U.S.

Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual Volume II
“Train, Maintain, Operate”
COMDTINST M16114.33

Commandant United States Coast Guard

2100 Second Street, S.W. Washington, DC 20593-0001 Staff Symbol: G-OCS Phone: (202) 267-1313 Fax: (202) 267-4593

COMMANDANT NOTICE 16114 Subj:

COMDTNOTE 16114 JUL 27 2005 CANCELLED: JUL 26 2006

CH-2 TO U. S. COAST GUARD BOAT OPERATIONS AND TRAINING (BOAT) MANUAL VOLUME II, COMDTINST M16114.33

1. PURPOSE. This Notice promulgates change two to U. S. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT)
Manual Volume II, COMDTINST M16114.33.

2. ACTION. Area and district commanders, commanders of maintenance and logistics commands, commanding
officers of headquarters units, assistant commandants for directorates, Judge Advocate General, special staff offices at Headquarters, sectors, activities, group commanders, boat unit commanding officers and officers-incharge shall ensure that the provisions of this Notice are followed. This Change will be distributed in paper copy upon the next revision to subject Manual. Internet release authorized.

3. DIRECTIVES EFFECTED. Module 2.4 of Port Security Unit (PSU) Personnel Qualification Standards (PQS),
COMDTINST M1540.11 is canceled and will be removed during the next revision.

4. SUMMARY OF CHANGES. Part 7 establishes Tactics qualification tasks associated with the Maritime
Homeland Security mission. The qualification tasks will ensure Coast Guard boat coxswains have the necessary skills to carry out these Law Enforcement, Homeland Security, and Defense Operations.

5. PROCEDURES. Remove and insert the following pages.
Remove Pages iii through viii A-1 through A-8 B-1 through B-6 Index - 1 through Index - 8 Insert Pages iii through viii Pages 7-1 through 7-14 A-1 through A-11 B-1 through B-6 Index - 1 through Index - 9

R. D. SIROIS /s/ Rear Admiral, U. S. Coast Guard Assistant Commandant for Operations
DISTRIBUTION – SDL No. 143 a b c d e f g A B C D E F G H NON-STANDARD DISTRIBUTION: *Cx: NESU Boston: 2 copies h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2

2 2

2 2 2

2 2 2

2 2 2

2 2

2

2 2 2

2 2

2 2 2

2 2

2

2 2 2 * 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2

2

Commandant United States Coast Guard

2100 Second Street, S.W. Washington, DC 20593-0001 Staff Symbol: G-OCS Phone: (202) 267-1313 Fax: (202) 267-4593

COMMANDANT NOTICE Subj:

COMDTNOTE 16114 JUL 7 2004 CANCELLED: JUL 6 2005

CH-1 TO U. S. COAST GUARD BOAT OPERATIONS AND TRAINING (BOAT) MANUAL – VOLUME II, M16114.33

1. PURPOSE. This Notice promulgates change one to U. S. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual – Volume II, COMDTINST M16114.33. 2. ACTION. Area and district commanders, commanders of maintenance and logistics commands, commanding officers of headquarters units, assistant commandants for directorates, Chief Counsel, special staff offices at Headquarters, sectors, activities, group commanders, boat unit commanding officers and officers-in-charge shall ensure that the provisions of this Notice are followed. This Change will be distributed in paper copy upon the next revision to ref (a). Internet release authorized. 3. DIRECTIVES EFFECTED. None. 4. SUMMARY OF CHANGES. The addition of Section H to ref (a) establishes boat Crew Member qualification tasks associated with the Maritime Homeland Security mission. The qualification tasks will ensure Coast Guard boat crewmembers receive a basic knowledge of Law Enforcement, Homeland Security, and Defense Operations. 5. PROCEDURES. Insert the following pages. Insert Pages 2-6.1 through 2-6.2 between pages 2-6 and 2-7 Pages 2-72.1 through 2-72.16 between pages 2-72 and 2-73 Pages 2-110.1 through 2-110.8 between pages 2-110 and 2-111

R. D. SIROIS /s/ Rear Admiral, U. S. Coast Guard Assistant Commandant for Operations

DISTRIBUTION – SDL No. 141 a b c d e f g A B C D E F G H

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2

2 2

2 2 2

2 2 2

2 2 2

2 2

2

2 2 2

2 2

2 2 2

2 2

2

2 2 2 * 2

2 2 2 2 2 2

2

NON-STANDARD DISTRIBUTION: *Cx: NESU Boston: 2 copies

R 161716Z JUN 03 ZUI ASN-A00167000090 FM COMDT COGARD WASHINGTON DC//G-OC// TO ALCOAST BT UNCLAS //N16114// ALCOAST 290/03 COMDTNOTE 16114 SUBJ: INTERIM CHANGE TO USCG BOAT OPERATIONS AND TRAINING MANUAL A. U.S. COAST GUARD BOAT OPERATIONS AND TRAINING (BOAT) MANUAL VOLUME I, COMDTINST M16114.32 B. U.S. COAST GUARD BOAT OPERATIONS AND TRAINING (BOAT) MANUAL VOLUME II, COMDTINST M16114.33 1. EFFECT THE FOLLOWING CHANGE TO REF A, PAGE 2-55, C.3. MINIMUM CREW REQUIREMENTS: FOR BOATS 30 FEET AND ABOVE, IF THE BOAT HAS OUTBOARD ENGINES, THE REQUIRED BOAT ENGINEER MAY BE REPLACED WITH AN ADDITIONAL CREW MEMBER. FOR BOATS CONDUCTING LAW ENFORCEMENT, AND MILITARY OPERATIONS (HOMELAND DEFENSE), ONE OF THE REQUIRED CREW (CREW MEMBER ONLY) MAY BE IN A BREAKIN STATUS AS LONG AS THE MEMBER IS A CERTIFIED BOARDING OFFICER OR BOARDING TEAM MEMBER. FOR OCONUS MILITARY OPERATIONS, CREW REQUIREMENTS WILL BE ESTABLISHED BY THE OPERATIONAL COMMANDER BUT WILL NOT BE LESS THAN REQUIRED BY THE SPECIFIC BOAT TYPE OPERATORS HANDBOOK. 2. EFFECT THE FOLLOWING CHANGE TO REF A, PAGE 5-41, SEARCH PATTERNS (PRECISION) AND SEARCH PATTERNS (DRIFTING): FREQUENCY SHALL BE ONE DAY AND ONE NIGHT EVERY SIX MONTHS. FOR ATON UNITS, FREQUENCY FOR SEARCH PATTERNS (DRIFTING) SHALL BE THE SAME. HOWEVER, FOR ATON UNITS ONLY, SEARCH PATTERNS (PRECISION) SHALL BE ONE DAY EVERY SIX MONTHS. 3. EFFECT THE FOLLOWING CHANGE TO REF A, PAGE 5-43, C.3. TESTS AND EXAMS: THE NOTE SHALL READ "OPEN-BOOK EXAMS - DEFINED AS USING A NEW OR CORRECTED, HIGHLIGHTED AND/OR UNDERLINED COPY OF NAVIGATION RULES, INTERNATIONAL - INLAND, COMDTINST M16672.2 (SERIES). HOWEVER, THIS COPY MAY NOT BE BOOK MARKED OR INDEXED." 4. THE PROFICIENCY REQUIREMENTS LISTED IN REF A, PAGE 5-39 THROUGH 5-41 ARE REQUIRED IN THE CURRENCY CYCLE BEGINNING 1 JULY 2003. 5. EFFECT THE FOLLOWING CHANGE TO REF B, PART 3 (ENGINEER QUALIFICATION). CHANGE ALL ENGINEER QUALIFICATION TASKS (ENG01-01 THROUGH ENG-04-01) FROM "ANY" TO "TYPE". EVERY TASK WILL BE COMPLETED AS IT PERTAINS TO EACH BOAT TYPE. 6. EFFECT THE FOLLOWING CHANGE TO REF B, PAGE 4-57. TASK COX06-03-ANY SHALL READ "SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETE THE CG INSTITUTES SAR FUNDAMENTALS COURSE OR SEARCH COORDINATION AND EXECUTION COURSE." 7. RETAIN A COPY OF THIS MESSAGE IN THE FRONT OF REF A AND B PENDING PROMULGATION OF THE NEXT CHANGES. 8. FOR COMMENTS/QUESTIONS, CONTACT CWO J. WHEELER AT (202) 267-2868 OR CWO S. DAWES AT (202) 267-4316. 9. INTERNET RELEASE AUTHORIZED. 10. RADM J. OLSON, DIRECTOR OPERATIONS CAPABILITY, SENDS. BT NNNN

U.S. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual, Volume II

Table of Contents
PART 1 INTRODUCTION TO QUALIFICATION........................................................................................................1-1 Section A. Description of Qualification.....................................................................................................................1-2 Section B. Sample Task.................................................................................................................................................1-3 Section C. Description of Tasks...................................................................................................................................1-4
C.1. C.2. C.3. C.4. C.5. C.6. C.7. C.8. Task Designation..................................................................................................................................................... 1-4 Task......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4 References ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-4 Conditions ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-4 Standards ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-6 Performance Criteria ............................................................................................................................................... 1-6 Accomplished.......................................................................................................................................................... 1-6 Comments................................................................................................................................................................ 1-6

Section D. Instructor Guidance...................................................................................................................................1-7
D.1. Give Chapter 3 to the Trainee ................................................................................................................................. 1-7 D.2. Assign the Task....................................................................................................................................................... 1-7 D.3. Confirm Completion of the Reading Assignment................................................................................................... 1-8 D.4. Demonstrate the Task to the Trainee ...................................................................................................................... 1-8 D.5. Walk the Trainee Through the Task........................................................................................................................ 1-9 D.6. Monitor the Trainee’s Performance ........................................................................................................................ 1-9 D.7. Verify the Trainee’s Performance ........................................................................................................................... 1-9 D.8. Sign Off the Task.................................................................................................................................................... 1-9 D.9. Keep an Accurate Record of the Training............................................................................................................... 1-9 D.10. Schedule Trainee for Interview and Check-Ride .................................................................................................. 1-9 D.11. Recommend Certification ..................................................................................................................................... 1-9

Section E. Trainee Guidance .................................................................................................................................... 1-10
E.1. E.2. E.3. E.4. E.5. Read the Assignments and Ask Questions............................................................................................................ 1-10 Pay Attention During Demonstrations .................................................................................................................. 1-10 Complete Walk-Through with Instructor.............................................................................................................. 1-10 Practice the Skill .................................................................................................................................................... 1-10 Certification Process.............................................................................................................................................. 1-10

PART 2 BOAT CREW MEMBER QUALIFICATION..................................................................................................2-1 CHAPTER 1. TASK ACCOMPLISHMENT R ECORD FOR BOAT CREW MEMBER ...........................................................2-3 CHAPTER 2. B OAT CREW MEMBER QUALIFICATION TASKS ........................................................................................2-9 Section A. Crew Efficiency Factors, Risk Factors and Team Coordination................................................ 2-10
TASK BCM -01-01-ANY TASK BCM -01-02-ANY TASK BCM -01-03-ANY TASK BCM -02-01-ANY TASK BCM -02-02-ANY TASK BCM -02-03-ANY TASK BCM -02-04-ANY TASK BCM -02-05-ANY TASK BCM -02-06-ANY TASK BCM -02-07-ANY TASK BCM -02-08-ANY TASK BCM -02-09-ANY TASK BCM -02-10-ANY TASK BCM -02-11-ANY TASK BCM -02-12-ANY TASK BCM -02-13-ANY TASK BCM -02-14-ANY TASK BCM -02-15-ANY Crew Fatigue .................................................................................................................. 2-10 Motion Sickness............................................................................................................. 2-11 Team Coordination Training (TCT).............................................................................. 2-11 Personal Physical Fitness and Vision............................................................................. 2-13 Crew First-Aid Responsibility ....................................................................................... 2-13 Demonstrate Adult, Child, and Infant CPR................................................................... 2-14 Don the Type III PFD.................................................................................................... 2-14 Don the Type III Flotation Jacket .................................................................................. 2-15 Don Anti-Exposure Coveralls ........................................................................................ 2-15 Don the Boat Crew Dry Suit.......................................................................................... 2-16 Identify Boat Crew Survival Vest Equipment ............................................................... 2-16 Use the Emergency Signaling Mirror ............................................................................ 2-17 Demonstrate the Use of the MK-124 Smoke and Illumination Signal .......................... 2-18 Demonstrate the Use of the MK-79 Illumination Signal Kit ......................................... 2-19 Operate the SDU-5/E or CG-1 Strobe Light .................................................................. 2-20 Don the Boat Crew Survival Vest.................................................................................. 2-20 Don the Inflatable PFD.................................................................................................. 2-21 Explain the Manual Deployment and Boarding Procedures for the Rescue and Survival Raft .................................................................................................................. 2-22

Section B. Physical Fitness, First-Aid, and Survival .......................................................................................... 2-12

i

U.S. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual, Volume II

TASK BCM -02-16-ANY TASK BCM -02-17-ANY TASK BCM -02-18-ANY

List Survival Procedures in Event of Boat Capsize....................................................... 2-22 Open Water Survival Skills............................................................................................ 2-23 Perform Water Survival Exercise .................................................................................. 2-24

Section C. Marlinespike Seamanship, Boat Nomenclature, Nautical Terminology, and Basic Stability....................................................................................................................................................... 2-25
TASK BCM -03-01-ANY TASK BCM -03-02-TYPE TASK BCM -03-03-TYPE TASK BCM -03-04-TYPE TASK BCM -03-05-TYPE TASK BCM -03-06-ANY TASK BCM -03-07-ANY TASK BCM -03-08-ANY TASK BCM -04-01-ANY TASK BCM -04-02-TYPE TASK BCM -04-03-TYPE TASK BCM -04-04-TYPE TASK BCM -04-05-ANY TASK BCM -04-06-ANY TASK BCM -04-07-ANY TASK BCM -04-08-ANY TASK BCM -04-09-TYPE TASK BCM -04-10-TYPE TASK BCM -04-11-TYPE TASK BCM -04-12-TYPE TASK BCM -05-01-ANY TASK BCM -05-02-ANY TASK BCM -05-03-ANY State Common Boat Nomenclature and Terminology ................................................... 2-25 Locate and Identify the Purpose of the Equipment Aboard the Boat ............................ 2-26 Boat Characteristics - Boat Construction....................................................................... 2-26 Boat Characteristics - Watertight Integrity.................................................................... 2-27 Stability.......................................................................................................................... 2-27 Identify the Different Parts of a Line and the Hitches Used in Line Handling.............. 2-28 Tie Various Knots, Hitches, and Bends......................................................................... 2-29 Secure Lines to Cleats, Bitts, and Posts......................................................................... 2-30 Rig Fenders to Side of the Boat ..................................................................................... 2-32 Make Fast a Boat to a Pier (Bow On Mooring, No Current/Wind) ............................... 2-32 Assist in Anchoring the Boat ......................................................................................... 2-33 Assist in Weighing the Boat’s Anchor........................................................................... 2-33 Identify the Common Navigation Lights Displayed by Ships and Boats ...................... 2-34 Identify the Common Sound Signals Used by Ships and Boats .................................... 2-35 Identify and Describe Accepted Maritime Distress Signals .......................................... 2-35 Stand a Lookout Watch.................................................................................................. 2-36 Act as a Helmsman and Steer a Compass Course.......................................................... 2-37 Get the Boat Away from a Pier/Cutter........................................................................... 2-38 Moor the Boat to a Pier/Cutter....................................................................................... 2-38 Boat Handling ................................................................................................................ 2-39 Operate a VHF-FM Radiotelephone.............................................................................. 2-40 Operate a SSB-HF Transceiver...................................................................................... 2-41 Use the VHF-FM Radiotelephone to Give a Operations and Position Report .............. 2-42 Identify the Symbols, Abbreviations and Basic Parts of a Nautical Chart .................... 2-44 Identify Common Aids to Navigation Used for Inland and Coastal Piloting................ 2-45 Identify Local Landmarks on a Nautical Chart.............................................................. 2-45 Plot a Position Using Latitude and Longitude ............................................................... 2-46 Plot a Magnetic Course on a Nautical Chart .................................................................. 2-46 Measure Distance on a Nautical Chart........................................................................... 2-47 Compute Time, Speed, and Distance ............................................................................. 2-47 Determine the Depth of Water Using a Fathometer ...................................................... 2-48 Use Radar to Identify Objects........................................................................................ 2-49 Determine the Range and Bearing to Objects Using Radar........................................... 2-49 Use Radar to Obtain and Interpret Relative Bearings and Ranges to a Moving Target to Determine if Risk of Collision Exists........................................................................ 2-50 Operate the VHF-FM Direction Finder and Steer on a Signal ...................................... 2-51 Obtain a Fix Using GPS/DGPS ..................................................................................... 2-52 Plot a Position Using LORAN-C TDs........................................................................... 2-52 Operate the Electronic Charting System........................................................................ 2-53 Participate in a Man Overboard Evolution as a Pointer................................................. 2-55 Participate in a Man Overboard Evolution as a Recovery/Pickup Person..................... 2-56 Participate in a Man Overboard Evolution as a Surface Swimmer................................ 2-56 Stokes Litter................................................................................................................... 2-57 Recover a Person-in-the-Water with the Stokes Litter.................................................. 2-58 Helicopter Operations.................................................................................................... 2-59 Conduct Helo-Ops.......................................................................................................... 2-59 Fire the MK-127A1 Parachute Illumination Signal ....................................................... 2-60 Bend a Heaving Line to a Bridle and Pass the Heaving Line to Another Boat ............. 2-60 Pass a Towline to Another Boat..................................................................................... 2-61 Connect a Towline to a Trailer Eyebolt Using a Shackle or Skiff Hook....................... 2-62 Secure an Alongside Tow .............................................................................................. 2-62

Section D. Boat Handling ........................................................................................................................................... 2-31

Section E. Communications ...................................................................................................................................... 2-40

Section F.

Navigation .................................................................................................................................................. 2-43

TASK BCM -06-01-ANY TASK BCM -06-02-ANY TASK BCM -06-03-ANY TASK BCM -06-04-ANY TASK BCM -06-05-ANY TASK BCM -06-06-ANY TASK BCM -06-07-ANY TASK BCM -06-08-ANY TASK BCM -06-09-TYPE TASK BCM -06-10-TYPE TASK BCM -06-11-TYPE TASK BCM -06-12-TYPE TASK BCM -06-13-TYPE TASK BCM -06-14-ANY TASK BCM -06-15-TYPE TASK BCM -07-01-TYPE TASK BCM -07-02-TYPE TASK BCM -07-03-ANY TASK BCM -07-04-ANY TASK BCM -07-05-TYPE TASK BCM -07-06-ANY TASK BCM -07-07-TYPE TASK BCM -07-08-ANY TASK BCM -07-09-ANY TASK BCM -07-10-TYPE TASK BCM -07-11-ANY TASK BCM -07-12-TYPE

Section G. Mission-Oriented Operations ............................................................................................................... 2-54

ii

............................................................................. 2-72............................4 TASK BCM-08-04-ANY Threats to Response Boat (RB) Crews ...........................2-111 Section A........................................................................................ Command and Control ................................................................................................... 2-68 Engage the Boat’s Main Fire Pump .............. 2-64 Identify the Different Classes of Fires.................. 2-64 Rig and Operate an Eductor to Obtain Suction................................................... 2-72. 2-117 Buoy Deck Tool Fundamentals ............................................................................................................ and State the Extinguishing Agents for Each Class of Fire..............11 TASK BCM-08-15-ANY Basic Response Boat Tactics ...................................................................................2-76 Section C.................................................. BOAT CREW MEMBER TRAINEE STUDY GUIDE .......9 TASK BCM-08-12-ANY Protection of Stationary/Anchored HVAs ................................. Reading Assignments ................................................... Use of Force .. 2-123 Buoy Deck Seamanship and Associated Hardware . Reading Assignments ....................................... 2-126 iii CH-2 .... 2-65 Locate and Identify the Fire Fighting Equipment Carried Onboard the Boat ............... 2-68 Operate a Vari-Nozzle ................Division Eight .......................... Buoy Deck Crew Member .........12 TASK BCM-08-16-ANY Weapons Engagement .....................................................Division Six .................. 2-72......................................8 TASK BCM-08-11-ANY Escorting a Moving High Value Asset (HVA) ................ 2-122 Buoy Deck Limitations and Parameters.......................... 2-72.................................................................................7 TASK BCM-08-09-ANY Limited Access Area (LAA)........ Start.....................................Division Four .................... 2-66 Demonstrate Knowledge of the Operation of a CO2 Fire Extinguisher ..........................................................................................2-112 TASK ACM-01-01-ANY TASK ACM-01-02-ANY TASK ACM-01-03-ANY TASK ACM-01-04-ANY TASK ACM-01-05-ANY TASK ACM-01-06-TYPE TASK ACM-01-07-ANY TASK ACM-01-08-ANY TASK ACM-01-09-TYPE TASK ACM-01-10-TYPE TASK ACM-01-11-TYPE TASK ACM-01-12-TYPE TASK ACM-01-13-TYPE AtoN Procedures ...................................................................... 2-124 Mooring Maintenance........................................................ 2-72..............................................6 TASK BCM-08-08-ANY Vessel on Vessel Use of Force ...............2-74 Section B.........................................................................10 TASK BCM-08-13-ANY Response Boat Duties............................................... 2-67 Assemble Equipment for the Boat’s Main Fire Fighting System......................................................2-110......................................... 2-72.......... and Obtain Suction ............................................................................................................................. 2-72..6 TASK BCM-08-07-ANY Loss of Communications Procedures.........................................................................2-72................ 2-120 Cutting and Heating with Oxygen Acetylene ........................ 2-72......13 TASK BCM-08-18-ANY Demonstrate Weapons Usage....................................... 2-72................. 2-63 Assist in Passing a Portable Pump Directly to Another Boat.............................................Division Seven......................... Reading Assignments ...2-103 Section H......5 TASK BCM-08-05-ANY TASK BCM-08-06-ANY Operational Pre-Brief and DeBrief .... 2-113 Roles and Responsibilities of Buoy Deck Crew ................................................................................... 2-125 Griping Buoys and Sinkers.......................................................................................... 2-72..........................................2-97 Section G..................................................................Table of Contents TASK BCM-07-13-ANY TASK BCM-07-14-ANY TASK BCM-07-15-TYPE TASK BCM-07-16-ANY TASK BCM-07-17-TYPE TASK BCM-07-18-ANY TASK BCM-07-19-ANY TASK BCM-07-20-TYPE TASK BCM-07-21-TYPE TASK BCM-07-22-ANY TASK BCM-07-23-TYPE TASK BCM-07-24-TYPE Prepare the Portable Pump for Operation..................................................................14 TASK BCM-08-19-ANY Use of Automatic Weapons ............. Law Enforcement..............................................................................................................................................................Division Five .............3 TASK BCM-08-03-ANY Maritime Homeland Security (MHS) Definitions.............................7 TASK BCM-08-10-ANY Security Zones (SZ)..... 2-69 Demonstrate Knowledge of the Procedures to Combat a Fire in the Engine Space............................ ATON CREW MEMBER QUALIFICATION TASKS ................................... Reading Assignments .......................2-88 Section E.................. State the Fuel Sources........ 2-114 Terminology Fundamentals .....................................10 TASK BCM-08-14-ANY Escorting a Target of Interest (TOI) .............................. 2-72.........2-73 Section A.. Reading Assignments ....................................................................................................................... 2-72......................1 CHAPTER 4................................................... 2-120 Hand Signal Fundamentals ... 2-72.......... 2-66 Demonstrate Knowledge of the Operation of a Dry Chemical Fire Extinguisher.........2-84 Section D...................................................12 TASK BCM-08-17-ANY Weapons Command and Control ............................................................. 2-72..............................1 TASK BCM-08-01-ANY Authority and Jurisdiction......................................................................... Reading Assignments ....................................... 2-72.......................5 Tactical Control ........................................................................15 CHAPTER 3.......................................................... 2-116 Rigging Safety Precaution Fundamentals .......................................................................................Division Three............ 2-72............................. 2-113 Safety Precaution Fundamentals...........Division Two .... 2-72.............................................................. 2-70 Demonstrate the Appropriate Response to the Basic Engineering Casualty Control Exercises (BECCE) ......................Division One.................... 2-72................................................2-95 Section F.............................................................. Reading Assignments ..........................................................3 TASK BCM-08-02-ANY Maritime Homeland Security (MHS) Missions ........ 2-72.......... Reading Assignments .......................................................................... 2-71 Section H.............................. 2-123 Use and Application of AtoN Buoy Deck Equipment ........ Homeland Security and Defense Operations........................

................................................................................................................................................ 2-128 Boom/Crane Operator Safety Fundamentals .......................................... 3-39 Section B.............................................................. 3-16 Energize the Electrical and Electronic Systems...................................................... 3-36 Capsizing ...................2-141 Section A.............................................. 3-29 Overheating Shaft Packing Gland................................................................................................................................................................Table of Contents TASK ACM-01-14-ANY TASK ACM-01-15-TYPE TASK ACM-01-16-TYPE TASK ACM-02-01-TYPE TASK ACM-02-02-TYPE TASK ACM-02-03-TYPE TASK ACM-02-04-TYPE Buoy Maintenance........................................ 2-132 Section B................................................................................................................................ 3-16 Set Watertight Integrity ................................................................................................Division Two ................................. 2-136 TASK ACM-03-03-TYPE Buoy Deck Supervisor Rigging Fundamentals .......................... 3-30 Steering Casualty............................ 3-20 Engine Will Not Turn Over or Start ............................. 3-6 TASK ENG-01-01-ANY TASK ENG-01-02-ANY TASK ENG-01-03-ANY TASK ENG-01-04-ANY TASK ENG-01-05-ANY TASK ENG-01-06-ANY TASK ENG-01-07-ANY TASK ENG-01-08-ANY TASK ENG-01-09-ANY TASK ENG-02-01-ANY TASK ENG-02-02-ANY TASK ENG-02-03-ANY TASK ENG-02-04-ANY TASK ENG-02-05-ANY TASK ENG-02-06-ANY TASK ENG-02-07-ANY TASK ENG-02-08-ANY TASK ENG-02-09-ANY TASK ENG-02-10-ANY TASK ENG-02-11-ANY TASK ENG-02-12-ANY TASK ENG-02-13-ANY TASK ENG-02-14-ANY TASK ENG-02-15-ANY TASK ENG-02-16-ANY TASK ENG-03-01-ANY TASK ENG-03-02-ANY TASK ENG-03-03-ANY TASK ENG-03-04-ANY TASK ENG-03-05-ANY TASK ENG-03-06-ANY TASK ENG-03-07-ANY Locate Installed Equipment and Fittings on the Boat .................................................................................................................. 3-35 Fire in the Auxiliary Machinery Space ..................................................................................................... 3-27 Loss of Control of Engine RPMs....... 3-5 Section A............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-139 CHAPTER 5................................................................................... 2-129 Boom/Crane Operator Fundamentals .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-134 TASK ACM-03-02-TYPE Buoy Deck Supervisor Fundamentals...... ATON CREW MEMBER TRAINEE STUDY GUIDE ................................................................2-134 TASK ACM-03-01-TYPE Buoy Deck Supervisor Safety Fundamentals......................................... 2-127 Towing a Buoy .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1 CHAPTER 1........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-35 Fire Onboard............................................. 2-130 Boom/Crane System and Components ..................................................................................... 3-11 Conduct a Pre-Start Checkoff .......................................... 3-24 Main Engine High Lube Oil Pressure ...................................................................................................................................................................3-33 iv CH-2 ................................. Pre-Operational Checks ................. 3-28 Reduction Gear Failure.............2-128 Section C......................................................... 3-38 Collision with a Submerged Object ................. 3-13 List the Disabling Casualties and Restrictive Discrepancies that Prevent the Boat from Getting Underway ........................................................... Reading Assignments ........Division Three..................2-152 Section C........ 3-33 Fire in the Engine Room.......................................... 3-17 Draw/List the Boat’s Systems.................................................................................................................... 3-26 Outboard Failing to Engage Forward or Reverse .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-6 Locate Components and Accessories of the Boat’s Propulsion and Electrical Systems........ 3-26 Outboard Motor Vibration or Spun Propeller ....................................................................................... 2-126 Mooring Evolution .................................................................................................... 3-27 Engine Running Uneven or Stalls........2-142 Section B................................................Division One....................... 3-31 Basic Casualty Response ...................................................................... TASK ACCOMPLISHMENT RECORD FOR ENGINEER ......................................................................................................................................................................... Reading Assignments ............................................................................................................. 3-8 Locate Components and Accessories of the Boat’s Auxiliary System .................. Boat Disabling Casualties .................... 2-131 Boom/Crane Operation......... Propulsion System Start Checks and Casualty Responses ............................................................................... 3-24 Loss of Fuel Oil Pressure........ 3-15 State the Equipment Casualties That Will Prevent the Boat from Getting Underway ................................... Reading Assignments ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ENGINEER QUALIFICATION TASKS ......................3-19 Section C.......... 2-138 TASK ACM-03-04-TYPE Supervise a Buoy Deck Evolution .............................. 3-21 Engine Failing to Start with the Starter Turning Over ...................................... 3-3 CHAPTER 2.................... 3-22 Main Engine High Water Temperature...............................................................................................................................2-155 PART 3 ENGINEER QUALIFICATION .................................. 3-18 Start the Boat ........................................ Buoy Deck Supervisor (BDS) ...................................................... 3-25 Engine Oil System Failure.... 3-37 Flooding......................................... 3-22 Loss of Main Engine Lube Oil Pressure ........ 3-30 Excessive Shaft Seal Leakage......................... Boom/Crane Operator................................................................................

............ 4-10 Locate and State the Purpose of Deck Equipment and Fittings Onboard the Boat ......................... COXSWAIN QUALIFICATION TASKS .......... Post-Operational Checks................................................................... 4-1 CHAPTER 1....................................3-43 Section A............................................................................................... Crew Efficiency Factors and Team Coordination..........................3-40 TASK ENG-04-01-ANY Secure the Boat After Operations .................................................................... 4-41 Determine a Compass Course from a True Course.............Division Four .......................................... 4-37 Successfully Complete the Navigation Rules Requirements for both Advancement and Coxswain Certification .....................................................................................................................................................3-44 Section B............................................................... 4-18 Locate and State the Characteristics of the Components and Accessories of the Boat’s Propulsion System..................................................................................................................................... 4-28 Maneuver the Boat in Tight Quarters .......................................................Division Two .....................................................................................Table of Contents Section D............... 4-35 Weigh the Boat’s Anchor .................. TASK ACCOMPLISHMENT RECORD FOR COXSWAIN ....................................................................................................... 4-17 State the Basic Principles of Boat Handling ............................................. 4-9 State the Characteristics of............ 4-44 Operate the GPS/DGPS ....................................................3-62 Section D................... 4-25 Shifting Steering and Throttle Stations................................................................. 4-18 State the Operational Characteristics and Limitations of the Boat........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-8 Team Coordination Training (TCT) ............................................................... 4-32 Identify Heavy Weather Terms.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-40 CHAPTER 3............................................... Reading Assignments . 4-33 Correct for Hard Chine Lock-Up................... 4-20 Energize the Electrical and Electronic Systems on the Boat................................... Boat Characteristics and Stability ........................................................................ Reading Assignments ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-38 Identify Navigational Publications ....................................................................... 4-43 Determine the Location of a Boat Using Radar Ranges and Bearings.................................... 4-43 Conn a Boat Using Radar .......................... 4-27 Secure the Boat After Operations .................................................................................................. 4-32 Maneuver in Rivers ................................................................. 4-34 Anchor the Boat...........................................................Division One................................................ 4-26 Conduct a Normal Cruising Checkoff ...................................... and Set Watertight Integrity Aboard the Boat ........................... 4-31 Maneuver in Heavy Weather ................................................................................................... Boat Handling............................................................ 4-21 Conduct a Pre-Start Checkoff for the Boat ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-8 TASK COX-01-01-ANY TASK COX-01-02-ANY TASK COX-02-01-TYPE TASK COX-02-02-TYPE TASK COX-02-03-TYPE TASK COX-02-04-TYPE TASK COX-02-05-TYPE TASK COX-02-06-ANY TASK COX-03-01-ANY TASK COX-03-02-ANY TASK COX-03-03-TYPE TASK COX-03-04-TYPE TASK COX-03-05-TYPE TASK COX-03-06-TYPE TASK COX-03-07-TYPE TASK COX-03-08-TYPE TASK COX-03-09-TYPE TASK COX-03-10-TYPE TASK COX-03-11-TYPE TASK COX-03-12-TYPE TASK COX-03-13-TYPE TASK COX-03-14-ANY TASK COX-03-15-TYPE TASK COX-03-16-TYPE TASK COX-03-17-TYPE TASK COX-03-18-TYPE TASK COX-03-19-TYPE TASK COX-03-20-TYPE TASK COX-03-21-TYPE TASK COX-03-22-TYPE TASK COX-04-01-ANY Crew Fatigue Standards.................Division Three................................................................................................................. 4-27 Get the Boat Away from a Pier........................................................................................................... 4-33 Moor the Boat.............................................................. 4-9 Section C........ 4-24 Conduct a Pre-Underway Checkoff for the Boat .....3-55 Section C..................4-38 Section E. 4-13 Recognize Warning Signs of an Unstable Vessel Before Boarding........................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-30 Operate the Boat and Apply its Handling Characteristics in a Following Sea ........... 4-41 Pilot the Boat Using Dead Reckoning (DR) Techniques .......................4-40 TASK COX-05-01-ANY TASK COX-05-02-ANY TASK COX-05-03-ANY TASK COX-05-04-ANY TASK COX-05-05-ANY TASK COX-05-06-ANY TASK COX-05-07-TYPE TASK COX-05-08-TYPE v CH-2 ............ 4-3 CHAPTER 2...............................................................................................................3-66 PART 4 COXSWAIN QUALIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................................... 4-8 State Basic Construction and Design Features of the Boat .............................................................................................. Reading Assignments ............. 4-42 Pilot a Boat Using “Seaman’s Eye”........... 4-45 Determine the Location of a Boat Using GPS/DGPS ..................... 4-22 Start the Boat ........................................................ 4-12 Locate Installed Electrical and Electronic Equipment and Fittings Onboard the Boat .................................... Rules of the Road ............................................................ 4-29 Come About in a Narrow Channel...................................4-16 Section D............................................................................... 4-11 Locate Installed Engineering and Propulsion Equipment and Fittings Onboard the Boat......................................................................... Reading Assignments ............................................ 4-47 Section B....... ENGINEER TRAINEE STUDY GUIDE ......... 4-7 Section A...... 4-15 State the Forces that Affect Boat Handling ..................................................................................................................... Boat Piloting and Navigation .............................

................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-61 Execute a Single Unit Track Line Non-Return Search (TSN) Pattern ........ Determine the Location of................ 4-79 State the Principle Forces that Affect Boat Towing...... 4-71 Use an Eductor to Dewater a Sinking or Swamped Boat.........4-78 TASK COX-08-01-ANY TASK COX-08-02-ANY TASK COX-08-03-ANY TASK COX-08-04-ANY TASK COX-08-05-TYPE TASK COX-08-06-ANY TASK COX-08-07-ANY TASK COX-08-08-TYPE TASK COX-08-09-TYPE TASK COX-08-10-TYPE vi CH-2 .................................... 4-80 Make Preparations for Taking a Vessel in Tow....... 4-62 Execute a Single Unit Track Line Return Search (TSR) Pattern ............................................................. 4-70 Use a Portable Pump to Dewater a Sinking or Swamped Boat............................. Sector (VS).......................... and Track Line Return (TSR) .......... Near Shoal Water in Tow ............................ 4-85 Moor a Disabled Vessel in Alongside Tow to a Float or Pier....................................... with No Way-On............................................................................................ 4-68 Maneuver the Boat Alongside a Ship and Transfer Personnel............................................... Creeping Line (CS).................................................... and Transfer Personnel ....................................................... 4-53 Distance... 4-51 Operate the Auto Pilot .............................................................. Rescue and Assistance ..................................................................4-55 TASK COX-06-01-ANY TASK COX-06-02-ANY TASK COX-06-03-ANY TASK COX-06-04-ANY TASK COX-06-05-ANY TASK COX-06-06-ANY TASK COX-06-07-ANY TASK COX-06-08-ANY TASK COX-06-09-ANY TASK COX-06-10-ANY TASK COX-07-01-TYPE TASK COX-07-02-TYPE TASK COX-07-03-TYPE TASK COX-07-04-TYPE TASK COX-07-05-TYPE TASK COX-07-06-TYPE TASK COX-07-07-ANY TASK COX-07-08-TYPE TASK COX-07-09-ANY TASK COX-07-10-TYPE TASK COX-07-11-TYPE TASK COX-07-12-TYPE TASK COX-07-13-TYPE Section G................................................................... 4-48 Operate the GPS/DGPS ................ 4-50 Operate Electronic Charting ...... 4-79 Inspect the Towline and Associated Hardware................................................................................................................................. 4-56 Successfully Complete the CG Institute’s SAR Fundamentals Course or Maritime SAR Planning (Resident) Course .. Track Line Non-Return (TSN)............................................................................................. 4-59 Execute a Single Unit Parallel Search (PS) Pattern .................................... Search and Rescue (SAR).................................................................................................................................... 4-56 Legal Aspects and USCG Policy . and Pilot a Non-Standard Boat Using GPS/DGPS ............................................................ 4-73 Participate in a Basket Hoist Using the Direct Delivery Method............... 4-54 Organization and Responsibility................. 4-58 Execute a Single Unit Expanding Square Search (SS) Pattern ................... 4-84 Take a Boat in Alongside Tow from a Stern Tow ........................................................................4-65 Section H......................... 4-66 Recover a Life-Like Dummy (Oscar) in 2.......................................................... 4-80 Use a “Heavy Weather” Approach to Take a Vessel in Stern Tow ............................................. 4-86 Take a Vessel at Anchor............................ and Transfer Personnel .............................. Towing and Salvage ................................................................................................................................................... 4-54 Demonstrate Plotting a Position Using LORAN-C Time Difference (TD) Coordinates.................................. 4-52 Pilot a Boat Using All Electronic Equipment...................... 4-68 Maneuver the Boat Alongside Another Boat. 4-75 Participate in a Rescue Swimmer Transfer Using the Rescue Strap ............ 4-58 Execute a Single Unit Sector Search (VS) Pattern..... 4-63 Recover a Person from the Water Using the Direct Pickup Method.................................................. with Way-On.......................................................................................... 4-49 Operate.................Table of Contents TASK COX-05-09-TYPE TASK COX-05-10-TYPE TASK COX-05-11-TYPE TASK COX-05-12-TYPE TASK COX-05-13-TYPE TASK COX-05-14-ANY TASK COX-05-15-ANY TASK COX-05-16-ANY Pilot a Boat Using GPS/DGPS .....................................................................to 4-Foot Seas...................... Parallel (PS)........................................................................................................................... Charts........ 4-81 Use a Shackle or Skiff Hook Assembly Connection to Take a Vessel in Stern Tow................................................ 4-83 Take a Boat in Stern Tow Using a Bridle Connection..................... Speed.................................... 4-72 Attend a Static Display Given by a CG Helicopter Air Crew................................ 4-69 Combat a Boat Fire from the Boat.............. 4-60 Execute a Single Unit Creeping Line Search (CS) Pattern ............................................................ and Time ........... and Tables .............................................. 4-57 Plot the Following Search Patterns: Expanding Square (SS)......................................................................... a Navigation Kit.............................................................................. 4-67 Maneuver the Boat Alongside Another Boat.............................. 4-76 State General Towing Safety Precautions........ 4-74 Participate in a Basket Hoist Using the Trail Line Delivery Method................................ 4-76 Demonstrate the Appropriate Responses to the Basic Engineering Casualty Control Exercises (BECCE) ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-86 Section F..................................................................

....................... 5-22 Conduct a Direct Pass of Equipment (Drogue................Table of Contents CHAPTER 3.............................................................5-12 Section C..........................................................................................................................................................................................Division Four ...4-102 Section F... Reading Assignments ......................................... Emergency Procedures or Response in Heavy Weather/Surf ........... 5-17 Operate a Boat in Heavy Seas.......................................... 5-7 Explain the Forces Effecting a Surf Capable Boat Operating in Heavy Weather and Surf ........................................................... 5-6 TASK HW-01-01-ANY TASK HW-01-02-ANY TASK HW-01-03-TYPE TASK HW-01-04-ANY TASK HW-01-05-ANY TASK HW-01-06-ANY TASK HW-01-07-ANY TASK HW-02-01-ANY TASK HW-02-02-ANY TASK HW-02-03-TYPE TASK HW-02-04-ANY Identify the Types of Breaking Seas..... TASK ACCOMPLISHMENT RECORD FOR HEAVY WEATHER COXSWAIN ..................................................................................................................................................Division One..... 5-13 Explain the Procedures to be Taken for a Rollover or Knockdown...................... COXSWAIN TRAINEE STUDY GUIDE..........................................) to Another Vessel in Heavy Seas ............................ Reading Assignments ................................... 5-25 Counteract Shockloading During Tow of a Vessel in Heavy Seas and Demonstrate Use of a Drogue........... their Characteristics and Causes ...Division Five ............................................................................................ 5-5 Section A.................................................................................... 5-26 Shorten Tow in Heavy Seas......4-94 Section D..................... 5-9 Explain the Procedures and Safety Concerns Related to Recovery of Personnel from the Water in Heavy Seas or Surf ............ 5-31 Conduct Pre-Mission Sortie Planning for Surf Operations .....5-16 TASK HW-03-01-ANY TASK HW-03-02-TYPE TASK HW-03-03-TYPE TASK HW-03-04-TYPE TASK HW-03-05-TYPE TASK HW-03-06-TYPE TASK HW-03-07-TYPE TASK HW-03-08-TYPE TASK HW-03-09-TYPE TASK HW-03-10-TYPE TASK HW-03-11-TYPE TASK HW-03-12-TYPE TASK HW-03-13-ANY TASK HW-03-14-ANY TASK HW-04-01-ANY TASK HW-04-02-TYPE TASK HW-04-03-TYPE TASK HW-04-04-TYPE Section D...................................... and Crew Brief Related to Surf Operations ............................................................ 5-6 Explain the Geographical Causes of Local Surf Conditions................................................... 5-33 Determine the Position of a Boat in Surf up to 8 Feet ....... Reading Assignments ....................................4-118 PART 5 HEAVY WEATHER COXSWAIN QUALIFICATION ..................................Division Two ............. 5-20 Conduct a Person-in-the-Water (PIW) Recovery in Heavy Seas...................................................... and Crew Brief Related to Heavy Weather Operations ........................... 5-30 Conduct a Post-Mission Standdown and Crew Debrief..........4-105 Section G............................................................... Vessel Systems Checks..................................................................................................................... Heavy Weather and Surf Knowledge .......... 5-10 Explain the Procedure for Passing the Pump or Other Gear in Heavy Seas.5-32 vii CH-2 ............. 5-1 CHAPTER 1........................................................... etc.. 5-19 Pilot a Boat in Heavy Seas.... Reading Assignments .....Division Seven............................... 5-29 Illuminate a Bar.................................. 5-12 Explain Boat Preparations and Safety Precautions for Operating in Heavy Seas/Surf......................................................... Reading Assignments ................................................................................ 5-3 CHAPTER 2.......................... Pump...................................................... 5-24 Take a Boat in Tow in Heavy Seas Using “Stern-to Seas” Approach .............................................................................................. Reading Assignments . Vessel Systems Checks........................................................................................................... 5-33 Conduct Safety Rounds...............................................................................................................................................................................4-112 Section H................... 5-36 Section B.............................................. 5-15 Conduct Pre-Mission Sortie Planning for Heavy Weather Operations ........................................................................... Reading Assignments ..............Division Six ................................................................4-89 Section A...................Division Three........................... 5-9 Explain the Heavy Weather Towing Approach and Key Elements Related to Towing in Heavy Weather................. Reading Assignments ..................................................................... Surf Operations (up to 8 feet) ............................................................................................ 5-21 Maintain a Stationary Position (Station Keep) Relative to Another Vessel (or Drifting Object) in Heavy Seas................................................................................................................................. 5-34 Maintain Stationary Position (“Station Keep”) Using Both the Bow-To and Stern-To Methods in Surf up to 8 Feet ............................................... 5-11 Identify PPE and Safety Equipment for Heavy Weather and Surf Operations ........................................... Heavy Weather Operations......... HEAVY WEATHER COXSWAIN QUALIFICATION TASKS .... Inlet or Surf Zone at Night Using Pyrotechnics from a Boat and from Shore ............... 5-17 Conduct Safety Rounds................ 5-23 Take a Boat in Tow in Heavy Seas Using Heavy Weather Approach (Bow-to Seas)..............Division Eight ............ 5-8 Explain the Relationship Between Navigation and Piloting as it Pertains to Operations in Heavy Seas or Surf..................................................................................................................4-92 Section C......................................................................................................4-101 Section E.................................................. 5-14 Explain the Procedures for Personal Survival if Lost Overboard in a Heavy Weather or Surf Environment.....4-90 Section B. Radio..................... 5-28 Tow a Vessel Inbound Across an Inlet or Bar in Heavy Weather...............

................ Tactical Boat Operations......................................................................... 5-36 Transit Inbound on an Inlet or Bar Through Surf up to 8 Feet.................5-43 Section A....... 7-7 Screen Boat (SB) Duties ..........................5-47 Section C............................................................ and a Crew Brief Related to Surf Operations ............. 6-10 Transit Outbound an Inlet or Bar Through 8...................................Division One.............................................................. 7-10 Vessel on Vessel Use of Force .............. 7-3 Section A....................................... 5-40 Conduct a Person-in-the-Water (PIW) Recovery in Surf up to 8 Feet .................. 7-9 Tactical Reaction Boat (TRB) Duties ........................................ 7-6 Complete Pre-Arrival Enforcement Procedures...to 15-Foot Surf..............to 15-Foot Surf ............................................................. SURFMAN TRAINEE STUDY GUIDE ..................................to 15-Foot Surf .............................Division Four ... Reading Assignments ............................................................................. TASK ACCOMPLISHMENT RECORD FOR SURFMAN ....................................................... 7-12 Secure from WSM Mission ............................. and Enhanced Maritime Safety and Security Team (EMSST) Specific Tasks....... 5-42 CHAPTER 3....................................................6-17 Section A............................................ Reading Assignments ...............Stationary ................................. 6-13 Conduct a Person-in-the-Water (PIW) Recovery in 8............................................................................................... 6-16 CHAPTER 3.........................................................................Moving .... 6-1 CHAPTER 1....................................................................... 6-14 Conduct a Post-Mission Standdown and Crew Debrief........................ TACTICS QUALIFICATION TASKS ....... Reading Assignments . Vessel Systems Checks............. 5-41 Conduct a Post-Mission Standdown and Crew Debrief...........................................................B-1 INDEX .................... 5-39 Enter and Depart a Beach (Shoal Area) Surf Zone in Surf up to 8 Feet............................................................ 6-5 Section A...... 6-8 Maintain Stationary Position (Station Keep) in 8................. 6-3 CHAPTER 2...............................................................................................................to 15-Foot Surf Using the Bow-To Method ................... 7-4 TASK TAC-01-01-ANY TASK TAC-01-02-ANY TASK TAC-01-03-TYPE TASK TAC-01-04-TYPE TASK TAC-01-05-TYPE TASK TAC-01-06-TYPE TASK TAC-01-07-TYPE TASK TAC-01-08-ANY TASK TAC-01-09-ANY Review Patrol Orders and Participate in Operational Pre-Brief........................................................................................................ 6-10 Transit Inbound an Inlet or Bar Through 8.................................................... 7-8 Screen Boat (SB) Duties ......................................................... GLOSSARY............................................................................................................................................................... HEAVY WEATHER COXSWAIN TRAINEE STUDY GUIDE ................................Division One... SURFMAN QUALIFICATION TASKS ............ 7-1 CHAPTER 1............................................................................ Reading Assignments ........ Surf Operations (greater than 8 feet) ..........................................Table of Contents TASK HW-04-05-TYPE TASK HW-04-06-TYPE TASK HW-04-07-TYPE TASK HW-04-08-TYPE TASK HW-04-09-TYPE TASK HW-04-10-ANY Transit Outbound on an Inlet or Bar Through Surf up to 8 Feet.................... 6-7 Determine the Position of a Boat in 8............ 6-7 Conduct Safety Rounds................... LIST OF ACRONYMS........................................................to 15-Foot Surf.................................................................... 6-6 TASK SRF-01-01-ANY TASK SRF-01-02-TYPE TASK SRF-01-03-TYPE TASK SRF-01-04-TYPE TASK SRF-01-05-TYPE TASK SRF-01-06-TYPE TASK SRF-01-07-TYPE TASK SRF-01-08-TYPE TASK SRF-01-09-TYPE TASK SRF-01-10-ANY Conduct Pre-Mission Sortie Planning for Surf Operations .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-11 Weapons Employment.......................Division Two .............. 5-38 Lateral Across a Surf Zone Beam to Surf up to 8 Feet ....................................................A-1 APPENDIX B....................................1 viii CH-2 .......................................................... 6-13 Depart a Surf Zone Using Only a Single Engine in Surf less than 12 Feet.................................................................................................. 6-11 Lateral Across a Surf Zone Beam to 8...... 7-13 Port Security Unit (PSU).................................................................................................................................. Maritime Safety and Security Team (MSST)..........................................Division Three.................5-52 PART 6 SURFMAN QUALIFICATION .......................................Index ......... 7-14 APPENDIX A.....to 15-Foot Surf ..................................... Reading Assignments ......................6-18 PART 7 TACTICS QUALIFICATION TASKS .............................................................5-44 Section B................................5-50 Section D............................. TASK ACCOMPLISHMENT RECORD FOR TACTICS............... 7-2 CHAPTER 2...............................

Instructor guidance. NOTE $ In this Part This Manual is not meant to be ordered for purposes of obtaining individual qualification tasks in Parts 2 through 6. Sample task. Description of tasks. Volume II Part 1 Introduction to Qualification Introduction This Part illustrates the qualification process through the following discussions: • • • • • Description of qualification.S. This Part contains the following Sections: Section A B C D E Sample Task Description of Tasks Instructor Guidance Trainee Guidance Title Description of Qualification See Page 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-7 1-10 1-1 .U. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. In addition. All instructors must ensure that their certification remains current. Qualification tasks should be reproduced locally and provided for trainees. instructors must ensure that they retain their proficiency with all installed boat equipment. Trainee guidance. It is imperative that a very high level of professionalism be maintained among all unit instructors.

Chapter 2 is made up of the qualification tasks. Chapter 1 contains a task accomplishment record which allows the instructor to record the trainee’s progress throughout the qualification process. Introduction • • • • • • • • Description of Qualification There are five Boat Crew Qualification Parts of this Manual.S. which are designed to measure the trainee’s progress. 1-2 . They are: Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 5 Part 6 Boat Crew Member Engineer Coxswain Heavy Weather Coxswain Surfman Task Accomplishment Record Qualification Tasks Trainee Study Guide Each Part is made up of three major Chapters: Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 - Additional tasks and/or chapters may be included to address specific mission qualification requirements.U. Volum II e Section A. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Chapter 3 provides guidance for the trainee’s reading assignments and is to be removed and retained by the trainee.

without error.2 (series) Task should be performed at any time aboard any of the unit’s standard boats without the use of reference or prompting. the trainee must. 3.Part 1 – Introduction to Qualification Section B. M. COMDTINST M16114. In response to the instructor. Identify DC breaker panel. identify different parts of the electrical panels. UNDERWAY 25 OCT 99 Instructor Comments 1-3 . 2. Identify AC breaker panel. Sample Task 41' UTB Operator’s Handbook. Date IMU IMU IMU BM1 I. TASK ENG-01-33-ANY References Conditions Standards Identify the Breaker Panels a. Identify shore-tie. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1.

1.1. ANY tasks are considered transferable from boat to boat and. Below are two examples with explanations of the qualification task designations: COX-02-03-ANY Task can be accomplished on any boat. boat does not carry specific gear) the task may be waived at command discretion. The conditions are the environmental and physical circumstances under which the tasks must be performed. Task designation number Division designation number Crewmember designation number – Boat Crew Member (BCM). Task designation number Division designation number Crewmember designation number – Boat Crew Member (BCM). Engineer (ENG).1. Surfman (SRF) C. AtoN Crew Member (ACM). Heavy Weather Coxswain (HWX). AtoN Crew Member (ACM). Surfman (SRF) C. Example 2 COX-02-03-TYPE Indicates that the task must be done individually for each different boat type for which qualification is desired.4. Example 1 Description of Tasks Tasks are identified by designation.2. References C. All tasks shall be completed unless specifically stated otherwise. The following definitions describe the terms found in the conditions and standards: 1-4 .3. Coxswain (COX). Any tools or special equipment needed for the completion of the task are listed here.Part 1 – Introduction to Qualification Section C. Engineer (ENG). Task Designation C. C. Heavy Weather Coxswain (HWX).g. The conditions listed with each task must be met.b. Task The task is knowledge or skill objective to be performed. Coxswain (COX). need only be done once.a. Conditions References are information sources used by the trainee and instructor to obtain the background necessary to enhance task performance. When situations exist that preclude a member from completing a task (e. therefore. NOTE $ C.

a.4. Sea Conditions Term Calm Moderate Heavy Surf C.4. Operational Guidelines for MLB and SPC (HWX) Coxswains Sea Coxswain HW Coxswain Surfman Wind 30 kts 40 kts 50 kts Surf None <8 ft 20 ft 10 ft 20 ft 30 ft NOTE $ Heavy Weather Coxswains shall not attempt operations in surf unless they have demonstrated the proper skills through satisfactory accomplishment of the surf operations tasks in Part 5 of this Manual. in situations when the coxswain or the CO/OIC is unsure. Heavy weather for each specific boat type may be determined by the coxswain at any time. Term Slow Underway Definition Underway and moving ahead at clutch speed or slower Not tied to a pier or float and not anchored or moored Definition Visibility less than ¼ mile All other states of visibility Definition Seas less than 4 feet Seas 4 to 8 feet Seas greater than 8 feet Waves or swell of the sea breaking on the shore or a reef C. This definition of heavy weather is not intended to define a heavy weather situation for a specific boat type.4.b.f.g. Visibility Term Restricted Clear C. 1-5 .c.4.d. Heavy Weather Heavy weather is defined as sea. NOTE $ C. Surf is defined as the waves or swell of the sea breaking on the shore or a reef. Boat Operations C.e. a rough bar is assumed. swell and wind conditions combining to exceed 8 feet and/or winds exceeding 30 knots. Rough Bar A rough bar is a river entrance or inlet where heavy seas or surf conditions exist.4.Part 1 – Introduction to Qualification C. Also.4. Surf C.4.

Comments NOTE $ 1-6 . while others serve as general guidelines for task completion.7. minimums. Standards Standards describe the expected outcome of the task. Successful task completion is a function of how well a trainee is able to complete the task without assistance.6. Each task demonstration must follow the correct sequence with little or no hesitation between the steps for accomplishment.a.b.5. Chapter 1 of each qualification Part provides a list of all tasks in that Part with space for the instructor to initial and date when each task has been completed. Aid in Learning the Task C. They can be utilized two basic ways: • • Aid in learning the task. the required information. Serve as a performance check. Generally.a. These steps delineate the procedure that is best followed for performing each task. C. The unit commander should consider maximum weather limitations in conjunction with Commandant policies to ensure trainees build confidence and platform proficiency gradually.6. Instructors may wish to ask questions concerning particular steps for accomplishment in order to measure the trainee’s total comprehension of the subject matter. Serve as a Performance Check Some steps for task accomplishment follow exact procedures which are required for performing a particular operation or using a specific piece of equipment.5. Some task steps can serve as a performance checkoff which can be used by the instructor to measure trainee performance when the trainee performs the task.6. the minimum sea conditions are just that. The comment section can be used to describe circumstances or conditions which might have a bearing on task completion. Skill Tasks C. Performance Criteria C. The designated instructor must print his/her name and rate.8. Knowledge Tasks C. C. a notation should be made.Part 1 – Introduction to Qualification NOTE $ During the period a member is qualifying. This qualifying period should include demonstration of skills during wind and sea conditions appropriate for the area.b. If the task is completed under more arduous circumstances than those described. C. from memory. sign and date this line attesting that the trainee successfully performed the task in accordance with the prescribed standards. the task performance standards are as follows: Trainee must be able to cite. Failure to perform any element or unsatisfactory performance of an individual element should be noted in the comments section for the task. Accomplished C. The trainee must practice in varied conditions within the above ranges and not just the minimums prior to certification.5. Trainee must be able to perform all performance tasks without prompting or assistance from the instructor.

Give the trainee the reading assignments and study guide questions. the tasks within each division should normally be accomplished in consecutive order.Part 1 – Introduction to Qualification NOTE $ Chapter 3 of each qualification Part (as well as Chapter 5 of Part 2.1. Boat Crew Member Qualification) lists reading assignments for each division followed by a group of questions that should be used by the trainee as a study guide. These must be completed individually for each desired boat type qualification. Give Chapter 3 to the Trainee D. Introduction Instructor Guidance Tasks are meant to be learned through constant practice under the instructor’s guidance. This is accomplished by following the procedural steps listed below and provided in Figure 1-1. Notes specifying task applicability may be found at the beginning of each task if applicable. Tasks designated as ANY are considered general in nature. While div isions may at times be done concurrently. Completion of these tasks on any boat type is sufficient for the qualification process and need not be repeated when qualification is desired on another boat type. Tasks designated as TYPE are considered to be specific to each boat type. Remove Chapter 3 from the Part and give it to the trainee to retain. • • • Which tasks must be completed depends on the crew position and type of boat for which the trainee is being qualified. Section D.2. Assign the Task 1-7 . D.

proceed to the next step. Verify the trainee’s performance. Demonstrate the Task to the Trainee Care should be taken at this point to clarify any misunderstandings the trainee might have about the material. Demonstrate the task to the trainee. Recommend certification. Assign the task. the instructor should narrate the procedures. Monitor the trainee’s performance. Sign off the task. Figure 1-1 Procedure for Guiding Trainees D. Schedule trainee for interview and check-ride. Walk the trainee through the task. 1-8 .4. Confirm Completion of the Reading Assignment D. During the demonstration.3. Demonstrate the steps required to complete the task. If the task is one of the few that does not require demonstration. Keep an accurate record of the training. Confirm the completion of the reading assignment.Part 1 – Introduction to Qualification Give Chapter 3 to the trainee.

Verify that the trainee’s performance meets the standard. however. NOTE $ D. When the Boat Crew Examination Board is satisfied with the trainee’s performance and abilities. The trainee is expected to perform each task on a consistent basis in accordance with the established standards and conditions. Sign Off the Task D.5. The instructor must ensure that all task completions are documented in this Manual.8. D. 1-9 . Schedule Trainee for Interview and Check-Ride D. There is no limit to the number of times the instructor performs the walk-through. trainee understanding must be ensured before continuing. Trainee performance should be monitored during both training and operations. It is an ongoing process that ends only when successful task completion can be met consistently.10. As a quick reference of the trainee’s progress. The trainee must be able to perform the task with no assistance. they may recommend to the unit commander that the trainee be certified. the instructor may want to walk the trainee through the steps more than once. The instructor should inform the Boat Crew Examination Board and schedule the trainee for an interview and certification check-ride. This includes two parts: • • The trainee must be able to perform the task subject to established conditions and standards delineated for the task. Keep an Accurate Record of the Training The instructor signs the task at the bottom of the page when he/she is confident that the trainee can perform the task consistently. Verify the Trainee’s Performance In order to ensure that the trainee understands. the qualification process is complete. while unsupervised. Walk the Trainee Through the Task D. When the trainee has completed all of the required tasks for the position and boat type.9. Monitor the Trainee’s Performance D. Recommend Certification Inform the unit commander when all tasks in this Manual are completed.11.7.Part 1 – Introduction to Qualification D. the instructor should maintain the task accomplishment record located in Chapter 1 of each qualification Part. This is accomplished by entering the start date as each task is assigned and then initialing and entering the completion date as each task is completed. Qualification does not end with the first successful completion of the task.6.

The instructor will not sign off any task as complete until the trainee can consistently and correctly complete the task unsupervised. Pay Attention During Demonstrations E.3. E. All reading assignments must be read carefully. Practice the skill. Practice the Skill First. the certification process can begin. while the task is being demonstrated by the instructor. Third. Second.4. The trainee should seek guidance from the instructor to clear up any uncertainties. Introduction Trainee Guidance It is the trainee’s responsibility to proficiently perform the tasks in accordance with the established standards. The tasks that make up Part 2 through Part 6 of this Manual represent the skills required to perform in the capacity of a boat crewmember. the trainee must practice the skill for consistent success at the task.1. the trainee must become familiar with each task. E. Read the Assignments and Ask Questions E.5. Once all required qualifications are completed. Complete WalkThrough with Instructor E. Complete walk-through with instructor.Part 1 – Introduction to Qualification Section E. Fourth. Pay attention during demonstrations. the trainee must pay close attention. Certification Process 1-10 . the trainee will complete the task the first time with the instructor walking the trainee through the steps.2. There are four parts to this learning process: • • • • Read the assignments and ask questions.

U. These tasks represent the minimum elements of skill and knowledge necessary for safe and effective performance of a Coast Guard boat crew member. which must be learned. Volume II Part 2 Boat Crew Member Qualification Introduction This Part contains a collection of tasks. and performed by the trainee.S. This Manual is not meant to be ordered for purposes of obtaining individual qualification tasks. practiced. NOTE $ In this Part This Part contains the following Chapters: Chapter 1 2 3 4 5 Title Task Accomplishment Record for Boat Crew Member Boat Crew Member Qualification Tasks Boat Crew Member Trainee Study Guide AtoN Crew Member Qualification Tasks AtoN Crew Member Trainee Study Guide See Page 2-3 2-9 2-73 2-111 2-141 2-1 . Qualification tasks should be reproduced locally and provided for trainees. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual.

U.S. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Volume II 2-2 .

TRAINEE NAME: ____________________________________ INSTRUCTOR NAME: ________________________________ RATE: ____________________ RATE: ____________________ POSITION/QUALIFICATION CODE TO BE TRAINED FOR: ______________________________ NOTE $ Task BCM-01-01-ANY BCM-01-02-ANY BCM-01-03-ANY BCM-02-01-ANY BCM-02-02-ANY BCM-02-03-ANY BCM-02-04-ANY BCM-02-05-ANY BCM-02-06-ANY BCM-02-07-ANY BCM-02-08-ANY BCM-02-09-ANY BCM-02-10-ANY BCM-02-11-ANY BCM-02-12-ANY Instructors should line through those tasks not applicable to this qualification. Task Accomplishment Record for Boat Crew Member NOTE $ Instructor should remove this chapter and place it in the trainee’s training record.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Chapter 1. Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 2-3 .

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Task BCM-02-13-ANY BCM-02-14-ANY BCM-02-15-TYPE BCM-02-16-TYPE BCM-02-17-ANY BCM-02-18-ANY BCM-03-01-ANY BCM-03-02-TYPE BCM-03-03-TYPE BCM-03-04-TYPE BCM-03-05-TYPE BCM-03-06-ANY BCM-03-07-ANY BCM-03-08-ANY BCM-04-01-ANY BCM-04-02-TYPE BCM-04-03-TYPE BCM-04-04-TYPE BCM-04-05-ANY BCM-04-06-ANY BCM-04-07-ANY BCM-04-08-ANY BCM-04-09-TYPE Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 2-4 .

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Task BCM-04-10-TYPE BCM-04-11-TYPE BCM-04-12-TYPE BCM-05-01-ANY BCM-05-02-ANY BCM-05-03-ANY BCM-06-01-ANY BCM-06-02-ANY BCM-06-03-ANY BCM-06-04-ANY BCM-06-05-ANY BCM-06-06-ANY BCM-06-07-ANY BCM-06-08-ANY BCM-06-09-TYPE BCM-06-10-TYPE BCM-06-11-TYPE BCM-06-12-TYPE BCM-06-13 TYPE BCM-06-14-ANY BCM-06-15-ANY BCM-07-01-TYPE BCM-07-02-TYPE Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 2-5 .

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Task BCM-07-03-ANY BCM-07-04-ANY BCM-07-05-TYPE BCM-07-06-ANY BCM-07-07-TYPE BCM-07-08-ANY BCM-07-09-ANY BCM-07-10-TYPE BCM-07-11-ANY BCM-07-12-TYPE BCM-07-13-ANY BCM-07-14-ANY BCM-07-15-TYPE BCM-07-16-ANY BCM-07-17-TYPE BCM-07-18-ANY BCM-07-19-ANY BCM-07-20-TYPE BCM-07-21-TYPE BCM-07-22-ANY BCM-07-23-TYPE BCM-07-24-TYPE Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 2-6 .

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section H. Homeland Security and Defense Operations TRAINEE NAME: __________________________________ INSTRUCTOR NAME: ______________________________ RATE: ________________ RATE: ________________ POSITION/QUALIFICATION CODE TO BE TRAINED FOR: ____________________________ NOTE Once complete (for qualified personnel). Law Enforcement. insert within member’s task accomplishment record between pages 2-6 and 2-7. For break-ins.1 CH-1 . Task BCM-08-01-ANY BCM-08-02-ANY BCM-08-03-ANY BCM-08-04-ANY BCM-08-05-ANY BCM-08-06-ANY BCM-08-07-ANY BCM-08-08-ANY BCM-08-09-ANY BCM-08-10-ANY BCM-08-11-ANY BCM-08-12-ANY BCM-08-13-ANY BCM-08-14-ANY BCM-08-15-ANY BCM-08-16-ANY Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 2-6. place with trainee’s original task accomplishment record in training record.

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Task BCM-08-17-ANY BCM-08-18-ANY BCM-08-19-ANY Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials CH-1 2-6.2 .

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification AtoN Crew Member Qualification Tasks Task ACM-01-01-ANY ACM-01-02-TYPE ACM-01-03-TYPE ACM-01-04-TYPE ACM-01-05-TYPE ACM-01-06-TYPE ACM-01-07-TYPE ACM-01-08-TYPE ACM-01-09-TYPE ACM-01-10-TYPE ACM-01-11-TYPE ACM-01-12-TYPE ACM-01-13-TYPE ACM-01-14-TYPE ACM-01-15-TYPE ACM-01-16-TYPE ACM-02-01-TYPE ACM-02-02-TYPE ACM-02-03-TYPE ACM-02-04-TYPE ACM-03-01-TYPE ACM-03-02-TYPE Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 2-7 .

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Task ACM-03-03-TYPE ACM-03-04-TYPE Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 2-8 .

dated. First-Aid. and Basic Stability Boat Handling Communications Navigation Mission-Oriented Operations See Page 2-10 2-12 2-25 D E F G 2-31 2-40 2-43 2-54 2-9 .Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Chapter 2. In this Chapter This Chapter contains the following Sections: Section A B C Title Crew Efficiency Factors. Boat Crew Member Qualification Tasks Introduction The following are the instructions for this Chapter: • • • The purpose of this Chapter is to provide guidance on the trainee’s progress through the qualification tasks. Boat Nomenclature. Nautical Terminology. and Survival Marlinespike Seamanship. Risk Factors and Team Coordination Physical Fitness. Tasks should be signed. and placed in the trainee’s training record when the instructor is satisfied that the trainee can consistently perform a task in accordance with all standards and conditions. The instructor should present the tasks to the trainee in a logical order using the instructions provided in Part 1.

4.5 (series). Describe the primary symptoms of fatigue. State underway limits for unit’s boats. Section B Task should be performed at any time. Date Instructor Comments 2-10 . Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. COMDTINST M16114. State the crew’s responsibility. In this Section This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number BCM-01-01-ANY BCM-01-02-ANY BCM-01-03-ANY Crew Fatigue Motion Sickness Team Coordination Training (TCT) Task See Page 2-10 2-11 2-11 TASK BCM-01-01-ANY References Conditions Standards Crew Fatigue a. Introduction Crew Efficiency Factors. at facilities available to the unit. Attend Team Coordination Training. Trainee must demonstrate knowledge of each task to the minimum standards included in each performance step.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section A. 5. Risk Factors and Team Coordination The following are objectives of Division One: • • Demonstrate knowledge of the factors that effect crew performance. Chapter 3. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Describe the situations that may cause fatigue. 2. 3. Describe the prevention measures.

Explain the causes of motion sickness. at facilities available to the unit. List the symptoms of motion sickness.5 (series). Team Coordination Training. 2. Trainee must attend the training as prescribed in the reference above. 3. Trainee must demonstrate knowledge of each task to the minimum standards included in each performance step. COMDTINST M16114. Section C Task should be performed at any time. Chapter 3.1 (series) Task should be performed at any time. Date initial training completed: _________ Date Instructor Comments 2-11 . Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Explain when best to take anti-motion sickness medication. 4.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-01-02-ANY References Conditions Standards Motion Sickness a. NOTE $ Attendance at TCT must be recorded in the trainee’s Training Record. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-01-03-ANY References Conditions Standards Team Coordination Training (TCT) a. List the prevention and medication for motion sickness. Completed (Initials) Performance Criteria 1. COMDTINST M1541. at facilities available to the unit.

Identify and become proficient in those skills necessary for coping with open water survival situations. Effectively use all standard boat crew signaling and survival equipment. This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number BCM-02-01-ANY BCM-02-02-ANY BCM-02-03-ANY BCM-02-04-ANY BCM-02-05-ANY BCM-02-06-ANY BCM-02-07-ANY BCM-02-08-ANY BCM-02-09-ANY BCM-02-10-ANY BCM-02-11-ANY BCM-02-12-ANY BCM-02-13-ANY BCM-02-14-ANY BCM-02-15-TYPE BCM-02-16-TYPE BCM-02-17-ANY BCM-02-18-ANY Task Personal Physical Fitness and Vision Crew First-Aid Responsibility Demonstrate Adult. and Infant CPR Don the Type III PFD Don the Type III Flotation Jacket Don Anti-Exposure Coveralls Don the Boat Crew Dry Suit Identify Boat Crew Survival Vest Equipment Use the Emergency Signaling Mirror Demonstrate the Use of the MK-124 Smoke and Illumination Signal Demonstrate the Use of the MK-79 Illumination Signal Kit Operate the SDU-5/E or CG-1 Strobe Light Don the Boat Crew Survival Vest Don the Inflatable PFD Explain the Manual Deployment and Boarding Procedures for the Rescue and Survival Raft List Survival Procedures in Event of Boat Capsize Open Water Survival Skills Perform Water Survival Exercise See Page 2-13 2-13 2-14 2-14 2-15 2-15 2-16 2-16 2-17 2-18 2-19 2-20 2-20 2-21 2-22 2-22 2-23 2-24 2-12 . Child. First-Aid.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section B. and Survival The following are objectives of Division Two: Achieve and maintain the level of physical conditioning necessary to safely and properly carry out the duties of a boat crew member aboard a Coast Guard boat. Introduction • • • In this Section Physical Fitness.

Section A Certifying Organization’s Training Manual Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Task should be performed at any time. Chapter 5. 2. b. Accomplish all physical fitness requirements in accordance with this Manual. Demonstrate normal color vision using the Farnsworth Lantern Test or the Pseudoisochromatic Plate Test.5 (series). Course: ________________________ Date: ___/___/___ Date Instructor Comments 2-13 . Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Certification Type and Date course completed. National Safety Council. or American Safety and Health Institute First-Aid Course to receive triennial certification. COMDTINST M16114. Age: _____ Gender: _____ Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-02-02-ANY References Crew First-Aid Responsibility a. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-01-ANY References Conditions Standards Personal Physical Fitness and Vision None. Trainee must complete the American Red Cross. at facilities available to the unit. at facilities available to the unit. Trainee must demonstrate the ability to perform the requirements set forth in the above references based on age and gender. Steps may be done all at once or over a period of time. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference.

or American Safety and Health Institute CPR course to receive certification. State when the Type III PFD is required to be worn. the trainee shall.5 (series). Chapter 5. Certification Type and Date course completed. Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. at facilities available to the unit. Trainee must complete the American Red Cross. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Section B Certifying Organization’s Training Manual Task should be performed at any time. b. COMDTINST M16114. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Course: ________________________ Date: ___/___/___ Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-02-04-ANY References Conditions Standards Don the Type III PFD a. at facilities available to the unit.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-03-ANY References Conditions Standards Demonstrate Adult. Chapter 3 Task should be performed at any time. Demonstrate proper donning of the Type III PFD and adjust for proper fit. In response to the instructor. National Safety Council. American Heart Association. don the Type III PFD. and Infant CPR a. COMDTINST M10470. 2. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. without error. Date Instructor Comments 2-14 .10 (series). Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Child.

the trainee shall. Demonstrate proper donning of the Type III flotation jacket and adjust for proper fit. don the anti-exposure coveralls. don the Type III flotation jacket. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. In response to the instructor.e. Chapter 3 Task should be performed at any time.10 (series). Demonstrate proper use of the special construction features of the anti-exposure coveralls (i. pillow. COMDTINST M10470. at facilities available to the unit. In response to the instructor. at facilities available to the unit. without error. Date 3. Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-02-06-ANY References Conditions Standards Don Anti-Exposure Coveralls a. Demonstrate proper donning of the anti-exposure coveralls and adjust for proper fit.10 (series). 2. ankle. Chapter 3 Task should be performed at any time. State when the anti-exposure coveralls are required to be worn. without error. COMDTINST M10470. 2. thigh and wrist straps.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-05-ANY References Conditions Standards Don the Type III Flotation Jacket a. Instructor Comments 2-15 . waist belt) and state how these increase hypothermia protection when utilized in the water. State when the Type III PFD is required to be worn. zipper closures. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. the trainee shall.

5 (series). Distress signal light f. and Activities San Diego. MK-79 signal kit e. Chapter 6 Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. In response to the instructor. 2. 14. 3. without error. State from memory the proper location and contents of the boat crew survival vest. MK-124 marine smoke and illumination signal d. identify the objects in the steps. COMDTINST M10470. Identify each item from the vest and explain its use: a. 3. don a boat crew dry suit. without error. COMDTINST M10470. NOTE $ Standards This task is not required to be performed at units located in District 7. WARNING I 2. 8. Chapter 3 Task should be performed at any time.10 (series). State requirements and proper methods for maintenance and stowage of the boat crew dry suit. the trainee must. the trainee shall. State problems that would make a boat crew dry suit unserviceable. Describe proper methods for sizing neck and wrist seals. Demonstrate proper donning of required neoprene hood. In response to the instructor. Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. Survival knife State when the boat crew survival vest is required to be worn. COMDTINST M16114. Cotton undergarments are not authorized. State the proper method for inspecting neck and wrist seals as well as general boat crew dry suit condition. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Emergency signal mirror b. Demonstrate proper donning of the boat crew dry suit and adjust for proper fit. State the proper thermal protective layers to be worn under the boat crew dry suit. Date 5. State the requirements for when a boat crew dry suit is to be worn. Signal whistle c. Chapter 3 Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. at facilities available to the unit. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Instructor Comments TASK BCM-02-08-ANY References Identify Boat Crew Survival Vest Equipment a. 2-16 . at facilities available to the unit.10 (series). Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-07-ANY Reference s Conditions Don the Boat Crew Dry Suit a. a. 4.

during daylight hours. The light rays from the sun must be reflected onto the predetermined object within one minute of trainee receiving a signal from the instructor.10 (series).Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-02-09-ANY References Use the Emergency Signaling Mirror a.5 (series). 2. boat). Reflect sunlight from the mirror onto a nearby surface (hand. Bring mirror to eye level. and a boat crew personnel survival vest. 3. COMDTINST M10470. Locate and break out signal mirror. and sight target through sighting hole. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. Section D Conditions Task shall be performed while floating in water deeper than the trainee’s height. Chapter 3. Sweep horizon to demonstrate attention-attracting technique. Section D Manufacturer Guidelines Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. c. Chapter 6. Hold mirror close to eye and manipulate so that light spot is on designated target.). 5. 4. Trainee should be wearing survival gear consistent with the weather and water temperature. b. wall. location on a wall. etc. Date Instructor Comments 2-17 . Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Sunlight should be reflected onto a predetermined target (boat. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. COMDTINST M16114.

c. Section D • • Conditions Task is accomplished in two parts: Ashore . Complete the following tasks ashore: a. Trainee must be able to distinguish between the day and night ends of the signal by touch alone. Identification of signal ends should be done in a well-darkened room. Identify and break out signal. Chapter 6. Section D Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. at 45-degree angle from the horizon over the side of the raft or away from dry debris. Identify day and night ends of the signal by touch alone. and a boat crew personnel survival kit. at arms length. Trainee should wear survival gear consistent with the weather and water temperature.Trainee identifies the signal ends and describes sequence required to ignite the signal. Break out signal while floating. d. e. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. activate the signal. Date Completed (Initials) 2. Pull down on tab to ignite signal. Complete the following tasks in the water: a. Trainee must be able to activate the signal while floating within one minute of receiving a signal from the instructor. Extend plastic lever out fully. Remove cap on end of signal.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-10-ANY References Demonstrate the Use of the MK-124 Smoke and Illumination Signal a. COMDTINST M16114. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 3. Afloat . Performance Criteria 1. b. Either end of the signal can be activated.In water deeper than the trainee’s height. Hold signal downwind. b.5 (series). b. COMDTINST M10470. Standards Trainee must immediately identify the signal.10 (series). Instructor Comments 2-18 .

Hold launcher over head with arm fully extended. Section D Conditions Task must be accomplished while afloat in water deeper than the trainee’s height during daylight hours. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. All steps must be done in the order listed. 6. Trainee should not fire the cartridge until directed by the instructor. Bend protective tab away from the signal.10 (series). fire signal by slipping the trigger screw out of the safety slot and into the firing slot.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-11-ANY References Demonstrate the Use of the MK-79 Illumination Signal Kit a. or simulate firing the signal within two minutes of receiving a signal from the instructor. Chapter 6. Section D Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. COMDTINST M16114. 4. On command of the instructor. and a boat crew personnel survival vest. Pull trigger screw of launcher into safety slot. Identify and break out MK-79 signal kit.5 (series). Completed (Initials) Performance Criteria 1. the trainee shall list in writing the procedures and safety precautions to be followed when igniting the MK79. If this requirement is waived. 5. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 7. Break out launcher and bandoleer from plastic envelope. Load signal cartridge into launcher and rotate clockwise until signal is seated. Trainee must immediately identify the signal. Standards NOTE $ The requirement for the trainee to activate the signal may be waived if adequate quantities of the signal are not available for training. COMDTINST M10470. Trainee should wear survival gear consistent with the weather and water temperature. Trainee must be able to load the cartridge into the launcher and fire. Date Instructor Comments 2-19 . 2. 3. b. Point launcher away from the body on a slight angle. Chapter 3.

don the boat crew survival vest. MK-79 signal kit f. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Trainee must be able to break out and activate the signal within one minute of entering the water or being given a signal by the instructor. COMDTINST M10470. Personal EPIRB (if carried) h. and a boat crew personnel survival vest. Section D Conditions Task must be accomplished while afloat in water deeper than the trainee’s height during daylight hours. Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-02-13-ANY References Conditions Standards Don the Boat Crew Survival Vest a. Signal mirror d. COMDTINST M10470. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 6. Locate and remove the SDU-5/E or CG-1 strobe light from its case. Activate strobe light. Demonstrate proper donning of the boat crew survival vest over the following PFDs and adjust for proper fit: a.10 (series).5 (series). Knife g. 2.10 (series). Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. Type III PFD b. Flotation jacket c. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. 3. Chapter 3.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-12-ANY References Operate the SDU-5/E or CG-1 Strobe Light a. Trainee must immediately identify the signal. Chapter 3 Task should be performed at any time. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Section D Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. b. Anti-exposure coverall Access the following equipment: a. In response to the instructor. COMDTINST M16114. MK-124 day/night signal e. at facilities available to the unit. Tether (if carried) State the requirements for when the boat crew survival vest is to be worn. 2. 2-20 . Strobe light b. Trainee should wear survival gear consistent with the weather and water temperature. without error. the trainee shall. Whistle c.

COMDTINST M10470. MK-124 day/night signal e. State when an inflatable PFD is required to be worn.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-02-14-ANY References Conditions Don the Inflatable PFD a. 2. In response to the instructor. Instructor Comments 2-21 . Access the following equipment: a. Whistle c. Knife g. NOTE $ Standards This qualification task is only required at units using inflatable PFDs. Personal EPIRB (if carried) h. Signal mirror d. Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. Date 4.10 (series). Tether (if carried) State the requirements and proper methods for maintenance and stowage of the inflatable PFD. don the inflatable PFD and explain the policy associated with the attached survival equipment. Chapter 4 Task should be performed at any time. Strobe light b. 3. the trainee shall. State the policy associated with carrying required survival/signal equipment as part of the inflatable PFD outfit in lieu of wearing the boat crew survival vest. Complete the Performance Qualification Standard for each inflatable PFD type in use at the unit. NOTE $Place the original PQS for the Inflatable PFD in the trainee’s Training Record. without error. MK-79 signal kit f. at facilities available to the unit. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1.

Board raft from alongside boat. Chapter 5. 4. First swimmer contacts crew still inside by tapping on the hull of the boat. 2-22 . 7. Trainee should be able to identify equipment.5 (series).Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-15-ANY Explain the Manual Deployment and Boarding Procedures for the Rescue and Survival Raft This qualification task is only required at units using a Rescue and Survival Raft. State all egress routes. Select best swimmer to exit first carrying line. 3. Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-02-16-ANY References Conditions Standards List Survival Procedures in Event of Boat Capsize a. if necessary. 2. Place raft in water in best location for boarding. Chapter 6. COMDTINST M16114. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. COMDTINST M16114.e. prior to yearly inspection). 6. 3. 6. 5. Inventory survival gear. Remove raft from rack. 4.10 (series). Task may be performed at any time. Identify and locate raft and container. Section B NOTE $ References Conditions Task should be performed only for those boats equipped with a life raft. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or the use of a reference. List and explain procedures for deploying and manning the raft. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Trainee should be able to list all steps in the procedure without error.5 (series). Explain best location to deploy the raft dependent upon environmental conditions. Locate nearest exit to open water. if possible. with PFD in hand. 2. and cite steps in the procedures without error. b. 5. Chapter 6. COMDTINST M10470. Pull the 50-foot painter line from the raft container to inflate raft. Section G Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. a. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. First swimmer exits craft. consideration should be given to deploying the raft for training (i. When practical. Section H Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or the use of references.

Describe the method for: a. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Boarding a life raft. COMDTINST M16114. the trainee shall explain risk-based decisions associated with open water survival skills. Crew stays with the boat until rescued or boat sinks. COMDTINST M10470. Date Instructor Comments 2-23 . COMDTINST 1541.5 (series) Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. 6. 4. Chapter 3 Team Coordination Training. 3.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 7. at facilities available to the unit. Describe the preventive measures that can be used to increase the chances for successful open water survival including methods of tethering. c.10 (series). Explain the benefits associated with the different levels of hypothermia protective garments and how they relate to Tables 3-1 and 3-2 of the Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. 5. 8. Boarding a boat from the water. 2.1 (series) Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. Climbing onto an overturned boat hull. Explain risk-based decisions associated with swimming in open water survival situations. In response to the instructor. b. Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK BCM-02-17-ANY References Open Water Survival Skills a. Explain the factors that accelerate the onset of hypothermia. c. Explain the benefits for getting your body out of the water as much as possible in open water survival situations. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. b. Rest of crew exits one at a time.

e. Personnel wearing dry suits shall don the required neoprene hood after entering the water. 6. Enter the water from a height of approximately 3 feet or from the level of the boat’s main deck. hypothermia protective garments and survival equipment consistent with the coldest weather and water temperature experienced at the unit. Strobe light b. 7. In response to the instructor. NOTE $ 5. Minimize initial immersion by spreading arms and applying a scissors kick upon entry. 2. snags. Knife g.e. Tether to other survivors and demonstrate the HELP for multiple survivors. hypothermia protective garments and survival equipment to reduce water intrusion. An immediate means of response must be available to assist any member that develops trouble during the completion of this task. Trainee shall wear flotation. Demonstrate the Heat Escape Lessening Position (HELP) for a single person in the water. If this task is completed near a boat or unit docks. Table 3-1 This exercise shall be completed by entering water from a height of approximately 3 feet above the surface or from the level of the boat’s main deck. Tether (if carried) Date Instructor Comments 2-24 . excess currents. boat movement. 3. Check surrounding water for debris and depth. debris. Personal EPIRB (if carried) h. a. but maintain awareness of surroundings (i. b. The preferred swim stroke is the resting backstroke. d. wave action. Signal mirror d. Maintain vertical position (body erect) upon entry into water. Trainee shall accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. heat loss. b. and to improve mobility and buoyancy. Access and demonstrate the use of the following equipment: a. and adjust for proper fit. or biological hazards).Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-18-ANY References Conditions Perform Water Survival Exercise a. Whistle c. the trainee shall. 4. shoals. COMDTINST M10470. Don flotation. c. complete all steps of the water survival exercise Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. currents). MK-124 day/night signal e. hypothermia protective garments and survival equipment. Adjust flotation. Swim 100 yards using an energy conserving stroke or movement. Look straight ahead when entering water. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.10 (series).5 (series) Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. ensure the area is free of any dangers (i. COMDTINST M16114. without error. MK-79 signal kit f.

Section A Task should be performed onboard one of the unit’s boats. move forward on the boat. 2.Watertight Integrity Stability Identify the Different Parts of a Line and the Hitches Used in Line Handling Tie Various Knots. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. identify different locations and positions aboard the boat. without error. Nautical Terminology. Bitts. Chapter 8. Introduction Marlinespike Seamanship. Boat Nomenclature. and Basic Stability The following are objectives of Division Three: • • • Identify. 3. 4. On command. Identify athwartships. Identify starboard side of boat. In this Section This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number BCM-03-01-ANY BCM-03-02-TYPE BCM-03-03-TYPE BCM-03-04-TYPE BCM-03-05-TYPE BCM-03-06-ANY BCM-03-07-ANY BCM-03-08-ANY Task State Common Boat Nomenclature and Terminology Locate and Identify the Purpose of the Equipment Aboard the Boat Boat Characteristics . Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section C. Demonstrate the ability to secure lines of various sizes to several types of deck and dock fittings. and Bends Secure Lines to Cleats. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Identify port side of boat. 5.Boat Construction Boat Characteristics . explain the use of. Identify bow of the boat. and Posts See Page 2-25 2-26 2-26 2-27 2-27 2-28 2-29 2-30 TASK BCM-03-01-ANY References Conditions Standards State Common Boat Nomenclature and Terminology a. the trainee must. COMDTINST M16114. Hitches. Identify the different parts of a boat’s ground tackle and be able to assist in anchoring a boat. and be able to consistently tie the basic knots and hitches used aboard Coast Guard boats.5 (series). In response to the instructor. 2-25 .

2-26 . Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-03-02-TYPE References Conditions Locate and Identify the Purpose of the Equipment Aboard the Boat a. Completed (Initials) 10.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 6. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Identify outboard and inboard areas. Trainee must label and explain the use of installed equipment and fittings. Identify starboard bow. Define keel and name the two keel types. COMDTINST M16114. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 9. Trainee must demonstrate knowledge of each task. Section B Task should be performed at any time. Chapter 8. Label each piece of equipment or fitting. Identify windward and leeward side of the boat. Chapter 8.5 (series). Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference.5 (series). 2. Name and define the three basic types of hulls. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1.Boat Construction a. at facilities available to the unit. COMDTINST M16114. 8. Trainee should list the location of each piece of equipment on the diagram. Section D Task should be performed using a simple line diagram of a boat and the boat checkoff or boat outfit list. Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-03-03-TYPE References Conditions Standards Boat Characteristics . 7. Identify stern of the boat. Identify port quarter. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1.

COMDTINST M16114. Open a watertight door and hatch. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-03-04-TYPE References Conditions Standards Boat Characteristics . at facilities available to the unit. State the watertight compartments of each boat type.Watertight Inte grity a.5 (series). 2. Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-03-05-TYPE References Conditions Standards Stability a. Chapter 8. Name the parts of doors and hatches that are used to make them watertight. and scuttle covers on a damaged boat. 4. hatches. Close a watertight door and hatch. fixed height.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 3. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. and draft). 3. Trainee must either demonstrate knowledge of or perform each task. or perform each task. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Describe the factors that should be determined before you open watertight doors. at facilities available to the unit. Section C Task should be performed at any time. 5. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 2-27 . freeboard. Name and define the measurements used to define boat displacement. height. 4. length. Section B Task should be performed at any time. Chapter 9. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). Name and define the most common boat measurements (beam. Trainee must either demonstrate knowledge of.

including double braid c. State the two types of stability.5 (series). Define equilibrium and describe how is it changed during rolling. 2. Make bight in the line. 4. 5. Define buoyancy. Natural fiber Identify bitter end of line. 5. Nylon. 6. 2. 3. Chapter 7. identify the different parts and configuration of a line. COMDTINST M16114. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. List the general vessel design features that influence stability. heeling. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-03-06-ANY References Conditions Standards Identify the Different Parts of a Line and the Hitches Used in Line Handling a. Identify standing part of line. 4. State the two primary forces that affect a vessel’s stability. the trainee must.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 1. Polypropylene b. without prompting or use of a reference. 2-28 . Sections A and D Task should be performed at any time. Define lay of line for: a. Double braid b. 3. without error. 7. In response to the instructor. Define center of gravity and describe how it changes as weight is added or subtracted upon the vessel. and listing. Describe the two types of forces that affect stability. ashore or afloat. Plain laid Define line material: a. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.

Chapter 7. Mount fender using a slip clove hitch. bowline and/or clove hitch with two half hitches. Section D Task should be performed at any time. 5. Instructor Comments Date 2-29 . Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 6. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. or at the unit’s pier. tie the following hitches. 10. 8. Secure line to a rail using a clove hitch. Attach heaving line to a towline using a sheet bend. Put a temporary eye in towline. snap hook. knots and bends quickly and confidently. 11. Tie a square (reef) knot. using a bowline. 3. 2. Make turn around an object. and Bends a. cutter. without prompting or use of a reference. Untie knot by “breaking” the bowline. 7. or other rough surfaced object.5 (series). the trainee must. Secure log. without error. by using a timber hitch and two half hitches. Make overhand loop in the line. 6. 7. 9. Add length of mooring line to a towline using a double becket bend. In response to the instructor. onboard one of the unit’s boats. board. 9. Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK BCM-03-07-ANY References Conditions Standards Tie Various Knots. Make underhand loop in the line. COMDTINST M16114. Hitches. Make round turn around an object. Secure clove hitch by using two half hitches. 8. 4. Tie bowline in the end of a mooring line. Tie bowline around an object.

14. the trainee must demonstrate the correct method for securing a line to cleats. Identify and locate sampson post on boat. Secure additional figure eights until the cleat is secured with at least three figure eights. Section E Task should be performed at any time. Bitts. Make several figure eights around horns of the post. 9. Feed eye of the line through the opening in the base of the cleat.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-03-08-ANY References Conditions Standards Secure Lines to Cleats. 6. 13. onboard one of the unit’s boats. Chapter 7. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Place eye of second mooring line over the cleat. In response to the instructor. or at the unit’s pier. cutter. Lead line over the top of the cleat and around the horns to form a figure eight. Place eye of first mooring line over the cleat. 5. Loop line back over horns and pull taut. Instructor Comments Date 2-30 . Run eye of second mooring line through the eye of the first. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Make a complete turn around the near horn. 15. COMDTINST M16114. 10. Make three or more figure eights around both horns. Locate all standard cleats on boat. 7. 2. Make complete round turn around the base of the sampson post. 11. 3. 12. Place complete round turn around the base of the cleat. and Posts a. bitts and posts. Identify and locate all bitts on boat. 8. 4. without prompting or use of a reference.5 (series).

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section D. This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number BCM-04-01-ANY BCM-04-02-TYPE BCM-04-03-TYPE BCM-04-04-TYPE BCM-04-05-ANY BCM-04-06-ANY BCM-04-07-ANY BCM-04-08-ANY BCM-04-09-TYPE BCM-04-10-TYPE BCM-04-11-TYPE BCM-04-12-TYPE Task Rig Fenders to Side of the Boat Make Fast a Boat to a Pier (Bow On Mooring. No Current/Wind) Assist in Anchoring the Boat Assist in Weighing the Boat’s Anchor Identify the Common Navigation Lights Displayed by Ships and Boats Identify the Common Sound Signals Used by Ships and Boats Identify and Describe Accepted Maritime Distress Signals Stand a Lookout Watch Act as a Helmsman and Steer a Compass Course Get the Boat Away from a Pier/Cutter Moor the Boat to a Pier/Cutter Boat Handling See Page 2-32 2-32 2-33 2-33 2-34 2-35 2-35 2-36 2-37 2-38 2-38 2-39 2-31 . Demonstrate the ability to participate in the common watches performed aboard Coast Guard boats. Identify and explain the purpose or use of the different fittings and equipment located on a Coast Guard boat. Introduction • • • In this Section Boat Handling The following are objectives of Division Four: Define the common terms used for identification aboard a Coast Guard boat.

5 (series). Trainee may be supervised by the coxswain who will maneuver the boat. without prompting or the use of a reference. in proper sequence. Place forward spring line on pier cleat tended and secure to the boat. COMDTINST M16114. Section D Chapman Piloting Task should be performed at any time onboard a unit boat without prompting or use of a reference. Place fenders at contact points between boat and pier. 3. Section D. Instructor Comments Date 2-32 . 2. Chapter 7. and Chapter 17. Fenders should be the proper height to avoid damage. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. the correct procedures for securing a boat to a pier using the boats mooring lines. Chapter 10.5 (series). In response to the instructor. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 3. 4. b. Place aft spring line on pier cleat and secure to the boat. COMDTINST M16114. Place stern line on pier cleat and secure to the boat. Place bow line on pier cleat and secure to the boat.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-04-01-ANY References Conditions Standards Rig Fenders to Side of the Boat a. dock or another boat. Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-04-02-TYPE References Conditions Standards Make Fast a Boat to a Pier (Bow On Mooring. In response to the instructor. Section C Task should be performed at any time onboard a unit boat. 2. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Position all fenders appropriately for width and height of pilings and piers. Tie fenders in place using a slip clove hitch. the trainee must correctly rig fenders to the side of the boat. No Current/Wind) a. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. the trainee must demonstrate.

2. 2-33 . Establish communications with coxswain. Chapter 10. 7. 6. 4. Section H Task should be performed at any time onboard each assigned boat.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. In response to the instructor. without prompting or use of a reference.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-04-03-TYPE References Conditions Standards Assist in Anchoring the Boat a. The trainee must demonstrate. without prompting or use of a reference. hand-over-hand at coxswain’s command (on 47' MLB throw anchor clear of the side). State the equipment associated with anchoring. Inform coxswain of direction line tending at all times as anchor line pays out (veers). COMDTINST M16114. Break out and attach anchor line to anchor. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Establish communications with coxswain during the evolution. 3. in proper sequence. the procedures for weighing the boat’s anchor. Secure anchor line to bitt at coxswain’s command. the correct procedure for anchoring the boat. Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-04-04-TYPE References Conditions Standards Assist in Weighing the Boat’s Anchor a. 5. Ascertain amount of scope needed based on depth of water and type of bottom. in proper sequence. 8. Chapter 10. State the main parts of the anchor.5 (series). Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Lower anchor over side. Section H Task should be performed at any time onboard each assigned boat. trainee must demonstrate.

Identify port side light. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. The navigation rules used should be those used in the unit’s area of operations. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-04-05-ANY References Identify the Common Navigation Lights Displayed by Ships and Boats a. onboard any unit boat or cutter. Identify bow combination light for boats. Signal to coxswain when the anchor line is at short stay (up and down). 5. verbally identify the lights listed below. COMDTINST M16672. In response to the instructor. Make up and stow all equipment. Part C Conditions Task should be performed at night. 2-34 . 3. immediately as it’s brought aboard. b. Trainee must identify the types of lights when presented with pictures or actual lights by the instructor. Stow anchor line below deck. Identify anchor light. Remove slack from anchor line as boat moves ahead. 2. Identify sailboat masthead light. away from work area. 6. 7. 8. Identify towing lights.2 (series). Identify starboard side light. 7. Determine if anchor is clear and clean. Identify stern light. 3. Chapman Piloting Navigation Rules International-Inland. Haul anchor aboard the boat. 5.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 2. trainee makes fast anchor line to bitt while coxswain moves the boat ahead to break it free). 4. the trainee must. Break anchor free from bottom (if anchor does not break free. 6. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. without error. 4.

COMDTINST M16672. Section F Navigation Rules International-Inland. verbally identify the distress signals listed below when given an illustration of each distress signal by the instructor. Identify signal for intention. 4. Trainee must identify the sound signals when presented with examples of the signals. at facilities available to the unit. Red star shells. Identify prolonged blast. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. b. Identify whistle signal for sailing vessels during periods of reduced visibility.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-04-06-ANY References Identify the Common Sound Signals Used by Ships and Boats a. onboard any unit boat or cutter. without error. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. Identify danger signal. Orange smoke marker. Continuous sounding fog horn. COMDTINST M16672. coming to port (inland).2 (series). 2-35 . Rule 37 Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. 5. without error. The navigation rules used should be those used in the unit’s area of operations. 3. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 2. verbally identify the signals listed below. 2. Identify short blast. 3.2 (series). Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. COMDTINST M16114. Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-04-07-ANY References Identify and Describe Accepted Maritime Distress Signals a. Chapman Piloting Navigation Rules International-Inland. The trainee must. the trainee must. In response to the instructor. Chapter 11. Part D Conditions Task should be performed at any time. b. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference.5 (series).

2-36 . In response to the instructor. 7. Chapter 1. 11. Radio telegraph alarm. SOS – Morse code signal. Dye marker (any color). Black square flag flown over a black circle flag. 3. 8. COMDTINST M16114. Trainee must report the range and relative bearing of objects identified by the instructor. Recognize and report meeting situations. Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-04-08-ANY References Conditions Stand a Lookout Watch a.5 (series). List the different types of buoys and their characteristics in the local area and the purpose of each. Orange board with a black square over a black circle. Recognize and report different vessel crossing situations. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. without error. Identify and report the range and relative bearing of four different type vessels. 4. 2. 13. Identify three different local fixed aids. 6. 5. COMDTINST M16672. High intensity white light flashing at intervals of 50 to 70 times per minute. November code flag flown over the “Charlie” code flag. 12. gong. Radio telephone alarm. Flames on a vessel. Gun fired at intervals of one minute. the trainee must. 9.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 4. “MAYDAY” radio broadcast.2 (series). Red parachute flare. identify objects and state relative bearing and range. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. and/or other local audio aids to navigation. Identify and report range and relative bearing to deadhead and/or other floating hazard to navigation. 5. 14. 15. b. 6. Identify whistle. bell. Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon (EPIRB). Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Rule 5 Task should be performed at any time. common to the local area. 17. 16. 7. Person waving arms. Completed (Initials) 10. onboard any of the unit’s boats or cutter. Section C Navigation Rules International-Inland.

2. onboard any of the unit’s boats while underway. 3. Section C Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. without error. 5. Steer on the course ordered by the coxswain. the trainee must respond. Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK BCM-04-09-TYPE References Conditions Standards Act as a Helmsman and Steer a Compass Course a. Alter course (at least 35 degrees) to new course on coxswain’s command.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 8. Recognize and report overtaking situations. to various helm commands. 4. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1.5 (series). Instructor Comments Date 2-37 . Chapter 14. In response to the coxswain. COMDTINST M16114. 6. Steady boat up on new course and hold to within five degrees of ordered course. All courses must be maintained to within five degrees of ordered course. Monitor engine gauges. Keep careful watch of the surrounding area. Maintain course to within five degrees of ordered course over a ten-minute staged run. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.

COMDTINST M16114. Any endangering of personnel or boat will cause the task to be secured until further training can be accomplished. Trainee must perform the task in accordance with the procedures in the listed steps. b. Chapter 10.5 (series). Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-04-11-TYPE References Moor the Boat to a Pier/Cutter a. Clear boat of pier. 3. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1.5 (series). Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 4. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Any endangering of personnel or boat will cause the task to be secured until further training can be accomplished. 2. 2. COMDTINST M16114. Trainee must perform the task in accordance with procedures in the listed steps. Chapter 10. The boat may be made fast to either side of the pier or mooring object. Demonstrate checking engine control (forward and reverse on each engine. Clear stern of the boat from the pier. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference.) Approach slowly. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section D Chapman Piloting Conditions Standards Task will be performed at any time of the day or night in light to moderate winds. Brief crew on procedure to be used and their duties. All mooring lines must be attached before task is begun. b. Remove mooring lines from pier as directed. Section D Chapman Piloting Task will be performed at any time of day or night in light to moderate winds. 2-38 . 3.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-04-10-TYPE References Conditions Get the Boat Away from a Pier/Cutter a. Brief crew on procedure to be used and their duties.

3. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. use spring line if desired. 6. 5. Determine the rudder limits. Trainee must perform each task to the minimum standards included in each performance step. Turn the boat with the helm. Adjust speed to ensure wake caused no damage or injuries. Secure lines. 5. Apply appropriate power and rudder.5 (series). 2. COMDTINST M16114. Maintain safe speed for trainee’s ability and weather conditions. 7. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. 8. Any endangering of personnel or boat will cause the task to be secured until further training can be accomplished. Hold a course while backing the vessel. 2-39 . Bring boat alongside. 4. Move boat forward in a straight line. Check engine control action.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 4. Stop the boat in a safe manner. Section B Task will be performed at any time of the day or night in light to moderate winds. Chapter 10. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-04-12-TYPE References Conditions Standards Boat Handling a. 6.

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 9. 2-40 . Rotate boat about the pivot point. COMDTINST M16114. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Turn boat with a reduced tactical diameter. This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number BCM-05-01-ANY BCM-05-02-ANY BCM-05-03-ANY Task Operate a VHF-FM Radiotelephone Operate a SSB-HF Transceiver Use the VHF-FM Radiotelephone to Give a Operations and Position Report See Page 2-40 2-41 2-42 TASK BCM-05-01-ANY References Operate a VHF-FM Radiotelephone a. onboard one of the unit’s boats or cutter. Introduction • • In this Section Communications The following are objectives of Division Five: Demonstrate the ability to operate a VHF-FM radiotelephone and the SSB-HF transceiver. without error. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 10. identify the different operating parts of the radio and operate the radio. COMDTINST 2300. Sections A and G Radiotelephone Handbook. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Instructor Comments Date Section E.5 (series). b. the trainee must. Demonstrate the ability to use the radiotelephone to give a position or operations report. Identify VHF-FM transceiver and speakers. 2. In response to the instructor.7 (series) Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. Chapter 11. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Identify breaker that energizes radio.

3. identify the different operating parts of the radio and operate the radio. COMDTINST M2300. 6. Identify channel selection switch or buttons for emergency and working frequencies. Identify microphone and transmitting button and obtain a radio check on appropriate working frequency. Identify SSB-HF transceiver and speakers. Identify and adjust squelch control to just beyond the point where the static disappears. No radio checks are permitted on the International VHF distress and calling frequency. the trainee must. 6. b. 5. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Identify squelch control and adjust to the point where static disappears. c. Instructor Comments Date 2-41 . 5.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 3. 4. Identify channel selection switch or buttons and select frequency 2182KHZ. NOTE $ No radio checks are permitted on the International Medium Frequency (MF) distress and calling frequency 2182KHZ. Completed (Initials) NOTE $ Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-05-02-ANY References Operate a SSB-HF Transceiver a. COMDTINST M16114. without error. Chapter 11 Radiotelephone Handbook. Channel 16. onboard one of the unit’s boats or cutter with SSB-HF radio onboard. Identify power switch and turn radio on. Identify power switch and turn radio on. Identify microphone and operating button and demonstrate radio check on appropriate working frequency.7 (series) SSB-HF Transceiver – Operator’s Manual Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 2. 4.5 (series). Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. In response to the instructor. Identify and adjust volume control. 7. Identify volume controls and adjust volume.

Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. and set radio to unit’s working frequency. b. the trainee must. COMDTINST M2300. 2. Hail Station using unit’s working frequency. tune.7 (series) Task should be performed at any time. Send status of operations and position. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Message to be sent should be composed by the trainee and the instructor prior to the beginning of the task. 3.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-05-03-ANY References Conditions Use the VHF-FM Radiotelephone to Give a Operations and Position Report a. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). Turn on. Ensure that channel 16 (emergency frequency) is being monitored at the same time. 5. Task must be accomplished using proper radio telephone procedures. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. send a short operations and position report. onboard one of the unit’s boats or cutter. without error. Sign off using proper prowords at conclusion of the message. Date Instructor Comments 2-42 . Chapter 11 Radiotelephone Handbook. including prowords and phonetic alphabet. 4. in accordance with the above reference. In response to the instructor.

Demonstrate the ability to identify navigation and general landmark symbols on a nautical chart. Demonstrate ability to calculate actual speed of vessel.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section F. determine amount of water beneath keel. In this Section This section contain the following tasks: Task Number BCM-06-01-ANY BCM-06-02-ANY BCM-06-03-ANY BCM-06-04-ANY BCM-06-05-ANY BCM-06-06-ANY BCM-06-07-ANY BCM-06-08-ANY BCM-06-09-TYPE BCM-06-10-TYPE BCM-06-11-TYPE Task Identify the Symbols. Speed. Demonstrate the ability to plan a voyage by laying down a track line across safe water and through marked channels. Introduction • • • • • Navigation The following are objectives of Division Six: Demonstrate the use of a nautical chart. and recommend adjustments to vessel’s course and speed to match voyage plan. Demonstrate the ability to take a fix and plot a position on a chart. Abbreviations and Basic Parts of a Nautical Chart Identify Common Aids to Navigation Used for Inland and Coastal Piloting Identify Local Landmarks on a Nautical Chart Plot a Position Using Latitude and Longitude Plot a Magnetic Course on a Nautical Chart Measure Distance on a Nautical Chart Compute Time. and Distance Determine the Depth of Water Using a Fathometer Use Radar to Identify Objects Determine the Range and Bearing to Objects Using Radar Use Radar to Obtain and Interpret Relative Bearings and Ranges to a Moving Target to Determine if Risk of Collision Exists Operate the VHF-FM Direction Finder and Steer on a Signal Obtain a Fix Using GPS/DGPS Plot a Position Using LORAN-C TDs Operate the Electronic Charting System See Page 2-44 2-45 2-45 2-46 2-46 2-47 2-47 2-48 2-49 2-49 2-50 BCM-06-12-TYPE BCM-06-13-TYPE BCM-06-14-ANY BCM-06-15-ANY 2-51 2-52 2-52 2-53 2-43 .

Chapter 14. a. Identify the general information block. Identify one nautical mile using the latitude scale. 6. 7.5 (series). Identify different colors and stated meaning of each. 10. In response to the instructor. COMDTINST M16114. Identify depth curves (contours). Identify aids to navigation. 5. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 12. Identify the symbol for prominent local landmarks. Identify the miles and yards scale. rock. or other submerged object. 15. Identify the latitude and longitude in minutes or seconds. Sections A and B NOTE $ References Conditions Standards Task should be performed ashore or afloat. 14. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Identify sounding numbers (feet/fathoms). Identify the latitude scale. skiffs or punts. Identify the longitude scale. at any time. the trainee must. 8. 13. 3. Identify the symbol for a wreck. Identify latest changes to the chart determined by Notice to Mariners and Local Notice to Mariners.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-06-01-ANY Identify the Symbols. Identify horizontal and vertical clearances of overhead bridges and cables. 11. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 2. 4. Abbrev iations and Basic Parts of a Nautical Chart Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. using a chart of the local area. Instructor Comments Date 2-44 . Identify the scale of a chart. Identify the compass rose and indicate the purpose of each of its prominent parts. identify the different parts of a nautical chart listed in the steps below. 9. 16. without error.

Chapter 14. In response to the instructor pointing out aids to navigation and prominent landmarks. 6. shoals and structures. b. 3. the trainee must. Identify all prominent submerged or partially submerged wrecks in the area. Chapter 5 Conditions Standards Task should be performed while underway. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 13 Nautical Chart Symbols. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Identify ranges and state their purpose. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Identify an intracoastal waterways (ICW) buoy and state its markings (if applicable).5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. 5. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 4. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Abbreviations. Identify all major piers and docks in the area. 3. In response to the instructor. 6. 4. 2. and Terms. and characteristic the primary aids used for entering and exiting the unit’s berths. Identify a day beacon. without error. While underway. 2-45 . Identify a nun buoy and a can buoy. Identify all prominent antennas and towers used as navigational landmarks in the area. using a nautical chart of the unit’s local operating area. and Terms. a. 5. 1 The American Practical Navigator. identify the stated aids to navigation and their corresponding chart symbols. Chart No. or semi-submerged rocks. b. correctly identify on the chart those objects pointed out. Chart No. Identify any prominent dangerous submerged. Abbreviations. c. without error.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-06-02-ANY References Identify Common Aids to Navigation Used for Inland and Coastal Piloting a. Identify all prominent buildings and structures used as navigational landmarks in the area. the trainee must. Identify a preferred channel buoy and state its purpose. Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-06-03-ANY Identify Local Landmarks on a Nautical Chart Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. 2. 1 NOTE $ References Conditions Standards Task should be performed while underway.5 (series). using a nautical chart of the unit’s local operating area. number. identify by type. Identify all prominent landmarks in the area. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Section B Nautical Chart Symbols. COMDTINST M16114.

plot the latitude and longitude coordinates within five minutes. Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-06-05-ANY Plot a Magnetic Course on a Nautical Chart Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. plot the courses indicated within five minutes. Plot five different positions on the chart within five minutes. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. Identify all bridges and their types in the area. Positions must be within 100 yards. b. Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK BCM-06-04-ANY Plot a Position Using Latitude and Longitude Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. b.5 (series). the five positions plotted in TASK BCM -06-04-ANY. without error. 2-46 . a. skiffs or punts. without error. Chapter 14. Courses must be accurate to within three degrees. Plot five different courses on the chart. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. The trainee must. Chapter 14. Section D The American Practical Navigator NOTE $ References Conditions Standards Trainee shall be given a nautical chart and five sets of coordinates expressed in longitude and latitude. and five magnetic bearings (one bearing for each position).5 (series). Section C The American Practical Navigator NOTE $ References Conditions Trainee shall be given a nautical chart (scale 1:80.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 7. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. skiffs or punts. a. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. The trainee must. Trainee must plot the five coordinates without prompting or use of a reference.000 or less).

Chapter 14.5 (series). Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-06-07-ANY Compute Time. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. without error. The distance from position C to D is _____ yards. and Distance Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. The distance from position B to C is _____ yards. Standards 2-47 . Speed. measure the distances indicated in the task’s steps within three minutes. The distance from position E to A is _____ nautical miles. All answers should be given to the nearest tenth of an hour. 4. skiffs or punts. The distance from position D to E is _____ nautical miles. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. The trainee must.5 (series). Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. a. 3. skiffs or punts. Distance must be accurate to within 200 yards. 5. The trainee must.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-06-06-ANY Measure Distance on a Nautical Chart Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. Section D The American Practical Navigator NOTE $ References Conditions Trainee shall be given a nautical chart (scale 1:80. calculate the answer indicated for each step within five minutes. b. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Section D The American Practical Navigator NOTE $ References Conditions Trainee shall be given a nautical chart. COMDTINST M16114.000 or less) and the set of five positions plotted in task BCM -06-04-ANY on the chart (designated A through E). without error. b. Chapter 14. a. nautical slide rule. knot. 2. The distance from position A to B is _____ nautical miles. COMDTINST M16114. All distances must be measured using nautical miles or yards as indicated by the task steps. or nautical mile as indicated in the step. and the positions and distance calculated in TASK BCM-06-06-ANY.

Demonstration should be performed in an area known to have accurate charted soundings. while underway.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification NOTE $ The Nautical Slide Rule may not be used for steps 2 and 5. a boat would travel at a speed of 12 knots for 2. without error. 4. Calculate the distance. In response to the instructor. in knots. 6. Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-06-08-ANY References Conditions Determine the Depth of Water Using a Fathometer a. 3. 5. Adjust “Display Contrast”. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. in nautical miles. Date Instructor Comments 2-48 . State the depth in three different positions. the trainee must. Turn on fathometer. identify different parts of the fathometer and various functions. All other soundings should be within 2 fathoms of the charted depth. in knots. (High through Off) Demonstrate entering “Offset Setup”. State the 3-minute and 6-minute rules. and 3 kts to demonstrate the 3-minute/6-minute rules. Steps 4 and 5 should be accomplished in water less than 30 feet. it would take a boat to get from point B to point C in 30 minutes.4 hours. Calculate the speed. Calculate the speed. 5. Section D Task should be performed at any time. 3. 6 kts. Adjust illumination from “Lamp 3 through Off”. 4. 2. onboard one of the unit’s boats. Steps 1 through 3 should be accomplished in water greater than 5 fathoms. it would take a boat traveling at a speed of 8 knots to get from point A to point B. In step 2 the trainee should also use speeds of 12 kts. Set appropriate depth. it would take a boat to travel 200 yards in 3 minutes.5 (series). Calculate the time. in knots. 2. Identify fathometer. Chapter 14. Calculate the speed. in hours. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Soundings should be within 10% (allowing for range of tide) of the charted depth when working in water less than 30 feet. 6. it would take a boat to get from point E to point C in 2 hours. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. COMDTINST M16114. Instructor should fix position and verify readings. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1.

COMDTINST M16114. Weather should be calm to moderate. Recognize and visually verify two different aids to navigation. and then verified by sight. Section D Radar Operator’s Handbook The American Practical Navigator NOTE $ References Conditions Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. COMDTINST M16114. 2-49 . Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-06-10-TYPE Determine the Range and Bearing to Objects Using Radar Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-06-09-TYPE References Use Radar to Identify Objects a. All of the objects listed must be identified using the installed radar and a local area chart. c. “sea clutter” and “rain clutter”. and then verified by sight. 3. a. State the use of “gain”. 7. “sea clutter” and “rain clutter” as necessary. 5. In response to the instructor. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. onboard each of the unit’s boats. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 14. while underway. All of the steps must be accomplished using the installed radar and a local area chart.5 (series). Section D Radar Operator’s Handbook The American Practical Navigator Conditions Task should be performed at any time. c. Recognize and visually verify two different moving targets. 4. Turn radar power switch on and allow unit to warm up. 6. b. correctly demonstrate the steps in the task. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Turn radar for maximum target return.5 (series). Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Use “gain”. without error. Chapter 14. b. the trainee must. Recognize and visually verify three different prominent landmarks. Identify a RACON on the radar screen (if applicable). while underway. 8. 2. onboard each of the unit’s boats.

without error. the trainee must. onboard each of the unit’s boats. Report the lines of position (LOPs) to three different objects. Decreasing Range”. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1.2 (series) Radar Operator’s Handbook The American Practical Navigator NOTE $ References Conditions Task should be performed at any time. Determine if the target is in a meeting situation or would be passing ahead or astern of the CG boat by monitoring the range and relative bearing. identify the objects and correctly utilize the VRM and EBL functions to complete tasks two and three.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Standards In response to the instructor. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Identify a moving target on the boat’s radar. 3. COMDTINST M16672. Report the ranges to three different objects. 3. 4. All of the steps must be accomplished using the installed radar and verified by sight. 2-50 . to avoid the other vessel. 2. Weather should be calm to moderate. State the meaning of “Constant Bearing. Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-06-11-TYPE Use Radar to Obtain and Interpret Relative Bearings and Ranges to a Moving Target to Determine if Risk of Collision Exists Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. c. if necessary. Use the VRM and EBL functions to establish the target range and relative bearing. Turn radar on and tune for maximum target return. b. d. 5. Recommend course alteration. Trainee must be able to determine the relative motion of the target within a “reasonable” amount of time and recommend an adjustment to the boat’s course to a risk of collision. while underway. 2. a. Knight’s Modern Seamanship Navigation Rules International-Inland.

onboard one of the unit’s boats. Instructor Comments Date 2-51 . the trainee must demonstrate the use of the FM direction finder. Identify off/on switch and turn direction finder on. 5. 7. Manufacturer’s Operating Manual NOTE $ References Conditions Task should be performed at any time. Press the CH key. a. then press ENT. 3. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. State the direction of the signal. Identify front panel indicator and controls. 4. Identify volume control and adjust. Identify squelch control and adjust to just beyond the point where static disappears. while underway. 2. 6. In response to the instructor. 8. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-06-12-TYPE Operate the VHF-FM Direction Finder and Steer on a Signal Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. Establish communications with another unit using appropriate working frequency. Enter the appropriate channel using the numerical keypad. Task will require the use of another radio transceiver at a known location. Identify direction finder and speakers. 9. Course should be steered within 5 degrees of the charted LOP.

b. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. 3.5 (series). Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-06-14-ANY Plot a Position Using LORAN-C TDs Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. Read and report latitude and longitude position to instructor. 3. onboard each of the unit’s boats. Explain Time Difference (TD) and how it is used. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section D GPS Operator’s Handbook The American Practical Navigator NOTE $ References Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. 4.5 (series). Describe LORAN-C and its purpose. Energize set and verify set receiving a signal. while underway. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Chapter 14. Demonstrate using “Sailplan” and “Reverse Sailplan” (as applicable). a. COMDTINST M16114. In response to the instructor. Section D The American Practical Navigator NOTE $ References Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. a. Chapter 14. 2-52 . Plot latitude and longitude position on chart. the trainee must correctly demonstrate the use of the GPS/DGPS receiver. Trainee must either demonstrate knowledge or perform each task to the minimum standards included in each performance step.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-06-13-TYPE Obtain a Fix Using GPS/DGPS Cutter boats will perform steps 1 and 2 only. at facilities available to the unit. COMDTINST M16114. 2. c. 2. Use TDs to plot three positions within one-tenth of a nautical mile utilizing the interpolator. b.

Trainee must either demonstrate knowledge or perform each task to the minimum standards included in each performance step. Complete procedure for using quick routes. Describe the basic purpose of the soft keys. 5. 2. State the specific features of the electronic charting system. 6. at facilities available to the unit. Perform the basic procedures for changing the chart scale and displaying information about objects. and trackpad. Describe the information provided in the cursor data box. a. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Describe the purpose of electronic charting. 3. Electronic Charting System Operation Manual NOTE $ References Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. Instructor Comments Date 2-53 .Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-06-15-TYPE Operate the Electronic Charting System Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. dedicated keys. 4.

Demonstrate procedures for helo hoist operation. Introduction • • • • • • In this Section Mission-Oriented Operations The following are objectives of Division Seven: Demonstrate actions to take during a man overboard emergency. Demonstrate procedures to combat a fire onboard own vessel or another vessel. This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number BCM-07-01-TYPE BCM-07-02-TYPE BCM-07-03-ANY BCM-07-04-ANY BCM-07-05-TYPE BCM-07-06-ANY BCM-07-07-TYPE BCM-07-08-ANY BCM-07-09-ANY BCM-07-10-TYPE BCM-07-11-ANY BCM-07-12-TYPE BCM-07-13-ANY BCM-07-14-ANY BCM-07-15-TYPE BCM-07-16-ANY Task Participate in a Man Overboard Evolution as a Pointer Participate in a Man Overboard Evolution as a Recovery/Pickup Person Participate in a Man Overboard Evolution as a Surface Swimmer Stokes Litter Recover a Person-in-the-Water with the Stokes Litter Helicopter Operations Conduct Helo-Ops Fire the MK-127A1 Parachute Illumination Signal Bend a Heaving Line to a Bridle and Pass the Heaving Line to Another Boat Pass a Towline to Another Boat Connect a Towline to a Trailer Eyebolt Using a Shackle or Skiff Hook Secure an Alongside Tow Prepare the Portable Pump for Operation. and State the Extinguishing Agents for Each Class of Fire Locate and Identify the Fire Fighting Equipment Carried Onboard the Boat See Page 2-55 2-56 2-56 2-57 2-58 2-59 2-59 2-60 2-60 2-61 2-62 2-62 2-63 2-64 2-64 2-65 BCM-07-17-TYPE 2-66 2-54 . State the Fuel Sources. Demonstrate procedures for towing astern and alongside. Start. Demonstrate procedures for dewatering another vessel. and Obtain Suction Assist in Passing a Portable Pump Directly to Another Boat Rig and Operate an Eductor to Obtain Suction Identify the Different Classes of Fires.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section G. Demonstrate procedures to signal an emergency.

Instructor Comments Date 2-55 . this task should be performed with an actual person in the water. while underway onboard each of the unit’s boats. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Section A Task should be performed during the day and at night.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Task Number BCM-07-18-ANY BCM-07-19-ANY BCM-07-20-TYPE BCM-07-21-TYPE BCM-07-22-ANY BCM-07-23-TYPE BCM-07-24-TYPE Task Demonstrate Knowledge of the Operation of a CO2 Fire Extinguisher Demonstrate Knowledge of the Operation of a Dry Chemical Fire Extinguisher Assemble Equipment for the Boat’s Main Fire Fighting System Engage the Boat’s Main Fire Pump Operate a Vari-Nozzle Demonstrate Knowledge of the Procedures to Combat a Fire in the Engine Space Demonstrate the Appropriate Response to the Basic Engineering Casualty Control Exercises (BECCE) See Page 2-66 2-67 2-68 2-68 2-69 2-70 2-71 TASK BCM-07-01-TYPE References Conditions Participate in a Man Overboard Evolution as a Pointer a. the trainee must move to his/her correct Station and perform the task steps without hesitat ion. and assist with pickup of PIW. Chapter 16. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Where possible.5 (series). Proceed immediately to assigned position. In response to the instructor. 3. Keep PIW in sight continuously and sound alarm. COMDTINST M16114. move to assigned position. When not possible due to weather conditions or water temperature. 4. a life-like dummy. Keep coxswain continuously informed of PIW position both vocally and by pointing. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Upon command. 2. (180 pounds dry) or Oscar must be used.

Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference.S. This task must be done with a life-like dummy. In response to the instructor.5 (series). 3. 2-56 . When not possible due to weather conditions or water temperature. the trainee must perform the task steps without hesitation. while underway onboard one of the unit’s boats. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 4. Prepare a rescue heaving line. Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-07-03-ANY References Participate in a Man Overboard Evolution as a Surface Swimmer a.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-07-02-TYPE References Conditions Participate in a Man Overboard Evolution as a Recovery/Pickup Person a. COMDTINST M16114. while underway onboard each of the unit’s boats. 5. COMDTINST M10470. Pull PIW alongside the boat. if PIW is conscious.2 (series) Conditions Task should be performed during daylight hours in calm sea conditions. Where possible. (180 pounds dry) Oscar in the water. COMDTINST M16130. In response to the instructor. a life-like dummy. Section A Task should be performed during the day and at night. b. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Chapter 16. if PIW is conscious.5 (series). Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual. throw a rescue heaving line to PIW. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. On command. Task may need to be modified. 2. this task should be performed with an actual person in the water. Review the policy outlined in references (b) and (c).10 (series) U. c. if PIW is conscious. Proceed immediately to assigned position (should be lowest point of free board away from screws). Standards NOTE $ The intent of this task is to ensure crew member can remove another person from the water. Section A Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. (180 pounds dry) Oscar may be used. depending upon equipment carried as part of boat outfit. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. the trainee must move to his/her correct Station and perform the task steps without hesitation. Pull the PIW aboard using two persons. COMDTINST M 16114. Chapter 16.

3.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 1. 5. Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK BCM-07-04-ANY References Conditions Standards Stokes Litter a. 4. Hold PIW in cross shoulder position. State procedures necessary for securing a patient in the litter. while pulled back to boat by tender. Place PIW in stokes litter (only if person is seriously injured and seas are calm). 2. Chapter 2 Task should be performed at any time at facilities available to the unit.10 (series). State flotation kit requirements. enter the water feet first. State what type of stokes litter is authorized for Coast Guard use.10 (series). Trainee must either demonstrate knowledge or perform each task to the minimum standards included in each performance step. 2. On command. 6. Don necessary rescue equipment/PPE. Date Instructor Comments 2-57 . 3. Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Review stokes litter policy and guidelines provided in the Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. COMDTINST M10470. State the surface swimmer policy as outlined in the above references. 4. COMDTINST M10470. Assist while PIW hauled onboard.

COMDTINST M10470. while underway onboard one of the unit's boats.10 (series) Task should be performed during daylight hours. 4. 2. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). This task must be done with a lifelike dummy (180 pounds). 3. depending upon equipment carried as part of the boat outfit. Place patient or Oscar in litter and attach all straps in correct order. Oscar.5 (series) and the Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. Section A Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. COMDTINST M10470. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 5. Assist while patient is hauled onboard (head first). b. Place stokes litter in water and tend with assistance of another crew member. 6. Make ready stokes litter manila tending lines and patient securing straps.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-07-05-TYPE References Conditions Recover a Person-in-the-Water with the Stokes Litter a. In response to the instructor the trainee must perform the task steps without hesitation. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. or unit personnel in the water. Check the patient to assess their physical condition and give first-aid as needed. Instructor Comments Date 2-58 . Assist in carrying stokes litter with patient from the boat to the shore. Task may need to be modified. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. COMDTINST M16114. Standards NOTE $ The intent of this task is to ensure crew member can remove another person from the water. Chapter 16. Review the policy outlined in the Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.10 (series). in calm sea conditions.

Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-07-07-TYPE Conduct Helo-Ops Task ONLY applies to boats 30' and above. In response to the instructor.5 (series). the trainee should perform the tasks in accordance with the steps listed below. a. in fair weather conditions. Secure loose gear before operations. Task must be completed at the earliest possible time. NOTE $ Standards If no helicopter training is available. Chapter 19. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 2. Trainee must either demonstrate knowledge or perform each task to the minimum standards included in each performance step. COMDTINST M16114. 4. PFDs or appropriate exposure gear and boat crew personnel survival vests. All crew members should be wearing gloves. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Section B NOTE $ References Conditions Task should be performed while underway during daylight hours. Ground rescue device using a deadman stick. 3. this task may be deferred. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. State safety precautions associated with delivery and hoisting.5 (series). Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. helmets. Chapter 19 Task should be performed at any time at facilities available to the unit.5 (series).Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-07-06-ANY References Conditions Standards Helicopter Operations a. 2-59 . 2. goggles. Rescue device must be grounded to the boat before crew members handle it. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. 3. Review air operations chapter of the Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. State delivery and hoisting methods. Rescue device and/or line must not become entangled or otherwise attached to the boat at any time. Tend rescue device as it is lifted from boat and hoisted to helicopter. Bring rescue device onto the boat’s deck by hand or by using a tag line.

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-07-08-ANY References Conditions Standards Fire the MK-127A1 Parachute Illumination Signal a. Point ejection end. Section F Task should be performed at night. prepare. 4.5 (series). Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. Fire signal by striking firing cap bottom with the palm of the right-hand. 8. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. The target boat must be at least 40 feet away from the boat at the time of the toss. Inspect cork sealing disc for looseness. the trainee must pass the line to the target boat. Withdraw firing cap from lower end. Remove signal from its container. 5. opposite the red band. in accordance with the steps listed below. 9. Chapter 6. Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-07-09-ANY References Conditions Bend a Heaving Line to a Bridle and Pass the Heaving Line to Another Boat a. Keep the arm rigid and pointed straight up. on two out of three throws. 3. Chapter 17. Section D Task should be performed at any time onboard one of the unit’s boats. Position signal so that firing end is perpendicular to the deck with the firing cap facing downward. Wet down heaving line to relieve stiffness. 2-60 . but not hit it. Trainee must break out. 6. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. flare should not be fired. ashore or underway. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor. The heaving line should pass over the target boat. If disc is loose. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 2. away from body and other people or objects. Push firing cap slowly onto primer end until cap is aligned with the lower edge of the red band. Heaving line used should be at least 75 feet long. Hold signal in left hand with red band facing up. and launch the MK-127A1 signal. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). 7. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. COMDTINST M16114.

On command. pass towline to the boat to be towed. 6.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 2. Chapter 17. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. or a snap hook. onboard any of the unit’s boats. In response to the instructor. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. perform all line handling related to passing a tow line. Make heaving line into tight coils. while taking another boat in tow. 6. 4. Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK BCM-07-10-TYPE References Conditions Standards Pass a Towline to Another Boat a. On command. Instructor Comments Date 2-61 . Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 3. 3. secure towline to the towing bitt. Section D Task should be performed at any time. 5. the trainee must. 2. as directed. 5. Using heaving lines. pay towline out. Place a proper working turn around the towing bitt and pay out the line. make up bitt.5 (series). throw heaving line over the target boat and tend. break towing bitt down to a working turn. Place two-thirds of coil in casting hand. Bend one heaving line onto the bridle eye using a bowline and second onto the throat using a clove hitch with two half hitches. Instruct people on other boat to take cover. On command. in accordance with the procedures listed below. On command. COMDTINST M16114. 4. Tend towline while people on other vessel make attachment.

a.5 (series). upon command. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. the trainee must. correctly tend and secure the towline and side lines in accordance with the procedures listed below. break down the tow bitt to a working turn. without prompting. Explain the purpose of each line (bow. COMDTINST M16114. lead tow line forward and use as the bow line. upon command. while disabled boat is off either quarter.5 (series). 2-62 . On command. In response to the instructor. onboard any of the unit’s boats. 3. secure towline to the tow bitt. 4. make up tow bitt. out of the way. If using stern towline. In response to the instructor. walk towline forward and fake out excess line on deck. 3. If using stern towline. towing strap. Tend towline from towing boat with proper working-turn around the tow bitt. Rig fenders and set up lines on the side where tow will be secured. Secure other lines as directed by the coxswain. back spring). Section D NOTE $ References Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. On command. 5. stern. in accordance with the procedures listed below. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. COMDTINST M16114. onboard each of the unit’s boats. 6. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. On command. Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-07-12-TYPE Secure an Alongside Tow Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. and pay out towline. Connect towline to eyebolt using skiff hook assembly or shackle. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. perform all line handling related to connecting a towline to a boat’s trailer eyebolt. 4.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-07-11-ANY References Conditions Standards Connect a Towline to a Trailer Eyebolt Using a Shackle or Skiff Hook a. Chapter 17. 2. 5. Prepare towing line with skiff hook assembly or shackle attached. the trainee must. Chapter 17 Task should be performed at any time. 2. while taking another boat in tow. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.

In response to the instructor. 5. Instructor Comments Date 2-63 . Connect suction hose. clean up and secure pump. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Start pump engine within six pulls. 3. Fill if needed. Check oil. The pump must take suction in order for this task to be considered successful. Dewatering Pump Manufacturer’s Instructions Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. COMDTINST M10470. Start. without error. Open and remove pump from pump can. and Obtain Suction Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. 8. prepare and start the pump in accordance with the procedures listed below. the trainee must. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-07-13-ANY Prepare the Portable Pump for Operation. Mount and connect fuel tank (if applicable). Place suction hose strainer in water. flush out with freshwater. 4. ashore. 10. b. 7. 6.10 (series) NOTE $ References Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. Prime pump. a. Drain. 9. Take suction and discharge water from the pump. afloat or onboard one of the unit’s boats. 2. Connect and unroll discharge hose.

Pass heaving line to other boat. Submerge eductor in the water to be pumped. 3. a. Attach mooring line to other handle. Tend pump can using mooring line while people on other boat haul it in (lines never allowed to lay slack in the water around the boats). Task should be performed using the installed pump onboard the boat. In response to the instructor. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section I NOTE $ References Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. The eductor must take suction in order for this task to be considered successful. COMDTINST M16114. pierside or underway. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. 4. onboard one of the unit’s boats. 5. Attach mooring line to pump can handle. Secure heaving line to mooring line using bowline or double becket bend. Date Instructor Comments TASK BCM-07-15-TYPE Rig and Operate an Eductor to Obtain Suction Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-07-14-ANY Assist in Passing a Portable Pump Directly to Another Boat Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. Chapter 18. 2. Chapter 18. the trainee must demonstrate passing the pump in accordance with the procedures listed below. 4. Connect eductor supply hose to pump outlet using 25-foot length of hose. acting as a member of a two-man team. on each of the boats carrying eductor equipment. COMDTINST M16114. 2-64 . a. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Connect 1½-inch supply hose to the eductor. In response to the instructor.5 (series). Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section I NOTE $ References Conditions Task should be performed at any time.5 (series). Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. the trainee must prepare the eductor and put it into operation in accordance with the procedures listed below. 2. Connect 2½-inch discharge hose to the eductor. 3. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1.

6. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Date Instructor Comments 2-65 . State the Fuel Sources. 7. In response to the instructor. and state the primary extinguishing agent for a Class C fire. 2. and state the primary extinguishing agent for a Class A fire. 3. flush out with freshwater. State most common fuels for Class D fires. and state the primary agents for containing a Class D fire. clean up and secure pump. Secure pump. 4. 8. Chapter 18. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-07-16-ANY References Conditions Standards Identify the Different Classes of Fires. without error state. Observe suction and discharge water through the eductor. the trainee must. State most common source for Class C fires.5 (series). Drain. COMDTINST M16114. Engage pump engine. and state the primary extinguishing agent for a Class B fire. State most common fuels for Class A fires. and State the Extinguishing Agents for Each Class of Fire a. Sections C and D Task should be performed at any time ashore or afloat.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 5. the answers called for in the steps below. State most common fuels for Class B fires. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Ensure discharge flowing overboard.

ashore or afloat. In response to the instructor. 6. 2-66 . Identify and state the purpose of all CO2 fire extinguishers. Boat outfit or daily checkoff list for the boat Task should be performed at any time. 2. 3. the trainee must identify all of the fire fighting equipment carried on the boat. Identify and state the purpose of the portable fire pump(s). Identify and state the purpose and capabilities of the nozzle. the trainee must demonstrate the use of a CO2 fire extinguisher in accordance with the guidelines listed below. Identify and state the purpose of the fixed extinguishing system. Identify and state the purpose of the fire monitor and controls. Identify and state the purpose of the installed fire pump and controls. COMDTINST M16114. In response to the instructor. 8. 4. Identify and state the purpose of all fire hoses. Identify and state the purpose of all dry chemical extinguishers. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-07-17-TYPE References Conditions Locate and Identify the Fire Fighting Equipment Carried Onboard the Boat a. 5. Only those items carried on the boat need to be identified. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. and state the purpose of each piece. 9. onboard the type boat being qualified on. Identify and state the purpose of all spanner wrenches.5 (series). 7. Chapter 18 Task should be performed at any time. Identify and state the purpose of all tri-gates and hose fittings. Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-07-18-ANY References Conditions Standards Demonstrate Knowledge of the Operation of a CO 2 Fire Extinguisher a. 10.

3. 2. 4. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 6. Identify and explain removal of the locking pin from the cutter assembly. Explain how puncture lever is pushed down. Chapter 18 Task should be performed at any time. 3. Ground cylinder by placing it on deck. 5. Check fill cap for tightness. Point extinguisher at base of fire. Approach fire from the windward side. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Point horn at target and explain how to activate the extinguisher. Date Instructor Comments 2-67 . explain discharge procedure. the trainee must demonstrate the use of a dry chemical fire extinguisher in accordance with the guidelines listed below. In response to the instructor. 5. Identify the locking pin and explain its removal from the valve.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 1. 4. Carry extinguisher in upright position. Direct CO2 at the base of the fire (simulate). Remain at least 8 feet from the fire. COMDTINST M16114. and why this is done. 2. Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK BCM-07-19-ANY References Conditions Standards Demonstrate Knowledge of the Operation of a Dry Chemical Fire Extinguisher a.5 (series). Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. ashore or afloat.

if applicable. Connect fire monitor to tri-gate with 2½-inch x 30-foot hose. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. acting as a member of a team. Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-07-21-TYPE References Conditions Engage the Boat’s Main Fire Pump a. 2. 3. Connect tri-gate to the firemain. In response to the instructor. COMDTINST M16114. 4. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Mount fire monitor. 5. onboard the specific boat type. Task need only be done for those boats with an installed fire fighting system. Only those steps applicable to the boat type should be done. Task must be completed within ten minutes. Connect 1½-inch hose to tri-gate and attach vari-nozzle. Section F Task should be performed at any time. Charge fire hose. 6. Place engine in neutral. Only those steps applicable to the boat type need to be accomplished. the trainee must correctly demonstrate the use of the boat’s fire pump in accordance with the guidelines listed below. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. the trainee must correctly connect those pieces of equipment necessary to use the boat’s fire fighting equipment for fighting a fire. or a semi-attached portable pump used for fire fighting. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-07-20-TYPE References Conditions Assemble Equipment for the Boat’s Main Fire Fighting System a.5 (series). Chapter 18. Place correct gates of the tri-gate in open position. Demonstration should be completed within 15 minutes. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Task should be performed at any time. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. In response to the instructor. 2-68 . onboard the specified boat type.

Start pump engine (if separate). Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-07-22-ANY References Conditions Operate a Vari-Nozzle a. Demonstrate flush feature. Energize fire pump. 5. COMDTINST M16114. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Break out and rig portable pump. 3. 2-69 . 6.5 (series). Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Engage and charge system. 9. Demonstrate wide-angle fog. Connect all gates and hoses. 2. 7. Open air vent valve. 8. Open firemain sea suction valve. Man nozzle and open nozzle. 4.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 2. In response to the instructor. the trainee must demonstrate the use of the vari-nozzle in accordance with the guidelines listed below. onboard any of the unit’s boats. Section F Task should be performed at any time. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. Chapter 18. Connect nozzle to 1½-inch hose. Demonstrate straight stream. Demonstrate narrow angle fog (power cone). Hose should be charged and water discharged. 4. 5. 3. Task should be completed within five minutes. Open discharge valve. 6.

FIRE. Simulate and explain activating fixed fire fighting system. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Task should be performed at any time. Secure air supply to engine space (if possible). In response to the instructor.” Secure engines. at base of the fire simulating fighting the fire. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Sound alarm to other crew members by shouting: “FIRE. FIRE. 4. acting as a member of a team. if used. 5. if available. onboard each specific boat type. the trainee must demonstrate the use of the main fire extinguishing system and the procedures for fighting engine space fires in accordance with the guidelines listed below. 3. 2. Instructor Comments Date 2-70 . Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. The demonstration must be accomplished in five minutes or less. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK BCM-07-23-TYPE References Conditions Standards Demonstrate Knowledge of the Procedures to Combat a Fire in the Engine Space a. Aim fire extinguisher.

12. Loss of main engine lube oil pressure. 4. without the use of any references or prompting. 8. Cooling system casualties. without error. 2-71 . including non-standard boats.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-07-24-TYPE References Demonstrate the Appropriate Response to the Basic Engineering Casualty Control Exercises (BECCE) a. Loss of electrical power. 10. Section E Manufacturers Operator’s Manual and Technical Publication Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time onboard each of the unit’s boats. General starting difficulties. 5. (cable/hydraulic) Loss of steering. the trainee must. demonstrate the steps taken for each of the BECCEs listed. In response to the instructor. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. including engine not starting and emergency starting procedures. Fire in the engine room. (jammed rudder) Accidental grounding. 2. 6. Loss of control of engine RPM. Immersed outboard. 14. 7. Propeller damage and excessive cavitation. Chapter 8. 9. Main engine high water temperature. Collision with submerged object. b. Loss of fuel oil pressure. 13. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1.5 (series). 3. 11. 15. COMDTINST M16114. Loss of steering. as stated in the above reference. Reduction gear failure.

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Instructor Comments Date 2-72 .

Define common terminology used in the MHS mission. Law Enforcement. Explain basic response boat tactics. Explain MHS operational and tactical control. For units that do not have or carry weapons. Explain response boat procedures for escorting a Target of Interest (TOI). NOTE Section H tasks are to be completed by all boat force units. command and control. 2-72. Explain response boat operations within a Limited Access Area (LAA) both moving and stationary. Explain weapons command and control. Explain response boat duties while conduction MHS operations. Homeland Security and Defense Operations Introduction The following are objectives of Division Eight: • • • • • • • • • Explain the Maritime Homeland Security (MHS) mission. tasks BCM-08-16-ANY through BCM-0819-ANY may be deferred. Demonstrate weapons usage.1 CH-1 .Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section H.

14 2-72.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification In this Section This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number BCM-08-01-ANY BCM-08-02-ANY BCM-08-03-ANY BCM-08-04-ANY BCM-08-05-ANY BCM-08-06-ANY BCM-08-07-ANY BCM-08-08-ANY BCM-08-09-ANY BCM-08-10-ANY BCM-08-11-ANY BCM-08-12-ANY BCM-08-13-ANY BCM-08-14-ANY BCM-08-15-ANY BCM-08-16-ANY BCM-08-17-ANY BCM-08-18-ANY BCM-08-19-ANY Task Authority and Jurisdiction.3 2-72.6 2-72.4 2-72.3 2-72. Command and Control Use of Automatic Weapons See Page 2-72.12 2-72. Use of Force Maritime Homeland Security (MHS) Missions Maritime Homeland Security (MHS) Definitions Threats to Response Boat (RB) Crews Tactical Control Operational Pre-Brief and De-Brief Loss of Communications Procedures Vessel On Vessel Use of Force Limited Access Areas (LAA) Security Zones (SZ) Escorting a Moving High Value Asset (HVA) Protection of Stationary/Anchored HVAs Response Boat Duties Escorting a Target of Interest (TOI) Basic Response Boat Tactics Weapons Engagement Weapons Command and Control Demonstrate Weapons Usage.15 CH-1 2-72.13 2-72.5 2-72.12 2-72.10 2-72.6 2-72.11 2-72.8 2-72.7 2-72.9 2-72.2 .7 2-72.5 2-72.10 2-72.

Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference.3 (series) Maritime Law Enforcement Manual. COMDTINST M16247.7 (series) Introduction Task should be performed at any time.1 (series) Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. Techniques. Instructor Comments TASK BCM-08-02-ANY References Conditions Standards Maritime Homeland Security (MHS) Missions a. 1-04 Use of Force Continuum Complete the following Boarding Officer tasks: a. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. Response Boat Tactics. Task must be accomplished in accordance with the above reference. Complete the following Boarding Team Member tasks: a. In response to the instructor. State the primary mission areas within Maritime Homeland Security (MHS). 2-01 Authority and Jurisdiction (Numbers 1 and 2 only) Date 2. Use of Force a. COMDTINST M16601. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. the trainee shall state MHS mission areas. Boarding Officer/Boarding Team Member Personal Qualification Standard (PQS).3 CH-1 . Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-08-01-ANY References Authority and Jurisdiction. 1-03 Authority and Jurisdiction b. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. COMDTINST M16247. Date Instructor Comments 2-72. b.

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK BCM-08-03-ANY References Conditions Standards

Maritime Homeland Security (MHS) Definitions a. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series)

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, the trainee shall define terms. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1.

Define the following terms: a. Captain of the Port (COTP) b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. Disabling Fire Escort Field of Fire High Value Asset (HVA) Intercept Zone (IZ) Landside Security Limited Access Area (LAA) Maritime Homeland Security (MHS) Maritime Security (MARSEC) Non-Compliant Vessel Operational Control (OPCON)

m. Operational Security (OPSEC) n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. Port Waterways and Coastal Security (PWCS) Reaction Zone (RZ) Response Boat (RB) Screen Boat (SB) Security Zone (SZ) Self Defense (Individual and Unit) Tactical Control (TACON) Tactical Reaction Boat (TRB) Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (TTP) Target of Interest (TOI) Vessel Posing an Imminent Threat (VPIT) Date

Instructor Comments

CH-1

2-72.4

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK BCM-08-04-ANY References

Threats to Response Boat (RB) Crews a. b. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 1, Section A Weapons of Mass Destruction and Catastrophic Hazardous Material Releases, COMDTINST 3400.3

Conditions Standards

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, the trainee shall state the most likely terrorist threats a boat crew may encounter, potential consequences, and procedures. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1. 2.

State the types of threats a boat crew may encounter and the potential consequences of each. State procedures for a Weapons of Mass Destruction or hazardous material release including appropriate PPE and decontamination. Date

Instructor Comments

TASK BCM-08-05-ANY References Conditions Standards

Tactical Control a. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 2, Section A

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, the trainee shall state the relationship between TACON and the RB coxswain. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1.

Explain the mission of TACON and the relationship between TACON and the RB coxswain. Date

Instructor Comments

2-72.5

CH-1

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK BCM-08-06-ANY References Conditions Standards

Operational Pre-Brief and De-Brief a. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 2, Section B

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, the trainee shall state the components and importance of a PreBrief and De-Brief. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1. 2. 3. 4.

State the reasons for and importance of the Operational Pre-Brief. State the type of information that should be contained within the Operational Pre-Brief. State the reasons for and importance of the Operational De-Brief. State the type of information that should be contained within the Operational De-Brief. Date

Instructor Comments

TASK BCM-08-07-ANY References Conditions Standards

Loss of Communications Procedures a. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 2, Section C

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, the trainee shall state the Loss of Communication Procedures. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1.

State the five (5) steps for Loss of Communication. Date

Instructor Comments

CH-1

2-72.6

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK BCM-08-08-ANY References

Vessel On Vessel Use of Force a. b. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 3 Maritime Law Enforcement Manual, COMDTINST M16247.1 (series) Chapter 4

Conditions Standards

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, the trainee shall state principles and policy with regard to Vessel on Vessel Use of Force while assigned to MHS duties. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1. 2. 3. 4.

State the two principles when force may be applied from CG vessels conducting LAA enforcement operations. Discuss key considerations when enforcing LAAs in congested ports and waterways. State the four steps and tactics involved in stopping a non-compliant vessel. State the difference in use of force policies/procedures between stopping a Non-Compliant Vessel (NCV) and a Vessel Posing Imminent Threat (VPIT). Date

Instructor Comments

TASK BCM-08-09-ANY References Conditions Standards

Limited Access Areas (LAA) a. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 4, Section B

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, the trainee shall state the five LAAs typically used for security purposes. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1.

State the five types of LAAs typically used during MHS operations. Date

Instructor Comments

2-72.7

CH-1

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK BCM-08-10-ANY References Conditions Standards

Security Zones (SZ) a. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 4

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, the trainee shall answer the following questions with regard to Security Zones. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

State why the CG routinely establishes Security Zones. State why a SZ is an effective tool for controlling movements and limiting access to sensitive areas. State who may establish a SZ. State and describe the five tactical areas of a security zone. State the difference between a Naval Vessel Protection Zone (NVPZ) and a security zone. State who may authorize movement within the NVPZ. State the reasons why you conduct waterway, bridge and pier inspections. State procedures for conducting a Route Inspection prior to the escort of an HVA. Date

Instructor Comments

CH-1

2-72.8

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK BCM-08-11-ANY References Conditions Standards

Escorting a Moving High Value Asset (HVA) a. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 4, Section D

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, the trainee shall state the appropriate procedures for escorting a moving HVA. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1.

State positioning and responsibilities of RBs in a: a. b. c. d. e. f. Four-Boat Escort Three-Boat Escort Three-Boat Restricted Channel Escort Two-Boat Escort Single Boat Escort Escort with Different Assets

2.

State the additional security options that should be considered when conducting a single boat escort. Date

Instructor Comments

2-72.9

CH-1

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK BCM-08-12-ANY References Conditions Standards

Protection of Stationary/Anchored HVAs a. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 4, Section D

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, the trainee shall state the appropriate procedures for protection and patrolling of stationary/anchored HVAs. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1.

State positioning and responsibilities of RBs in a: a. b. c. d. Multi-Boat Patrol Two-Boat Patrol Single-Boat Patrol Anchored HVA

2.

State the additional security options that should be considered when conducting a single boat patrol. Date

Instructor Comments

TASK BCM-08-13-ANY References Conditions Standards

Response Boat Duties a. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 5, Section A

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, trainee shall correctly answer the below questions: Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1. 2. 3.

What are the duties of the Screen Boat (SB)? What are the duties of the Tactical Reaction Boat (TRB)? What are the duties of the Command and Control Vessel? Date

Instructor Comments

CH-1

2-72.10

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK BCM-08-14-ANY References Conditions Standards

Escorting a Target of Interest (TOI) a. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 5, Section B

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, trainee shall correctly explain the proper techniques in escorting a TOI. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1. 2. 3. 4.

Explain the purpose for escorting a TOI. Explain Switching Sectors. Explain Loitering Hand-Off. Explain Drop Back Hand-Off. Date

Instructor Comments

2-72.11

CH-1

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK BCM-08-15-ANY References Conditions Standards

Basic Response Boat Tactics a. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 5, Section C

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, trainee shall correctly explain the Shadow, Intercept, Herding, and Shouldering tactics. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1. 2.

List the four basic response boat tactical maneuvers. Explain the following for each tactic: a. b. c. d. e. Procedure Benefit When the tactic should be used Potential dangers to the boat crew Cautions Date

Instructor Comments

TASK BCM-08-16-ANY References Conditions Standards

Weapons Engagement a. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 6

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, trainee shall correctly identify RB constraints with regard to weapons engagement. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1. 2. 3.

State the factors that will constrain an RB in their ability to engage hostile targets. Under what circumstances can a target be engaged without a prearranged clear field of fire? Who can approve a Field of Fire? Date

Instructor Comments

CH-1

2-72.12

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK BCM-08-17-ANY References Conditions Standards

Weapons Command and Control a. Response Boat Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual, COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 6, Section B

Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, the trainee shall define standard weapons commands, who can authorize the command and state the appropriate response to each command. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1.

Define the following weapons commands, who can authorize the command and state the appropriate response to each command if applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Weapons Tight Weapons Free Weapons Stowed Weapons Ready Surface/Air Action, Port/Starboard Open Fire Check Fire Cease Fire Date

Instructor Comments

2-72.13

CH-1

Live ammunition will not be used unless appropriate policy and procedures are utilized.7 (series) Chapter 6. f. Section B Task must be performed in an RB and location designated by the CO/OIC or Operational Commander. h. Response Boat Tactics. Weapons Tight Weapons Free Weapons Stowed Weapons Ready Surface/Air Action. c. e. g. the trainee shall demonstrate standard weapons usage in response to weapons commands. COMDTINST M16601. b. Command and Control a.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-08-18-ANY References Conditions Standards Demonstrate Weapons Usage. d. In response to the instructor. Demonstrate appropriate actions to the following weapons commands and state the appropriate response to each command if applicable: a. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Techniques. Port/Starboard Open Fire Check Fire Cease Fire Date Instructor Comments CH-1 2-72. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1.14 . and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual.

COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 6. State how and why an automatic weapon should be fired. State the safety concerns associated with ricochet from an automatic weapon.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-08-19-ANY References Conditions Standards Use of Automatic Weapons a. State the relation between RB speed and sea state regarding mounted weapon stability. Response Boat Tactics. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. 3. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 4. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Techniques.15 CH-1 . State how the “roll” of the RB should be utilized in firing an automatic weapon. Section C Task should be performed at any time. Date Instructor Comments 2-72. 2. the trainee shall state how automatic weapons shall be used and associated safety concerns. In response to the instructor.

16 .Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification CH-1 2-72.

Division Three Reading Assignments . Its purpose is to provide guidance for the trainee’s reading assignments and is not a part of the training record. then the task will not have a page number to reference.Division Two Reading Assignments .Division Four Reading Assignments .Division Six Reading Assignments . NOTE $ In this Chapter If there is no reading assignment assigned for a specific task. Boat Crew Member Trainee Study Guide Introduction This Chapter should be removed and given to the trainee to keep.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Chapter 3.Division Seven See Page 2-74 2-76 2-84 2-88 2-95 2-97 2-103 2-73 .Division One Reading Assignments . The instructor should then discuss the trainee’s answers to ensure understanding of the subject matter prior to beginning instruction for each new task.Division Five Reading Assignments . The trainee should read the appropriate reading assignment and answer the related questions prior to beginning training in each new task. This Chapter contains the following Sections: Section A B C D E F G Title Reading Assignments .

5 (series). Section B Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 3. Chapter 3. COMDTINST M16114. Section C None assigned See Page 2-75 BCM-01-02-ANY • 2-75 BCM-01-03-ANY • 2-74 . COMDTINST M16114. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number BCM-01-01-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments .5. (series).Division One The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section A.

or other tasks that require close attention. c. c. Motion Sickness Motion sickness occurs when there is an imbalance between __________images and the portion of the _________________which senses motion. 2. COMDTINST M6710. 2-75 . 3. Some preventive measures are: a. b. 2. Specifically. b. Crew Fatigue Mental and physical fatigue is among the ________________________________ during rough weather operations.15 (series). c. 3. 4. c. it must not be given under the following circumstances: a. TASK BCM-01-02-ANY: 1. b. e. d. f. d.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-01-01-ANY: 1. f. restricts medication use. will _________________motion sickness. e. b. Antimotion Sickness Medications. Reading chart work. The primary symptoms of fatigue are: a. d. Some other environmental conditions that also promote fatigue are: a.

10 (series).10 (series). Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments . COMDTINST M10470. COMDTINST M10470. Chapter 3 Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. Chapter 3 Rescue and Survival Systems Manual.10 (series). COMDTINST M10470. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number BCM-02-01-ANY BCM-02-02-ANY • • Reading Assignment None Assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.10 (series).5 (series).10 (series). Section D Rescue and Survival Manual.10 (series). COMDTINST M10470.Division Two The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. COMDTINST M10470. Chapter 5 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 4 See Page 2-78 BCM-02-03-ANY • 2-79 BCM-02-04-ANY • 2-79 BCM-02-05-ANY • 2-79 BCM-02-06-ANY • 2-80 BCM-02-07-ANY • 2-80 BCM-02-08-ANY • 2-80 • BCM-02-09-ANY BCM-02-10-ANY BCM-02-11-ANY BCM-02-12-ANY BCM-02-13-ANY • • • • • 2-81 BCM-02-14-ANY • 2-81 2-76 . Chapter 3 None assigned None assigned None assigned None assigned Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. Chapter 6. Chapter 5 Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 3 Rescue and Survival Systems Manual.10 (series).5 (series). Chapter 3 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M10470. Chapter 3 Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M10470.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section B.5 (series).

5 (series). COMDTINST M10470. COMDTINST M16114.10 (series). Chapter 6. Chapter 3 Team Coordination Training. COMDTINST M10470. Section B Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section G Rescue and Survival Manual.10 (series). COMDTINST M10470. Table 3-1 See Page 2-81 • BCM-02-16-TYPE • 2-82 BCM-02-17-ANY • • 2-82 • BCM-02-18-ANY • • 2-83 2-77 . Section H Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST 1541. COMDTINST M16114.1 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). Chapter 5.5 (series) Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. COMDTINST M16114.10 (series).5 (series) Rescue and Survival Systems Manual.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Task Number BCM-02-15-TYPE • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 6.

What should you do if you find someone with a piece of glass sticking out of their arm? 6. Crew First-Aid Responsibility What are dressings and bandages used for? 2.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-02-ANY: 1. What should you do for someone who is suffering from a heat-related illness? 5. What is the first step in caring for bleeding wounds? 3. Why should you cover burns with a clean or sterile dressing? 2-78 . What should you do if you think a victim has serious internal bleeding? 4.

What is a signal of breathing difficulty? 3. but does have a pulse? 10. TASK BCM-02-04-ANY: 1. and Infant CPR In a life-threatening situation. 7. What should you do to determine whether or not a victim requires rescue breathing? 4. Zippers on the Type III flotation jacket should be open before entering the water to create air pockets for additional flotation. 2-79 . Where on an adult victim should you feel for a pulse? 8. Child. 2. The Type III PFD will turn a crew member face up if they fall overboard and are rendered unconscious. One cycle of CPR for an adult includes ____ compressions and ____ breath(s). True or False. Demonstrate Adult.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-03-ANY: 1. The Type III flotation jacket has __________ flotation characteristics. One cycle of CPR for a child includes ____ compressions and _____ breath(s). what is the most important thing you can do to help? 2. True or False. Where do you check for a pulse on an infant? 9. 3. When should you stop CPR? 6. What should you do for a conscious adult who is choking and cannot cough? 5. The Type III PFD has a tendency to ________ _______ on the wearer in the water. Don the Type III PFD The Type III PFD is normally worn aboard boats when _______ ______ __________ is required. 3. Don the Type III Flotation Jacket The waist straps on the Type III flotation jacket should be adjusted to a ________ ______ before entering the water. 2. TASK BCM-02-05-ANY: 1. How often should you give rescue breaths to a child who is not breathing.

To afford the maximum protection from hypothermia. 17. The signal in the MK-79 kit can be fired to an altitude of 250 feet to ____________ feet. 6. The dry suit has watertight seals at the _________. 10. The SDU-5/E or CG-1 strobe light emits a high _____________________________ visual distress signal visible for great distances. ______________________________ the light from service. After the seal has been broken.____ flashes per minute. TASK BCM-02-07-ANY: 1. The anti-exposure coveralls is ideal for cold weather operations with __________ cockpit boats. The night end of the MK-124 smoke and illumination signal produces a ___________________. 4. 12. does not operate within limits. 5. 19. Don the Boat Crew Dry Suit The dry suit shall be worn in __________ cockpit boats when the water temperature is below _________ °F and the air temperature is below _________ °F. The emergency signaling mirror is used to attract the attention of passing ________________________. ____________ and ___________. 11. When firing. 3. 3. The anti-exposure coveralls have straps located at the __________. The light is intended to omit approximately ____ . the dry suit must be worn with the ________ _______________. Identify Boat Crew Survival Vest Equipment The boat crew survival vest was designed to aid personnel to ___________________ in hazardous situations. the signal is activated by a pull on the ________________. the arm should be extended _____________________________. 4. 8. with a new battery. It does this by __________________________________ light at them. The protective tab should be bent _____________________________ from the signal. The survival knife is used to ___________________ yourself if you become entangled. True or False. Wearing a Type I or III PFD over an anti-exposure coverall may be dangerous in certain situations. 16. The day end of the signal produces ___________________ smoke. Two prominent bands around the circumference identify the __________ end. _____________________ or boats. 5. 2. you should face a point about _____________________ between the sun and the object you wish to signal. 20. TASK BCM-02-08-ANY: 1. 2. 9. 13. To use the mirror. 18. 15. 7. Reflected light from the emergency signal mirror can be seen at a _______ from the point of origin. Spent signals or misfires should be ______________________________ overboard. Don Anti-Exposure Coveralls True or False. The dry suit must never be worn over regular clothing. A _ _ _ must be worn over a dry suit at all times. 2-80 . _______________ and ________________ which should be tightened before entering the water. 14.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-06-ANY: 1. ____________. 2. The second step in preparing the signal for launching is to move the ________________________ screw into the safety slot. If the light. The signal should be mated to projector and rotated _______________ until the signal is seated. The signal should be held downwind and overhead at a ______-degree angle ______________ flame. 3.

The raft may be inflated either ________________________________ or automatically. 8. After boarding the raft. 6. The raft may be inflated manually by completely pulling the ____________________ line from the raft container. The flotation jacket provides minimal protection against hypothermia. The anti-exposure coveralls have an orally inflated ____________for better flotation angle. The flotation characteristics of the anti-exposure coveralls is similar to those of a Type __________PFD. The anti-exposure coveralls are the same as a dry suit. If practical. True or False. True or False. The Type III PFD has a minimum of ___________ pounds of buoyancy. 3.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-13-ANY: 1. 4. 7. 6. 3. the raft should be ____________________________ directly from the boat . TASK BCM-02-15-TYPE: Explain the Manual Deployment and Boarding Procedures for the Rescue and Survival Raft 1. 4. 5. Don the Inflatable PFD The inflatable type PFD uses________ as the inflating agent.avoid entering the _________________. The inflatable type PFD should be inflated before entering the water. 4. TASK BCM-02-14-ANY: 1. True or False. an _________ ______________ tube is provided. The raft should be considered as a means of _________________________ persons stranded in areas where a boat cannot go. 2. 5. 3. The inflatable type PFD will probably have a ________ and __________ attached to it. you should try to remain in the same general area as the ___________________________. To maintain the buoyancy of the inflatable PFD. The Boat Crew Survival Vest should only be worn under a PFD. 2-81 . 2. The flotation jacket provides a minimum of ______pounds of buoyancy. 2. Don the Boat Crew Survival Vest The Type III PFD is normally worn when the water temperature is greater than_________ °F. Food and water should be ________________________________. True or False.

Because air will eventually leak or run out. 10. If the engines are still running. 4. followed by the ___________________ swimmers. The length of time a person can stay alive in cold water depends on three factors. If no line is available. board the life raft from the sinking vessel to avoid entering the water. _______ clothing robs the body of heat by breaking down the thermal protection of insulated clothing. and lastly by a __________ swimmer. 5. the first swimmer out should contact the people inside by ___________________________________________. 11. 2. you must remember that all exits are ___________________________ when the boat capsizes. personnel should ______________________ something sturdy. 5. Sometimes it is necessary to _________________________ your PFD in order to exit. 8. What are these three factors ? True or False. TASK BCM-02-17-ANY: 1. 8. 7. When swimming out from under an inverted boat. 6. True or False. When free. If necessary. an inventory should be made of all _____________________________________ that might be taken along. 6. b. 2. every effort should be made to _________________________. 4. it will normally carry a survival raft. it should be attached to a __________ so it can be _______________________________ after exiting. The anti-exposure coveralls are Type _______PFD. Open Water Survival Skills State the four types of hypothermia clothing used by the Coast Guard. 9. seek out an _____ _________ near the top. a. List Survival Procedures in Event of Boat Capsize While capsizing. the ___________________ swimmer should go out first. the ____________ swimmer should exit first taking an end of the line with him/her. 3. boat crew members must wear a ________ at all times. a PFD should be worn at all times. If trapped in or under a boat. If trapped under an inverted boat. 2-82 . 3. c. 9. personnel should seek out an _____________________________________ near the ______________. When trapped in an open cockpit. 7. If trapped in an enclosed cabin. It is best to climb on an overturned boat hull from the windward side. 10. Before attempting to escape. If a Coast Guard boat is greater than _____feet. True or False. If a dry suit is worn. you should exit by swimming __________________ the gunwales and _________________ alongside the boat. If line is available. you should _____________________ the stern. d.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-16-TYPE: 1. If possible.

The strobe light is designed to emit about ________ flashes per minute and is capable of flashing _____ hours if used continuously. Swimming in cold water will warm you up and increase your chances for survival. 2. In the dark. Where can directions for use of the signal mirror be easily found ? 3. A signal whistle’s audible sound may be heard up to _____________ yards. Define the acronym HELP in regards to water survival. Perform Water Survival Exercise The bright light spot on the signal mirror is used to _________ the mirror.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-02-18-ANY: 1. the night end of the MK-124 is identifiable by ___________ on the night end. 11. 10. Each MK-79 signal kit contains _________ cartridge type aerial flares and _________ pencil type projector. 8. 9. The aerial flares in the MK-79 signal kit can attain an altitude of _______ to _______ feet and remain illuminated for about ________ seconds. True or False. 12. The MK-124 day/night pyrotechnic device produces________ colored smoke for daytime conditions and ___________ colored flare as a night signal. 6. Each end of the MK-124 will burn for about _________ seconds. 4. 7. The use of a whistle is especially helpful to rescuers during periods of __________ ___________. 2-83 . 5.

Section D Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 9. Chapter 8 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 8 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.Division Three The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. Section E See Page 2-85 BCM-03-02-TYPE • 2-85 BCM-03-03-TYPE • 2-86 BCM-03-04-TYPE • 2-86 BCM-03-05-TYPE • 2-87 BCM-03-06-ANY • 2-87 BCM-03-07-ANY • 2-87 BCM-03-08-ANY • 2-87 2-84 . COMDTINST M16114.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section C.5 (series).5 (series). Chapter 7. Chapter 7.5 (series). Chapter 8. Chapter 7. Sections A and D Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).5 (series). Chapter 8. Section D Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). Section B Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. Section A Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments . COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number BCM-03-01-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series).

11. 13.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-03-01-ANY: 1. From either side toward the centerline is called _________________. 7. The rear of the boat is the __________________________. The side of the boat against a dock is also called ________________. 2-85 . When securing chafing gear to a line. 3. The right side of the bow is the __________________________ bow. 10. 8. When proceeding toward the bow. you are going __________. 5. If you are up into the rigging of the boat. The left rear section of the boat is the port ______________________. From the center line toward either side is referred to as _________________________________. 5. 4. A __________________ is used to allow the anchor line to spin freely. State Common Boat Nomenclature and Terminology The front end of the boat is the ______________________. TASK BCM-03-02-TYPE: Locate and Identify the Purpose of the Equipment Aboard the Boat 1. you are going __________________. 9. you are going _____________________. 3. If you go down inside the boat. 2. Ring _____________________ are used during man overboard emergencies. A line running from one side of the boat to the other is said to be _______________________________________. 6. 12. The left center side of the boat is the __________ _________________. The central or middle area of the boat is __________________________. 75' and 100' _________________________ ______________ are used for passing the towline when maneuverability is restricted. 4. 2. A ________________________ is used to attach a towline to a trailer eyebolt on boats. you should use ________________.

Watertight doors are designed to resist as much ___________ as the ____________ through which they provide access. then hatches are seagoing ___________. The interior of a boat is compartmentalized into bulkheads. the space between them becomes watertight and is called a __________________________________________________________. 2-86 . The hatches are actually “doors” though the bulkheads. TASK BCM-03-04-TYPE: 1. If _________ are seagoing floors. and hatches. The _________ of the boat is attached to the frames. 4. Heavy displacement hulls cannot exceed a speed of _________ times the _________ _______ of their waterline length without requiring excessive power. Once “on top. Boat Characteristics – Watertight Integrity ________________________doors are designed to resist as much pressure as the bulkheads through which they provide access. 13. design. Boat Characteristics – Boat Construction The three basic types of hull forms based on vessel speed are _________________. 5. 14. Many ___________ _________ boats are this type. 2. 12. ____________. __________ are attached to the keel. 10.” the ___________ ___________ skims along the ___________ of the water. unpainted. If decks are seagoing floors. 4. With the hatches closed. ______ __________ controls the direction of the boat and may vary widely in size.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-03-03-TYPE: 1. which extend athwartships. 15. 11. and ________________. 8. decks. 6. ____________ are small openings. A displacement hull boat pushes away (displaces) water allowing the ______ to ___________ __________ into the water. _____________ frames provide hull strength along the __________ of the hull. 3. bright. The ________ is the backbone of the boat. 9. _________ is the distance a propeller advances in ________ revolution with no slip. The three rudder types are ____________. 7. ____________. 5. A ________ is a seagoing floor and provides strength to the _______by reinforcing the transverse _________ and deck beams. cleaning. or painting. whereas the displacement hull always forces water around it. and method of construction. 2. The semi-displacement hull is a combination of characteristics of the ____________ hull and the ___________ hull. 3. then __________ are seagoing doors. Scuttles must be secured for _________________________ at all times except when they are open for inspection. Watertight closures must have clean. smooth ________________________ for gaskets to press against. and semi-displacement.

and Posts Deck fittings permit easy handling of lines and reduce ______________ and friction on lines. TASK BCM-03-07-ANY: 1. unused. A boat has two principal types of stability: ___________________ and _______________. 2. The running or free end of a line is called the ____________ ____________. 2. the dipping the _____________ method should be used when two mooring lines have to be placed on the same cleat. or other _______________________________________ objects. An overhang loop is made by crossing the ____________ _____________ over the standing part. spar. The long. 4. You should finish securing the line by forming several figure ____________ and securing them with a half _____________ over each horn. 3. 3. 3. The __________________________is the upward force of water displaced by the hull. 4. When a boat is at rest. Tie Various Knots. 2. and Bends The advantage of a bowline is that it does not _____________________________. 4. 3. To facilitate speed and safety. 5. or post. planks. ____________________ are used to lengthen one line by bending one to another. 6. 8. A bight is a ____________ _______________ formed by turning the line back on itself. Timber hitches are used to secure a line to logs. 4. A ______________ is a single turn and a ______________ __________ is two complete turns around an object. 2-87 . The best all-around hitch for securing a line to a ring. When securing a line to a cleat. The ______________________________is the point at which the weight of the boat acts vertically downwards.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-03-05-TYPE: 1. _______________________ and __________________________ are the two primary forces acting upon a floating vessel that affect stability. or belayed end is called the ____________ _____________. 2. Secure Lines to Cleats. 7. The two principal forces that affect stability are _____________ and ________________forces. Bitts. TASK BCM-03-06-ANY: Identify the Different Parts of a Line and Hitches Used in Line Handling 1. the center of buoyancy acting upward/vertically is below the center of gravity acting downwards. or other round or near round object is the ___________________________. b. A boat is considered to be in __________________. TASK BCM-03-08-ANY: 1. General vessel design features that influence stability include: a. you should first take a _________________ ________________ around the deck fitting. Stability The tendency to remain upright is its (the vessel’s) _______________________. bitt. 5. Hitches.

Division Four The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. 61 st edition. Rule 37 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 10.2 (series). COM DTINST M16114. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number BCM-04-01-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. Part C Chapman Piloting. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). COMDTINST M16672. Section C See Page 2-90 BCM-04-02-TYPE • 2-90 • BCM-04-03-TYPE • 2-90 BCM-04-04-TYPE • 2-90 BCM-04-05-ANY • • 2-91 BCM-04-06-ANY • • 2-91 BCM-04-07-ANY • 2-92 • BCM-04-08-ANY • 2-92 • BCM-04-09-TYPE • 2-92 2-88 . COMDTINST M16672. Chapter 1. Pages 200-201 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.2 (series). Section H Chapman Piloting. and Chapter 14. Section H Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments . COMDTINST M16672. Part D Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.2 (series). 61 st Edition. 61 st Edition.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section D. Chapter 10. Chapter 11. Section C Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). Rule 5 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). COMDTINST M16672. COMDTINST M16114. Section C.2 (series). Chapter 1.5 (series). Chapter 17.5 (series). Section D Chapman Piloting. Section C Navigation Rules International-Inland. Chapter 7 Navigation Rules International-Inland. Section F Navigation Rules International-Inland. Chapter 6 Navigation Rules International-Inland. Chapter 10.5 (series).5 (series). COMDTINST M16114.

Chapter 10. Section D Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Task Number BCM-04-10-TYPE • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Page 207 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series).5 (series). Chapter 10. Chapter 10. Sections A and B See Page 2-93 • BCM-04-11-TYPE • 2-93 BCM-04-12-TYPE • 2-94 2-89 . 61 st Edition. Section D Chapman Piloting.

The _________ of the mooring line should be secured to the dock before the bitter end is fixed to the boat cleat. Assist in Weighing the Boat’s Anchor Slack in the anchor line should be _________________________ as the boat is moved ahead. As the line is brought aboard. 7. 3. 2. 3. 2. 6. The anchor line should always form an angle of _________ or less with the bottom. 4. Assist in Anchoring the Boat Most Coast Guard boats use a ___________________ type anchor. or chafing chain. 2. The _________________ of the anchor are the parts that dig into the bottom to provide holding power. The anchor line. a ________ _________. TASK BCM-04-02-TYPE: 1. The anchor line should be tended directly from the ________________ locker if possible. TASK BCM-04-03-TYPE: 1. or cleat. the line should be ______________ around the forward bitt while the coxswain moves ahead a few feet to break it free. 5. 4. If the anchor refuses to break free. it should be faked on deck or stowed below _______________________. Make Fast a Boat to a Pier All fenders should be rigged and _______________ __________ should be broken out and ready before reaching the dock. 4. you should always rig fenders to prevent ____________ damage. 2. 2-90 . Fenders should be secured using a ____________ _______________ or _____________________ ___________________. Fenders should be secured to a stanchion. is secured to the ___________. bitt. Fenders should be adjusted to cushion points of ____________________. The anchor should be __________________ over the side. TASK BCM-04-04-TYPE: 1. Never stand in the _______________ of an anchor line. 8. Rig Fenders to Side of the Boat When docking or taking another boat alongside. A ____________________ is used to attach the chain so that the anchor line can spin freely. never ____________. The order in which the lines are attached depends on the ____________ evaluation of the situation. 3. 3.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-04-01-ANY: 1. Normally the after _________ spring line is secured first.

8. 4. or a red and green _________________________ light. you know the vessel is at least ________ meters long. 2. Vessels 12 meters in length or more must carry a ________________ along with a whistle. A green sidelight means you are looking at a vessel’s _____________ side. A red sidelight means you are looking at a vessel’s _________________ side. 2-91 . A short blast is a blast of about ___________ second(s) duration. Sailing vessels less than 12 meters (international) or 20 meters (inland) in length must display red and green sidelights. 8. 10. 6. a masthead light. On sailboats and rowboats less than 7 meters in length. 3. Lights must be used from ___________________ to _________________ and in times of restricted visibility. TASK BCM-04-06-ANY: Identify the Common Sound Signals Used by Ships and Boats 1. and a _____________________ light. 9. and a _____________________ light. 2. 5. Bells and gongs are used by vessels that are _______________________. along with a stern light. Navigational lights also aid in determining the __________________ of the vessel. Sailing vessels during periods of reduced visibility sound ______________.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-04-05-ANY: Identify the Common Navigation Lights Displayed by Ships and Boats 1. A power-driven vessel less than 50 meters in length must display red and _____________________ sidelights. Vessels under 12 meters in length are required to __________________. A power-driven vessel 50 meters or more in length must display red and _____________________ sidelights. they may display ___________ or torch. 4. A prolonged blast is from _______ to _________ seconds in duration. 7. 6. a stern light. 5. The purpose of navigational lights is to ______________ vessels of the presence or approach of another vessel. it means you are looking at the vessel ________________________________________. If you see both a red and green sidelight. 7. A power-driven vessel less than 7 meters and whose maximum speed does not exceed 7 knots only has to show an _______ _______________ light. 11. If you hear a gong. a masthead light. A power-driven vessel underway in conditions of reduced visibility sounds __________________________. 3. if regular running lights are unavailable.

TASK BCM-04-08-ANY: 1. 7. Dark adaptation requires ___________________ or more. MAYDAY is the_________________________________ priority of urgency call. 6.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-04-07-ANY: Identify and Describe Accepted Maritime Distress Signals 1. a _________________ scanning technique should be used. it should be ____________. The signal . 2. 5. To ensure understanding. When making reports.. Rockets. 2. 3. TASK BCM-04-09-TYPE: 1. 6. means______ _____ _____ and indicates an __________________ situation. 4. Slowly _______________ and _________________ outstretched arms indicates an emergency. or flares should be of a _______________ color to indicate an emergency. When looking for a person or object in the water... but may be destroyed in less than ___________________. MAYDAY. shells. A reading of 000 degrees on the compass card should point toward __________ North. . A square flag above a _________ ___________ also can be a distress signal. 4.. 2-92 . The _____________ ______________ is in line with the boat’s centerline and indicates the boat’s ______________________. 3. 4. Lookouts should always remain at their Station until __________________________ If a report to the coxswain is not acknowledged. 3. Two _____________________ lights in a _________________________ line may be used to indicate that a vessel is broken down. Stand a Lookout Watch It is the lookout’s job to report everything ____________________ or _______________________ to the boat coxswain. MAYDAY. 6. A gun fired at intervals of about _____________________ minute(s) may be used as an emergency signal. . The helmsman should not execute any orders unless _________________ by the coxswain. . the helmsman should always _____________ all orders given to him/her by the coxswain. 2. the lookout should first ______________ the object and than give the direction in ___________________ _______________________ to the object. 5. The helmsman should attempt to maintain a course within ______ degrees. 5. Act as a Helmsman and Steer a Compass Course The arc of the compass card is divided into ______ degrees..

with a wind or current from astern. the coxswain should apply _____________ full rudder and go ahead on the _________________ engine. 9. against the wind or current. the approach should be made using an approximately _________-degree angle. 6. 2-93 . the coxswain should use full _____________ rudder and kick the engine ________________. with no wind or current. With the starboard screw astern and the port screw stopped. port side to. the coxswain moves ahead. 7. the bow _______________ should be cast off and the coxswain should shift the rudder and back away. When mooring port side to. Moor the Boat When mooring port side to. The pivot point is normally ____________________ of the way aft of the bow. When mooring port side to. the coxswain should go ahead on the _____________________ engine and astern on the ____________________ with full _______________ rudder. 2. 3. 4. and applies right or left rudder __________________. Twin-Screw Boats 5. 2. When mooring port side to. When the stern is clear. after the bow spring line is secured. the approach should be made on an angle. when in the clear. With the starboard screw ahead and the port screw astern. against a current. When clearing a pier. When mooring starboard side to. against the wind or current. When clearing a pier. after securing the bow line. Twin-Screw Boats 5. 6. TASK BCM-04-11-TYPE: Single-Screw Boats 1. against the wind or current. The starboard screw is right-handed and the port screw is ___________-handed. until the stern clears. 3. the approach angle should be as _________________________ as possible. the stern of the boat will move to ______________________.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-04-10-TYPE: Single-Screw Boats 1. the approach should be made slowly at an approximately ________degree angle. the coxswain should go ahead slowly. 4. 8. The screws are arranged so that the top of each blade moves _________ ________. the boat will __________________ in a leftward direction. as the wind will tend to throw the _______ ____________ out. then put the rudder over toward the ________________________. Get the Boat Away From a Pier While leaving a pier. When mooring port side to.

Strong ___________ will easily move a vessel upwind. 3. A one-knot _____________ may affect a vessel to the same degree as 30 knots of wind. on smaller boats. When rotating to move in a forward direction. 8. 7. another effect of propeller rotation is ____________________. In addition to the thrust along the shaft axis. Boat Handling The ___________ acts on the hull. the crew. 2. When a hull moves forward through the water. propeller side force presents a major obstacle to ________________ in the direction you want. topsides. Regardless of whether the propeller is turning to go ahead or astern. a ____________ draws its supply of water from every direction forward of and around the blades. the water flow pattern in the propeller’s arc of rotation is called _______________________________.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-04-12-TYPE: Environmental Forces 1. The speed of the water flowing past the _____________greatly enhances the _____________ force. 2-94 . and. Vessel Generated Forces 4. depending on their height and direction and the particular vessel’s characteristics. In single-screw vessels. the effective ________________ moves forward. _________ affect the boat handling in various ways. 5. 6. 9.

Chapter 11. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number BCM-05-01-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Sections A and G Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 11 SSB-HF Transceiver – Operator’s Manual Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series).Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section E. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments .5 (series).Division Five The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. Chapter 11 See Page 2-96 BCM-05-02-ANY • 2-96 • BCM-05-03-ANY • 2-96 2-95 . COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).

156. TASK BCM-05-03-ANY: Use the VHF-FM Radiotelephone to Give a Position or Operations Report 1. 4. 5. The CG VHF-FM radios will automatically monitor channel ______. and use by other Stations is restricted to communications with them. which are hard to understand over a radio. 2. 2670 KHz is designated a ___________________ __________________ frequency. channel 13 is the vessel _________________ to ______________ frequency. channel ________ is the international VHF-FM calling and distress frequency. 3. 4. 3. TASK BCM-05-02-ANY: 1. 4. 3. 2. 5. 6. The microphone should not be _________________________ until you are ready to speak. Only _____________________________ prowords or abbreviations should be used.65 MHz.8 MHz. Unofficial conversations should/should not be transmitted. The noise limiter should be ________________________ as necessary to reduce ______________________ noise (static) while receiving. Operate a SSB-HF Transceiver Most Coast Guard boats carry an AM radio as a _____________________ communications system. Operate a VHF-FM Radiotelephone The effective range of the VHF-FM radio is up to _____ miles. The international distress and calling frequency is ____________ KHz. Every transmission should be ended with the words _______________ or ________________. Message should be sent _________________________ so that the receiving party will have a chance to copy the entire message. The __________________________ alphabet is used to spell difficult words.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-05-01-ANY: 1. 2-96 . The squelch control should be turned counterclockwise until just beyond the point where the ______________________ disappears. 2. 156.

Sections A and B Nautical Chart Symbols Abbreviations and Terms Chart No. Section D The American Practical Navigator. Chapter 5 See Page 2-99 • BCM-06-02-ANY • 2-99 • • BCM-06-03-ANY • 2-100 • BCM-06-04-ANY • 2-100 • BCM-06-05-ANY • 2-100 • BCM-06-06-ANY • 2-100 • BCM-06-07-ANY • 2-100 • 2-97 . Section B Nautical Chart Symbols Abbreviations and Terms Chart No. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section F.5 (series).5 (series).5 (series). Chapter 5 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments . Chapter 5 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section B The American Practical Navigator. Chapter 5 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number BCM-06-01-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 1 The American Practical Navigator. Chapter 14. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 5 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 14. Chapter 14.Division Six The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. COMDTINST M16114. Section D The American Practical Navigator. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 14. COMDTINST M16114. Section C The American Practical Navigator. COMDTINST M16114. 1 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 1 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). Chapter 13 Nautical Chart Symbols Abbreviations and Terms Chart No. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). Chapter 14. Chapter 14.

5 (series). Chapter 5 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section D Fathometer Operator’s Handbook Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 14.5 (series).Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Task Number BCM-06-08-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 5 Radar Operator’s Handbook Knights Modern Seamanship. Pages 611-616 The American Practical Navigator. Section D The American Practical Navigator.5 (series). Chapter 5 None assigned See Page 2-101 • BCM-06-09-TYPE • 2-101 • • BCM-06-10-TYPE • 2-101 • • BCM-06-11-TYPE • • • BCM-06-12-TYPE BCM-06-13-TYPE • • 2-102 2-102 2-102 • BCM-06-14-ANY • 2-102 • BCM-06-15-ANY • 2-98 . Chapter 14. Chapter 5 Radar Operator’s Handbook Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 14. Eighteenth Edition.5 (series). Chapter 5 Radar Operator’s Handbook Manufacturer’s Operating Manual Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section D The American Practical Navigator. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 14.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. Section D The American Practical Navigator. Section D The American Practical Navigator. Chapter 14. COMDTINST M16114.

If the top stripe of an obstruction or junction buoy were red. One degree is equal to _________________ minutes. Latitude scales are normally indicated along the ___________________ margins. The symbol for a lighthouse or other fixed light is a black _______________ with a magenta _________________. 10. True direction is printed around the _________________________ of the compass rose. TASK BCM-06-02-ANY: Identify Common Aids to Navigation Used for Inland and Coastal Piloting 1. 6. 14. Day beacons are indicated by small _________________________. Charts are oriented with ______________________________________ at the top. 17. 16. The meridian that passes through Greenwich. A buoy’s type is indicated by the ________________________ printed with it. 2-99 . 15. Channel buoys that are painted green should be taken on the _____________________ side of the boat when entering a harbor. 4. 2. Abbreviations and Basic Symbols of a Nautical Chart 1. The scale of a chart is a ratio of a distance on the chart and the actual distance on the ____________________________________. 3. 12. 7. 9. 3. The sounding numbers show the water level at ____________ ___________ tide. Ranges are indicated by the symbol for lights and a _________________ ______________________ indicating the direction. 5. 4. Permanent navigation aids positioned the same as a buoy are _____________________ beacons. When steering on a range.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-06-01-ANY: Identify the Symbols. Coastlines are viewed at both ________________ and _____________ water. The color of a buoy symbols print indicates the ______________ of the buoy. 13. 5. A cylindrical buoy that tapers to a blunt point at the top is called a _____________ buoy. ______________________________ of latitude are normally indicated by lines running from side to side. 11. 2. All meridians intersect at the ___________________________. 8. it would indicate that it should be taken on the _________________ side when leaving the harbor. England is designated as ___________(o). if the top and bottom marks are in line. One minute of ____________________________ is equal to one nautical mile. it means you are __________________________________ of the center of the channel. Any location on a chart can be expressed in terms of _________________________ and _______________________________.

All symbols and abbreviations found on a nautical chart are defined in _____________________. the speed in _______________________. For longitude. and time to the nearest __________________________. 2-100 . and Distance In working time. place the rule so the edge passes through the _______________________ of the compass rose and the bearing number on the inner ring. 4. 3. 5. How are piers. distance. 3. When measuring magnetic direction using a parallel rule. Speed. Distance should be measured using the latitude scale ________________ to the latitude where the distance is being measured. 3. the distance is always measured in ________________________ miles. TASK BCM-06-06-ANY: 1. use the _____________________scale. Identify Local Landmarks on a Nautical Chart Prominent landmarks such as towers. and the time in ______________. Compute Time. 2. 2. 4. 3. distance. is measured in degrees _________ through _____________. Distance should be expressed to the nearest _______________ of a nautical mile. speed to the nearest ___________________ of a knot. TASK BCM-06-07-ANY: 1. put one point of a pair of dividers on the __________________nearest the object. Plot a Magnetic Course on a Nautical Chart Direction. In boat navigation you will usually use ________________ courses and bearings. When the distance to be measured is greater than the span of the dividers. and speed problems when piloting a boat. put one point of a pair of dividers on the _____________nearest the object. TASK BCM-06-05-ANY: 1. 3. generally referred to as a bearing. 2. and speed problems. The nautical ______________________ ___________________ was designed to solve time. and wharves displayed on a nautical chart? TASK BCM-06-04-ANY: 1. 2. jetties.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-06-03-ANY: 1. To measure latitude. To measure longitude. One nautical mile is approximately ______________ yards. By setting any two of the values on their opposite scales. The ___________________ mile is used for measurement on most navigable waters. 2. and flagpoles are pinpointed by a standard symbol of a dot surrounded by a _____________. the third can be read from the appropriate ________________________. For latitude. 4. smoke stacks. 5. the dividers should be set at a given number of minutes and then used to _____________________ off the distance between the points to be measured. Plot a Position Using Latitude and Longitude They (lines) are parallel to the Equator and known as __________________________. use the __________________scale. Measure Distance on a Nautical Chart In piloting distance is measured in ________________ or ____________.

The disadvantages of radar are: a. 5. The fathometer can be set to measure either __________ or __________. The advantages of radar are: a. 7. Can be used at night or periods of _____________________ visibility. 4. b. It is subject to mechanical and _______________________________ failure. 6. Determine the Depth of Water Using a Fathometer Because the transducer for the fathometer is normally mounted above the low point of the hull. The fathometer is turned on by turning the _______________ switch. 3. 3. The center of the screen represents the position of your ___________. Charts do not always give information necessary for the ______________________ of radar echoes. Radar bearings are measured ____________________________ the same as you would visual bearings. 3. c. The brilliance control should be set so that the sweep is barely _____________________________. 10. 2. 8. When obtaining target ranges. the difference must be ___________________ from the reading in order for the reading to be accurate. _________________________ must be used between rings. b. Use Radar to Identify Objects Radar navigation depends on the operator’s ___________________ with radar operation and knowledge of the ______________________ operating area. 9. the ranges can be read directly. The bearing of a target is represented by the direction of its __________________________ from the center of the screen and the range is represented by its __________________________________. the cursor line is placed over the target and the bearing is read where the cursor crosses the ____________________ ring. 2-101 . 2. TASK BCM-06-10-TYPE: Determine the Range and Bearing to an Object Using Radar 1. TASK BCM-06-09-TYPE: 1. If the radar has a ____________________ range marker. The _________________________ control adjusts the receiver for best reception. The _______________________________________ selects the operating range and marker interval. Sandy spits. 4. 2. Buoys with radar reflectors will appear ____________________________ to their actual size. There are both __________________ and _____________________ range limitations. Fixes are available at greater distances from _______________than from most other methods of piloting. The plan position indicator indicates ____________________________ bearing of a target and presents a _______________________________ representation of the area around the boat.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-06-08-ANY: 1. and sandy beaches return the ________________ and _______________________ echoes. Fixes can be obtained __________________. mud flats. When reading bearings. 4. c. Water depth is indicated by a ______________ ____________ on the video screen per digital readout. 5.

each shall alter her course to starboard so that each shall pass on the __________side of the other vessel. 5.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-06-11-TYPE: Use Radar to Obtain and Interpret Relative Bearings and Ranges to a Moving Target to Determine if Risk of Collision Exists 1. Plot a Position Using LORAN-C TDs LORAN-C is used for precise __________________________ over long distance. if the circumstances of the case admit. LORAN-C can pinpoint a vessel position within ____________ of a mile almost anywhere in the world. the boat is swung in the direction of the pointer until it _________________________ itself. After tuning the set. it processes a three-dimensional position that is accurate to about __________ meters. When two power-driven vessels are crossing so as to involve risk of collision. 2-102 . especially scanty radar information. TASK BCM-06-13-TYPE: 1. TASK BCM-06-12-TYPE: Operate the VHF-FM Direction Finder and Steer on a Signal 1. 3. The source must continue to ____________________ as you track it. 2. 2. is indicative of a collision course and requires immediate and substantial action. and ________________________ (PPS) for military users. The VHF-FM homer allows you to zero in on the ________________ of FM radio signal you are receiving. the radar bearing of an approaching vessel that remains fairly ___________________ (with a decreasing ____________). 4. Once the receiver has computed the range for at least __________ satellites. Just as is true of a visual bearing. the vessel which has the other on her own _______________side shall keep out of the way and shall. when two power-driven vessels are meeting on _________________or nearly ___________________courses so as to involve risk of collision. Assumptions shall not be made on the basis of _______________________________. The direction is shown on a ____________________ ____________________ display screen. 4. After centering. not aft.________________ . Obtain a Fix Using GPS/DGPS GPS is a radio navigation system of ____ satellites operated by the _________________. 3. 2. 5. 2. in all weather conditions. 3. a GPS receiver on the boat uses the signal to determine the distance between it and the satellite. the boat’s head should be swung ______-degree to be sure the source is ahead. avoid crossing _______________of the other vessel. TASK BCM-06-14-ANY: 1. You determine your position by matching the line figures displayed on the set to set of Loran _______________________ superimposed on a chart. Unless otherwise agreed. It is available _________ hours per day. GPS provides two levels of service -__________________________ (SPS) for civilian users. 3. In a process called “_____________”. 4.

5 (series).S. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 16. COMDTINST M16130.10 (series) None assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). Section D See Page 2-105 BCM-07-02-TYPE • 2-105 • BCM-07-03-ANY • 2-105 • • BCM-07-04-ANY BCM-07-05-TYPE BCM-07-06-ANY BCM-07-07-TYPE • • • • 2-105 2-106 BCM-07-08-ANY • 2-106 BCM-07-09-ANY • 2-106 BCM-07-10-TYPE • 2-107 2-103 . Section A U. Chapter 6. Chapter 19 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.Division Seven The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual.5 (series). Section D Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16130. Chapter 16. COMDTINST M10470. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 16. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number BCM-07-01-TYPE • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments .2 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section G.10 (series) None assigned Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. Chapter 17.2 (series) Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. Section A Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 17. COMDTINST M10470. Section A U.S. COMDTINST M16114. Section F Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).

Chapter 18. Chapter 18. Chapter 17 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 18. COMDTINST M16114. Section F Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. Section I Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section I Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). Chapter 18. Section I Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 18 None assigned None assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Task Number BCM-07-11-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Sections C and D None assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 18 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 17. Chapter 18. COMDTINST M16114 (series) None assigned See Page 2-107 BCM-07-12-TYPE • 2-107 BCM-07-13-ANY • 2-107 BCM-07-14-ANY • 2-108 BCM-07-15-TYPE • 2-108 BCM-07-16-ANY • 2-108 BCM-07-17-TYPE BCM-07-18-ANY • • 2-108 BCM-07-19-ANY • 2-109 BCM-07-20-TYPE BCM-07-21-TYPE BCM-07-22-ANY • • • 2-109 BCM-07-23-TYPE • 2-109 BCM-07-24-TYPE • 2-104 . COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).5 (series).5 (series).5 (series). Section D Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.

with a PFD. _______. 4. Recover a Person-in-the-Water with the Stokes Litter The stokes litter will float upright at a ____________ angle with the foot submerged. and _______ with flotation pad. A rescue swimmer is designated when the man overboard is ____________ or ________________________. _______. The pointer will keep the victim in ______________ and continuously __________________ to the victim’s position. _______. 2. 2-105 . The pointer should ________________________ proceed to his/her _____________________________ Station. The stokes litter is _________-righting. Five restraining straps and mesh netting are for patient restraint. Secure the remaining restraint around the patient working from ________ to ________. TASK BCM-07-03-ANY: Participate in a Man Overboard Evolution as a Surface Swimmer 1. The strap colors are _______. 2.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-07-01-TYPE: 1. TASK BCM-07-02-TYPE: Participate in a Man Overboard Evolution as a Recovery/Pickup Person 1. The litter may be a ___________ one-piece or ____________ two-piece design. The _______________ strap goes first. 3. 5. 3. 2. and a helmet. Participate in a Man Overboard Evolution as a Pointer The first crew member to observe a person overboard should give the alarm by yelling “man ___________________” followed by either “_____________ side” or “__________________ side”. 2. a swimmers __________________________. 6. under the patient’s arms and over the chest. TASK BCM-07-04-TYPE: 1. The rescue swimmer must wear a _______ or wet __________. After the victim has been brought alongside the boat. The recovery/pickup person prepares the ______________ heaving line for casting to the victim. the recovery/pickup person should _________________________________ aboard.

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-07-06-TYPE: 1. Thimbles are used to ________________________ load on the eye and provide maximum protection to the inner top of the eye from abrasion and wear. The heaving line should be ______________ to make it more flexible and less susceptible to becoming tangled. The flare will provide illumination for approximately ______ seconds. 4. 2-106 . The MK-127A1 can climb to an altitude of ________ to ______ feet. 2. it is recommended that a minimum of _________ feet of towline be carried. ______________________ line. the crew member is responsible for __________ the litter or basket. A minimum of ________ turns of towline should always be kept on the reel. 3. Trail line. 5. the MK-127A1 produces a _______________________ star. Conduct Helo-Ops Emergency exits on USCG helicopters are marked with __________ ___________ and ___________________ lettering. The message line is simply a length of light line. 5. 2. 8. TASK BCM-07-08-ANY: Bend a Heaving Line to a Bridle and Pass the Heaving Line to Another Boat 1. or hoisting cables should never be _______ to the boat during the operation. 6. 9. 3. basket slings. The hoisting cable and trail lines should be ________________________ at all times. For offshore work. and loose cable over the side. There are _________ emergency exits on the HH3F. The towline should be inspected frequently for damage resulting from cutting. 4. propelled. fusing. 3. Fire the MK-127A1 Parachute Illumination Signal Upon ignition. A towing bridle should be used in cases where a __________________ _______________________ attachment point is not available on the boat to be towed. 6. 2. and snagging. Having the ________________________ working with the heaving line increases the range. TASK BCM-07-07-ANY: 1. You cannot tow beyond the design characteristics of any towing boat simply by _____________________________ the line size. or floated further than the tow line. _________________________. which can be _________________. The basket should be _________________ before being touched by any crew member. During breakaway procedures. 7.

3.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-07-09-TYPE: 1. The engine will run approximately _____________ hours on one tank of fuel. make certain the fitting attachment it is to be attached to is ______________________________ to the deck with through bolts and backing plates. Single leg bridles are generally used in towing ____________________. 4. 4. 5. 2. Connect a discharge hose and lay it out on deck so there are no _________ or __________. When shortening the tow. 3. 3. the ______________________ _____________ takes the strain of forward movement. When securing the vessel alongside. TASK BCM-07-11-TYPE: 1. After tightening the shackle ________________________. Skiff hook assemblies breaking strength should be __________________ or greater than the breaking strength of the towline. 2-107 . Always rig ______________________________ to prevent hull damage. 2. A pump watch must be alert for __________ around the strainer and must ensure the strainer remains ___________. 5. The trailer eyebolt is normally located on the ___________________. depending on conditions. you should _______________________ in the slack from the towline to bring the disabled vessel along side. When taking a boat alongside. Watch for __________ __________. A pump can run dry for ____________________. 4. 3. you should lead the _____________ forward to use as the bow line. 2. it should be moused. 2. When attaching to tow bow cleats or bitts. Pull the handle to release a ________ _________ on the storage container. the towline should be passed ________________________ to one of the people on the other boat. but it was designed to be started only after suction has been taken. Secure an Alongside Tow When taking a boat alongside. Pass a Towline to Another Boat Where conditions permit and the towing boat can maneuver enough. TASK BCM-07-10-ANY: Connect a Towline to a Trailer Eyebolt Using a Shackle or Skiff Hook 1. 4. Start. Before attaching the towline. Connecting the towline with a shackle should only be done in ________ or moderate weather conditions. a ________________________ should be used. TASK BCM-07-12-ANY: Prepare Portable Pump for Operation. the ______________________ _____________ takes the strain of backing down. and Obtain Suction 1.

State the Primary Extinguishing Agents for Each Class of Fire 1. 3. is performed when weather conditions permit your boat to ___________________________ ____________________ the disabled boat safely. The four elements of a fire are oxygen. flammable gases. 2. 5. When using the extinguisher. heat. 4. using an eductor. The principle remedy for these type fires is to secure the __________ and to apply _____________ to the fire. 4. Rig and Operate an Eductor to Obtain Suction Dewatering. or ______________________________ pulls the water up through the suction hose and out the discharge hose. Fires involving energized _______________ equipment. are classified as Class _____ fire. 3. with fuel sources such as sodium. 7. Fire is a chemical _____________________________ known as combustion. such as wood. Given that these type fires are not easily extinguished. Fires fueled by common combustible materials. TASK BCM-07-14-TYPE: 1. 3. are classified as Class _________ fires.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-07-13-ANY: Assist in Passing a Portable Pump Directly to Another Boat 1. The range of the extinguisher is approximately _________ feet. The standard CO2 fire extinguisher used on Coast Guard boats is the ___________ pound. TASK BCM-07-17-ANY: Demonstrate Knowledge of the Operation of a CO2 Fire Extinguisher 1. the eductor is _______________________ in the flooded area. Fires involving combustible __________. or paper. or similar material are classified as Class _______ fires. The bridle should be attached to the ____________________ container handles. A ___________________________ line should be rigged to control the movement of the pump after the pump is in the water. TASK BCM-07-15-ANY: Identify the Different Classes of Fires and State the Fuel Sources. Be careful not to let the extinguisher’s discharge touch your __________________. and _________________ chain reaction. 2-108 . 2. 2. 2. or magnesium. The CO2 is released in the form of a fine white __________________. cloth. After rigging. The primary extinguishing agent for this class fire is ______________________. the _______________________________ is lowered over the side and the people on the other boat are directed to _________________________ in on the line. potassium. After passing the heaving line. the cylinder should be kept ____________. Fires fueled by flammable or combustible liquids. 6. Vacuum. 5. such as conductors or appliances. 3. The best extinguishing agent for this class fire is _____________. _______________. the best agents to use for control of the fire are __________________ or ___________. are classified as Class _____ fires.

2-109 . The quickest most likely way to attack an engine space fire is with CO2 and ________________ _______________________________ extinguishers. the nozzle is in the ___________________ ___________________ position. The vari-nozzle has ________ different positions.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-07-18-ANY: Demonstrate Knowledge for the Operation of a Dry Chemical Fire Extinguisher 1. The dry chemical should be pointed at the __________________ of the fire and use a ______________ motion. When the handle is back. 3. the ____________________ supply to the space should be secured. After all fire extinguishers have been expended. and if possible. TASK BCM-07-22-TYPE: Demonstrate Knowledge of the Procedures to Combat a Fire in the Engine Space 1. To change patterns you ________________the black tip. When the handle is forward the nozzle is in the ________________ position. Operate a Navy Vari-Nozzle Straight stream is employed when ______________________ _____________ and penetrating power are critical. The first thing to do in the case of an engine space fire is to secure the ___________________________(s). 3. Some of the causes of engine space fires are electrical. 5. and lube oil line leaks. When using dry chemical approach the fire from the __________________ side of the fire. 2. 2. The effective range for a dry chemical fire extinguisher is ______ feet. 2. 4. Wide-angle fog can cool a much _________________________surface than a steady stream. 6. 3. 4. ____________ line leaks. TASK BCM-07-21-ANY: 1.

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification 2-110 .

Techniques. Techniques. Section A Response Boat Tactics. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. COMDTINST M16247. COMDTINST M16601. COMDTINST M16247. Techniques. Section B Response Boat Tactics. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. Techniques.1 CH-1 .3 BCM-08-03-ANY • 2-110. Section A Response Boat Tactics. Techniques.7 (series) Chapter 2. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number BCM-08-01-ANY • • Reading Assignment Maritime Law Enforcement Manual. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual.3 (series) Response Boat Tactics.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section H.7 (series) Response Boat Tactics.4 BCM-08-07-ANY • 2-110. COMDTINST M16601. Section C Response Boat Tactics. COMDTINST M16601.4 • BCM-08-09-ANY • 2-110. Techniques. COMDTINST M16601.3 BCM-08-06-ANY • 2-110. Techniques. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual.7 (series) Chapter 3 Maritime Law Enforcement Manual. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual.7 (series) Chapter 4.3 BCM-08-04-ANY • 2-110.1 (series) Boarding Officer/Boarding Team Member Personal Qualification Standard (PQS). COMDTINST M16601.3 BCM-08-02-ANY • 2-110.7 (series) Chapter 2.4 BCM-08-08-ANY • 2-110. COMDTINST M16601. Section B See Page 2-110. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task.7 (series) Chapter 2. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual.3 BCM-08-05-ANY • 2-110.1 (series) Chapter 4 Response Boat Tactics. COMDTINST M16247. COMDTINST M16601. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual.4 2-110.7 (series) Chapter 1. Techniques.7 (series) Introduction Response Boat Tactics. COMDTINST M16601.

7 BCM-08-16-ANY • 2-110. Techniques.6 BCM-08-13-ANY • 2-110. COMDTINST M16601. COMDTINST M16601. COMDTINST M16601. Section D Response Boat Tactics.7 (series) Chapter 5.7 (series) Chapter 5.7 (series) Chapter 5. Section B Response Boat Tactics. Section B Response Boat Tactics.2 . COMDTINST M16601. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual.5 BCM-08-11-ANY • 2-110. Techniques. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. Techniques.7 BCM-08-18-ANY • 2-110.7 BCM-08-17-ANY • 2-110. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual.6 BCM-08-15-ANY • 2-110. Section A Response Boat Tactics. COMDTINST M16601. Techniques. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. COMDTINST M16601. Techniques. Section C Response Boat Tactics.5 BCM-08-12-ANY • 2-110.7 BCM-08-19-ANY • 2-110.7 (series) Chapter 6.6 BCM-08-14-ANY • 2-110.7 (series) Chapter 4. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual.7 (series) Chapter 4 Response Boat Tactics. Section B Response Boat Tactics. Techniques. Techniques. COMDTINST M16601. COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 6 Response Boat Tactics.7 (series) Chapter 6. Section C See Page 2-110. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. Techniques. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. COMDTINST M16601.7 (series) Chapter 6. Techniques. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual.7 (series) Chapter 4. COMDTINST M16601. Techniques. Section D Response Boat Tactics.8 CH-1 2-110.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Task Number BCM-08-10-ANY • Reading Assignment Response Boat Tactics.

Use of Force TASK BCM-08-02-ANY: Maritime Homeland Security (MHS) Missions 1. TACON may designate a _______________________________________ to handle onscene organization. 2-110. TACON is responsible for ________________________________ as well as ______________________________________. The four major mission areas within Maritime Homeland Security (MHS) include: • ___________________________________ • ___________________________________ • ___________________________________ • ___________________________________ TASK BCM-08-03-ANY: None. The five most likely threats a boat crew may encounter are: • ______________________________________________________________________ • ______________________________________________________________________ • ______________________________________________________________________ • ______________________________________________________________________ • ______________________________________________________________________ TASK BCM-08-05-ANY: Tactical Control 1.3 CH-1 .Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-08-01-ANY: None. For larger operations. 2. Authority and Jurisdiction. Maritime Homeland Security (MHS) Definitions TASK BCM-08-04-ANY: Threats to Response Boat (RB) Crews 1.

TASK BCM-08-07-ANY: Loss of Communications Procedures 1. there is ______________________ and __________ within which to ______________. The five types of LAA typically used for security purposes include: • __________________________________________ • __________________________________________ • __________________________________________ • __________________________________________ • __________________________________________ CH-1 2-110. 3. The two principles when force may be applied from Coast Guard vessels conducting Limited Access Area (LAA) enforcement are: • ________________________________________________________________ • ________________________________________________________________ 2. ______________________________________________________________________ 4. TASK BCM-08-09-ANY: Limited Access Areas (LAA) 1. Herding and shouldering are considered ______________________________ tactics. and _________________________. ______________________________________________________________________ TASK BCM-08-08-ANY: Vessel on Vessel Use of Force 1. 2.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK BCM-08-06-ANY: Operational Pre-Brief and De-Brief 1. ______________________________________________________________________ 3. Items to discuss at the de-brief include ________________________________________________________. ___________________. The operational pre-brief is designed to ______________________________________ to security forces. ______________________________________________________________________ 5. ______________________________________________________________________ 2. _______________________________________________________________________________________and __________________________________________________________________________________________. The four steps for stopping a non-compliant vessel are: Step 1: _____________________________________________ Step 2: _____________________________________________ Step 3: _____________________________________________ Step 4: _____________________________________________ 4. _______________. The recommended sequence for reestablishing/reporting lost communications is: 1. When enforcing LAAs in congested ports and waterways.4 .

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK BCM-08-10-ANY:

Security Zones (SZ)

1. Prior to the escort of a High Value Asset (HVA), the planned transit route should be __________________ for __________________________ and ____________________________________vessels. 2. Throughout the HVA’s port stay, the _____________________________ should be re-inspected _____________ and ______________________ by both _______________________________________ patrols. 3. The Coast Guard routinely establishes security zones to __________________________ such as an ________ or _______________________ from _______________, ______________, ____________________, or other subversive acts, ________________, or other causes of a similar nature. 4. Security zones may only be established by: • ________________________________________ • ________________________________________ • ________________________________________ • ________________________________________ 5. Security zones are either ________________ or ___________________. 6. The five tactical areas of a security zone are: 1. ________________________________________ 2. ________________________________________ 3. ________________________________________ 4. ________________________________________ 5. ________________________________________

TASK BCM-08-11-ANY:

Escorting a Moving High Value Asset (HVA)

1. An HVA escort should normally not be conducted with less than ________________________ detachment. 2. Should a Target of Interest (TOI) enter the security zone, the ______________________ covering that sector will ______________________ the TOI while a second _________________________ will maneuver into the ____________________________ to act as the __________________________________________ if needed. 3. In the event of an aggressive movement by a TOI, the screen boat will ___________________ as far as possible from the ___________.

2-110.5

CH-1

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK BCM-08-12-ANY:

Protection of Stationary/Anchored HVAs

1. Coxswains should always maneuver their response boats so as to maintain a position between the ___________ and the ___________________. 2. Fields of fire shall be pre-approved by _________________ and __________________ for each specific weapon deployed. 3. If the screen boat is unable to engage with its own weapons, it should _______________ and ________________ the tactical reaction boat’s _________________________. The screen boat then moves to the _________________ zone to back up the _______________________________. 4. Use of the HVA as a _____________________________ to identify incoming _________ and vector ________ _______________ to investigate is a way to _______________________________ within the security zone.

TASK BCM-08-13-ANY:

Response Boat Duties

1. Response boats assigned to protect an HVA (moving or stationary) will assume one of the following roles: • _____________________________ • _____________________________ 2. The _____________________ is the response boat in charge of intercepting an incoming vessel to ___________ its ________________. 3. The ____________________________________ is charged with backing up the _________________________ when it is _______________________________________ a ______________________________ entering the security zone.

TASK BCM-08-14-ANY:

Escorting a Target of Interest (TOI)

1. The purpose for escorting a TOI through a security zone ______________________________________ while also ___________________________________________ a transiting vessel. 2. The three methods of escorting a TOI between two different sectors are: • _____________________________________ • _____________________________________ • _____________________________________

CH-1

2-110.6

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK BCM-08-15-ANY:

Basic Response Boat Tactics

1. The four basic tactical boat maneuvers are: • ____________________ • ____________________ • ____________________ • ____________________ 2. The ___________________________ is a method of showing force by physically ___________________ the TOI to __________ or _____________________.

TASK BCM-08-16-ANY:

Weapons Engagement

1. Response boats will be constrained in their ability to engage a vessel posing an imminent threat (VPIT) by a number of factors including: • ___________________________________ • ___________________________________ • ___________________________________ • ___________________________________ • ___________________________________ • ___________________________________

TASK BCM-08-17-ANY:

Weapons Command and Control

1. The two weapons commands that are ordered by TACON authority only are: • ____________________ • ____________________ 2. When the command, “Weapons Stowed” is given, the weapons are _________ loaded and the chambers are ____________. 3. When the weapon command, “Check Fire” is given, the gunner momentarily _______________________ of fired rounds. Gunner will ______________________ if the target continues to _________________________.

TASK BCM-08-18-ANY:
None

Demonstrate Weapons Usage, Command and Control

2-110.7

CH-1

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK BCM-08-19-ANY:

Use of Automatic Weapons

1. The use of weapons, when authorized by the Coast Guard, requires total awareness of ____________________, ____________________, and ________________________________ by the response boat crews and shore-based security forces. 2. Coxswains should make every attempt to maneuver their craft so as to _____________________________ target while bringing ______________________________ to bar on the TOI. 3. Coxswains shall determine their most stable _____________ and ______________ for employing weapons.

CH-1

2-110.8

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

Chapter 4. AtoN Crew Member Qualification Tasks
Introduction In this Chapter In addition to the crew member qualification tasks, personnel assigned to Aids to Navigation units will complete the following Sections. This Chapter contains the following Sections: Section A B C Title Buoy Deck Crew Member Boom/Crane Operator Buoy Deck Supervisor (BDS) See Page 2-112 2-128 2-134

2-111

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

Section A.
Introduction • In this Section

Buoy Deck Crew Member

The following are objectives of Division One: Demonstrate knowledge of the factors that effect crew performance.

This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number
ACM -01-01-ANY ACM -01-02-TYPE ACM -01-03-TYPE ACM -01-04-TYPE ACM -01-05-TYPE ACM -01-06-TYPE ACM -01-07-TYPE ACM -01-08-TYPE ACM -01-09-TYPE ACM -01-10-TYPE ACM -01-11-TYPE ACM -01-12-TYPE ACM -01-13-TYPE ACM -01-14-TYPE ACM -01-15-TYPE ACM -01-16-TYPE AtoN Procedures Roles and Responsibilities of Buoy Deck Crew Safety Precaution Fundamentals Terminology Fundamentals Rigging Safety Precaution Fundamentals Buoy Deck Tool Fundamentals Cutting and Heating with Oxygen Acetylene Hand Signal Fundamentals Buoy Deck Limitations and Parameters Use and Application of AtoN Buoy Deck Equipment Buoy Deck Seamanship and Associated Hardware Mooring Maintenance Griping Buoys and Sinkers Buoy Maintenance Mooring Evolution Towing a Buoy

Task

See Page
2-113 2-113 2-114 2-116 2-117 2-120 2-120 2-122 2-123 2-123 2-124 2-125 2-126 2-126 2-127 2-128

2-112

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

TASK ACM-01-01-ANY References

AtoN Procedures a. b. c. Aids to Navigation Manual - Seamanship, COMDTINST M16500.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual - Technical, COMDTINST M16500.3 (series) Short Range AtoN Servicing Guide, COMDTINST M16500.19 (series)

Conditions Standards

Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. Task must be accomplished so as not to endanger either the boat or its crew.

NOTE $

Completion of task does not lead to an AtoN technician qualification code. Completed (Initials)

Performance Criteria 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Assemble and install a 155-mm lantern. Demonstrate ability to time a flasher insuring the proper flash characteristic. Charge and install solar batteries. Explain proper protective equipment that is worn while handling AtoN batteries. Explain battery tracking procedures. Assemble and install solar panels. Conduct a blocking diode test and determine the condition. Take voltage readings before and after load testing a battery and determine the condition. Take megohmeter readings on power cable and determine condition.

10. Conduct a routine inspection and determine the condition of the lighting equipment. 11. Explain/demonstrate procedures for conducting air tests on buoys. 12. Troubleshoot and correct problems in lighting and power equipment. Instructor Comments Date

TASK ACM-01-02-ANY References Conditions Standards

Roles and Responsibilities of Buoy Deck Crew a. b. Aids to Navigation Manual - Seamanship, COMDTINST M16500.21(series) United States Coast Guard Regulations 1992, COMDTINST M5000.3 (series)

Task will be performed onboard underway. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below.

2-113

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

Performance Criteria 1. Explain the roles and relationship of the buoy deck crew: a. Buoy deck crew member b. Boom/crane operator c. Buoy deck supervisor d. Coxswain Explain the importance of the evolution pre-brief and the assignment of personnel. Observe a minimum of five AtoN evolutions from the pilothouse. Date

Completed (Initials)

2. 3.

Instructor Comments

TASK ACM-01-03-ANY References

Safety Precaution Fundamentals a. b. c. d. e. Aids to Navigation Manual - Seamanship, COMDTINST M16500.21(series) Aids to Navigation Manual - Technical, COMDTINST M16500.3 (series) Coast Guardsman Manual Knights Modern Seamanship Naval Ships Technical Manual (as applicable)

Conditions Standards

Task will be performed ashore or underway. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1.

Discuss the following safety equipment and describe when and how it is to be used: a. Hard hats with proper chin straps to include proper color designations. b. Proper eye protection for specific situations. c. Proper types of personal flotation devices and their associated equipment. d. Proper use of safety belts and harnesses. e. Explain why knives are to be worn by all buoy deck personnel. f. Proper clothing and footwear during buoy deck evolutions to include clothing required for foul weather operations. g. Boat’s eye wash stations. h. Situations when hearing protection is to be worn to include types of hearing protection. i. Situations and dangers that require gloves to be worn. j. Appropriate safety markings for the buoy deck and associated equipment (e.g. trip hazards, lifting hooks, etc.). State the minimum distance that personnel should remain clear of fairlead blocks, bitts, cleats, deck winches, and chocks. Explain why personnel should remain clear of a bight of line, wire and chain.

2. 3.

2-114

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

Performance Criteria 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Explain why line and wire must be handled hand-over-hand. Explain the proper method for fairleading cross deck winches. Discuss why and how suspended hooks must be tended. Discuss the importance of minimizing noise during buoy deck operations. For each of the following, identify the associated hazards and what safety precautions apply: a. Working near suspended or moving loads b. Cleaning buoys c. Painting buoys d. Handling/working near AtoN batteries e. Working on/near buoys with sound signals f. Working with hand tools g. Working with electric tools and electricity h. Working with pneumatic tools and compressed air i. Entering/leaving the buoy deck j. Working in foul weather k. Working atop a buoy (servicing, hot packing) l. Working around open hatches and unguarded openings m. Hoisting loads from the water or over the stern n. Working with hazardous material in general o. Working on an icy or unusually slippery deck p. Working with pressure washing equipment q. Wearing jewelry during buoy deck evolutions PROHIBITED r. Handling wire s. Overloading of load handling equipment Identify and explain the danger zones associated with the following: a. Line handling b. Wire rope c. Running rigging d. Snatch blocks e. Hoisting and moving loads f. Pulling and faking chain g. Deck boxes and handrails

Completed (Initials)

9.

2-115

Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification

Performance Criteria 10. Identify and explain escape routes associated with the following: a. Line handling b. Wire rope c. Running rigging d. Snatch blocks e. Hoisting and moving loads f. Pulling and faking chain 11. Discuss how the following external forces affect buoy deck operations: a. Adverse weather b. Roll c. Boat control difficulties d. Pitch e. Fouled mooring f. List g. Current Instructor Comments Date

Completed (Initials)

TASK ACM-01-04-ANY References

Terminology Fundamentals a. b. c. d. e. Aids to Navigation Manual - Seamanship, COMDTINST M16500.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual - Technical, COMDTINST M16500.3 (series) Coast Guardsman Manual Knights Modern Seamanship Naval Ships Technical Manual (as applicable)

Conditions Standards

Task will be performed ashore or underway. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1.

Define the following terms and explain how the terms pertain to the buoy deck evolutions:

2-116

Stow ss. Working load limit (WLL) Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK ACM-01-05-ANY References Rigging Safety Precaution Fundamentals a.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . Wire drag zz. o. Padeye kk. Saddle ll. Safety chain mm. e. j. l. Aids to Navigation Manual . g. Marker buoy jj. Tag line uu. q. COMDTINST M16500. Lead line dd. Lifeline ee. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. v. k. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. w. p. m. Sounding pole pp. Snatch block qq. i. c. Avast Bale/bail Bight Bitts Bitter end Block Boat hook Boom/crane Bull chain Chain stopper Chain hook Check Chock (closed) Cross deck Cleat Deck load Dor-Mor ® anchors Dunnage Ease Fender Grapnel hook Hand-over-hand Head block Heave around Hold Horse collar aa. s.Seamanship. 2-117 . COMDTINST M16500. Slack oo.3 (series) Knights Modern Seamanship Conditions Standards Task will be performed ashore or underway. d. Stand by rr. Strain tt. u. t. y. Link gg. Winch xx. b. Line ff. h. Safe working load (SWL) nn. z. x. Hoist (whip) cc. Two-block ww. Live chain hh. Tension vv.Technical. b. r. n. f.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria a. Master link ii. c. Wire rope yy. Hook bb.

Shackles f. 2-118 . Snatch blocks j. Padeyes h. Hooks (assorted types) l. Wire rope p. Tag lines & snap hooks Discuss what to do with load handling equipment that is found to be defective. Lines n. sheaves. Bull chain (1) Slings (2) Wire rope (3) Chain b.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 1. pins k. Horse collar f. Completed (Initials) 3. Aircraft tie-downs h. Gripe chains i. 5. Shackles (assorted types) m. Padeyes o. Explain how and why routine visual inspections are conducted prior to use of the following equipment: a. Lines g. Steamboat jacks i. Define SWL and WLL. Snatch blocks Discuss why it is necessary to know the weight of the load to be lifted. Discuss safety precautions and rigging requirements in preparing to load/off-load buoy deck. Modeer shackle g. Explain the importance of knowing the WLL or SWL following rigging equipment: a. Synthetic fiber c. Chain stopper e. Blocks. Slings (1) Wire rope (2) Chain (3) Synthetic fiber c. Pelican hook q. 2. Wire rope b. Hooks e. Gripe chains d. 4. Steamboat jacks d.

12. padeyes and chains. Pigtail h. 15. Explain the use of tag lines when moving a load. Explain the proper use of dunnage. Bridle g. Explain the importance of properly reeving hooks into bales. 16. Identify the size of chain serviced. 11. Mechanical advantage 14. 13. Deck load d. Explain how to properly attach slings to a load. Identify the various sizes and classes of buoys serviced. Explain the importance of setting the chain in the stopper after every pull. Completed (Initials) 10. Discuss why the landing area must be clear before lifting the load.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 6. Explain the proper care and stowage of rigging equipment. 9. 7. Explain how to properly attach slings to a load: a. Instructor Comments Date 2-119 . End fitting e. Chain (open link) c. 8. Wire rope clip b. Fairlead f. Discuss the possible consequences of attempting to hoist a load with improperly rigged slings.

Aids to Navigation Manual . Buoy scraper i.Seamanship. b. Boat hook n. Pliers h. COMDTINST M16500. Marlinespike Date Instructor Comments TASK ACM-01-07-ANY References Cutting and Heating with Oxygen Acetylene a.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500. Knives o. Reeving line device (happy hooker) p.21 (series) Naval Engineering Manual. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. COMDTINST M16500.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-01-06-TYPE References Conditions Standards Buoy Deck Tool Fundamentals a.Seamanship.Technical. Bars (crow. split key 30 and 45 degree) f. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. cheater) c. Anvil (heat and beat) b. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. Hatchet (axe) g.6 (series) Conditions Standards Task will be performed ashore or underway. Screwdrivers (assorted sizes and types) j. Hacksaw e. Chain hook d. Wrench m. Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M9000. 2-120 . wrecking. Calipers l. Hammer (sledge. pin. Identify and discuss how to use the following tools: a. Task must be accomplished so as not to endanger either the boat or its crew. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. b. Tape measure k.3 (series) Task will be performed ashore or underway.

Explain hazards of cutting or heating buoy hulls. Tip cleaning tool l. Check valves i. Emergency shutdown procedures. Dangers of heating or cutting around buoy battery pocket vent lines. c. Presence of flammables in cutting/slag area. Select proper regulator settings. Proper sequence for lighting torch. Inspection of hoses and torch. b. Oxy/acetylene hoses m. Fire watch requirements during and after hot work.). eye protection. hot work gloves. Cutting goggles/face shield j. g. Select proper size cutting tip and/or rosebud tip. 3.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 1. Flashback arrestors k. Oxygen cylinder f. 2-121 . l. Protecting deck and adjacent compartments. Striker n. k. Identify and explain the following: a. Cut and heat with oxygen-acetylene outfit as follows: a. n. d. Cut various chain and shackles.g. d. Dangers of cutting on concrete sinkers. Operation of flashback arrestors and check valves. Dangers of cutting on metal painted with lead. Rosebud tip h. Acetylene c. 4. i. Completed (Initials) 2. Oxygen b. Acetylene cylinder g. Perform heat and beat installation. Dangers of excessive acetylene pressure. etc. Hazards of conducting hot work on galvanized metals. Personal protective equipment (e. o. Incompatibility of petroleum products and oxygen. Inspection of regulators. Cutting tip e. q. h. p. j. m. c. Importance of keeping acetylene cylinders upright prior to and during use. Security of cylinders in rack. Torch handle d. Regulators Discuss the following safety related items: a. b. e. f. chromate or vinyl based paints.

Seamanship. Shut off torch. Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK ACM-01-08-ANY References Hand Signal Fundamentals a. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. c. NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Conditions Standards Task will be performed ashore or underway. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Boom/crane aft c. Heave around on the cross deck g.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 5. Boom/crane aft/ease the cross deck i. Secure torch as follows: a. b. Raise/lower both whips f. Boom/crane forward/heave around on the cross deck Date Instructor Comments 2-122 . d. Boom/crane forward b.21 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2. Stow all gear. Secure gas bottles. Raise/lower starboard whip e. Ease the cross deck h. Secure hoses and regulators. Discuss/identify and demonstrate the following hand signals used during buoy deck evolutions: a. Aids to Navigation Manual . Raise/lower port whip d. b. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. COMDTINST M16500.

Seamanship.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference.22 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . b. 2-123 . 49' Buoy Utility Stern Loading (BUSL) Boat Operator’s Handbook. 2. 3.Technical. COMDTINST M16500. State the WLL of the boom/crane and cross decks. State the WLL of the bull chain padeyes. b. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. d.3 (series) Conditions Standards Task will be performed ashore or underway. Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16114. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. State the WLL of the recessed tie-down padeyes. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Instructor Comments Date TASK ACM-01-10-TYPE References Use and Application of AtoN Buoy Deck Equipment a. COMDTINST M16500. COMDTINST M9000.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-01-09-TYPE References Buoy Deck Limitations and Parameters a.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. State the maximum deck load (weight). Task must be accomplished so as not to endanger either the boat or its crew. c.6 (series) Conditions Standards Task will be performed onboard each boat type.3 (series) Naval Engineering Manual. COMDTINST M16500. 4.Seamanship.Technical.

Snatch blocks i. 5. Split key Identify the types/classes of swivels. Grapnel hook e. Horse collar j. 2-124 .Seamanship. 4.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 1. Aircraft tie-downs g. Aids to Navigation Manual . Hammer locks d. Rig and demonstrate the proper use of: a. Heat and beat (rivet pin) c.Technical. 3. 2. Task must be accomplished so as not to endanger either the boat or its crew. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Synthetic slings c.3 (series) Task will be performed ashore or underway. COMDTINST M16500. Calipers k. Identify different types of buoy bridles. Screw pin b. Identify the different sizes of sinkers. COMDTINST M16500. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. Steam boat jacks h. Choker b. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Identify and determine the size of chain. Identify the use and application of the following types/classes of shackles: a. Sounding pole/lead line l. b. Come-along f. Marker float Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK ACM-01-11-TYPE References Conditions Standards Buoy Deck Seamanship and Associated Hardware a.

c. Hook up a sinker. d. Identify the types/sizes of Dor-Mor anchors and their holding power.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .Technical. Aids to Navigation Manual . Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. b. Break the buoy. Date Instructor Comments 2-125 . COMDTINST M16500. c. e. f. e. b. Attach chain to a sinker. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK ACM-01-12-TYPE References Mooring Maintenance a. Split a split key shackle. Mouse hooks to lifting bails (NO WEATHER HITCHES). b.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 6. Determine chain wear. Conduct mooring maintenance as follows: a. Install a heat and beat. f. Attach a swivel to a mooring bail. g. Inspect bridle and swivel. Secure equipment after use. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1.3 (series) Conditions Standards Task will be performed onboard each boat type. 7. Task must be accomplished so as not to endanger either the boat or its crew.Seamanship. Hook up the buoy. Check personal equipment. d. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. COMDTINST M16500. Demonstrate the ability to perform the following: a. Install a buoy bridle or mooring pendant (5x9).

Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. f. c. Task must be accomplished so as not to endanger either the boat or its crew. Set headblock. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. Check personal equipment. Scrape and paint a buoy. e. b. Set up deck.3 (series) Conditions Standards Task will be performed onboard each boat type. Aids to Navigation Manual . Position dunnage. c. Lay out AtoN equipment. COMDTINST M16500. Check personal equipment. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference.Technical. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. COMDTINST M16500.3 (series) Task will be performed ashore or underway. e. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 2-126 . g. h. COMDTINST M16500. Inspect and replace retro as needed. Gripe down buoys and sinkers as follows: a. h.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-01-13-TYPE References Griping Buoys and Sinkers a.Seamanship. Secure equipment after use. b. Prepare buoy for recharge. d. g. Position saddle under buoy. Task must be accomplished so as not to endanger either the boat or its crew. Gripe sinker. COMDTINST M16500. Date Instructor Comments TASK ACM-01-14-ANY References Conditions Standards Buoy Maintenance a. Inspect and replace vent valves as needed. f. b. Aids to Navigation Manual . Perform buoy maintenance as follows: a.Technical. b. Rig buoy for air testing. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below.Seamanship. d.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . Secure equipment after use. Gripe buoy.

Participate in a mooring evolution as follows: a. Hookup for hoist. Trip pelican hook on the “Stand by” command. i. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. e. k. Rig modeer shackle/nipper chain/shackle. d. Tie rotten stops. m. f. Rig horse collar. Trip chain stopper on the “Set the buoy” command. COMDTINST M16500. h. Strike horse collar. 2. l. Instructor Comments Date 2-127 . Seat chain in stopper. Fake chain on deck. Rig tagline.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . n. Rig bull chain. Rig pelican hooks. Task must be accomplished so as not to endanger either the boat or its crew. Aids to Navigation Manual . Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1.Seamanship. COMDTINST M16500. Make proper reports to the coxswain on how the chain tends throughout the evolution. b. b.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK ACM-01-15-TYPE References Mooring Evolution a. c.3 (series) Conditions Standards Task will be performed onboard each boat type. j. g.Technical. Secure equipment after use. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. Check personal equipment.

3 (series) Task will be performed onboard each boat type.Seamanship. if applicable. Rig buoy for towing. Aids to Navigation Manual .21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Instructor Comments Date Section B. COMDTINST M16500. b. In addition to the crew member and AtoN crew member qualification tasks. COMDTINST M16500. 3. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. Introduction • Boom/Crane Operator The following are objectives of Division Two: Demonstrate knowledge of the factors that effect crew performance.Technical.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-01-16-TYPE References Conditions Standards Towing a Buoy a. personnel assigned to aids to navigation units will complete the following section. Rig the deck for towing a buoy. Task must be accomplished so as not to endanger either the boat or its crew. 2. In this Section This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number ACM -02-01-TYPE ACM -02-02-TYPE ACM -02-03-TYPE ACM -02-04-TYPE Task Boom/Crane Operator Safety Fundamentals Boom/Crane Operator Fundamentals Boom/Crane System and Components Boom/Crane Operation See Page 2-129 2-130 2-131 2-132 2-128 . Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Set tow watch.

Why excessive speed and sudden starts or stops should be avoided on lifting equipment. Describe the minimum number of turns required on wire rope drums. m. COMDTINST M9000. h. c. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. The dangers of exceeding limits when boom/craning forward and aft.21 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2. b. g. Explain the importance of exercising the boom/crane. pitch and wind affect boom/crane operations. Why the boom/crane operator must follow the buoy deck supervisor’s hand signals. Task must be accomplished so as not to endanger either the boat or its crew. k. j. COMDTINST M16500. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. l. d. Date Instructor Comments 2-129 . How external factors such as roll. f. e. When tag lines are required on lifts. Discuss the following safety topics: a.6 (series) Conditions Standards Task will be performed onboard each boat type upon completion of Chapter 4.Seamanship. i. Explain importance of evenly distributing the deck load. The maximum height a load should be lifted and why landing area shall be clear prior to lifting the load. The special or emergency situations when the boom/crane operator should take independent action. c. Aids to Navigation Manual . NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Naval Engineering Manual.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-02-01-TYPE References Boom/Crane Operator Safety Fundamentals a. Section A of this Part. The precautions necessary when lifting loads near the rated capacity of the boom/crane. b. The warnings that may be seen or heard from faulty equipment or equipment under heavy strain. The dangers of shock-loading the boom/crane.

Condition of blocks and sheaves 3. Aids to Navigation Manual . Lubrication of fittings h. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. c. Wire rope snatch blocks Explain the following characteristics of wire rope: a. 2. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Operation of controls prior to energizing boom/crane i. Wire rope spooling b. Types of wire rope cores d. Loss of diameter e. Condition of hooks and swivels e. 4. 2-130 . Identify the following blocks and tackles (as applicable): a.Seamanship. Discuss restrictions on use Discuss the importance of and procedures for wire rope lubrication and maintenance. b. Wire rope diameter b. Corrosion f.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-02-02-TYPE References Boom/Crane Operator Fundamentals a. Wire rope construction c. NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Naval Engineering Manual. Cotter pins and keepers g. Wire rope grade e. COMDTINST M16500. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. COMDTINST M9000. Explain the inspection standards for each of the following conditions which would cause the removal of wire rope from service: a. State the lifting limits of the boom/crane and the whips. Kinks d. Condition of end fittings f. 5. Wire rope condition d. 6. Crushing b. Single whip b. Excessive wear of outer wires Identify and discuss the following relating to daily inspections prior to boom/crane operation: a.6 (series) Conditions Standards Task will be performed onboard each boat type upon completion of TASK ACM -02-01-TYPE. Wire rope lubrication c. Explain how to determine serviceability f. Broken wires/strands c.21 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2.

Seamanship. Swivels d. Discuss the indications of improper operation for each of the following when the boom/crane is being exercised: a. 2-131 . Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . Brakes e. COMDTINST M16500. Sheaves Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK ACM-02-03-TYPE References Boom/Crane System and Components a. c. Boom/crane controls b. Blocks f. NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Naval Engineering Manual. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. COMDTINST M16114.3 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2. b. Discuss the following boom/crane system components applicable to the boom/crane: a. Rams h.22 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. d. e. Limit cutoff switch Discuss the following electrical system components associated with the boom/crane: a. Wire rope i.Technical. COMDTINST M9000. Drum f. Emergency shutoffs c. 49' Buoy Utility Stern Loading (BUSL) Boat Operator’s Handbook. Winches d. Winch motor g. Controls b. Rough or unsmooth operation e. Circuit breakers 2.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 7.6 (series) Conditions Standards Task will be performed onboard each boat type upon completion of TASK ACM -02-02 -TYPE. Whip hoist c.

Filters i. COMDTINST M16500. c. Discuss the following hydraulic system components: a. Exercise the boom/crane and cross decks.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Naval Ships Technical Manual (as applicable) Naval Engineering Manual. Instructor Comments Date TASK ACM-02-04-TYPE References Boom/Crane Operation a. Hydraulic motor d. 6.Seamanship. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Relief valve e. 5. Generator PTO b. Directional control valve g. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Hydraulic pump c.Technical.6 (series) Conditions Standards Task will be performed onboard each boat type upon completion of TASK ACM -02-03-TYPE.3 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2. Discuss the effects of contaminants/air in hydraulic systems. d. 7. State the pressure and temperature operating parameters. Discuss the identification of fluid leaks and the procedure for correcting leaks. Task must be accomplished so as not to endanger either the boat or its crew. COMDTINST M16500. Aids to Navigation Manual .Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 3. COMDTINST M9000. b. Reservoir h. Temperature gauge f. Conduct a pre-exercise inspection of boom/crane and cross deck. Pressure gauge Explain how to properly energize boom/crane hydraulics. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 4. e. 2-132 . 2.

Instructor Comments Date 2-133 . Retrieve mudded/sanded in sinker. U/W work lighted buoys and moorings. 9. Load/offload general cargo.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 3. Retrieve a mooring with paper-clipped chain. Load/offload lighted buoys. U/W work unlighted buoys and moorings. 4. 7. chain. 8. and unlighted buoys. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 10. Operate the boom/crane with no load to limits of arc following hand signals from BDS. 5. 6. Retrieve fouled mooring. Load/offload sinkers. 11.

NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Naval Engineering Manual. Sections A and B of this Part. b.Technical. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. d. d. i. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. The dangers of shock loading the boom/crane. COMDTINST M9000.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section C. b. Describe the minimum number of turns required on wire rope drums. In this Section This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number ACM -03-01-TYPE ACM -03-02-TYPE ACM -03-03-TYPE ACM -03-04-TYPE Task Buoy Deck Supervisor Safety Fundamentals Buoy Deck Supervisor Fundamentals Buoy Deck Supervisor Rigging Fundamentals Supervise a Buoy Deck Evolution See Page 2-134 2-136 2-138 2-139 TASK ACM-03-01-TYPE References Buoy Deck Supervisor Safety Fundamentals a. c. COMDTINST M16500. c. Introduction • Buoy Deck Supervisor (BDS) The following are objectives of Division Two: Demonstrate knowledge of the factors that effect crew performance. The warnings that may be seen or heard from faulty equipment or equipment under heavy strain. g. personnel assigned to aids to navigation units will complete the following section. COMDTINST M16500. f.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . e. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Why the boom/crane operator must follow the buoy deck supervisor's hand signals. The maximum height a load should be lifted and why landing area shall be clear prior to lifting the load. h.6 (series) Conditions Standards Task will be performed onboard each boat type upon completion of Chapter 4. if applicable. When tag lines are required on lifts.Seamanship. In addition to the crew member and AtoN crew member qualification tasks. 2-134 . The special or emergency situations when the boom/crane operator should take independent action. The precautions necessary when lifting loads near the rated capacity of the boom/crane. Why excessive speed and sudden starts or stops should be avoided on lifting equipment.3 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2. Aids to Navigation Manual . Discuss the following safety topics: a.

Operating with a full deck load b. Loss of power during: (1) Hoisting a buoy (2) Pulling chain (3) Setting the buoy (4) Hanging the sinker (5) Pulling the sinker f. Swinging load c. Two-blocked e. The dangers of exceeding limits when boom/craning forward and aft. k. Roll c. Parting the whip. 7. List g. How external factors such as roll. Explain importance of evenly distributing the deck load. Explain what actions a BDS should take to ensure safety in the following situations. Loss of main engines during: (1) Hoisting a buoy (2) Pulling chain (3) Setting the buoy (4) Hanging the sinker (5) Pulling the sinker 5. 2. Fouled tagline d. Fouled mooring f. 2-135 . 6. Explain the importance of the evolution pre-brief and the assignment of personnel. Explain the importance of exercising the boom/crane. m. Explain air testing requirements and safety precautions. l. 4. Adverse weather b. Boat control difficulties d. a. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Explain the coordination required between the buoy deck supervisor and coxswain. Current Explain the importance of conducting operational pre-checks. 3. Pitch e. Discuss how the following external forces affect buoy deck operations: a.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria j. pitch and wind affect boom/crane operations. during: (1) Hoisting a buoy (2) Pulling chain (3) Setting the buoy (4) Hanging the sinker (5) Pulling the sinker g.

Retrieving a sunken buoy b. Towing buoys on to Station j.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria h. COMDTINST M16500. Mudded/sanded-in sinker g.6 (series) Conditions Standards Task will be performed onboard each boat type upon completion of TASK ACM -03-01-TYPE. Single whip. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. Working a diving buoy i. State the lifting limits of the boom/crane and whips.Technical. c. Wire rope snatch blocks. COMDTINST M16500.3 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2. Retrieving stray buoys Date Instructor Comments TASK ACM-03-02-TYPE References Buoy Deck Supervisor Fundamentals a. Fouled mooring e. b. 9. dangers. Working in ice c. Identify the following blocks and tackles (as applicable): a. difficulties. Knotted chain d.Seamanship. d. and procedures: a. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Working a buoy with divers h. b. Define shock load and identify what safety precautions to take to prevent it. Inverted buoy f.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . Discuss the following abnormal situations. Loss of cross deck control during: (1) Hoisting a buoy (2) Setting the buoy (3) Hanging the sinker (4) Pulling the sinker Loose buoy on deck Completed (Initials) Boat Type i. Aids to Navigation Manual . 2. 2-136 . Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. COMDTINST M9000. NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Naval Engineering Manual. 8.

Wire rope construction c. Wire rope spooling b. Lubrication of fittings h. Broken wires/strands c. Boom/crane controls b. Excessive wear of outer wires Identify and discuss the following relating to daily inspections prior to boom/crane operation: a. Explain the inspection standards for each of the following conditions which would cause the removal of wire rope from service: a. Swivels d. Types of wire rope cores d.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 3. Operation of controls prior to energizing boom/crane i. Kinks d. Restriction on use Discuss the importance of and procedures for wire rope lubrication and maintenance. Emergency shutoffs c. Rough or unsmooth operation e. Wire rope condition d. 7. Wire rope diameter b. 5. Blocks f. Crushing b. Sheaves Completed (Initials) Boat Type 4. Condition of hooks and swivels e. Instructor Comments Date 2-137 . Wire rope lubrication c. Corrosion f. Explain the following characteristics of wire rope: a. Cotter pins and keepers g. Loss of diameter e. straps. and sheaves Discuss the indications of improper operation for each of the following when the boom/crane is being exercised: a. Condition of end fittings f. Wire rope grade e. blocks. Conditions of hangers. 6. How to determine serviceability f.

Discuss the authorized method for lifting compressed gas cylinders. Wire rope b. Explain the requirements for rated capacity tags on slings. 3. State the weight of the various types of buoys. 5.Seamanship. Describe two-blocking and the dangers involved. b. sizes of chains and bridles serviced. COMDTINST M16500. d. 7. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Naval Engineering Manual. 8.Technical. Explain the importance of establishing and maintaining a proper lead to control loads. c. Explain the importance of loads being level prior to lifting. Define SWL and WLL. Discuss the safety considerations for towing buoys on to Station. 10. Explain the danger involved with point loading of hooks. 2-138 . Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below. COMDTINST M16500.3 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-03-03-TYPE References Buoy Deck Supervisor Rigging Fundamentals a. Discuss the safety considerations for retrieving stray buoys. Explain how to drag a sinker on Station. 12. Steamboat jacks Explain horizontal sling angles. 6. Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M9000. Slings (1) Wire rope (2) Chain (3) Synthetic c. 2. Explain the importance of knowing the WLL or SWL and how to determine it on the following rigging equipment: a. 4.6 (series) Conditions Standards Task will be performed onboard each boat type upon completion of TASK ACM -03-02 -TYPE. 11. 9.

2-139 . Whips c. Cross decks e. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Hooks d.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 13. Aids to Navigation Manual . Moving loads on deck in a seaway 15. Wire rope 16. Task must be accomplished so as not to endanger either the boat or its crew. Chain stop f. Loading and off-loading g. COMDTINST M16500. Trainee must complete the task in accordance with the steps below.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .Technical. b. Discuss the required frequencies and conduct rigging inspections and weight/load testing for the following equipment: a. Pulling chain c. Hanging the sinker e. Slings j. Conduct a pre-exercise inspection of boom/crane and cross deck. Bringing the sinker onboard d.3 (series) Task will be performed onboard each boat type upon completion of TASK ACM -03-03-TYPE. Boom/crane b. Setting the buoy f. Describe the boom/crane position for the following evolutions: a. Gripe down chains i. Hooking a buoy b. 14. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Pelican hook h. COMDTINST M16500. State the weight of the various types of buoys serviced by your unit when they are flooded. Recessed padeyes g.Seamanship. Slush wire rope Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK ACM-03-04-TYPE References Conditions Standards Supervise a Buoy Deck Evolution a.

Supervise loading/offloading lighted buoys. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 10. Supervise servicing lighted and unlighted buoys on deck. 6. Supervise hanging and setting various lighted buoys used in unit OPAREA. 13. 8. Exercise the boom/crane and cross decks with no load to limits of arc using proper hand signals. Supervise loading/offloading general cargo. Supervise loading/offloading sinkers. Conduct post buoy operation debriefs. Instructor Comments Date 2-140 . 15. 17. Explain procedures for retrieval of a flooded buoy. 12. 14. 9.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Performance Criteria 2. 3. Supervise the retrieving of a stray buoy. 5. Supervise retrieving. chain. Retrieve mudded/sanded in sinker. 18. 11. 16. servicing and deploying lighted and unlighted buoys in adverse weather conditions. and unlighted buoys. Retrieve fouled mooring. Supervise towing buoys onto Station. 4. Retrieve a mooring with paper-clipped chain. Explain procedures of a man overboard drill while at AtoN Stations. 7. Supervise hanging and setting various unlighted buoys used in unit operational area (OPAREA). Explain procedures for retrieval of a sunken buoy by dragging.

The trainee should read the appropriate reading assignment and answer the related questions prior to beginning training in each new task. The instructor should then discuss the trainee’s answers to ensure understanding of the subject matter prior to beginning instruction for each new task. NOTE $ In this Chapter If there is no reading assignment assigned for a specific task.Division One Reading Assignments . AtoN Crew Member Trainee Study Guide Introduction This Chapter should be removed and given to the trainee to keep.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Chapter 5.Division Two Reading Assignments .Division Three See Page 2-142 2-152 2-155 2-141 . Its purpose is to provide guidance for the trainee’s reading assignments and is not a part of the training record. then the task will not have a page number to reference. This Chapter contains the following Sections: Section A B C Title Reading Assignments .

Aids to Navigation Manual .21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500. COMDTINST M5000. COMDTINST M16500. COMDTINST M16500.Seamanship.3 (series) Knights Modern Seamanship Aids to Navigation Manual .Technical. COMDTINST M16500.3 (series) See Page 2-144 ACM -01-02-TYPE • • 2-144 ACM -01-03-TYPE • • • • • 2-145 ACM -01-04-TYPE • • • • • 2-146 ACM -01-05-TYPE • • • 2-147 ACM -01-06-TYPE • • 2-147 2-142 .3 (series). This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number ACM -01-01-ANY • • • Reading Assignment Aids to Navigation Manual .Seamanship.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500. COMDTINST M16500.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500. COMDTINST M16500.Seamanship.Technical.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .Seamanship. COMDTINST M16500.3 (series) Short-Range Aids to Navigation Servicing Guide.19 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .21 (series) United States Coast Guard Regulations 1992. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments .Seamanship.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .Division One The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task.Seamanship.Technical.3 (series) Coast Guardsman Manual Knights Modern Seamanship Naval Ships Technical Manual (as applicable) Aids to Navigation Manual .Technical.3 (series) Coast Guardsman Manual Knights Modern Seamanship Naval Ships Technical Manual (as applicable) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500. COMDTINST M16500. COMDTINST M16500.Technical.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section A.

Technical.3 (series) See Page 2-148 2-148 2-149 2-149 2-149 2-150 2-150 2-150 2-151 2-151 2-143 .3 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500. COMDTINST M16500. COMDTINST M16500. NAVEDTRA10121-G1 49' BUSL Boat Operator’s Handbook . COMDTINST M16500.3 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .Seamanship. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16500.Seamanship.Technical. COMDTINST M16500. COMDTINST M16500.Technical.3 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500.Seamanship.3 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .3 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500.Seamanship. COMDTINST M16500.Seamanship. COMDTINST M16500.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Task Number ACM -01-07-TYPE • • ACM -01-08-TYPE • • ACM -01-09-TYPE • • • • ACM -01-10-TYPE • • ACM -01-11-TYPE • • ACM -01-12-TYPE • • ACM -01-13-TYPE • • ACM -01-14-TYPE • • ACM -01-15-TYPE • • ACM -01-16-TYPE • • Reading Assignment Aids to Navigation Manual .21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .3 (series) Naval Engineering Manual.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .Technical. COMDTINST M16500.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .Seamanship.6 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .6 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500.Seamanship. COMDTINST M16500.Technical.Technical. COMDTINST M9000.21 (series) Naval Engineering Manual.22 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .Seamanship.Seamanship. COMDTINST M9000.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .Technical.Technical.3 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500.21 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2. COMDTINST M16500.Seamanship. COMDTINST M16500.

4. 2-144 . what denotes the direction of current flow? 4. What are the correct disposal techniques for AtoN batteries that are no longer serviceable? 8. The most important item to be accomplished during the evolution pre-brief is ___________. Why are air tests conducted on buoys. 2.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-01-01-ANY: 1. The ____________ and _____________ charger should be checked for proper operation after a new battery is installed. 3. Where are the critical gaskets and weather seals located when assembling a lantern? 7. TASK ACM-01-02-TYPE: 1. 2. AtoN Procedures Most lighted shore aids use _________mm lanterns and _______ watt solar panels. 6. the boom/crane operator may also be the _______________. When looking at the schematic symbol for a diode. Name at least four external forces which affect buoy deck operations. 3. a. b. A ___________ is used to check the buoy battery power cables prior to installation of a new battery. and state the pressure normally applied and the allowable pressure loss? 5. State at least two ways the buoy deck supervisor may communicate with the boom/crane operator. Roles and Responsibilities of Buoy Deck Crew Who is in charge of all evolutions when handling buoys or other aids to navigation ? On some craft.

Define a “bight” in reference to line. State the location of eye wash station on your assigned boat. Wire and line must be handled hand-over-hand to prevent ___________ ____ _________________. wire or chain and explain its apparent danger to personnel. What four external forces (there are more than four) effect buoy deck operations? 2-145 . 3. 2.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-01-03-TYPE: 1. 4. From how many points (minimum) should loads on suspended hooks be tended? 6. Safety Precaution Fundamentals List at least five pieces of safety equipment or apparel that must be worn on the buoy deck during buoy handling evolutions. 5. What is the minimum distance that buoy deck crew members should remain clear of cross deck winch cables when under load? 7. What jewelry can be worn by personnel on the buoy deck during buoy deck evolutions? 8.

2-146 . What is dunnage? 3. What is a sounding pole? 5.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-01-04-TYPE: 1. Explain how a snatch block might be used during the lifting or lowering of a buoy. Define the term “lead line”. What is a head block? 7. 8. Define the term “live chain”. Terminology Fundamentals What is the difference between SWL and WLL? 2. Explain the difference between a cleat and a padeye. What is the difference between an open chock and a closed chock? 6. What is a tag line normally used for? 10. 4. 9.

What size and class buoys can be safely serviced by the 49' BUSL? 7. cross deck winches) be inspected? TASK ACM-01-06-TYPE: 1. hydraulic pumps and motors.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-01-05-TYPE: 1. The WLL of wire rope used in slings is based on a ________ to _______ safety factor. Buoy Deck Tools Fundamentals During buoy handling evolutions. 3. 2-147 . 6. The angle of the teeth on a hacksaw blade should be _________ from the handle. 4. Line should never be stored while ____ or ______. What is a steamboat jack used for? Rigging Safety Precaution Fundamentals 2. What personnel safety equipment is required when using a buoy scraper? 4. 5. Blocks are classified by the number of ______________. where should tools be stowed that are not required for the evolution? 2. Explain the term 6 x 37 wire rope. When should buoy handling equipment (boom/crane. What is the reeving line device (happy hooker) normally used for? 3.

If the deck supervisor has his arms bent upward at the elbows and fists clenched. it is the signal for _________________. If the deck supervisor has his hands clasped in front of his body. What is the hand signal for the deck supervisor transfer? 4. Where are the oxygen-acetylene bottles stowed? 4. What safety equipment is essential when using an oxygen-acetylene torch? 3. 2. 7.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-01-07-TYPE: 1. it is the signal for ___________ ____. TASK ACM-01-08-TYPE: 1. Hand Signal Fundamentals The buoy deck supervisor shall only give signals to the ________ __________ or appointed ______________. The greatest hazard when cutting or heating a buoy hull is ______________________. Explain the difference (function and description) between a rosebud tip and a cutting tip? 5. The danger of cutting or heating around buoy battery vents is the presence of ______________. What is the hand signal for raising the boom/crane? 5. Cutting and Heating with Oxygen Acetylene What color(s) are normally used to identify industrial oxygen containers? 2. Explain the fire watch requirements when conduction hot work? 6. 3. 2-148 .

What is the safe working load of the tow bull chain tie-downs on the BUSL buoy deck? 3.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-01-09-TYPE: 1. _______________. Swivels are necessary to ________ __________ ___________ of the load. The most common sinker weights are __________ and ___________ pounds. Most sinkers have _______bails. Buoy Deck Limitations and Parameters What is the safe working load for the boom/crane and the cross deck winches? 2. Use and Application of AtoN Buoy Deck Equipment Describe and define the use of the following buoy deck equipment: a. What are the types and sizes of Dor-Mor anchors and state each of their holding power? 6. 4. 5. What is the safe working load of the fourteen tie-downs on the BUSL buoy deck? TASK ACM-01-10-TYPE: 1. Lead line d. 2. Grapnel hook c. Snatch blocks b. Come-along TASK ACM-01-11-TYPE: 1. 3. one on __________and one on the __________. Buoy Deck Seamanship and Associated Hardware The three most common types of shackles are ____________. and _________________. Horse collar e. What terms are used to identify the type and size of chain? 2-149 .

State all the personnel protective gear that must be worn during mooring maintenance. What is the function of the vent valve in a buoy? 4. What is meant by the term gripe in relation to buoy handling evolutions? 3. the chain must be replaced. Buoy Maintenance When handling buoys. Where are the deck lockers located in relation to the buoy deck? TASK ACM-01-14-TYPE: 1. connected by an __________ _____________. 4. What is the purpose for air testing a buoy? 3. TASK ACM-01-13-TYPE: 1. 2. it is advisable to keep the load _______ and handle it _________________. 2.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-01-12-TYPE: 1. 2. Mooring Maintenance When ____ percent of the bar diameter has been worn away. Buoy moorings consists of a bridle which is _________ short lengths of ________. What is one of the primary safety hazards when recharging a buoy battery? 2-150 . What is meant by the term break the buoy? 3. Griping Buoys and Sinkers A headblock is used in conjunction with a ___________ ______________.

4. 2-151 . 3. What is a tag line used for? TASK ACM-01-16-TYPE: 1. A nipper chain is a section of chain with _____________ on both ends. 5. 2. Towing a Buoy Never attempt to tow a buoy unless you know the __________ of the sinker and the size.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-01-15-TYPE: 1.or 2-inch__________ shackle with a _____________ _________ type pin. A modeer shackle is a 1. __________ and _________ of mooring. Mooring Evolution A rotten stop is a ___________ _____________ intend to _____________ __________ ________________. When attempting to tow a buoy with the 49' BUSL. What is meant by the command strike the horse collar? 3. 2. it is recommended that the ______ _______ tie-downs be used. Always tow from the _________ __________ of the buoy.

NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Naval Engineering Manual.Seamanship.22 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500.Seamanship.21 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2. NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Naval Ships Technical Manual (as applicable) Naval Engineering Manual. COMDTINST M16500. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments .Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section B.Technical.6 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number ACM -02-01-TYPE • • • ACM -02-02-TYPE • • • ACM -02-03-TYPE • • • • • ACM -02-04-TYPE • • • • • Reading Assignment Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M9000.21 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2.Seamanship. COMDTINST M16114.6 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .6 (series) See Page 2-153 2-153 2-154 2-154 2-152 .21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M9000. COMDTINST M16500. COMDTINST M9000. COMDTINST M16500.Technical. NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Naval Engineering Manual.Seamanship. COMDTINST M16500. NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Naval Engineering Manual. COMDTINST M9000.6 (series) 49' BUSL Boat Operator’s Handbook .Division Two The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task.3 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2. COMDTINST M16500.3 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2.

The line speed of each A-frame winch is 0 to _____ feet per minute. How can the load be lowered to the deck if suspended and there is no hydraulic pressure? 2-153 . 3. From how many different locations may the A-frame and cross deck winches be operated? 5. All hand signals during boom/crane operations should originate from the _______ _______ __________________. what is the maximum hoisting capacity (buoy safe working load) for the 49' BUSL? 5. On a 49' BUSL. In pounds. What is the size of the lanyard attached to the chain stopper? 6. TASK ACM-02-02-TYPE: 1.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-02-01-TYPE: 1. The cross deck winches contain ______ feet of ____-inch steel wire rope. Boom/Crane Operator Safety Fundamentals Why are hand signals so important to the boom/crane operator during buoy handling operations? 2. what is the maximum sea state for buoy operations? 4. What are at least four inspection items that are used to determine the serviceability of wire rope? a. 7. d. 6. The minimum number of turns required on a wire rope drum is ____________ turns. 4. What will support the load on the boom/crane if hydraulic pressure fails during a lifting operation? 8. Boom/Crane Operator Fundamentals The A-frame winches contain ________ feet of ______-inch steel wire rope. c. Tag lines are required to _____________________________________. 3. b. 2.

2. an alarm will sound in the pilothouse. a sinker up to ________ pounds and up to a ______-inch chain can be handled. 3. What is the function of the quick disconnect fittings at each A-frame and cross deck winch? 3. List four topside components associated with buoy handling equipment that should be inspected for hydraulic leaks when the system is static and operating. chain guard and release assembly on the transom of the BUSL? 4. d. Boom/Crane Operation The 49' BUSL can relieve floating aids up to and including a _____ by _______ foot lighted buoy. What drives the hydraulic pump for buoy operation on the 49' BUSL? TASK ACM-02-04-TYPE: 1. Boom/Crane System and Components What is the function of the A-frame actuators on the 49' BUSL? 2. The __________ must be in operation to perform power on pre-start check to the buoy handling equipment. The ________ ___________ __________ will provide hand signals to the boom/crane operator during all buoy handling operations. c. 7. a. How many disposable oil filters are located in the BUSL buoy handling hydraulic system? 6. 4. What is the function of the chain stopper. 5. If pressure in the buoy handling system drops below ________ PSI or the temperature of the fluid exceeds _______ °F. Where is the buoy handling system hydraulic fluid heat exchanger located? 5. up to a _______ class lighted buoy.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-02-03-TYPE: 1. 2-154 . b. Before bringing a lighted buoy on deck attach a ____________ and ____________ to prevent the buoy from swinging.

6 (series) 49' BUSL Boat Operator’s Handbook . COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16500.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification Section C. COMDTINST M16500. COMDTINST M16500.Seamanship.Technical. COMDTINST M9000.Seamanship. COMDTINST M16500.Technical.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Naval Engineering Manual. COMDTINST M16500. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments .3 (series) See Page 2-156 2-157 2-158 2-158 2-155 .Division Three The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task.21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M9000.Seamanship. NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Naval Engineering Manual.Technical. COMDTINST M16500.3 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2. COMDTINST M9000.6 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .Technical. NAVEDTRA10121-G1 Naval Engineering Manual.Seamanship. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number ACM -03-01-TYPE • • • • ACM -03-02-TYPE • • • • ACM -03-03-TYPE • • • • ACM -03-04-TYPE • • • Reading Assignment Aids to Navigation Manual .22 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .3 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2.3 (series) Boatswain Mate 3 & 2.6 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual .21 (series) Aids to Navigation Manual . COMDTINST M16500. COMDTINST M16500.

c. Why are tag lines required when lifting loads? 2.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-03-01-TYPE: Buoy Deck Supervisor Safety Fundamentals 1. 8. 3. What is the most inherent danger if the whip should part during any buoy handling operation? 7. How does the buoy deck supervisor relay commands for buoy lifting and lowering operations to the boom/crane operator/coxswain? 5. b. The deck supervisor must conduct __________ inspection of the buoy handling equipment if use is anticipated. What are the minimum number dead wraps on the drum for the deck winches and A-frame winches on the 49' BUSL? 4. What operating indications will the buoy deck supervisor observe if a buoy is being raised and the mooring in fouled? 2-156 . What will happen if hydraulic power is lost and a buoy is suspended on the boom/crane? 6. The following topics should be included: a. d. The buoy deck supervisor should conduct a briefing prior to beginning buoy deck operations.

and length of the wire rope installed on the deck winches and A-frame winches on the assigned buoy boat? 3. c.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-03-02-TYPE: Buoy Deck Supervisor Fundamentals 1. What is the difference between strands and wire when expressing the size and serviceability of wire rope? 4. If the boom/crane/A-frame is being exercised and the operation is rough or erratic with audible noise in the hydraulic fluid flow. 5. What is the size. What is meant by slushing a wire rope? 2-157 . 6. What are five physical inspection standards that should be observed when visually inspecting wire rope? a. material. 7. e. What are the safe working load limits for the cross deck winches and A-frame winches on the assigned buoy boat? 2. b. Daily inspection and _____________ of buoy handling equipment fittings is essential to maintain equipment serviceability. it is most likely an indication of ________ in the ____________ ____________. d. Where are the manual release features located on your boat to safely lower a load if hydraulic pressure fails? 8.

Explain at least four items that should be included in the safety brief prior to buoy deck operations. The deck winches on the 49' BUSL have a WLL of ____________ pounds each. For buoy handling operations. 6. the line size used for rotten stops is determined by the ________ and ____________ of the _________. then it should be replaced.Part 2 – Boat Crew Member Qualification TASK ACM-03-03-TYPE: Buoy Deck Supervisor Rigging Fundamentals 1. 4. What safety gear must be worn by any buoy deck personnel that is engaged in battery maintenance? 2-158 . It is never a good practice to tow or drag a buoy from the chain stopper. Do not use _________ ___________ to mouse the hooks when lifting or lowering loads. d. b. What is the normal safety factor required when testing slings and where can the last load test date of a sling be located? 3. a. What is the danger of horizontal sling angles during any lifting operation? 2. The bridle is normally connected to the buoy with _______ __________ shackles. 7. 6. What action might the BDS recommend the coxswain take if a sinker is mudded or sanded-in? 2. 5. c. A sinker of _____________ lbs and a chain up to __________inches can be handled by the 49' BUSL. 5. 8. 3. TASK ACM-03-04-TYPE: Supervise a Buoy Deck Evolution 1. What is meant by the term two-blocking and what must be done if this situation occurs? 7. The AtoN boat can relieve up to a _________ class unlighted buoy. If the throat opening of a hook has been enlarged greater than ______ percent. True or False. What is the function of the A-frame limit switch and where is it located on the 49' BUSL? 4.

which must be learned. These tasks represent the minimum elements of skill and knowledge necessary for safe and effective performance of a Coast Guard engineer. Volume II Part 3 Engineer Qualification Introduction This Part contains a collection of tasks.S. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. NOTE $ In this Part This Part contains the following Chapters: Chapter 1 2 3 Title Task Accomplishment Record for Engineer Engineer Qualification Tasks Engineer Trainee Study Guide See Page 3-3 3-5 3-43 3-1 . This Manual is not meant to be ordered for purposes of obtaining individual qualification tasks. Qualification tasks should be reproduced locally and provided for trainees. practiced.U. and performed by the trainee.

Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual.U. Volume II 3-2 .S.

Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 3-3 . Task Accomplishment Record for Engineer NOTE $ Instructor should remove this chapter and place it in the trainee’s training record.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Chapter 1. TRAINEE NAME: _________________________________ INSTRUCTOR NAME: _____________________________ RATE: ____________________ RATE: ____________________ POSITION/QUALIFICATION CODE TO BE TRAINED FOR: ______________________________ NOTE $ Task ENG-01-01-ANY ENG-01-02-ANY ENG-01-03-ANY ENG-01-04-ANY ENG-01-05-ANY ENG-01-06-ANY ENG-01-07-ANY ENG-01-08-ANY ENG-01-09-ANY ENG-02-01-ANY ENG-02-02-ANY ENG-02-03-ANY ENG-02-04-ANY ENG-02-05-ANY ENG-02-06-ANY Instructors should line through those tasks not applicable to this qualification.

Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Task ENG-02-07-ANY ENG-02-08-ANY ENG-02-09-ANY ENG-02-10-ANY ENG-02-11-ANY ENG-02-12-ANY ENG-02-13-ANY ENG-02-14-ANY ENG-02-15-ANY ENG-02-16-ANY ENG-03-01-ANY ENG-03-02-ANY ENG-03-03-ANY ENG-03-04-ANY ENG-03-05-ANY ENG-03-06-ANY ENG-03-07-ANY ENG-04-01-ANY Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 3-4 .

In this Chapter This Chapter contains the following Sections: Section A B C D Pre-Operational Checks Propulsion System Start Checks and Casualty Responses Boat Disabling Casualties Post-Operational Checks Title See Page 3-6 3-19 3-33 3-40 3-5 . dated.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Chapter 2. Tasks should be signed. Engineer Qualification Tasks Introduction The following are the instructions for this Chapter: • • • The purpose of this Chapter is to provide guidance on the trainee’s progress through the qualification tasks. The instructor should present the tasks to the trainee in a logical order using the instructions provided in Part 1. and placed in the trainee’s training record when the instructor is satisfied that the trainee can consistently perform a task in accordance with all standards and conditions. Prerequisites A prospective Engineer must: • Be a certified crew member on the boat type for which they are seeking this higher level of qualification.

Aboard the boat. The task will be performed during normal unit training and lecture programs pertaining to boat operations. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Conditions Standards This task may be performed when the boat is out of the water.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Section A. 3-6 . Introduction • • In this Section Pre-Operational Checks The following are objectives of Division One: Demonstrate the knowledge of the casualties and discrepancies that would prevent a boat from getting underway. c. without reference material. b. Applicable Outfit Lists Applicable Technical Manuals Boston Whaler Manual Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number ENG-01-01-ANY ENG-01-02-ANY ENG-01-03-ANY ENG-01-04-ANY ENG-01-05-ANY Task Locate Installed Equipment and Fittings on the Boat Locate Components and Accessories of the Boat’s Propulsion and Electrical Systems Locate Components and Accessories of the Boat’s Auxiliary System Conduct a Pre-Start Checkoff List the Disabling Casualties and Restrictive Discrepancies that Prevent the Boat from Getting Underway State the Equipment Casualties That Will Prevent the Boat from Getting Underway Energize the Electrical and Electronic Systems Set Watertight Integrity Draw/List the Boat’s Systems See Page 3-6 3-8 3-11 3-13 3-15 ENG-01-06-ANY ENG-01-07-ANY ENG-01-08-ANY ENG-01-09-ANY 3-16 3-16 3-17 3-18 TASK ENG-01-01-ANY References Locate Installed Equipment and Fittings on the Boat a. Demonstrate the ability to perform Engineering Casualty Control on a boat. d. the trainee must locate and describe the operation or purpose of each installed piece of equipment and fittings as listed below.

or tie-down points. (9) Bilge pump discharge ports. (6) Portable dewatering pump. GPS/DGPS. Navigation lights. f. h. j. ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) raw water discharge ports. l. h.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria 1. f. Main deck/deck storage: (1) Escape hatch. c. 12-volt accessories switch panel. g. Compass sending unit. b. Hoisting. Forward lift rings. chocks. Spotlight and/or blue light. (7) Fuel tank vent. Deck fittings (cleats. k. k. 3-7 . bitts). Completed (Initials) 2. Fathometer. Engine air shutdown pull handles. j. i. Bilge access plate. (3) Window wash reservoir and pump. e. Forward drain plug. g. e. Battery switches. Radar. Start/stop switches. Loudhailer. i. Kill switch. b. c. (5) Heat. Locate and describe the functions of the following: a. Radios. d. Anchor and anchor rope components. Main circuit breakers. (4) Shore-tie receptacle. d. Locate and state the purpose of the following: a. Mooring and towing gear. Battery parallel switch. (8) Fuel fill/sounding rod. Compass. (2) Portable dewatering pump sea suction. m. trailer.

c. without reference material. the trainee must locate components and accessories of the propulsion and electrical systems following the steps listed below. Reduction Gear Space: a. Propeller shaft seals. c. g. Applicable Technical Manuals Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. HVAC overboard discharge. the pierside instructions should be followed by related underway exercises. Fuel tank inspection covers. Rudder feedback units. Where practicable. Vents. Transducer. Tie rod. b. b. h. d. d. h. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Conditions This task will be performed pierside.5 (series) Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. All outfitted equipment. Instructor Comments TASK ENG-01-02-ANY References Locate Components and Accessories of the Boat’s Propulsion and Electrical Systems a. c. while normal unit training and lecture programs pertaining to boat operations are being conducted. Standpipes. g. Speed log. Emergency tiller. Rudder post glands. f.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria 3. Standards 3-8 . Date Completed (Initials) 4. Cardan shaft seals. Fuel stripping port. f. Aboard the boat. e. b. Servo/power cylinder. i. Bilge pump and water sensor switch. i. Lazarette: a. COMDTINST M16114. Bilge pump overboard discharge. e. Bilge pumps and water level switches.

Locate the jacket water pump.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria 1. aftercooler. 4. c. f. Emergency air shutdowns. 3-9 . c. e. coolant expansion tank and hot start. State the location of the fuel tank. g. restrictor plate and shaft seal. State how the propulsion and generator engines are cooled. Locate the primary filters. f. h. State the type of system used. Rotation of each engine. Locate the fuel pump. b. d. e. g. State the usable capacity of the tank. b. secondary filters. priming pump and stripping port. d. f. thermostats. State the capacity of the fuel tank. Engine and generator water temperature. c. 3. Reduction gear clutch apply pressure. b. b. Make and model. Locate the main engines and ship’s service generator (if installed). State the following parameters for idle and cruising: a. Generator rating (kW). Locate the manual emergency shutoff valves. as applicable on propulsion and generator engines. 5. generator fuel filters. h. as applicable. e. Horsepower of each engine. Emergency fuel cutout valves. Locate and state the purpose of the following engine stop systems: a. Engine and generator lube oil pressure. and state the following: a. ECM cooler plate and fuel cooler. c. Cruising and maximum engine RPMs. b. i. i. Locate the fill tube. sounding rod and fuel gauge. State how the exhaust gases are cooled. Locate the sea suction valves and the sea strainers. Describe the engine cooling system: a. State the jacket water capacity of the propulsion and generator engines. Describe the fuel oil system: a. j. d. Describe the Airsep system. Locate and state the purpose of the raw water pump. Engine stop buttons (switches). g. oil cooler. Lube oil capacity and type of oil of each engine. Locate and state the size and purpose of the restricted orifice. Locate the primer bulb. Reduction gear lube oil temperature. Locate the fuel tank vent. Completed (Initials) 2. c. State how the raw water system is protected from corrosion. d. State how the reduction gears are cooled.

d. Describe the fixed fire fighting and installed eductor systems: a. State the type of oil used. e. d. Cut in/out pressure. Describe the boat shafts and propellers. Locate and state the purpose of the fixed fire extinguishing system: a. d. Locate and state the capacity of the oil reservoir. Type of agent. Locate the fire pump. b. State what will happen when the cylinder is discharged. Describe the hydraulic steering system: a. 9. stating the following: a. 10. e. Locate and state the purpose of the flow divider. Completed (Initials) 7. e. Direction of rotation in forward and reverse. Describe the engine alarm system: a. Locate and state the purpose of the installed eductor and isolation valves. Relief valve setting. c. c. 8. e. Engine shutdown cylinders. Gear ratio in forward and reverse. 11. Locate the steering pump. model and configuration of gear box. b. c. Purpose of the shaft seal. State the output of the fire pump in gallons per minute. c. State the purpose of the engine alarm system and at what temperature or pressure the alarm is activated. b. State the maximum engine RPMs with the fire pump engaged. Locate the air tank and state capacity. c. 3-10 . State the purpose of the alarm cutoff switch. b. b. Number of blades. Oil capacity of the gears and what type of oil is used. d. e. Locate the air compressor and state the PSI. b. Cylinder and state the PSI. d. Pressure gauge and bleed valve. Oil dipstick and where oil is added. Propeller diameter and pitch.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria 6. Describe and state the purpose of the compressed air system: a. 12. Locate the marine gears and state the following: a. Diameter of shaft. d. Thermal sensors and at what temperature the alarm will sound. State the pressure range of the fire pump. Make. Locate and state the purpose of the relief valve. c. b.

d. Batteries. Alternators. Shore-tie box. g. Describe the operation of the battery charging system. Explain the purpose of the start batteries. Multi-battery isolators. AC power panel. the trainee must locate components and accessories of the auxiliary systems following the steps listed below. the pierside instructions should be followed by related underway exercises. b. b. 18. 14. h. Locate the following DC power equipment: a. without reference material. b. 15. COMDTINST M16114 (series) This task will be performed pierside. 20. Explain the purpose and function of the multi-battery isolators. Applicable Technical Manual Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. d. c. 19. 21. 16. Where practicable. Describe the results of a failed or improperly installed multi-battery isolator. Describe the results of a battery failure or low voltage in the start batteries. e. c. Describe the results of a battery failure or low voltage in the service batteries. DC power panels and their voltages. Aboard the boat. Shore-tie battery charger. Instructor Comments Date Completed (Initials) TASK ENG-01-03-ANY References Conditions Locate Components and Accessories of the Boat’s Auxiliary System a.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria 13. f. while normal unit training and lecture programs pertaining to boat operations are being conducted. Main breakers. State when the batteries are paralleled. Explain the purpose of the service batteries. Standards 3-11 . Voltage regulators. Battery cutout switches. Main breaker. Generators. Locate the following AC power equipment: a. Explain how the batteries are connected. 17. State the power output and purpose of the alternators and generators.

i. c. Steering pumps. k. b. Water sensor switches. Smoke and heat detector. h. Sea suction valve. Fire alarm warning lights. State the relief pressure of the steering system and of the servo/power cylinder. Pressure switches. 3. 3-12 . c. Auto pilot pump. Locate and state the purpose of the fire detection and suppression system components: a. c. State the capacity and what type fluid is used in the steering system. l. e. f. b. Raw water pumps. Sea strainer. 4. Strobe light. j. Discharge nozzle. b. h. f. g. e. f. Completed (Initials) 2. HVAC control panel. Explain how the HVAC unit both cools and heats. d. Jog levers. e. System status panel. State the head pressure of the system. Servo/power cylinder. Engine room dewatering standpipe. Engine room air inlet damper. 30-second delay bottle. Mechanical actuators/nitrogen bottles. Steering pressure alarm and components. i. d. Locate and state the purpose of the fixed dewatering system components: a. Siren. HVAC system circuit breakers/switches. h. d. Steering feedback units. k. Explain how the system works when actuated. Bilge pumps. Steering control valve. Reservoir/filter/cooler assembly. Agent. HVAC raw water piping. HVAC units. i. g. l. g. d. Bilge pump control and alarm panel. Locate and state the purpose of the following HVAC system components: a. Helm unit. e. Locate and state the purpose of the following hydraulic steering system components: a. c. m.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria 1. Describe the two hydraulic circuits that are used in the steering system. j. b. Bilge pump overboard discharge points. Locate and describe the 47' MLB ventilation intakes and ducting.

the instructions should be followed by related underway exercises. CO2 backup actuator. Alarms. c. while normal unit training and lecture programs pertaining to boat operations are being conducted. Compressor and reservoir assembly. d.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria 5. Locate and state the purpose of the gray water system components (if installed): a. Controls and control switches. Controls and control switches. Date Completed (Initials) 6. e. Deck connection and inport discharge hose. Applicable Technical Manuals NSB Manufacturer Manuals Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. System parameters. f. e. f. c. c. 3-13 . Deck connections and fill hose. Water sensor switches. 8. e. f. 7. e. Locate and state the purpose of the sewage system (if installed): a. Alarms. Potable water pump. System test switch. Sewage discharge pump. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Conditions This task will be performed when the boat is out of the water. Grease trap. Instructor Comments TASK ENG-01-04-ANY References Conduct a Pre-Start Checkoff a. Deck connection and inport discharge hose. Alarms. c. c. Gray water pump. Locate and state the purpose of the emergency window release system components: a. Sewage tank. b. d. f. d. b. Gray water tank. Latch assembly. Hot water tank. Controls and control switches. Potable water tank. Macerator pump. b. Locate and state the purpose of the potable water system (if installed): a. b. d. Where practicable. b.

Check that bilge drain plugs are in place (transom) and overboard discharge scuppers are clear. 8. Visually check sea strainer for debris. Ensure all breakers on 120-VAC power panel are on. Clean if necessary. 18. Check engine controls for free movement. 6. 3. 13. Look for signs of spilled fuel or oils. Coolant level must be rechecked after the engine warms up and when the boat stops to take on fuel. Ensure HVAC system raw water cooling valve is open. 14. 5.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Standards The trainee must properly complete all steps below in order to successfully complete this task. as applicable. Secure and disconnect shore power electrical cable as appropriate. Secure battery charger and jacket water heater. fuel. Check for proper valve alignment of fuel system. 11. Fuel should be at or near 95 percent. CAUTION ! 9. 2. Open sea suction valve. Check steering fluid level. and oil.or 24-VDC power panels are on. Damage to the alternator may occur. 7. the level must be between the L and the H marks on the dipstick. Reduction gear oil will normally be above the H mark when the reduction gear is not turning. Check bilges for water. 10. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Check belts for proper tension (no greater than 7/16 inch per foot of span). 12. Check coolant by removing cap and looking into the expansion tank. 15. 20. At low idle. 17. Never start or run the engines with the battery charger energized. CAUTION ! NOTE $ NOTE $ 4. Inspect bilges for excessive amounts of water. Do not open the coolant expansion tank cap on a hot engine. The reduction gear oil level must be checked again with the engine running at low idle. Ensure air intake is clear and machinery space ventilation flapper is open. 16. 19. Drain and dispose of as required. Check steering and steering fluid levels. Ensure all breakers on all 12. Check the marine gear and engine oil levels. it should be full. 21. Sound fuel tank with sounding rod. Visually inspect the bottom of the fuel oil filter bowl for the presence of water and sediment. Pump and clean as necessary. The fluid recovery tank should be ¼ to ½ full. Check compartments and deck for unsecured or loose gear. 3-14 .

S. Readiness and Standardization. Readiness and Standardization.32 (series). 4. Readiness and Standardization. COMDTINST M16114. Date 2. COMDTINST M16114. but not all missions safely” as defined in Part 4. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Unit Instructions or Policy This task will be performed pierside. 5. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Instructor Comments 3-15 . Each of these would “make the boat not serviceable” as defined in Part 4. will prevent the boat from getting underway for an operational mission. Volume I. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. of the U. These are important maintenance issues that “degrade the effectiveness of the boat to perform one or more missions” as defined in Part 4. Volume I. of the U. while normal unit training and lecture programs pertaining to boat operations are being conducted. of the U. Where practicable. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. State the equipment problems or symptoms that would constitute restrictive discrepancies. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Describe the actions to be taken if the disabling casualty is found while underway and at dockside. State the equipment or condition listed in the Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK ENG-01-05-ANY References Conditions List the Disabling Casualties and Restrictive Discrepancies that Prevent the Boat from Getting Underway a. 3.S. These must be documented and corrected but do not otherwise restrict the boat’s service or impact safety of the crew.S. Describe the actions to be taken if the restrictive discrepancy is found while underway and at dockside.32 (series). Volume I. Each of these would “restrict the operations of the boat such that it can perform some missions. COMDTINST M16114 (series) that constitutes a restrictive or major discrepancy. State the equipment problems or symptoms that would constitute disabling casualties. COMDTINST M16114. Describe examples of problems or symptoms that would constitute major discrepancies. COMDTINST M16114 (series) that constitutes a disabling casualty. b. The trainee must know what steps must be followed when a casualty or discrepancy is found.32 (series). the pierside instructions should be followed by related underway exercises. the trainee must state the equipment that. The trainee must know the difference between disabling casualties and mission critical casualties. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. With reference material and without error. State the equipment or condition listed in the Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. should a casualty or discrepancy occur.

while normal unit training and lecture programs pertaining to boat operations are being conducted. AC generator (if installed). VHF-FM radio. before energizing the main breaker. c. e.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-01-06-ANY References State the Equipment Casualties That Will Prevent the Boat from Getting Underway a. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. will prevent the boat from getting underway for an operational mission. All power switches must be in the off position. Date Instructor Comments TASK ENG-01-07-ANY References Conditions Energize the Electrical and Electronic Systems a. Engine. under direct supervision of the engineer. Compass. d. b. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Unit Standing Orders Conditions This task will be performed at any time. With reference material and without error. 2. classroom instruction should be followed by related underway exercises. The trainee must properly complete all steps below in order to successfully complete this task. Starboard engine battery switch services the starboard engine and the electric bilge pumps. will prevent a boat from getting underway on an operational mission: a. b. f. Depth finder. b. the trainee must state the equipment that . State the purpose of the boat alternators or generator and explain how the charging system works. 3-16 . Port engine battery switch services the port engine and ship’s service loads. c. c. State the equipment that. b. Describe the functions of the electrical systems on the boat: a. d. AUX battery switch services power for electronics and communications equipment. Steering system. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. g. both at the power panels and on the equipment. should a casualty or discrepancy occur. Where practicable. should a casualty occur. Radar. Boston Whaler Manual Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. or while normal unit training and lecture programs pertaining to boat operations are being conducted. Applicable Technical Manuals Boston Whaler Manual This task will be performed on a boat when making preparations for getting underway. GPS/DGPS.

Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. c. COMDTINST M16114 (series) This task will be performed pierside. State the procedures for removing shore power (if applicable). Turn on the power switches at the individual electrical and electronic units. Where practicable. Radar. 5. Serious damage to the engine’s electrical system may result. the parallel system will allow the available power from both batteries to be used for engine starting. d. must state the number and location of all watertight compartments. release the switch once the engine has started or if the engine starter is not cranking. Fathometer. Never turn the battery switches to the off position when the engine is running. Conduct pre-start checks and start the AC generator (if applicable). 3-17 . f. Completed (Initials) NOTE $ 4.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria 3. while normal unit training and lecture programs pertaining to boat operations are being conducted. The parallel solenoid is designed for momentary use only and will be damaged if used continuously. State the purpose of watertight integrity. The trainee must secure all hatches and doors for watertightness. e. 6. State the purpose of the battery charger (if installed). b. Energize the following power switches on the 12-volt circuit breaker panels: a. Main circuit breaker. Console power (battery switches). Instructor Comments TASK ENG-01-08-ANY References Conditions Set Watertight Integrity a. and check for proper operation. VHF radio. The trainee. hatches and doors aboard the boat. the pierside instructions should be followed by related underway exercises. without error. Date 8. In the event the engine fails to start due to insufficient charge of the batteries. Blue lights. g. Navigation lights. 7. State the purpose of the battery parallel system onboard the boat. When using emergency battery parallel switch. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1.

m. Installed dewatering system. Trace out and draw the following systems: a. c. e. Fixed fire fighting system. The trainee must correctly trace out and draw the following systems and list all communications and navigation systems. b. g. Quick-acting watertight doors. Fuel oil system. Date 2. Watertight hatches. Lube oil system. k. h. f. COMDTINST M16114 (series) This task will be performed pierside. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Buoy handling system.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria 2. Watertight compartments. j. i. Hydraulic steering system. List all communications and navigation systems. Instructor Comments 3-18 . Steering system. l. Set watertight integrity. DC electrical system. Date Completed (Initials) 3. Reduction gear lube oil system. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Electrical charging system. Gray water and sewage. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. b. c. AC electrical system (if applicable). d. State the number and location of the following watertight closure devices and compartments aboard the boat: a. Engine cooling water system. Potable water system. Instructor Comments TASK ENG-01-09-ANY References Conditions Standards Draw/List the Boat’s Systems a. n.

Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Section B. In this Section This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number ENG-02-01-ANY ENG-02-02-ANY ENG-02-03-ANY ENG-02-04-ANY ENG-02-05-ANY ENG-02-06-ANY ENG-02-07-ANY ENG-02-08-ANY ENG-02-09-ANY ENG-02-10-ANY ENG-02-11-ANY ENG-02-12-ANY ENG-02-13-ANY ENG-02-14-ANY ENG-02-15-ANY ENG-02-16-ANY Start the Boat Engine Will Not Turn Over or Start Engine Failing to Start with the Starter Turning Over Main Engine High Water Temperature Loss of Main Engine Lube Oil Pressure Loss of Fuel Oil Pressure Main Engine High Lube Oil Pressure Engine Oil System Failure Outboard Failing to Engage Forward or Reverse Outboard Motor Vibration or Spun Propeller Engine Running Uneven or Stalls Loss of Control of Engine RPMs Reduction Gear Failure Overheating Shaft Packing Gland Excessive Shaft Seal Leakage Steering Casualty Task See Page 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-22 3-24 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-26 3-27 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-30 3-31 3-19 . Introduction Propulsion System Start Checks and Casualty Responses The following are obje ctives of Division Two: • • Demonstrate the knowledge of the casualties and discrepancies that would prevent a boat from getting underway. Demonstrate the ability to perform Engineering Casualty Control on a boat.

Ensure engine kill switches are in place and properly set. Start engines one at a time. Energize the battery switches. b. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Conditions This task will be performed when the boat is out of the water while normal unit training and lecture programs pertaining to boat operations are being conducted. Ensure throttles are in the neutral position. Repeat for other engine. b. Squeeze the primer bulbs. until they become firm. (3) Fuel oil system for leaks. 3-20 . 7. 8. 5. raw water. (4) Alternator or voltmeter. (2) Marine gear lube oil pressure gauges. Ensure fuel system is primed and properly aligned for start. and correct and report: (1) Jacket water system and raw water system for leaks. as applicable. jacket water. Energize and inspect all electrical equipment. get underway as soon as checkoff procedures are completed. 11. 4. main switch/breaker and all required switches/breakers for start. (3) Main engine jacket water temperature gauges. or other abnormal conditions. Depress the starter button (or key) and hold until engine starts. 2. (5) Exhaust leaks. 12. The trainee must properly complete all steps below in order to successfully complete this task. c. Applicable Technical Manuals Applicable Manufacturer Manuals Boston Whaler Manual Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. If an engine does not start within 15 seconds. 13. Ensure outboards or outdrive units are in water and trimmed properly. (2) Main engine and marine ge ar for lube oil leaks. 3. (4) Marine gear oil level. Check raw water overboard discharge. if installed. exhaust. the instructions should be followed by related underway exercises. Check propeller shaft packing gland or other through hull fitting for leakage. The following procedures must be performed in the post-start inspection: a. Where practicable. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. d. let it stand for 30 seconds before further attempt. CAUTION ! Do not depress both starter buttons simultaneously. 6. and oil leaks. When practical. Check engine for fuel oil. Check the following items for discrepancies.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-02-01-ANY References Start the Boat a. Check the following gauges: (1) Main engine lube oil gauges. 10. NOTE $ Diesel engines are best warmed up under load. Monitor gauges on console for correct engine operating parameters. 9.

3-21 . Check battery and starter cables for broken.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) NOTE $ With the main engine at idle. 7. or corroded connections. Where practicable. Inspect fuel system for air leaks. CAUTION ! a. Ensure kill switch or kill switch lanyard is in proper position. 6. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. loose. e. 3. d. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. If proper oil pressure is not evident. while normal unit training and lecture programs pertaining to boat operations are being conducted. following the steps listed below. Applicable Technical Manuals Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Use installed voltmeter if applicable. will perform the correct procedures. the main engine for the affected marine gear MUST be secured before adding the oil. upon being given the casualty symptoms. Energize and test all installed electronic components. Complete the following steps prior to getting underway: Close (turn on) all of the remaining breakers on the 24-volt DC and 12-volt DC power panels. 14. 2. Check battery voltage. If actions above do not solve casualty. If additional oil is required. call unit for assistance. immediately secure engine and investigate. The trainee. Inform coxswain on the status of all engineering and electronic systems and if the boat is ready to get underway. b. prime. COMDTINST M16114. b. the oil level of the marine gear must be between the L and H marks on the dipstick. Ensure main power switch or breakers are in proper position. Ensure gear is properly stowed and watertight integrity is set. Test throttle operation in forward and reverse. Date Instructor Comments TASK ENG-02-02-ANY References Engine Will Not Turn Ove r or Start a. and correct valve alignment. Ensure throttle is in neutral. 5. c. the instructions should be followed by related underway exercises. 4.5 (series) Conditions This task will be performed when the boat is in the cradle or underway during daylight hours.

The instructor will ask the trainee to state the proper jacket water temperature range and at what temperature the alarm will sound. 2. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. 3. Check engine main circuit breaker. will perform the correct procedures. Inspect fuel hoses. following the steps listed below. Identify affected engine. Inspect fuel filter and housing. The trainee. in calm or moderate weather conditions. 3. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Conditions Standards This task will be performed while underway. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. upon being given the casualty symptoms. 2. The trainee must state the correct temperatures. 4.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK ENG-02-03-ANY References Conditions Engine Failing to Start with the Starter Turning Over a. Upon being given the casualty symptoms. Applicable Technical Manuals Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Reduce RPMs. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. the trainee will simulate and state correct procedures to be taken. during daylight hours. Notify crew of casualty. Check fuel system priming bulbs. Date Instructor Comments TASK ENG-02-04-ANY References Main Engine High Water Temperature a. Applicable Technical Manuals This task will be performed on a boat while making preparations for getting underway. The trainee will be assigned as Engineer. b. 3-22 .

secure the engine(s). 14. Crew member: If necessary. the engine(s) should be secured and cooled naturally. If necessary. 6. secure and trim up affected motor. Ensure sea suction valves are open. trim down motor. NOTE $ NOTE $ Anti-freeze is poisonous. start up. 9. periodically rotate the engine with the starter. to prevent seizure until the engine cools. Check raw water pump with back of hand or telltale cooling water line. shift strainers. 12. check the jacket water level. Instructor Comments Date 3-23 . CAUTION ! 5. 13. 8. If applicable. Inspect seawater suction for debris. 4. 11. Check lube oil for proper quantity and quality. Oil alarms and sensors are directly related to engine temperature. 10. 15. If steam is present or if the temperature is 205 ºF or above. Check expansion tank after engine has cooled. 18. Notify Station of situation. An overheating engine will often set off lube oil alarms. 7. the coolant will either flash to steam or boil with a serious potential for injury. Check cooling lines. Check sea strainers. Engineer: Check engine to assess the situation. While the engine is secured and the fuel stop is in the up position.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) WARNING I If steam is flowing from the expansion tank vent. 17. Check bilges. If applicable. If applicable. Check overboard discharge. Do not inhale the fumes. rig the anchor. If the pressure is released when extremely hot by removing the expansion tank cover. 16. and check discharge.

Notify Station of situation. The trainee. SECURE engine immediately. 5. upon being given the casualty symptoms. Check the cooling system recovery bottle for contamination. Upon being given the casualty symptoms. COMDTINST M16114 (series) This task will be performed pierside or underway. WARNING I 2. Date Instructor Comments TASK ENG-02-06-ANY References Conditions Standards Loss of Fuel Oil Pressure a. The instructor will ask the trainee to state the proper oil pressure range and at what pressure the alarm will sound. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. 3-24 . The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. the trainee will simulate and state correct procedures to be taken. COMDTINST M16114 (series) This task will be performed pierside or underway. check lube oil for quality and quantity. Shut down the affected engine immediately unless circumstances warrant continued operation due to safety of the crew. 4. will simulate and state the correct procedures. following the steps listed below: Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. following the steps listed below: Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 6. Notify crew of casualty. Check the primary fuel filter for accumulated sediment and water in the bowls. Ensure fire extinguishers are on scene. 3. The coxswain should reduce RPMs and determine which engine has lost power and inform the crew. upon being given the casualty symptoms. Check the emergency fuel cutout valves to ensure that they are open. Reprime the system. Verify the oil level when the affected engine has been shut down. If applicable. 3. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-02-05-ANY References Conditions Standards Loss of Main Engine Lube Oil Pressure a. The trainee must state the correct pressures. Return to Station if cause cannot be determined or repaired. 7. will perform the correct procedures. Reduce engine RPMs and identify which engine has a loss of lube oil pressure. If engine oil pressure gauge reads zero. The trainee. Replace if suspect. 8. 2.

Date 3. If lube oil pressure exceeds normal range after engine is at operating temperature. suspect internal mechanical problem. secure the engine. Restart the engine and check for proper operation. It is necessary to shut the engine down to obtain a correct lube oil level reading. Applicable Information Book This task will be performed pierside or underway. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 5. The trainee. Check oil on dipstick for milky appearance. check fuel tank level. NOTE $ NOTE $ 2. Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK ENG-02-07-ANY References Conditions Standards Main Engine High Lube Oil Pressure a. upon being given the casualty symptoms. Notify Station of situation.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria 4. Check the entire fuel system for obvious leaks. If there is no water in the oil. will perform the correct procedures. Water intrusion in the engine will cause high lube oil pressure. 6. Leaky engine hatch gaskets in heavy seas or rain can lead to water intrusion at the engine air intakes. reduce speed and investigate cause. a. b. Monitor engine and engine lube oil pressure closely. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. If the problem still persists. If oil has milky appearance. there is water in the lube oil. Instructor Comments 3-25 . Secure the engine. following the steps listed below.

Note engine RPMs. Restart engine. 8.O. Check if propeller is spinning. following the steps listed below. Check water around lower unit for oil sheen or visual oil leaks. 2. upon being given the casualty symptoms. during daylight hours. The trainee. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. b. Date 2. Bring throttles to neutral/idle. upon being given the casualty symptoms. Check oil levels. S. Secure engine. 7. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. The trainee will be assigned as Engineer. 3. 5. Inspect oil distribution manifold and oil lines along with connections around variable ratio oiler (VRO) pump. will perform the correct procedures. 4. 3. 9. 6. The trainee will be assigned as Engineer. 3-26 . during daylight hours. Applicable Technical Manuals This task will be performed on the boat while underway. System check. Check shift linkage at the console. Check shift linkage at the engine. Instructor Comments TASK ENG-02-09-ANY References Conditions Outboard Failing to Engage Forward or Reverse a.L.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-02-08-ANY References Conditions Engine Oil System Failure a. The trainee. in calm or moderate weather conditions. following the steps listed below. in calm or moderate weather conditions. will perform the correct procedures.W. Prime oil system using priming bulb. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. Applicable Technical Manuals This task will be performed on a boat both dockside and while underway. Identify the symptoms for engine oil system failure: a.

Bring throttles to neutral and note vibration. Secure the engine. 3. 3-27 . upon being given the casualty symptoms.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK ENG-02-10-ANY References Conditions Outboard Motor Vibration or Spun Propeller a. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. upon being given the casualty symptoms. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. the instructions should be followed by related underway exercises. Applicable Technical Manuals This task will be performed on a boat while underway. Note engine RPMs. The trainee. 4. 3. Trim down outboard and restart. Ensure fuel supply valve is open and fuel system correctly aligned. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. Where practicable. Ensure fuel stop “T handle” is in the run position. 5. 2. following the steps listed below. during daylight hours. Inspect propeller and lower unit condition. The trainee. following the steps listed below. The trainee will be assigned as engineer. while normal unit training and lecture programs pertaining to boat operations are being conducted. in calm or moderate weather conditions. Trim up outboard. Note vibration. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. will perform the correct procedures. Applicable Technical Manuals This task will be performed when the boat is in the cradle or underway during daylight hours. Date Instructor Comments TASK ENG-02-11-ANY References Conditions Engine Running Uneven or Stalls a. Ensure fuel stop linkage is intact. will perform the correct procedures. 2.

6. if applicable. the coxswain should pull the emergency air shutdown for the affected engine. If this fails. Check fuel filter(s) for contamination. If applicable. 7.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria 4. will perform the correct procedures. 5. Check level of fuel tank. upon being given the casualty symptoms. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. 8. WARNING I Instructor Comments Date 3-28 . 6. Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK ENG-02-12-ANY References Conditions Standards Loss of Control of Engine RPMs a. 4. If this fails to control the engine RPMs. COMDTINST M16114 (series) This task will be performed pierside or underway. push and hold down the engine stop button for the affected engine. If the engine fails to secure. Do not restart the engine until the problem has been corrected. following the steps listed below. Depleting the fire fighting capabilities of the boat can be dangerous. 7. Bring the engine control back to idle. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Check intake air system for restrictions. call unit for assistance. Check fuel supply lines for air leaks. The trainee. or if the fuel cutoff fails to secure the engine. 5. 3. switch to a different control station. ensure the active light is lit for the throttle control station in use. If time does not allow for the affected engine to run out of fuel. Do not use the CO2 or Halon system to secure the engine. the engineer should pull the fuel cutoff valve handle for the affected engine and allow the engine to run out of fuel. 2. If actions above do not solve casualty. and attempt to take control. repair and bleed if necessary.

b. b. will perform the correct procedures. mis-adjustment of the linkage may be preventing the gear from engaging. Instructor Comments 3-29 . Date 6. place control in clutch ahead. 8.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-02-13-ANY References Conditions Reduction Gear Failure a. The engineer should check throttle control system breakers on the power panel to ensure the breakers have not tripped. If the affected transmission will not respond electronically to clutch engagement. NOTE $ 2. Where practicable. Bring engine control to the neutral position. Adjust/repair as necessary to obtain positive engagement in forward and reverse. Check the reduction gear lube oil level. If the marine gear engages. secure engine and notify Station of situation. If pressure rises to the clutched in range. If all mechanical checks have been made. proceed to troubleshooting the electronic controls. the problem is in the linkage adjustment or cable clamps in the control head or at the marine gear. while normal unit training and lecture programs pertaining to boat operations are being conducted. If pressure does not rise to the normal clutched in range. If there is no pressure. a. 7. Even though the controls and linkage may be actuating the selector valve. the instructions should be followed by related underway exercises. The trainee. Applicable Technical Manuals This task will be performed when the boat is underway during daylight hours. 4. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. If pressure is in the normal range for idle. but doesn’t engage. 3. Disconnect linkage at selector valve and shift lever into forward position. Malfunction is internal. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. manually lock the clutch in the forward station and proceed to port for repairs. Request permission from the coxswain to manually engage the marine gear. upon being given the casualty symptoms. Attempt to take throttle control at each of the remaining throttle control stations. following the steps listed below. If the marine gear will not engage using this method. a. 5. Ensure cables are attached to reduction gear controls. bring control back to neutral and secure the engine. secure engine immediately. Perform the steps listed below to eliminate faulty linkage or linkage adjustment as the cause of the casualty. check linkage in the control head and at the selector valve. Check marine gear lube oil pressure.

Adjust and recheck as needed to obtain normal shaft and packing gland temperatures throughout the entire speed range. b. call unit for assistance. The trainee. 2. 5. The engineer should inform the crew of the casualty. Performance Criteria Complete d (Initials) 1. The engineer should realign the seal assembly and check to see if the seal clamp has backed off. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1.5 (series) Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. following the steps listed below. Date Instructor Comments TASK ENG-02-15-ANY References Conditions Standards Excessive Shaft Seal Leakage a. 3-30 . COMDTINST M16114 (series) This task can be performed pierside or underway. Cool down the shaft and packing gland with raw water. COMDTINST M16114. CAUTION ! 3. must accurately identify the casualty and perform the correct procedures. Evenly back off hex nuts on gland to loosen packing until enough leakage is obtained to keep shaft and gland cool (normally 6-10 drops of water per minute). Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Applicable Technical Manuals Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. The coxswain should place throttles to neutral and secure the affected engine. must accurately identify the casualty and perform the correct procedures. after being given the casualty symptoms. following the steps listed below. but do not secure the engine or shaft. The trainee. 2.5 (series) Conditions Standards This task can be performed pierside or underway.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-02-14-ANY References Overheating Shaft Packing Gland a. Use caution when working in the vicinity of a rotating shaft. De-energize the start switch in the engine room to prevent inadvertent starting of the engine while working around the shaft. b. COMDTINST M16114. CAUTION ! 4. after being given the casualty symptoms. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. 3. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. If above actions do not solve the casualty. Reduce speed.

restart the engine after realignment and roll the shaft. secure the engine. n. The coxswain shall give standard steering commands to the crew members tending the rudder. rig the anchor. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. If the clamp ring remains tight. Check system from stern to helm for cause of casualty (e. Place engines in neutral. Is applicable. o. Gain control of the rudders using the emergency tiller. If the seal continues to leak excessively. k. Coxswain: Steer with engines. low fluid). if needed. Secure the affected shaft with line to prevent rotation and subsequent damage.g. 5. COMDTINST M16114 (series) This task will be performed while underway. upon being given the casualty symptoms. secure the shaft cooling water pump. Date Complete d (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK ENG-02-16-ANY References Conditions Standards Steering Casualty a. Crew member: Remove emergency tiller from stowage bracket. Bring both main engine throttle controls to the neutral or minimum steerage clutch position if in a running sea. Engineer: Investigate the casualty. The engineer should then loosen the seal clamp ring and reposition it in a position that properly compresses the seal bellows. Restart the engine and roll the shaft. Crew member: If necessary. m. Carefully mount the emergency tiller. c. secure the engine and shaft. Try to put the seas on the bow. will perform the correct procedures. 3-31 . f. Notify crew of casualty. following the steps listed below. d. a. Test rudders for complete range of motion (full port to full starboard). 6. i. j. b. e. The following procedures must be performed if a steering hose is broken: a. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Keep the main engine RPMs at a minimum to reduce strain on the crew tending the emergency tiller. p. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. Perform required damage control to slow the rate of leakage. Notify Station of situation. 7. l. h. If excessive water continues to leak from the seal. Check electrical power source for steering. 8. Engage each shaft separately to reduce propeller thrust on the rudder blades and emergency tiller. The trainee. Bring the tiller arm about until the rudder arm position indicates the rudders are amidship.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria 4. g.

damage. Carefully install emergency tiller. c. Place engines in neutral. Reduce RPMs on both engines. d. Notify crew of casualty. and propellers. k.).. Use main engines. Try to put the seas on the bow. The coxswain shall give standard steering commands to the crew members tending the rudder. n. to prevent movement. Turn steering wheel to isolate cable/ram damage. 3. adjust the opposite rudder to gain the greatest steerage. m. to regain and maintain steerage. Detach release pin on starboard rudder post to disconnect steering cable/hydraulic ram. secure it. Date Instructor Comments 3-32 . Bring both main engine throttle controls to the neutral or minimum steerage clutch position if in a running sea. debris. e. If the starboard rudder is jammed. f. Crew Member: Remove emergency tiller from stowage bracket. if possible (i. g. Coxswain: Steer with engines. mounting it on the port rudder post. keep the ram attached to prevent movement. if needed. Maintain positive control. Engineer: If necessary. WARNING I s. as soon as possible. Crew Member: If necessary. Reinstall steering cable/hydraulic ram release pin. Determine the cause. If unable to free the jammed rudder (using attempts to rack it back and forth with the emergency tiller or by clearing any debris). Completed (Initials) NOTE $ o. If sternway is necessary. h. The following procedures must be performed to regain control with a jammed rudder: a. man the tiller at all times while it is installed on a rudder post. Keep main engine RPMs at a minimum to reduce stress on the crew tending the emergency tiller. Gain control of rudders using the tiller located in the lazarette. After securing the jammed rudder. Maintain control of the port rudder with the tiller and the starboard rudder with the steering wheel. Backing down produces a heavy surge on the rudder. l. j.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria 2. To prevent injury. rig the anchor.e. p. Engineer: Investigate the casualty. b. i. carefully remove the tie rod bar connecting the port and starboard rudder posts. r. lash the emergency tiller/rudder arm with mooring lines to the stern cleats to prevent movement. Use caution while exercising each rudder to determine which rudder is jammed. etc. Notify Station of situation. q. do not exceed 1000 RPM. throttles shafts. If the port rudder is jammed.

b. Inspect hull. 3-33 . upon being given the casualty symptoms. Maneuver to safe water. while normal unit training and lecture programs pertaining to boat operations are being conducted. a. Tilt each outboard or outdrive unit up and inspect lower unit and propeller for damage. e. a.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Section C. will perform the correct procedures. d. Respond to striking a submerged object or temporary grounding casualty. following the steps listed below: Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. Where practicable. Demonstrate use of any emergency steering system if applicable. the instructions should be followed by related underway exercises. Introduction • • In this Section Boat Disabling Casualties The following are objectives of Division Three: Demonstrate the knowledge of the casualties and discrepancies that would prevent a boat from getting underway. Respond to a loss of steering casualty. Demonstrate the ability to perform Engineering Casualty Control on a boat. c. 2. Test steering system for damage or restrictions. c. bilges and compartments for leaks or damage. Test steering for complete range and function after repair. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. Inspect steering gear or system for damage or fouling. This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number ENG-03-01-ANY ENG-03-02-ANY ENG-03-03-ANY ENG-03-04-ANY ENG-03-05-ANY ENG-03-06-ANY ENG-03-07-ANY Task Basic Casualty Response Fire in the Engine Room Fire Onboard Fire in the Auxiliary Machinery Space Capsizing Flooding Collision with a Submerged Object See Page 3-33 3-35 3-35 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 TASK ENG-03-01-ANY References Conditions Basic Casualty Response a. d. The trainee. Test propulsion system (each engine individually) by running up slowly to check for damage or vibrations. Applicable Technical Manuals This task will be performed when the boat is underway during daylight hours. Maintain heading or control with engines keeping the seas on the bow if possible. b.

Respond to engine high water temperature (overheating) casualty. 6. Check shift linkage at engine. Secure electrical power (if situation warrants). b. b. Date Completed (Initials) 4. 7. Check if propeller is turning. d. Bring throttle controls to neutral/idle. c. e. Note engine RPM. e. Respond to a fire onboard. d. c. Secure engine if necessary. Unit and other vessels in vicinity notified of situation. d. Check quantity and quality of coolant.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Performance Criteria 3. c. Check water around lower unit for oil sheen or visual oil leaks. Instructor Comments 3-34 . d. Check for overboard discharge. Bring throttles back to neutral and check for vibration. Check each engine individually by engaging into forward and reverse gears and bringing up RPMs slowly. Check quantity and quality of oil for signs of contamination (milky). outboard motor vibration or damaged propeller. Bring throttle controls to neutral/idle. Reduce engine RPMs and observe changes. Check for fouling of the cooling water intake. a. Bring throttles to neutral/idle. Check bilges for signs of oil leaks. Check cooling system integrity and coolant level. b. Consider risk versus gain of abandoning boat. Check oil level. then secure. Respond to engine vibration. b. c. a. Trim down outboard or outdrive and restart. Respond to a loss of oil pressure casualty. a. e. Secure engine(s) and trim up outboard or outdrive to inspect propeller and lower unit. e. d. Respond to loss of shift control casualty (engine fails to engage in forward or reverse). a. c. Check shift linkage at console. a. 8. Demonstrate rigging and deploying anchor as appropriate in any of the above casualty scenarios. Note vibration. Use onboard fire extinguishers and any other means available to extinguish fire. Secure effected engine. 9. Unit notified and kept informed during all of the above casualty response scenarios. b. 5.

The engineer should try to determine size and source of fire by looking through the portlight in the watertight door. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114 (series) This task can be performed while underway or pierside. and inform all crewmembers. WARNING I 7. 6. Ensure that crewmembers are aware of the installed fire fighting agent (CO2 or Halon).Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-03-02-ANY References Conditions Fire in the Engine Room a. It is extremely dangerous to enter a compartment during or after a fire. The engineer should proceed to the machinery space and ensure the engine room watertight door is tightly closed. As much as possible. 4. however. 2. WARNING I 5. Where practicable. any introduction of oxygen into the compartment may ignite a fire reflash.5 (series) Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Trainee shall demonstrate proper methods of controlling and extinguishing an engine room fire too large to be combated with only the portable fire extinguishers aboard. Keep the engine room secured until towed ashore and secured. Keep the space sealed until towed ashore and secured. COMDTINST M16114. Given a boat with required fire fighting equipment and installed systems.5 (series) This task will be performed on a boat dockside during daylight hours in calm or moderate weather conditions. extensive ventilation is necessary to ensure safety when entering. the dockside training should be followed up by underway exercises. COMDTINST M16114. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Date Instructor Comments TASK ENG-03-03-ANY References Conditions Fire Onboard a. Secure all sources of DC electrical power except those required to operate VHF radios. discharge the installed fire extinguishing system. in accordance with the steps listed below: Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards NOTE $ 1. stay off of the after deck as the heat may have caused structural damage. The coxswain should secure the engines and generator. The trainee will be assigned as engineer. 3. After the engine room has been flooded with CO2. then secure the fuel oil by pulling the emergency fuel cutout valves. Ensure power to one VHF-FM radio is maintained for communications. 3-35 . Notify the unit once the situation is under control. take corrective action. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the symptoms to the trainee. if applicable. b. If fire is observed or cause of smoke cannot be determined.

4. then secured. will perform the correct procedures. 3. do not enter the auxiliary machinery space compartment under any circumstances. COMDTINST M16114 (series) This task will be performed pierside or underway. if situation warrants. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. Secure electrical power. following the steps listed below: Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 4. 2. inform all crew members and notify the Station.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Standards The trainee will demonstrate the p roper methods of controlling and extinguishing a fire onboard without prompting or use of a reference. If underway. The coxswain should secure the engines. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Use fire extinguishers and any other means available to extinguish fire. The engineer should proceed to the survivor’s compartment and secure the battery cutout switches on the port forward bulkhead. WARNING I WARNING I Instructor Comments Date 3-36 . There is not an installed fire fighting system for this compartment. Date Instructor Comments TASK ENG-03-04-ANY References Conditions Standards Fire in the Auxiliary Machinery Space a. Keep the auxiliary machinery space sealed until towed to safe moorage and secured. Ensure that the watertight doors leading to the auxiliary machinery space are closed. if possible. Notify unit of situation. following the steps listed below: Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. upon being given the casualty symptoms. 2. 3. Complete inspection of the electrical system should be made once the compartment has been deemed safe to enter. The trainee. In the event of a fire in the space. ensure throttles brought to neutral on both engines. Do not hook up the shore-tie.

When applicable. Once dewatering is complete. Closely check the material condition of each compartment. Each compartment should be thoroughly wiped or washed down as appropriate. rig the portable dewatering pump on the aft deck and connect the suction line to the engine room suction standpipe. All wiring must be cleaned. such as reduction gear. check to see if both engines are running and if the coxswain has engine and steering control. NOTE $ 7. all electrical equipment must be tested thoroughly. and main engine oil should be replaced whenever the possibility of contamination has occurred. The trainee. determine whether it is safe to proceed with the mission or whether to return to the unit. If the flooding is too severe to be handled by the electric bilge pumps. Investigate the condition of the engine room by looking through the window in the watertight door. upon being given the casualty symptoms. COMDTINST M16114 (series) This task will be performed pierside or underway. 4. NOTE $ WARNING I NOTE $ All compartments must be inspected for water intrusion and damage. 2. A portable VHF/FM radio is the best means of passing critical situation reports immediately following this type of situation. Begin dewatering the vessel by energizing all of the installed electric pumps. check the oil in both main engines (engines must be secured to ensure an accurate reading). the boat engineer should go below to check for damage. Add oil as necessary. 8. Take precautions if operating in surf. hydraulic system. if circumstances make securing the engines inappropriate. presenting a fire hazard. Assist coxswain in regaining control of the boat. The engine room may be coated with water and oil. electronic or electrical components will be replaced. Once complete. The engine room must be washed down and all insulation material in the survivor’s compartment must be inspected. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symp toms. Report results to the coxswain. 3. Upon re-righting. A backup means of communications is critical after a capsizing or knockdown. Electronic equipment in all below-deck spaces may be soaked with water. Engines should be shut down to check oil level. All fluids and associated filters. Do not hook up the shore-tie. After damage has been assessed. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. 5. When in safe water and upon direction of the coxswain. wait to check the oil levels until the situation has further stabilized. Upon returning to the Station. will perform the correct procedures. 9. dried and inspected. 6. In the mean time.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TAS K ENG-03-05-ANY References Conditions Standards Capsizing a. keep a close eye on the engine oil pressure. following the steps listed below: Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 3-37 . Check the crew to ensure no one was lost overboard or injured. all electronic and electrical equipment must be tested and cleaned.

COMDTINST M16114 (series) This task can be performed pierside or underway. If directed. enter the space to investigate. The engineer or coxswain will check the control panel to identify the space where flooding is indicated. The engineer shall report to the coxswain the extent. In the event of engine room flooding. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. 4. After damage has been assessed. The crew will prepare to apply basic casualty control procedures. A sounding of the alarm will indicate water in the bilge space. secure the generator set before entering the space. secure the power panels that feed the spaces before entering. making ready the damage control kit and dewatering pump as required. after being given the casualty symptoms. CAUTION ! Instructor Comments Date 3-38 . 5. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. The crew shall check the material condition of each compartment. cause and corrective actions necessary to control or stop the flooding. the coxswain shall determine whether it is safe to proceed with the mission or return to the unit. following the steps listed below: Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. then report the results to the coxswain. The bilge flooding alarm system is designed to notify the crew of an onboard EMERGENCY underway as well as dockside.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK ENG-03-06-ANY References Conditions Standards Flooding a. Push the RESET button to silence the alarm. and report status to coxswain. The engineer and a crew member will proceed to the flooded space indicated by the control panel. The trainee. b. 6. 3. must accurately identify the casualty and perform the correct procedures. This system should be confirmed operational prior to and upon return from any missions or sorties. WARNING I NOTE $ 2. If flooding is detected in other spaces. look through the portlight in the watertight door.5 (series) Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook.

Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-03-07-ANY References Conditions Standards Collision with a Submerged Object a. stop engines. If vibration is too severe. 5. The trainee. 6. Also. will perform the correct procedures. trim/tilt engines up and investigate propeller. Check for normal rudder movement stopto-stop. COMDTINST M16114 (series) This task can be performed while underway. NOTE $ 8. 4. Individually bring up the engine RPMs to determine range and severity of vibration. upon being given the casualty symptoms. The crew member should check all forward compartments for damage. lower unit or outdrive. 200 RPM below range of vibration. Make reports to the coxswain. The engineer should check the engine room and lazarette for damage. inform the rest of the crew. The engineer and a crew member should proceed to the machinery space to check shafting for damage. the boat should be hoisted to determine extent of damage. following the steps listed below: Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 2. 3. check shaft seals for leakage. If possible. Reduce engine RPMs throttles to neutral. and try to determine what the boat hit. The instructor will simulate the casualty by providing the trainee with the casualty symptoms. Check for flooding. 7. Maintain engine RPMs. Conduct steering check by turning helm hard port and starboard. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. especially if there is a vibration. Verify status of bilge alarms and physically check areas below the waterline. place that shaft into neutral or secure engine. For outboard or outdrive equipped crafts. Date Instructor Comments 3-39 .

COMDTINST M16114 (series) Conditions This task will be performed when the boat is out of the water. Secure all breakers in the 24-VDC power panel in the machinery space except for those required to maintain fire. CAUTION ! NOTE $ Do not check engine coolant levels until temperature has dropped to 140 °F or below. If equipped. Shut down the engine. b. Close generator seawater suction valve. Allow the engines to idle 4-5 minutes. Where practicable. 8. Check all machinery fluid levels and refill as necessary. Allow associated alarm to activate. Secure start system battery cutout switch. Applicable Technical Manuals Applicable Manufacturer Manuals Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number ENG-04-01-ANY Task Secure the Boat After Operations See Page 3-40 TASK ENG-04-01-ANY References Secure the Boat After Operations a. Conduct a visual inspection of the engine room bilges for any obvious abnormalities. then secure alarm. windows. and lighting systems. 4. 6. 3-40 . the instructions should be followed by related underway exercises. 3. hatches and scuttles. 7. 5. flooding.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Section D. 2. trim/tilt outboard engine or outdrive into storage position as appropriate. Introduction • In this Section Post-Operational Checks The following are objectives of Division Four: Demonstrate the ability to secure a boat after operations. Shift electrical load from ship to shore power. c. especially if recently run at high RPM. Secure all electrical gear with the exception of the main switch. 11. The trainee must properly complete all steps below in order to successfully complete this task: Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. Close all doors. while normal unit training and lecture programs pertaining to boat operations are being conducted. 10. Secure fuel supply valves to engine. 9. 12. It may be necessary to wait 30 minutes to obtain an accurate reading on engine lube oil levels.

Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Instructor Comments Date 3-41 .

Part 3 – Engineer Qualification 3-42 .

Division Two Reading Assignments . The trainee should read the appropriate reading assignment and answer the related questions prior to beginning training in each new task. then the task will not have a page number to reference.Division One Reading Assignments .Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Chapter 3. Engineer Trainee Study Guide Introduction This Chapter should be removed and given to the trainee to keep. NOTE $ In this Chapter If there is no reading assignment assigned for a specific task. The instructor should then discuss the trainee’s answers to ensure understanding of the subject matter prior to beginning instruction for each new task.Division Four See Page 3-44 3-55 3-62 3-66 3-43 . This Chapter contains the following Sections: Section A B C D Title Reading Assignments . Its purpose is to provide guidance for the trainee’s reading assignments and is not a part of the training record.Division Three Reading Assignments .

Chapter 1. Section D Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks. Chapter 8. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number ENG-01-01-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 8. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Section A. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments . COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114 (series) None assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section E Boston Whaler Manual/Applicable Technical Manuals Boston Whaler Manual/Applicable Technical Manuals Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. Section D Boston Whaler Manual/Applicable Technical Manuals Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks. COMDTINST M16114. Section D Boston Whaler Manual/Applicable Technical Manuals Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks.5 (series). Chapter 8.Division One The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. Appendix 1-A and Chapter 8. COMDTINST M16114 (series) See Page 3-46 • • ENG-01-02-ANY • • 3-48 • ENG-01-03-ANY ENG-01-04-ANY • • 3-51 • • ENG-01-05-ANY • 3-52 ENG-01-06-ANY • 3-52 • ENG-01-07-ANY ENG-01-08-ANY • • 3-53 3-53 3-44 . COMDTINST M16114 (series) Applicable Technical Manuals Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114 (series) Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks.

COMDTINST M16114 (series) See Page 3-54 3-45 .Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Task Number ENG-01-09-ANY • Reading Assignment Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks.

Weapons and ammunition stowage 3-46 . h. d.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-01-01-ANY: 1. Inflatable collar fittings (if equipped) h. Weapons mount Bilge pump access plate Anchor locker Forward drain plug Battery parallel switch(es) Loudhailer control Start/Stop switch Engine circuit breakers Kill switch Main circuit breakers Depth finder transducer 2. Spotlights or searchlights c. e. tow line (if equipped) e. Electric and manual bilge pumps g. Navigation lights (color and location) b. Anchor. lifting eyes) d. f. c. g. chocks. Lanyard for engine kill switch f. anchor line. b. Locate Installed Equipment and Fittings on the Boat State the location of the following items: a. j. Deck fittings (cleats. Locate and state the purpose of the following: a. a. bitts. i.

Describe the location and purpose of the following communications/navigation equipment: a. Fathometer (location of transmitter) d. It will require approximately ______ of water in a bilge space to activate the bilge pumps when set in the __________ mode. 3-47 . 5. UHF radios f. GPS or DGPS b. VHF radios g. Standby compass (magnetic compass) 4. EPIRB i. The installed bilge pump system is a __________ system.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification 3. Surface radar c. Loudhailer control and speakers e. 6. The craft’s cooling water (raw water) system is used for ____________. Installed onboard intercom system (if equipped) h.

State the location of the fuel tank(s) and capacity at 95 percent. The main engines are ____________________. e. 12.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-01-02-ANY: Locate Components and Accessories of the Boat’s Propulsion and Electrical Systems 1. c. 3. b. 10. c. __________ __________ rotation standing aft looking forward The boat’s fuel (________ ______ diesel) is carried in a ______-gallon tank located in the ________________________. d. e. 7. 2. c. c. d. primer bulb. 6. The engine alarm system is operated by the ______-volt ______ electrical system and consists of: a. d. b. Operating fuel pressure at ______ RPM should be between ______-______ PSI. b. State make and model (if installed). State make and model. b. The AC generator is ____________________. the location of the filler neck. __________ horsepower __________ stroke __________ cylinder __________ cooled 4. __________ horsepower __________ stroke __________ cylinder __________ cooled __________ kW rating 5. State the following specifications for the AC generator set engine (if installed): a. State the following specifications for the engines: a. Normal clutch-apply pressure is ______ to ______ PSI. 8. vent valve and if applicable. 9. f. e. State the location of the following components on the engine: a. 11. Direct cooling of the engines is done by a ________-________ freshwater system. d. Alternator Freshwater reservoir/expansion tank Oil level dipstick Fuel pump Throttle control connection Oil fill cap 3-48 .

17. Shore power connector 3-49 . State the location of installed seawater strainers and seachest suction valves. l. Tachometers d. k. h. The cooling system suction is located _____________ and the cooling system weep hole is located ______________.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification g. 16. Battery charger c. o. c. Trim level gauge c. Raw water (seawater) pump Oil filter Fuel filter(s) Glow plugs (if installed) Hot start system (if installed) Engine coolant heat exchanger Oil cooler (if installed) Intercooler (if installed) Oil level gauge m. a. e. State the idle and cruising readings for the following gauges: a. b. Describe the DC electrical system on your craft and state the location of the following components: a. State the location of the following gauges: b. Turbocharger (if installed) 13. i. j. Water temperature 14. n. Batteries b. d. Engine lube oil pressure Engine coolant temperature Marine gear oil pressure (if installed) Boost pressure (if installed) Engine RPM at idle/cruising 15.

outboard and steering system. Describe the potable water system (if installed) on the assigned boat. Include all major components. State how to fill and purge the system. State the function of the engine kill switch. Describe the sewage system (if installed) on the assigned boat. 19.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification d. Battery switch and indicator e. The engine stop controls are located _________________________. Batteries are located ___________________. 20. 26. Describe the cathodic protection system installed in the assigned boat. Describe the gray water system (if installed) on the assigned boat. Essential breakers and switches 18. Compassing sending unit is located __________________. 3-50 . 23. State the type of coolant. outdrive. 21. 24. 22. 25. Describe the boat’s steering system. oil or lubricant required for the engine. 27.

fluid. 3. 9. 10. Check engine drive belt tension. Visually inspect the _________________ filter for the presence of sediment and water. State in what position the battery switch(es) should be for starting. 13. Never start or __________ the engines with the __________ __________ power energized. 8. the marine gear oil level __________ should be above the __________ mark on the dipstick. 4. 7. 14. 6. near) of the engine oil dipstick. 2. state the location and level for the engine coolant system. lubricant or lubricating oil level that must be checked prior to operation. The engine steering and throttle controls should be checked for ___________ ______ _______________________. With the engine cool or cold. State the coolant. State the correct procedure for disconnecting the shore power cable.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-01-04-ANY: 1. Ensure the _____________ suction valve is open. 11. Damage to the __________ may occur. No greater than __________-inch deflection per foot of span is allowed. 16. State the location (side of engine. 5. 12. State why the engine should not be operated with the shore power system energized. When the engine is secured. The marine gear oil level must be rechecked after the engine is __________ and __________ to confirm the correct level on the __________. Ensure all ______ electrical power switches are in the ______ position. The marine gear oil level must be rechecked after the engine is __________ and __________ to confirm the correct level on the __________. 17. Conduct a Pre-Start Checkoff The fuel tanks should be at or near __________ percent during pre-start checks. the marine gear oil level __________ should be above the __________ mark on the dipstick. When the engine is secured. 15. 3-51 .

8. d. h. List three restrictive discrepancies for an assigned boat. A disabling casualty is a casualty that makes the boat __________ ________________. 2. e. 5. Describe what actions must be taken if a disabling casualty occurs while underway. 4. Define the term restrictive discrepancy. b. c. a. c. 3-52 . f. c. List three disabling casualties for an assigned boat. 6. g. a. would prevent the boat from getting underway. List the eight pieces of equipment that. 3. a.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-01-05-ANY: List the Disabling Casualties and Restrictive Discrepancies that Prevent the Boat from Getting Underway 1. If the casualty cannot be repaired within 48 hours. 7. State what must be done if a restrictive discrepancy occurs while underway or dockside. b. b. a ________ shall be sent within ______ hours. 9. TASK ENG-01-06-ANY: State the Equipment Casualties That Will Prevent the Boat from Getting Underway 1. should a casualty occur. The Operational Commander will be notified immediately or within ______ hours after the casualty has been discovered. Give some examples of major discrepancies for an assigned boat.

d. c. Name them and list fore and aft bulkheads: 3. The starboard engine battery switch serves the _________ and the ________________. Set Watertight Integrity How many watertight compartments are aboard the boat? 2. 3. The port engine battery switch serves the _____________ and _____________ loads. Energize the Electrical and Electronic Systems What is the purpose of the boat stators? 2. 3-53 . b. The AUX battery switch supplies power to ____________________. 4.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-01-07-ANY: 1. What is the function of the battery parallel system? TASK ENG-01-08-ANY: 1. 5. The following are secondary watertight compartments which aid in self-righting the craft in event of a capsize: a.

Fuel oil system (tank to engine) b. Electrical system(s). Raw water (seawater) cooling system c. Steering system e. Draw the Boat’s Systems Draw the following systems and label all components: a. AC and DC (include shore power interface) 3-54 . Freshwater cooling system d.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-01-09-ANY: 1.

Chapter 8. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number ENG-02-01-ANY • • Reading Assignment Boston Whaler Manual/Applicable Technical Manuals Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks. Section E Boston Whaler Manual/Applicable Technical Manuals Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks. Chapter 8.Division Two The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. Chapter 8.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Section B. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments . COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. Section E Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks. Section E Boston Whaler Manual/Applicable Technical Manuals Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114 (series) See Page 3-57 ENG-02-02-ANY • 3-57 • ENG-02-03-ANY • 3-58 • ENG-02-04-ANY • 3-58 • • ENG-02-05-ANY • • 3-58 ENG-02-06-ANY • 3-59 • ENG-02-07-ANY • 3-59 3-55 . COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section E Boston Whaler Manual/Applicable Technical Manuals Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 8. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Applicable Technical Manuals Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks.5 (series).5 (series).

Section E Boston Whaler Manual/Applicable Technical Manuals Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section E Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Task Number ENG-02-08-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section E Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks. Chapter 8.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). Section E Boston Whaler Manual/Applicable Technical Manuals Applicable Technical Manuals Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 8. COMDTINST M16114. Section E Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks. Chapter 8. COMDTINST M16114 (series) See Page 3-59 • ENG-02-09-ANY • 3-59 • ENG-02-10-ANY • 3-59 • ENG-02-11-ANY • • 3-60 ENG-02-12-ANY • 3-60 ENG-02-13-ANY • • 3-60 • ENG-02-14-ANY • • 3-61 • ENG-02-15-ANY • 3-61 • ENG-02-16-ANY • • 3-61 3-56 . COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114 (series) Applicable Technical Manuals Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. Section E Boston Whaler Manual/Applicable Technical Manuals Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 8.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114 (series) Applicable Technical Manuals Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 8. Chapter 8. Chapter 8.5 (series).5 (series). COMDTINST M16114 (series) Applicable Technical Manuals Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section E Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbooks.

Engine Will Not Turn Over or Start The engine/throttle should be in the __________________. 5. If outside temperature is below freezing. The primer bulb should be squeezed __________________. 6. 12. At idle. State what visual checks should be conducted on the engine prior to getting the boat underway. the engine RPM should be approximately _____________ RPM. Do not depress both starter buttons___________. 3. Start the Boat State the location and purpose of the engine kill switch (if equipped). the oil pressure gauge should read at or above ____________ PSI. Start engines ____at a time. 2. State any procedures for energizing the installed communications/navigation equipment. release the __________ button and let stand __________ minutes. release the button and wait ___________ seconds before attempting another start. If the engine fails to start. If proper oil pressure is not evident. 13. 7. 7. 3. 4. 3-57 . the oil levels of the marine gear should between ______ and ______ on the dipstick. 5. 14. State the location of the engine kill switch and in what position it should be prior to start. Depress the __________ engine __________ button and hold until the engine starts. 9. 8. The throttle should be in ____________ prior to engaging the starter. At idle. 6. What is the normal battery voltage for the assigned craft and where can it be read? Where is the engine starter located? Describe (if applicable) how to prime the engine fuel system for the assigned craft. State the location of the raw water (seawater) overboard discharge for engine cooling. If an engine does not start within __________ seconds. The start button should be depressed for _________ seconds. 2. At idle the water temperature should be ________ ºF and the water pressure ___________ PSI. and repeat starting procedures. 4. List the possible causes for an engine that will not start: TASK ENG-02-02-ANY: 1. 11. ________ ________ ________ and investigate.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-02-01-ANY: 1. 10. With the main engines at idle. state what systems might need to be energized to start the craft.

c. Removing ________ ________ ________ while engine is hot may cause coolant to flash to steam causing ________ ________. ________ engine. ______ engine immediately. Check the fuel system. e. 7. If the strainers are clean. b. Check the following for possible problems: a. d. 5. in particular the system ___________ and the ________ and housing.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-02-03-ANY: 1. 3. TASK ENG-02-05-ANY: 1. Engine Failing to Start with the Starter Turning Over Check the ____________ switch ______________. If the ________ is burned up. 4. the cover will be very hot. Check the engine main _______________ ___________________. check the ________ ________ pump cover lightly with the ________ of the ________ for coolness. TASK ENG-02-04-ANY: 1. The operating parameters are ______ min _______ max at idle ______ min ________ max at cruising. What procedure should be followed to keep an engine from seizing? If steam is present or engine temperature is above ______ ºF. 4. f. c. e. 2. 6. d. 3. 3. b. 2. 2. Main Engine High Water Temperature What is the normal operating range for the water temperature? State the six corrective actions to be taken for engine high water temperature: a. f. 3-58 . Loss of Main Engine Lube Oil Pressure If engine oil pressure gauge reads ______. Check the condition of the fuel system _____________ bulbs.

Main Engine High Lube Oil Pressure Water __________ in the engine will cause __________ __________ __________ pressure._________ and if oil pressure continues to decrease ___________ the __________. The oil system should be __________ using the __________ bulb. Leaky engine hatch gaskets in __________ __________ or __________ can lead to water intrusion at the __________ __________ intakes. means in regards to an engine oil failure casualty. State what S.W. Outboard Motor Vibration or Spun Propeller Note the __________ at which the vibration occurs. Engine Oil System Failure If an engine experiences no/low oil pressure. 3. TASK ENG-02-07-ANY: 1. TASK ENG-02-08-ANY: 1.O. 3-59 . Once the engine is secured.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-02-06-ANY: 1. 2. TASK ENG-02-10-ANY: 1. 3. 2. If necessary _____________________ the fuel system. Secure the engine and ___________ _______ the outboard to inspect the ________ and ____________. 2. Perform a quick _______. 5. 3. 4. Bringing throttles t o _________ note any change in vibration. verify that the ___________ is _______________. the throttles should be placed in _____________ and the engines secured. Verify the __________________ ________________________ levels. With the engine operating. check for an ____________ ____________ around the lower unit.L. Check the primary __________ ____________________ for _____________ and/or _________________. 4. 2. Loss of Fuel Oil Pressure The engineer should request that the coxswain reduce the engine RPMs to _____________ ___________________. Outboard Failing to Engage Forward or Reverse Check the linkage at the _____________ and the ____________. TASK ENG-02-09-ANY: 1. 2.

3. Check the ______________-volt power p anel for tripped breakers. b. 3-60 . Reduction Gear Failure Ensure that the ___________________ light is lit at the control station in use. Check oil level and restart the engine and check the clutch apply pressure. The ______________ valve on the reduction gear allows for ________________ operation. If the engine fails to secure. should be _________ to _________ PSI. 4. 2. List the steps that need to be accomplished after you free wheel for over 8 hours of operation. 7. Verify the __________ intake system for obstructions. Using the free wheel feature. 8. Check the _______________ ________________ for visual contamination. 2. 5. TASK ENG-02-12-ANY: 1. the clutch-apply pressure should be ______-______ PSI. Engine Running Uneven or Stalls Check the fuel system ____________ alignment if the engine runs uneven or stalls. 6. fill the marine gear _______ with oil. 4. 3. the engineer should proceed to the ________ ________ and pull the fuel ________ ________ for the affected and allow the engine to _________________________. 3. Loss of Control of Engine RPMs Bring the engine back to ________ ________.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-02-11-ANY: 1. 5. DO NOT use the ______ system to secure the engine. 2. Check that the ______________ are attached to the reduction gear controls. Verify the ____________ ____________ level. TASK ENG-02-13-ANY: 1. When the clutch is engaged. a. c. Check the ___________________ linkage for security and worn or missing hardware.

Excessive Shaft Seal Leakage The engineer should realign the _______ assembly and check to see if the ________ _______ has backed off. immediately take the following three corrective actions: a.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-02-14-ANY: 1. the engineer should recommend ____________. suspect a broken __________ __________. _____ oil is used in the steering system. 2. air in the system. Steering Casualty List the four likely causes of steering loss: a. c. 3. Where is the emergency tiller located on the boat? 3-61 . b. b. c. _____________ the affected shaft with _______________. 2. 4. d. Overheating Shaft Packing Gland If there is no water coming from the shaft packing gland __________ to __________ drops per and the __________ box gland is too hot to __________. 2. If after alignment excessive water continues to leak from the seal. If the helm turns __________ without any effect on the __________. or __________ fitting. TASK ENG-02-16-ANY: 1. stop the engine. If after alignment the seal continues to leak. TASK ENG-02-15-ANY: 1. 3. Do not place a __________ near the turning __________ until you bring the __________ to clutch speed.

COMDTINST M16114 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Boston Whaler Manual/Applicable Technical Manuals Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Chapter 8. and Chapter 18 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section E Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Boston Whaler Manual/Applicable Technical Manuals Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook.Division Three The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. Sections I and K Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. COMDTINST M16114. Section E. COMDTINST M16114 (series) See Page 3-63 ENG-03-02-ANY • 3-64 • ENG-03-03-ANY ENG-03-04-ANY • • 3-64 3-64 ENG-03-05-ANY • 3-64 ENG-03-06-ANY • 3-65 • ENG-03-07-ANY • • 3-65 3-62 .5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 8. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments .5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 18. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number ENG-03-01-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Section C.5 (series).

Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-03-01-ANY: 1. 5. State all the actions that must be taken and considerations that must be evaluated if a fire occurs onboard. Basic Casualty Response State three actions that should be taken in the event of a steering casualty. High cooling water (freshwater) temperature Loss of engine oil pressure Unusual engine outdrive or outboard vibration Loss of engine control (fails to engage in forward or reverse) 4. 3-63 . b. Describe what action should be taken in regards to restarting the boat if the coxswain of the boat falls overboard or is ejected from the craft. b. 6. 2. State three actions that must be taken if the boat strikes a submerged object or runs temporarily aground. a. c. demonstrate the rigging and deploying of the anchor if required by any casualty. 3. Check for actions that should be taken in response to the following casualties: a. d. c. a. If equipped. c. b.

If at any __________ there is doubt as to the ability to __________ and extinguish and __________ __________ fire. TASK ENG-03-03-ANY: 1. 2. The fixed __________ __________ fire extinguishing system has the capacity to extinguish and __________ __________ fire provided the __________ for its use are followed carefully. or if it is determined to be __________ the capability of the portable fire extinguishers. Notify the ________________. use the __________ __________ __________ __________fire extinguishing system. Once dewatering is complete. Fire in the Engine Room The most logical and best __________ action is to remain __________ and take early __________ action when fire __________ conditions are observed. 2. If required by the location/type of fire. 3. 5. 3. 6. How long should the compartment be ventilated? 4. Electronic equipment in all below deck spaces may be soaked with ______ and ______. Fire in the Auxiliary Machinery Space True or False . 2. 3. secure the _________________________. Do not hook up the ______ ______. The engineer should proceed to the survivor’s compartment and secure the ________ ________ ________ on the ________ ________ bulkhead. Capsizing The average time under water will be approximately ______ to ______ seconds. 2. The fixed CO2 fire extinguishing system must be __________ operated. Fire Onboard Bring the _____________ to neutral and _______________ the __________________.There are no fire or smoke detectors in the auxiliary machinery space. check the ______ in both main engines.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-03-02-ANY: 1. 3-64 . TASK ENG-03-05-ANY: 1. The fixed Halon 1301 fire extinguishing system is __________ operated. TASK ENG-03-04-ANY: 1.

TASK ENG-03-07-ANY: 1. Flooding The engineer will check the ________ ________ to identify the space where flooding is indicated. Notify the crew. d. 3.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-03-06-ANY: 1. Check __________ and _______ for flooding. Bring the ______ to neutral. If engine vibration is noted after striking a submerged object. When is it required to verify the operation of the bilge alarm system? The engineer should proceed to the space with the flooding alarm and report to the coxswain the _______________. _____________________ and ______________ ___________________ __________________. What is the bilge flooding alarm system designed for? The central alarm panel located ___________ ___________ ___________ will provide and audible and visual indication of flooding. Collision with a Submerged Object List the four actions that the crew should take after striking a submerged object: a. 6. the engine RPM should be kept at __________ RPM below the vibration range. b. 5. 3. List the location of the installed electric bilge pump(s). 2. c. 3-65 . 4. 2. 4.

Part 3 – Engineer Qualification Section D. COMDTINST M16114 (series) See Page 3-67 • • 3-66 . Chapter 8. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number ENG-04-01-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.Division Four The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. COMDTINST M16114 (series). Section E Boston Whaler Manual/Applicable Technical Manuals Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments .

it may be necessary to _____________ the engine(s). Secure the Boat After Operations The engine should be allowed to idle _____ to _________ minutes prior to securing. Prior to stopping the engine. Once the engine is stopped. the _________ __________________ and ________ __________ should be turned on. If necessary. 5. trim or tilt the outdrive into the _________ position. 2. secure all _________ _____________ except for the main DC power switch. 4. when the boat is installed in a trailer or boat davit cradle. Once shore power is energized. Inspect all ________ compartments and ________ all hatches and ________. Refill the fuel tank(s) to _____________ percent. 3-67 . 3. 6.Part 3 – Engineer Qualification TASK ENG-04-01-ANY: 1. 7.

Part 3 – Engineer Qualification 3-68 .

which must be learned.S.U. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Qualification tasks should be reproduced locally and provided for trainees. NOTE $ In this Part This Part contains the following Chapters: Chapter 1 2 3 Title Task Accomplishment Record for Coxswain Coxswain Qualification Tasks Coxswain Trainee Study Guide See Page 4-3 4-7 4-89 4-1 . Volume II Part 4 Coxswain Qualification Introduction This Part contains a collection of tasks. and performed by the trainee. This Manual is not meant to be ordered for purposes of obtaining individual qualification tasks. practiced. These tasks represent the minimum elements of skill and knowledge necessary for safe and effective performance of a Coast Guard coxswain.

S. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Volume II 4-2 .U.

Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 4-3 . Task Accomplishment Record for Coxswain NOTE $ Instructor should remove this chapter and place it in the trainee’s training record. TRAINEE NAME: _________________________________ INSTRUCTOR NAME: _____________________________ RATE: ____________________ RATE: ____________________ POSITION/QUALIFICATION CODE TO BE TRAINED FOR: ______________________________ NOTE $ Task COX-01-01-ANY COX-01-02-ANY COX-02-01-TYPE COX-02-02-TYPE COX-02-03-TYPE COX-02-04-TYPE COX-02-05-TYPE COX-02-06-ANY COX-03-01-ANY COX-03-02-ANY COX-03-03-TYPE COX-03-04-TYPE COX-03-05-TYPE COX-03-06-TYPE COX-03-07-TYPE Instructors should line through those tasks not applicable to this qualification.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Chapter 1.

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Task COX-03-08-TYPE COX-03-09-TYPE COX-03-10-TYPE COX-03-11-TYPE COX-03-12-TYPE COX-03-13-TYPE COX-03-14-TYPE COX-03-15-TYPE COX-03-16-TYPE COX-03-17-TYPE COX-03-18-TYPE COX-03-19-TYPE COX-03-20-TYPE COX-03-21-TYPE COX-03-22-TYPE COX-04-01-ANY COX-05-01-ANY COX-05-02-ANY COX-05-03-ANY COX-05-04-ANY COX-05-05-ANY COX-05-06-ANY COX-05-07-TYPE COX-05-08-TYPE Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 4-4 .

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Task COX-05-09-TYPE COX-05-10-TYPE COX-05-11-TYPE COX-05-12-TYPE COX-05-13-TYPE COX-05-14-ANY COX-05-15-ANY COX-05-16-ANY COX-06-01-ANY COX-06-02-ANY COX-06-03-ANY COX-06-04-ANY COX-06-05-ANY COX-06-06-ANY COX-06-07-ANY COX-06-08-ANY COX-06-09-ANY COX-06-10-ANY COX-07-01-TYPE COX-07-02-TYPE COX-07-03-TYPE COX-07-04-TYPE COX-07-05-TYPE COX-07-06-TYPE Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 4-5 .

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Task COX-07-07-ANY COX-07-08-TYPE COX-07-09-ANY COX-07-10-TYPE COX-07-11-TYPE COX-07-12-TYPE COX-07-13-ANY COX-08-01-ANY COX-08-02-ANY COX-08-03-ANY COX-08-04-ANY COX-08-05-TYPE COX-08-06-ANY COX-08-07-ANY COX-08-08-TYPE COX-08-09-TYPE COX-08-10-TYPE COX-09-01-ANY Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 4-6 .

and placed in the trainee’s training record when the instructor is satisfied that the trainee can consistently perform a task in accordance with all standards and conditions.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Chapter 2. The instructor should present the tasks to the trainee in a logical order using the instructions provided in Part 1. In this Chapter This Chapter contains the following Sections: Section A B C D E F G H I Title Crew Efficiency Factors and Team Coordination Boat Characteristics and Stability Boat Handling Rules of the Road Boat Piloting and Navigation Search and Rescue (SAR) Rescue and Assistance Towing and Salvage Law Enforcement. Homeland Security and Defense Operations See Page 4-8 4-9 4-16 4-38 4-40 4-55 4-65 4-78 4-88 4-7 . Tasks should be signed. dated. Coxswain Qualification Tasks Introduction The following are the instructions for this Chapter: • • • The purpose of this Chapter is to provide guidance on the trainee’s progress through the qualification tasks. Prerequisites A prospective Coxswain must: • Be a certified crew member.

at facilities available to the unit. NOTE $ Attendance at TCT must be recorded in the trainee’s Training Record. at facilities available to the unit.5 (series). Attend team coordination training (TCT) training. Date initial training completed: 4-8 . b.S. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16130. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Section B U. State the crew fatigue guidelines as listed in the above references. In this Section This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number COX-01-01-ANY COX-01-02-ANY Task Crew Fatigue Standards Team Coordination Training (TCT) See Page 4-8 4-8 TASK COX-01-01-ANY References Crew Fatigue Standards a. Trainee must attend the training as prescribed in the reference above.5 (series) Task should be performed at any time. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual. Trainee must demonstrate knowledge of each task to the minimum standards included in each performance step. Performance Criteria Complete d (Initials) 1. Introduction Crew Efficiency Factors and Team Coordination The following are objectives of Division One: • • Demonstrate knowledge of the crew fatigue standards.2 (series) Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section A. Date Instructor Comments TASK COX-01-02-ANY References Conditions Standards Team Coordination Training (TCT) a. Team Coordination Training. Chapter 3. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114.

Introduction • • • In this Section Boat Characteristics and Stability The following are objectives of Division Two: Identify and describe the structural features of a Coast Guard boat. State interval between the hull frames. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time onboard each boat type. b. COMDTINST M16114. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Chapter 8.5 (series). and Set Watertight Integrity Aboard the Boat Locate and State the Purpose of Deck Equipment and Fittings Onboard the Boat Locate Installed Engineering and Propulsion Equipment and Fittings Onboard the Boat Locate Installed Electrical and Electronic Equipment and Fittings Onboard the Boat Recognize Warning Signs of an Unstable Vessel Before Boarding See Page 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-15 TASK COX-02-01-TYPE References State Basic Construction and Design Features of the Boat a. State hull construction material. 4-9 . point out and state the basic construction features of the boat as outlined in the steps listed below.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Instructor Comments Date Section B. Perform those tasks necessary for preparing and getting the boat underway. This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number COX-02-01-TYPE COX-02-02-TYPE COX-02-03-TYPE COX-02-04-TYPE COX-02-05-TYPE COX-02-06-ANY Task State Basic Construction and Design Features of the Boat State the Characteristics of. Locate and explain the use of all equipment and accessories. without error. Section B Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. the trainee must. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 2. In response to the instructor.

State beam of the boat at its widest point in feet and inches. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. State location of deepest draft. State amount of freeboard at the lowest point in feet and inches. 7. Point to the highest fixed point of the boat and state its height in feet and inches. 12.5 (series). without error. and Set Watertight Integrity Aboard the Boat a. Sections B and C Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. 11. point out and state the basic watertight characteristics of the boat and secure the boat’s watertight fittings as outlined in the step s listed below. State number of watertight compartments. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 10. State cabin/superstructure construction material. COMDTINST M16114. 9. Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-02-02-TYPE References State the Characteristics of. State full load displacement of the boat in pounds. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 4-10 .Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 3. 4. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time onboard each boat type. 5. b. 6. 8. State length of the boat in feet and inches. Point to the highest unfixed point of the boat and state its height in feet and inches. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. the trainee must. In response to the instructor. Chapter 8. State amount of freeboard at the bow in feet and inches. State draft of the boat in feet and inches.

without error. Set and check watertight integrity throughout the boat. the trainee must. Locate all vents and state which can be secured. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. b. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-02-03-TYPE References Conditions Locate and State the Purpose of Deck Equipment and Fittings Onboard the Boat a. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. locate and state the purpose and use of installed equipment and fittings as outlined in the steps listed below.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 2. 5. Locate all scuttles and state which can be secured. Trainee should list the location of each piece of equipment on the diagram. Locate all watertight hatches. 3. COMDTINST M16114. Locate the following applicable equipment and explain use and purpose: 4-11 . 4. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Task should be performed using a simple line diagram of each boat type and the boat’s checkoff or outfit list. 6. In response to the instructor.5 (series). Chapter 8 Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Locate all through hull drain fittings.

COMDTINST M16114 (series) Tasks should be performed at any time onboard each boat type. d. n. z. o. s. m. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. In response to the instructor. jj. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. c. j. k. ee.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria a. bb. aa. point out engineering and propulsion system components as outlined in the steps listed below. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. gg. Sluice valve T-handle wrench Fire monitor Freshwater jug/tank EMT kit First-aid kit Scuttle Vents 4. w. g. dd. i. x. ff. q. f. Locate the following equipment: 4-12 . ii. cc. y. kk.or 6-man life raft Safety belt pad eyes Air horn pull handle Sink Sink drain valve Compass Towline and reel Tow/taff rail Main fire valve Towing bitt Leadline Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-02-04-TYPE Reference Conditions Standards Locate Installed Engineering and Propulsion Equipment and Fittings Onboard the Boat a. l. e. without error. ll. v. u. r. hh. Anchors Anchor line reel and line Cap cover with hook Bull nose Key wrench Dry chemical extinguisher Bilge inspection port Battle lantern Marine toilet Clock Bell CO2 fire extinguisher Emergency tiller Stokes litter Air horn Wheel Chart table Portable pump Windshield wiper speed control t. p. h. b. the trainee must.

g. b. sea suction cutoff valves Air compressor Air compressor bleeder valve Engine neutral throttles Windshield wiper bottle Hydraulic steering pump Hydraulic ram and pin Steering cable Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-02-05-TYPE References Conditions Standards Locate Installed Electrical and Electronic Equipment and Fittings Onboard the Boat a. q. In response to the instructor. h. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Task should be performed at any time onboard each boat type. e. f. j. Fuel tank sounding tubes Fuel tank fill pipe Freshwater fill pipe Installed Halon/CO2 fire system Power take-off Rudder arm Engine controls Tachometers Hot water supply lines Pressurized hydraulic fluid hose Rudder stock l. n. s. o. Locate the following equipment: 4-13 . the trainee must.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria a. i. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Fuel tank vent pipe Fuel sounding rod Freshwater tank Sea chest. k. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. m. u. r. without error. c. point out electrical and electronic system components as outlined in the steps listed below. v. d. p. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. t.

Hand-held portable search light mm. Electric horn button ll. GPS/DGPS antennas l. Loudhailer gg. SSB-HF transceiver antenna j. e. Radar set m. Searchlight switch q. All interior lights u. Auto pilot qq. Stern light t. Underway compartment heater x. Radio and loudhailer speakers ff. Radar power supply ii. Sidelights p. Battery charger Instructor Comments w. Deck floodlight oo. AC power panel z. Digital fathometer display hh. f. Anchor light r. Hot starts Completed (Initials) Boat Type Date 4-14 . VHF-FM direction finder receiver cc. GPS/DGPS receiver bb. VHF-FM direction finder ee. VHF-FM radio k. d. VHF-FM radio converter i. Law enforcement light switch pp. c. b. Digital fathometer display kk. Radar antenna n. Underway heater switch Shore power compartment heater DC circuit breaker panel Alarm cut out switch Amp meter SSB-HF transceiver SSB-HF transceiver antenna coupler h. Towing lights (2) s. g. Radar wave guide jj.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria a. VHF-FM radio antenna dd. Volt meter aa. Depth finder o. Electronic compass rr. Auxiliary machinery fan v. Masthead lights (2) nn. Shore-tie receptacle y.

3.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-02-06-ANY References Conditions Standards Recognize Warning Signs of an Unstable Vessel Before Boarding a. Compare own boat’s righting moment with other vessels in the area. 2. Determine if other vessel is down by the bow or the stern. Determine if other vessel is damaged. trawling. 6. 4.) and weather conditions. State the causes and effects of the following: a. towing. Free surface effect b. Topside icing Date Instructor Comments 4-15 . Downflooding c. 7. 5. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Determine wind and sea conditions. Determine if other vessel is listing.e.5 (series). etc. Chapter 9 Task should be performed underway observing other vessels in various situations (i. COMDTINST M16114. Determine if other vessel is riding high or low in the water. The observer must note: • • • • • Listing Setting high or low in the water Trimming bow up or down Wind/sea conditions Your boat’s reaction to the sea compared with that of the distressed vessel Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1.

Introduction • • • In this section Boat Handling The following are objectives of Division Three: Define and state the principal forces that effect boat handling. State the different safety aspects involved in boat handling.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section C. This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number COX-03-01-ANY COX-03-02-ANY COX-03-03-TYPE COX-03-04-TYPE Task State the Forces that Affect Boat Handling State the Basic Principles of Boat Handling State the Operational Characteristics and Limitations of the Boat Locate and State the Characteristics of the Components and Accessories of the Boat’s Propulsion System Energize the Electrical and Electronic Systems on the Boat Conduct a Pre-Start Checkoff for the Boat Start the Boat Conduct a Pre-Underway Checkoff for the Boat Shifting Steering and Throttle Stations Conduct a Normal Cruising Checkoff Secure the Boat After Operations Get the Boat Away from a Pier Maneuver the Boat in Tight Quarters Come About in a Narrow Channel Operate the Boat and Apply its Handling Characteristics in a Following Sea Maneuver in Heavy Weather Maneuver in Rivers Identify Heavy Weather Terms Correct for Hard Chine Lock-Up Moor the Boat Anchor the Boat Weigh the Boat’s Anchor See Page 4-17 4-18 4-18 4-20 COX-03-05-TYPE COX-03-06-TYPE COX-03-07-TYPE COX-03-08-TYPE COX-03-09-TYPE COX-03-10-TYPE COX-03-11-TYPE COX-03-12-TYPE COX-03-13-TYPE COX-03-14-ANY COX-03-15-TYPE COX-03-16-TYPE COX-03-17-TYPE COX-03-18-TYPE COX-03-19-TYPE COX-03-20-TYPE COX-03-21-TYPE COX-03-22-TYPE 4-21 4-22 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-32 4-33 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-37 4-16 . Handle a boat proficiently during various common maneuvers.

State the meaning of the word “set” as related to current and drift. Instructor Comments Date 4-17 . State the effect of an ebb tide on a bar or entrance. State the effects of “side force”. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 2. without error. 15. 5. State the effects of leeway. In response to the instructor. State the two types of stability. State the meaning of the term “righting moment”. State the effect of running with a current. c. 3. 7. State the effects of dynamic propeller thrust.5 (series). State the effect of running against a current. State the effects of slip. the trainee must. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. State the meaning of the term “force of buoyancy”. 10. state the basic forces that affect boat handling as outlined in the steps listed below. State the meaning of the word “drift” as related to current. 6. 13. COMDTINST M16114. State the effects of wind blowing out an entrance. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 12. Chapter 9 and Chapter 10 Chapman Piloting Knight’s Modern Seamanship Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. b. 8. at facilities available to the unit. State the effects of “unequal blade thrust”. 11. 14.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-01-ANY References State the Forces that Affect Boat Handling a. 4. State the causes of cavitation. 9.

Steps 1 through 5 are for single screw boats and steps 6 through 8 are for twin screw boats. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Task should be performed at any time. state the basic principles of boat handling as outlined in the steps listed below. State the reaction of the boat when commencing forward motion from no way-on. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-02-ANY References State the Basic Principles of Boat Handling a. 4. 6. State the reaction of the boat with sternway on and the rudder left. 2. State the reaction of a twin screw boat with the port screw ahead. State the reaction of a twin screw boat when the port screw is placed ahead and the starboard screw in reverse. the trainee must. 5. State the reaction of the boat with the headway on and the rudder right.5 (series). Chapter 10 Chapman Piloting Conditions Task should be performed at any time. State the reaction of the boat with headway on and the rudder left. without error. Date Instructor Comments TASK COX-03-03-TYPE References Conditions State the Operational Characteristics and Limitations of the Boat a. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. and the rudders to the left. 4-18 . In response to the instructor. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. and the rudders to the right. the starboard screw in reverse. the starboard screw in reverse. trainee should perform step 14. 2. 7. 3. State the most economical cruising RPMs. at facilities available to the unit. COMDTINST M16114. State the maximum speed of the boat in knots. without error. b. NOTE $ Standards If boat type is an MLB or SPC (surf). the trainee must. In response to the instructor. State the reaction of a twin screw boat with the port screw ahead. State the reaction of the boat with sternway on and the rudder amidships. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 8. state the basic principles of boat handling as outlined in the steps listed below.

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 3. 9. State the maximum following seas in which the boat may operate. 13. 6. State the maximum size surf the boat can take abeam without capsizing. and if so. that the boat may tow. how thick. 4. State the maximum number of people that can be carried on the boat. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 10. State whether the boat may be used to break ice. 5. State the maximum size vessel. State the maximum endurance of the boat at cruising RPMs. that the boat may tow. State the maximum range of the boat at cruising RPMs in nautical miles. in feet. State the minimum crew size of the boat. State the equipment that must be onboard and/or operative before the boat can get underway. State whether or not the boat may be operated in breaking surf or bar conditions. 11. Instructor Comments Date 4-19 . 12. [MLB or SPC (surf) only] 15. 8. State at what RPMs and under what conditions the boat will experience dynamic instability or “caught on the hard chine”. in gross tons. State the maximum size vessel. State the maximum wind speed in which the boat may operate. 7. 14.

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-04-TYPE References Conditions Standards Locate and State the Characteristics of the Components and Accessories of the Boat’s Propulsion System a. Water temperature in degrees Fahrenheit. Locate and state the purpose of the emergency engine stop control. 6. State the purpose of the engine alarm system. Locate the gauges and state the normal readings for each engine at idle and cruising speeds: a. point out and state the characteristics of the boat’s propulsion system components as outlined in the steps listed below. Locate and state the type of cooling system used on the engine(s). Marine gear oil pressure in pounds. c. without error. 4-20 . 2. 13. 4. Locate and state the purpose of the engine control module on the 47' MLB. State the usable capacity of the fuel tank(s) as a percentage of maximum. 7. State the horsepower of each engine. In response to the instructor. the trainee must. State the freshwater capacity of each engine in gallons. 3. 14. 12. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Locate and state the reason why the simplex/duplex strainer(s) must be cleaned one at a time. 5. 8. 9. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 15. State the type of fuel used in the engine(s). State the capacity of the lube oil system in quarts. State the maximum shaft RPMs for each engine. State the model number of the engine(s). COMDTINST M16114 (series) Task should be performed at any time onboard each boat type. Locate and state the maximum capacity of the fuel tank(s) in gallons. b. Lube oil pressure in pounds. 10. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. 11. State the direction of the shaft rotation for each engine.

Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-03-05-TYPE References Energize the Electrical and Electronic Systems on the Boat a. f. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 21. Locate the fire pump and state the gallons per minute that it can deliver. 20. c. 22. Engine heaters (hot starts) Electric space heaters/HVAC Engine room receptacle 2. Completed (Initials) Boat Type NOTE $ Steps 21 and 22 are not applicable to the 47' MLB. Locate and state the type and model number of the marine gear used on the boat. State the ratio of the reverse gear. 4-21 . COMDTINST M16114 (series) Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time onboard each boat type. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. State the ratio of the forward gear. 23. 17. Trainee must energize the boat’s electrical and electronic systems following the steps listed below. Electrical/Electronic Operator’s Manuals Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Secure shore-tie power pierside. State the diameter of the propellers in inches. 19. Battery charger Shore-tie power breaker Electronic test receptacle d.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 16. b. 18. State the number of blades on the propeller(s). State the maximum engine RPMs allowable with the fire pump engaged. Locate AC shore-tie panel and de-energize the following power switches: a. e. Locate and state the purpose of the installed bilge pump(s). b.

c. Main breakers General lighting c. h. Engine space lights Blue lights Towing lights Siren/loudhailer Hot cups Sidelights g. d. as applicable: a. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Task should be performed at any time onboard each boat type while pierside. Searchlights Individual electronics equipment Compass and all gauge lights Cabin heaters/HVAC Other interior lights Normal running lights 7. both at the power panels and on the individual electrical and electronic units. f. Ensure all power switches are in the off position. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 2. e. c. d. Task steps must be completed. b. 5. l. Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-03-06-TYPE References Conditions Standards Conduct a Pre-Start Checkoff for the Boat a. k. Secure shore power at the boat’s p ower panel. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Energize and check power switches at the individual electronic and electric units for proper operation. 4. Starter motors Engine alarm system Completed (Initials) Boat Type Notify Coxswain/Engineer that the power switches listed above have been energized so that the main engines can be started. b. i. j. using the steps applicable to the boat type. 6. Loudhailer Dock lights All radios 8. b. without error and in sequential order. Locate and energize the following circuit breaker panels and power switches if applicable to boat type: a. Energize the following power switches. Secure shore power at pierside.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 3. Locate and energize the following power switches on the DC power panel: a. 4-22 . Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1.

13. Ensure engine room is free of all loose gear. 6. 9. Disconnect shore-tie cable. Instructor Comments Date 4-23 . Check air intake on turbo chargers for cleanliness. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 10. Sound fuel tanks using the sounding rod. 11. Check drain valve on the primary strainer of filter for water. 14. Energize main breaker at the circuit breaker panel. Ensure that all electrical power switches are in the off position both at the power panel and on individual units. 12. Check all belts for proper tension. Locate dipsticks and check engine and gear oil levels. 4. 16. 7. Open sea suction valves and check sea strainers for cleanliness.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 3. Check engine coolant level. Energize general lighting at the circuit breaker panel. Check and open fuel line valves and return valves. Check bilges for excessive fuel or water. 15. 5. 8.

Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Wait thirty seconds and repeat the procedure in steps 4 and 5 if engine does not start. or any other abnormal conditions. 8. Throw switches to energize starting systems. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 2. 5. ensuring that main breaker and general lighting systems are energized. Check correct oil and fuel pressures and temperature. State recommended engine temperature readings before applying a load (engaging the engine). without error. 7. 9. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Task should be performed at any time onboard each boat type while pierside. start the engine(s) on the applicable boat type in accordance with the steps listed below. State likely causes for an engine not starting. 3.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-07-TYPE References Conditions Standards Start the Boat a. Instructor Comments Date 4-24 . 6. 11. Push down engine shutdown cables (T Handles). Depress starter button(s). Conduct pre-start checkoff. while engines are warm. Place throttles in neutral position. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Check for external water or oil leaks. 10. 4. Check for overboard discharge. Trainee must.

Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. c. d. 5. including the complete boat’s outfit. Test the following electronic equipment: a. 4-25 . COMDTINST M16114 (series) Task should be performed at any time onboard each boat type while pierside. including the following: a. is onboard (using daily boat checkoff). Chapter 1. e. Fuel onboard Oil levels – engine and marine gears Cooling water level Hydraulic steering oil Sea suction open Engine and marine gear oil pressure g. f. fully covering the following items: a. Ensure all equipment necessary to the mission. Purpose of the mission Any special circumstances concerning the mission Working radio frequency to be used for the mission Plan of action at destination e. Procedure should be accomplished in accordance with the steps listed below applicable to the boat. b. Brief the crew. without error. b. Set watertight integrity. c. Appendix A Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Radar All navigation systems NOTE $ Coxswain must take throttle control at the appropriate conning station on a 47' MLB. Ensure crew members are wearing required survival gear.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-08-TYPE References Conditions Standards Conduct a Pre-Underway Checkoff for the Boat a. 2. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Receive engineering report from the boat’s engineer. d. g. j. Radio Depth sounder c. Trainee must. 4. i. f. d. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Electrical and electronic systems status Navigational lights (night or reduced visibility) status Shore-tie status Overboard discharge 8. b.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. 7. Secure boat for sea (no loose gear). 6. h. Route to be taken to destination Expected weather and sea conditions Risk assessment with crew using green-amber-red (GAR)/severityprobability-exposure (SPE) or similar applicable models 3. conduct a pre-underway checkoff for the boat. b. Conduct daily boat checkoff using the checkoff list provided.

Place throttle station in low idle. Test engine controls for both forward and astern propulsion. explain and demonstrate the steps to be taken to shift steering and throttle stations. 4. Shift steering and throttle stations while making way. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. the trainee must. COMDTINST 16114. 3.25 (series) Task should be performed at any time onboard the unit’s boat. 8. 6. without error. 9. 7. Energize all steering stations. 2. Instructor Comments Date 4-26 . 47' Motor Lifeboat Operator’s Handbook.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 9. 5. note the reaction for both directions. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Activate one of the three throttle stations after engine start-up. Place throttle station in neutral for engine warm-up. Place throttle station in sync mode. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-03-09-TYPE References Conditions Standards Shifting Steering and Throttle Stations a. In response to the instructor. Shift steering and throttle stations while not making way. Energize and operate emergency backup throttle station. State steering default location.

3. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Task should be performed while pierside after each boat type has been operated for a minimum of forty-five minutes. 3. 2. Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-03-11-TYPE References Conditions Secure the Boat After Operations a. without error. Stow all boat equipment properly. 4-27 . Properly post and brief lookouts. both at the individual electrical and electronic units and at the power panels. Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. other than the daily boat checklist. COMDTINST M16114. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Shut down engine(s) by pulling up on the engine stops or securing the ignition system.5 (series). 2. Trainee will conduct all of the procedures necessary to secure the boat after operations. secure the boat after operations. Check propulsion machinery and associated instruments. Appendix B Task should be performed at any time onboard each boat type while pierside. and in serviceable condition. Trainee must. The boat’s complete outfit and daily checklist is required. 4. Allow engines to idle for 4 to 5 minutes. Note and correct all discrepancies. Chapter 1. Check all electronic gear. 5. Place all power switches in the off position. Trainee should ensure that all boat equipment is in its proper place. the boat should be ready for operations. At the completion of the task. Task must be accomplished in the order of presentation. Checkoff must be completed using the unit’s daily boat checkoff sheet.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-10-TYPE References Conditions Conduct a Normal Cruising Checkoff a.

Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-03-12-TYPE References Get the Boat Away from a Pier a. Secure all doors and windows. b. Secure main breaker and starter motor switches. Reconnect shore-tie and energize pierside power. f. Make a visual check of all hoses. COMDTINST M16114. 9. Check oil levels in the engines. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Chapter 10. Wash boat down with freshwater. Activate bilge alarm systems. Set watertight integrity. e. Standards 4-28 . wiring. 5. Trainee must perform the task without casualty to personnel or boat in accordance with the steps listed below. d. Section D Chapman Piloting Conditions Task will be performed onboard each boat type at any time of day or night. The boat must be sitting port side to the pier or mooring object. 6. 8.5 (series). and add if necessary. 12. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Stow all gear in accordance with the boat’s daily checkoff list. and other items subject to wear. 11. Wind and current must equal a speed of at least fifteen knots and be setting the boat against the pier. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Pump bilges using shore-side equipment and wipe down engines.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 4. Task must be accomplished within five minutes of beginning the evolution. Check hydraulic steering oil and add if necessary. marine gears. 7. Energize shore-tie panel main power breaker and place battery charger and engine heater (hot starts) power switches in the on position. 10. Top off fuel tank(s). b. c. All mooring lines must be attached before task is begun. belts. Sound and record fuel tanks. Conduct the following engineering checks: a.

5. Back boat down until clear with room to move ahead. 2. Task must be accomplished within the confines of a slip or other area where maneuverability is limited. 6.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 1. in any type of weather conditions. Trainee must turn the boat 180 degrees within the confines of the slip or other limited area in accordance with the steps listed below. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-03-13-TYPE Maneuver the Boat in Tight Quarters Task MAY BE DEFERRED for cutter boats operating in open waters. Trainee must perform the task without casualty to personnel or boat. State the expected effects of the wind and current on the movement of the boat described.5 (series). Maneuver away from pier and moved slowly ahead. 3. COMDTINST M16114. a. Take in bow spring line when stern is well clear of the pier. Brief crew on procedure to be used and their duties. 2. Clear stern of the boat by going ahead slowly and springing the stern out. 4-29 . Brief crew on the procedure to be used and their duties. 4. Trainee will bring the boat completely about and out of the slip. Chapter 10 Chapman Piloting NOTE $ References Conditions Task should be performed onboard each boat type at any time. the boat must be facing into the slip. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. At the beginning of the task. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Take in all mooring lines except the bow spring line. Describe expected effects of the wind and current during maneuvering of the boat. 3. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. b.

Back boat as far as possible before moving ahead. in any type of weather conditions. 4. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Brief crew on procedure to be used and their duties. 5. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Maintain a position in the center of the channel for at least three minutes. river. Engage engine(s) and apply rudder in order to bring the stern around. or harbor entrance in accordance with the steps listed below. Date Instructor Comments 4-30 . or harbor entrance with limited maneuverability. a. 6. 3. Bring boat around in the channel from an into the current position to a with the current position. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. Trainee must turn the boat 180 degrees within the confines of a narrow channel. Task must be accomplished within the confines of a narrow channel.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 4. Section G NOTE $ References Conditions Task will be performed onboard each boat type at any time. COMDTINST M16114. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-03-14-ANY Come About in a Narrow Channel Task MAY BE DEFERRED for cutter boats operating in open waters. bringing the boat out of the confined area.5 (series). 2. Shift rudder and move boat ahead. Chapter 10. Bring boat around in the channel from a with the current position to an into the current position. river. Trainee must perform the task without casualty to personnel or boat.

COMDTINST M16114. 7. Ride on the back of the swells and avoid allowing the boat to ride on the face of a swell. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. State operational limitations of the boat pertaining to the following conditions: a. 4. in 15. Chapter 10. b. For MLB. Instructor Comments Date 4-31 . and following seas of not greater than 4 feet. NOTE $ Standards Surf. Section F Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook.to 30knot winds.to 30knot winds. when necessary. Task will be performed while underway during daylight. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Task will be performed while underway during daylight. breaking bars. to allow overtaking seas to pass beneath the boat. Brief crew on procedure to be used and their duties before beginning operations. 6.5 (series). c. 5. and following seas of not less than 3 feet but not greater than 6 feet. Trainee must perform the task without casualty to personnel or boat in accordance with the steps listed below. in 10. and adverse inlets are to be avoided while doing this task. Slow down. Steer into any tendency of the stern to slip sideways. Keep boat’s stern square to t he seas to prevent broaching. UTB and SPC (surf): For all others: Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 2. Describe expected effects of a following sea upon the handling characteristics of the boat.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-15-TYPE References Conditions Operate the Boat and Apply its Handling Characteristics in a Following Sea a. b. Following seas in open water Following seas in surf or bar conditions Towing in following seas Maximum wind 3. d. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.

5 (series).5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. 4. Middle of the Channel” maneuver. Demonstrate “Hug the Point” maneuver.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-16-TYPE References Conditions Standards Maneuver in Heavy Weather a. Approach seas at correct angles to keep propellers and rudders working. Demonstrate “Proceed on the Bend Side. Demonstrate the ability to keep the vessel in the water to prevent injury to the crew and avoid damage to the vessel. Demonstrate knowledge of vessel motions to maintain stability. Trainee must perform the task to the minimum standards in accordance with the steps listed below. Section G Task should be performed at any time. on a river within the unit’s area of responsibility (AOR). 3. Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-03-17-TYPE References Conditions Standards Maneuver in Rivers a. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Instructor Comments Date 4-32 . COMDTINST M16114. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 10. Chapter 10. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. during heavy weather. 3. Section F Task should be performed onboard each boat type at any time. Demonstrate “Stay in the Bend” maneuver. Prevent sheering by controlling bank cushion and suction. 2. Trainee must demonstrate knowledge of and perform the task to the minimum standards in accordance with the steps listed below. 2.

without error. b. Chapter 8 Conditions Standards Task should be performed while underway in moderate to heavy weather. 6. 2. Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-03-19-TYPE References Correct for Hard Chine Lock-Up a. State the sea conditions that will put the 47' MLB in hard chine lock-up. COMDTINST M16114. wave saddles. Determine wave height using height of eye on freeboard. In response to the instructor. close outs. and the high and low side of a wave. 7. Heavy Weather Addendum Task should be performed at any time. State definition of surf. explain and demonstrate the steps to be taken if hard chine lock-up occurs. Determine wave height by comparing with floating structures. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Discuss the effects of wind on waves. 8.5 (series).5 (series). 5. at facilities available to the unit. Trainee must demonstrate knowledge of and perform the task to the minimum standards in accordance with the steps listed below. Determine wave height using a depth sounder. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. the trainee must. COMDTINST M16114. 4. Identify the types of breaking waves. Determine wave height by comparing with fixed structures.25 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 3. Identify windows.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-18-TYPE References Conditions Standards Identify Heavy Weather Terms a. 47' Motor Lifeboat Operator’s Handbook. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 4-33 . COMDTINST M16114.

bowline. 4-34 . Chapter 10 Task will be performed onboard each boat type at any time of day or night. 5. Secure stern line. State expected effects of the wind and current on the mooring of the boat. spring or pivot stern toward the pier. Approach pier slowly on an angle. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Brief crew on procedure to be used and their duties.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 2. Instruct one crew member to stand by on the bow with a fender. Apply full rudder away from the pier. State the corrective action for hard chine lock-up. Mooring must be accomplished cleanly without extended maneuvering for position correction within five minutes of beginning the evolution. Inform crew of possibility of hard chine lock-up. COMDTINST M16114. 3. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 4. Wind and current must equal a speed of at least fifteen knots and be setting the boat away from the pier. 7. 4. 6. Ensure crew member secures the bow spring line when the bow is alongside the intended mooring point on the pier. Trainee must perform the task without casualty to personnel or boat in accordance with the steps listed below. 3.5 (series). and aft spring line. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-03-20-TYPE References Conditions Moor the Boat a. State action to be taken to prevent hard chine lock-up. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 2.

bottom contours. note the depth of water.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. Task will be performed while underway during daylight. and seas of not less than 6 feet but not greater than 8 feet. 3. Section H Task will be performed onboard each boat type while underway. and seas not greater than 4 feet. Boat must be anchored with room to swing. Pilot boat into the selected position. Task will be performed while underway during daylight. For UTB: For all others: Standards Trainee must perform the task without casualty to personnel or boat in accordance with the steps listed below. Approach anchorage keeping the boat headed into the wind and/or current. Scope of anchor line should be based upon the following guidelines: Calm to moderate seas: Heavy seas: 3 to 5 times the water depth 5 to 7 times the water depth Completed (Initials) Performance Criteria 1. 2. and seas of not less than 3 feet but not greater than 6 feet. State expected effects of wind and current on the boat. Chapter 10. 4. Instructor should provide the trainee with a general location for anchorage. at any time of the day or night. Ensure crew rigs the anchor. in 10. Determine scope of anchoring by checking the depth of water and the room available for boat swing. Select and plot position for placement of the anchor.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-03-21-TYPE References Conditions Anchor the Boat a.to 30-knot winds. For MLB and SPC (surf): Task will be performed while underway during daylight. 7.to 20-knot winds. 5. and characteristics. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. in 15. Boat Type 4-35 . Trainee should select the specific spot for placing the anchor. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference.to 15-knot winds. in 0. 6. Brief crew on procedures to be used and establish crew hand signals.

hand over hand. away from the anchor with the crew slowly veering (paying out) the line until the anchor is held. 11. 18. 9. Ensure crew puts the anchor over the side.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 8. Fix actual position and visual anchor bearings (minimum of 3). 14. 15. 16. Instructor Comments Date 4-36 . Check and record water depth using depth finder. Ensure crew makes line fast to the forward bitt with at least three figure eights. or establish and record radar ranges. Ensure the anchor is not dragging. 12. without throwing it. Check boat’s headway at the charted anchoring position. Veer line until proper scope is reached. 17. 10. Set anchor watch. Back boat down slowly. Notify unit that boat is anchored and give position. 13. Completed (Initials) Boat Type NOTE $ Line is not tended from storage reel on 47' MLB. Ensure crew lowers the anchor to the bottom with a round turn around the bitt. brief crew members on responsibilities.

Section H Task will be performed onboard each boat type upon completion of TASK COX-03-21-TYPE.5 (series). 2. Move boat ahead slowly. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Make the anchor line around the forward bitt and advance the boat in a wide circle if the anchor does not free. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 6. Trainee must perform the task without casualty to personnel or boat in accordance with the steps listed below. tending line at all times. Ensure crew breaks loose the anchor. COMDTINST M16114. Ensure the anchor line does not approach the boat’s screw(s). 8. 3. Chapter 10. Make line off when anchor is at short stay.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-22-TYPE References Conditions Standards Weigh the Boat’s Anchor a. Ensure crew takes up the slack in the anchor line and fakes it on deck out of the way. 7. Brief crew on procedure to be used and establish communications. Ensure crew brings anchor onboard. using the engines. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Instructor Comments Date 4-37 . 5. 4.

a. Oklahoma City.2 (series) U. 4-38 . Deck Watch Officer Examination. Successfully complete an approved Rules of the Road course listed at www. Members not completing this task will be ineligible for the coxswain insignia.S. Navigation Rules International-Inland. Introduction • In this Section Rules of the Road The following are objectives of Division Four: Display competence in the knowledge and use of the International-Inland Rules of the Road. NOTE $ OR 4. OR Receive passing score on the Deck Watch Officer Examination. Trainee must either successfully complete an approved Merchant Marine Rules of the Road Exam or receive a passing score on the CG Institute NAVRULS End-of-Course Test.mil/hq/gm/marpers/examques/rules. Certification letters must state coxswain’s operating limitations.pdf. 5900 SW 64th Street. Receive passing score on the Merchant Marine Rules of the Road Exam (Module 054XX) Successful completion of this requirements must be reported by forwarding a copy of the final test results or completion letter to CG INST (NRT). COMDTINST M16672. This Section contains the following task: Task Number COX-04-01-ANY Task Successfully Complete the Navigation Rules Requirements for both Advancement and Coxswain Certification See Page 4-38 TASK COX-04-01-ANY Successfully Complete the Navigation Rules Requirements for both Advancement and Coxswain Certification Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boat trainees who will only operate within sight of the cutter. Receive passing score on the CG Institute NAVRULS End-of-Course Test.uscg. OK 73169-6990.32 (series) NOTE $ NOTE $ References Conditions Standards Task may be performed at any time in a manner prescribed by the above references and the course or examination issuing authority. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section D. or the Merchant Marine Rules of the Road Exam. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. COMDTINST M16114. b. OR 3. 2. Volume I.

OK 73169-6990. Oklahoma City.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) NOTE $ Successful completion of this requirements must be reported by forwarding a copy of t he final test results or completion letter to CG INST (NRT). 5900 SW 64th Street. Instructor Comments Date 4-39 .

Demonstrate knowledge of the local operations area. a Navigation Kit. In this Section This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number COX-05-01-ANY COX-05-02-ANY COX-05-03-ANY COX-05-04-ANY COX-05-05-ANY COX-05-06-ANY COX-05-07-TYPE COX-05-08-TYPE COX-05-09-TYPE COX-05-10-TYPE COX-05-11-TYPE COX-05-12-TYPE COX-05-13-TYPE COX-05-14-ANY COX-05-15-ANY COX-05-16-ANY Task Identify Navigational Publications Determine a Compass Course from a True Course Pilot the Boat Using Dead Reckoning (DR) Techniques Pilot a Boat Using “Seaman’s Eye” Determine the Location of a Boat Using Radar Ranges and Bearings Conn a Boat Using Radar Operate the GPS/DGPS Determine the Location of a Boat Using GPS/DGPS Pilot a Boat Using GPS/DGPS Operate the GPS/DGPS Operate. Coast Guard boat using dead reckoning (DR) techniques.S. The following are objectives of Division Five: • • • • Identify and state the use of various common navigational references. and Time Demonstrate Plotting a Position Using LORAN-C Time Difference (TD) Coordinates See Page 4-41 4-41 4-42 4-43 4-43 4-44 4-45 4-47 4-48 4-49 4-50 4-51 4-52 4-53 4-54 4-54 4-40 . Demonstrate the ability to pilot using the installed electronic navigational equipment found on U.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section E. Demonstrate the ability to pilot a U.S. Determine the Location of. Speed. NOTE $ Introduction Boat Piloting and Navigation The tasks within this Section DO NOT apply to cutter boat trainees who will only operate within sight of the cutter. and Tables Distance. Charts. and Pilot a NonStandard Boat Using GPS/DGPS Operate Electronic Charting Operate the Auto Pilot Pilot a Boat Using All Electronic Equipment. Certification letters must state coxswain’s operating limitations. Coast Guard boats.

4. f. convert given true courses into compass courses for the boat used in accordance with the steps listed below. 7. 6. Trainee must specify those volumes or chapters of these publications that pertain to the local operating area. e. 3. Identify all Nautical Charts for Local Area. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. d. c. Identify and state the use of The American Practical Navigator. Coast Pilot Light List Nautical Charts of Local Area Nautical Chart Symbols. given a chart of the local area and a deviation table for any unit boat. 4-41 . g.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-05-01-ANY References Identify Navigational Publications a. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16672. h. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. without error. Date Instructor Comments TASK COX-05-02-ANY References Determine a Compass Course from a True Course a. Identify and state the use of the Tide Tables and the appropriate entries for the local area. Identify and state the use of Chart No. Chart No. 1 Navigation Rules International-Inland. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 2. and state the use of each one. Chapter 14. 1. b. 5. 9. Identify and state the use of the Coast Pilot and the appropriate entries for local area. State and identify Navigation Rules and their use. the commonly used navigational publications listed below. without error. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Trainee must. Trainee must identify. 8.5 (series). Identify magnetic variation and the annual change for the local area. Section C The American Practical Navigator Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any time. Identify and state the use of the Local Notice to Mariners. b. Abbreviations and Terms. Identify and state the use of the Light List and the appropriate entries for local area. Identify and state the use of the Tidal Current Tables and the appropriate entries for the local area.2 (series) Notice to Mariners/Local Notice to Mariners The American Practical Navigator Tide Tables/Tidal Current Tables Conditions Standards Task may be completed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of any further reference.

COMDTINST M16114. day or night. All locations must be verified by taking a simultaneous sounding using the fathometer (if available). Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. Section D Coast Guard Navigation Standards. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. speed/engine RPM curve. and charts found on the boat. 2. Lay out compass course on the chart indicating predicted turns. Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK COX-05-03-ANY References Pilot the Boat Using Dead Reckoning (DR) Techniques a. stopwatch. 5. speed/engine RPM curve. Pilot boat to the next predicted position using only the boat’s compass. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 3. Determine and list magnetic and compass course for each true course. The instructor should verify all locations using the boat’s installed navigation systems. 4.5 (series). 6. All courses and speeds to turn points are to be given to the trainee by the instructor. 3. The course to be run must be at least five miles long with at least four turns. All turn point locations must be within one quarter of a nautical mile. speed/engine RPM curve. using only the installed compass. Plot and label from five positions provided by the instructor. and stopwatch. Predict estimated time of arrival (ETA) to first turn point. c. Predict ETA to next turn point with course and correct speed to make good to second position. navigational kit. Chapter 14. 4. and stopwatch. Date Instructor Comments 4-42 . Connect the five positions with true courses.2 (series) The American Practical Navigator Conditions Task must be performed while underway. Pilot boat to the first predicted position using only the boat’s compass. All plotting on charts must be done using proper chart notation and symbols. in calm to moderate weather conditions. b.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 2. COMDTINST M3530. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until voyage is complete.

b. Visibility must be at least 1 nautical mile. 4. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. All plotting on charts should be done using proper chart notation and symbols. and charts found on the boat.2 (series) The American Practical Navigator Conditions Task must be performed while underway. All fixed positions must be accurate to within one-tenth of a nautical mile using two radar LOPs. Identify terrestrial landmark or aids to navigation to be used to steer to second turn point. 8. b. Standards 4-43 . 2. Identify terrestrial landmark or aids to navigation to be used to steer to first turn point. Task should be run over a course provided by the instructor of at least 3 nautical miles and containing at least 8 course changes.5 (series). using only a local chart of the area. The charts used should be harbor charts or some other larger scale charts (no smaller than 1:80.5 (series). COMDTINST M3530. Steer boat directly to next turn point. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. in calm to moderate weather. at night or during a period of restricted visibility. in calm to moderate weather conditions.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-05-04-ANY References Pilot a Boat Using “Seaman’s Eye” a. c. using only the installed radar. compass. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. terrestrial landmarks. 6. and “Seaman’s Eye”. Courses must be steered directly without wandering or requiring any stopping or back tracking in order to stay on course or within any channels. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. navigation kit. Chapter 14 Coast Guard Navigation Standards. day or night. Section D Coast Guard Navigation Standards. Lay out and label courses on the chart.000). 5. Repeat steps 5 through 7 until voyage is complete. At no time may the vessel or crew be put in danger. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M3530. Clear the pier and start boat on course. Steer boat directly to first turn point. Turn boat upon reaching first turn point.2 (series) Radar Operator’s Handbook The American Practical Navigator Conditions Task must be performed while underway. 3. fathometer. d. c. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 7. All locations should be verified by taking a simultaneous sounding using the fathometer. aids to navigation. Date Instructor Comments TASK COX-05-05-ANY References Determine the Location of a Boat Using Radar Ranges and Bearings a. local knowledge of the area. Chapter 14.

local knowledge of the area. 5. Section D Coast Guard Navigation Standards. Two or more fixes must be taken over a course of at least 3 nautical miles. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. aids to navigation. At no time may the vessel or crew be put in danger.5 (series). Steer boat directly to turn point using proper helm commands. in calm weather. c. 11. Take two or more fixes over a course of at least three miles. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. b. Determine speed over ground using the radar. and the boat’s radar. 9. 6. 3. Repeat steps 3 through 7 until voyage is completed.2 (series) Radar Operator’s Handbook Conditions Task must be performed while underway. State range to closest point of land. Plot turn bearing correctly and utilize for turn. 4. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. Verify all positions by utilizing the fathometer to check the soundings. Determine position of the boat within standards while underway at slow speed. Activate and properly tune radar set. State range and bearing to local hazards to navigation. 8. 10. Correctly lay out courses on the chart. Identify contacts and take avoidance. Determine position of the boat within standards while underway. using only a local chart of the area. terrestrial landmarks. COMDTINST M3530. 4-44 . 3. Activate and properly tune radar set. if necessary. Task should be run over a course provided by the instructor of at least 3 nautical miles and containing at least 5 course changes (of 10 degrees or more). 4. 7. Chapter 14. COMDTINST M16114. 2. Use proper commands to steer boat directly to first turn point. at night or during periods of restricted visibility. but with no way -on. 2.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 1. Courses must be steered directly without wandering or requiring any stopping or back tracking in order to stay on course or within any channels. Take two or more fixes over a course of at least 3 nautical miles. 5. Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-05-06-ANY References Conn a Boat Using Radar a.

COMDTINST M3530. 3. Navigation in rhumb line Enter boat data (Setup 2:1). Speed. In response to the instructor. 6. Identify and state the use of the soft.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-05-07-TYPE References Operate the GPS/DGPS a. 4-45 . Antenna height in feet d. Demonstrate entering Sailplan 2 (Waypoint Bank). special. Identify the three “traffic lights” and state the meaning of each. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Demonstrate entering Setup (Presentation 1:1). 8. day or night. and function keys. t he trainee must. Range in nautical miles b. using only the installed GPS/DGPS. 7. drift in knots c. COMDTINST M16114. 24-hour time selected e. a. Ensure appropriate boat type. b. Enter geographical location (Setup 4:1). d. 5. c. 2. Ensure appropriate time and time offset. a. under any weather conditions. b.2 (series) GPS/DGPS Operator’s Handbook The American Practical Navigator Conditions Task should be performed onboard each boat type while underway or moored. Chapter 14. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Ensure appropriate datum selected. without error. Determine: a. 4. 9. Each step should be completed within 5 minutes.5 (series). Adjust screen for daytime and nighttime viewing. Ensure appropriate antenna height. perform the steps listed below. referencing local charts. b. Section D Coast Guard Navigation Standards. Energize the GPS/DGPS.

Set appropriate alarm limits. Enter WARNING AREAS. a. 14. 17. Demonstrate creating a route utilizing previously entered waypoints. GPS 3. 23. Demonstrate entering appropriate waypoint pass criteria (recommend using “D”). approach distance 22. 20. Alarm 5. Demonstrate activating the man overboard (MOB) function. Alarm 3. Name each waypoint either by text information or number. Waypoint. 13. 26. Check display. Enter PLOTTER and demonstrate proficiency. Activate DGPS mode (if installed). 19. 28. 12. Demonstrate clear track. Demonstrate soft key proficiency in Sailplan 2 (Waypoint Bank). 25. 18. 11. Enter ALARM LIMITS.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 10. Demonstrate re-enabling the MOB function. Alarm 4. 21. Enter DGPS Control. X-track error limit b. 15. Locate MOB position in the Waypoint Bank. Demonstrate creating a sailplan utilizing the waypoints previously entered in the waypoint bank. Program warning areas (minimum of 2). Alarm 1. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 4-46 . Enter a minimum of 5 waypoints into the waypoint bank using positions provided by the instructor. Enter WARNINGS. Enter ALARM STATUS. 27. 16. 24. Acknowledge all active alarms. Demonstrate appropriate alarm activation.

Chapter 14. day or night. 2. navigation kit. d. Ensure NMEA 1 and NMEA 2 are displaying proper configurations while in DGPS mode. and local charts of the area. National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) Data Output. Power off unit. under any weather conditions. 31. Section D Coast Guard Navigation Standards. Enter SETUP. Plot position of boat using latitude and longitude coordinates obtained from the boat’s GPS/DGPS. Locate DGPS icon. b. All plotting on charts should be done using proper chart notation and symbols.5 (series). Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 32. COMDTINST M16114. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting of use of a reference. Accessories. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-05-08-TYPE References Determine the Location of a Boat Using GPS/DGPS a. 30.2 (series) GPS/DGPS Operator’s Handbook The American Practical Navigator Conditions Task must be performed on each boat type while underway. Energize GPS/DGPS.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 29. The location must be within 100 yards. Instructor Comments Date 4-47 . Enter GPS 2 (GPS Status) and verify quality of satellite signal and number of satellites tracked. using only the installed GPS/DGPS. 3. c. COMDTINST M3530.

Determine boat’s speed using the GPS/DGPS. Continue until voyage is complete. Course must be completed within 5 minutes (plus or minus) of the ETA to the final destination. 12. a stopwatch or clock. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. All turns must be made within 50 yards of the turn point. The instructor should verify positions and speeds using the available navigational instruments. 8. day or night.2 (series) GPS/DGPS Operator’s Handbook The American Practical Navigator Conditions Task must be performed onboard each boat type while underway. navigation kit. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. and reset cross track error (XTE) function. 4-48 . Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Clear Sailplan 1. or clock. Two or more fixes are required on legs of at least 3 nautical miles. Task must be run over a course provided by the instructor of at least 3 nautical miles and containing at least 4 course changes. All chart plotting must be accomplished using proper notation and symbols. Determine and lay out courses and waypoints for turns on the chart.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-05-09-TYPE References Pilot a Boat Using GPS/DGPS a. 3. 10. stopwatch. b. Activate the waypoint function on the radar. under any weather conditions. c. The boat must remain within one-tenth of a nautical mile of the intended course. d. 6. 2. Enter Navigate mode (Navigate 2). 4. Chapter 14. Predict boat’s speed and ETA to first turn point. 9. and local charts of the area. 7. COMDTINST M3530. Times must be within one minute (plus or minus) of the estimated time of turn and speeds must be within one knot.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. Activate the GPS/DGPS. Steer boat directly to first turn point. Section D Coast Guard Navigation Standards. Enter waypoints into the GPS/DGPS. 11. 5. Insert waypoints into a sailplan. (XTE reset only at beginning of run). using only the installed GPS/DGPS. Clear boat from pier and start on course.

2 (series) GPS/DGPS Operator’s Handbook The American Practical Navigator Conditions Task should be performed while underway or moored. day or night. Waypoint Event Position Course Deviation Variance (CDV) Route f. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-05-10-TYPE References Operate the GPS/DGPS a. e. the trainee must. Each step should be completed within 5 minutes. under any weather conditions. perform the steps listed below. i. In response to the instructor. Determine horizontal dilution of precision (HDOP) quality. Enter setup menu and ensure the following are correct: a. MOB Alarm Navigation GOTO 5. using only the installed GPS/DGPS. Section D Coast Guard Navigation Standards. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 3. b. DGPS selected. COMDTINST M3530. c. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. b. Demonstrate the following functions: a. if installed Date 4-49 .5 (series). Energize GPS/DGPS unit. without error. Adjust contrast/back lighting. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Demonstrate “Reverse Sailplan” for return trip. COMDTINST M16114. d. 6. c. h. c. e. g. Map datum Variation Time d.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 13. Determine signal status. b. d. 4. Chapter 14. 2.

Determine boat’s speed utilizing GPS/DGPS. Enter waypoints into the GPS/DGPS properly. Chapter 14. Determine the Location of. 4. day or night.5 (series). and Pilot a Non-Standard Boat Using GPS/DGPS a. Determine and lay out courses and waypoints on the chart. Section D Coast Guard Navigation Standards. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Clear docks and start on course. Task must be run over a course of 3 nautical miles. Instructor Comments Date 4-50 . The boat must remain within one-tenth of a nautical mile of the intended course. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. stopwatch or clock. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.2 (series) GPS/DGPS Operator’s Handbook Conditions Task must be performed while underway. and local charts of the area. 3.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-05-11-TYPE References Operate. 2. under any weather conditions. b. 6. c. and within 3 minutes of the ETA when the final destination is reached. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M3530. 5. Steer boat directly to final destination. navigation kit. Predict boat’s speed and ETA. using only an installed or handheld GPS/DGPS.

Determine signal status. b.5 (series). Energize the chart plotter unit. 12. Operate cursor to identify objects/symbols. and delete tracks c. 2. Enter. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 14. Demonstrate the event function. Explain the function of clear and enter. Set up and use a route 4-51 . day or night. edit. Demonstrate the display function. 5. 9. c.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-05-12-TYPE References Operate Electronic Charting a. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 3. 8. perform the steps listed below. 10. 7. Demonstrate the range function. Demonstrate the mark function. Section D Coast Guard Navigation Standards. Start. using only the installed chart plotter. Alarm/timers d. Demonstrate the use of the track pad. under any weather conditions. Each step should be completed within 5 minutes.2 (series) RAYCHART Plotter Operator’s Handbook Conditions Task should be performed while underway or moored. COMDTINST M3530. Enter the main menu and demonstrate the following functions: a. Adjust contrast/backlighting. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. and delete a waypoint b. In response to the instructor. the trainee must. 11. edit. without error. 6. 4. Demonstrate the MOB function.

In response to the instructor. Map datum b. under any weather conditions. Adjust backlighting. Demonstrate how to install/remove chart cards. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 2. 6. perform the steps listed below. Section D RAYCHART Plotter Operator’s Handbook Conditions Task should be performed while underway or moored. Explain and demonstrate the power steer mode. Locate the installed GPS/DGPS providing navigational information. 15. 4-52 . Variation c. Date/time d. Identify and explain all of the alarms. 3. Chapter 14. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-05-13-TYPE References Operate the Auto Pilot a. COMDTINST M16114. without error. Explain and demonstrate the compass mode. Turn unit off. the trainee must. b. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. 5. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Each step should be completed within 5 minutes. using only the installed chart plotter.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 13.5 (series). day or night. 4. Enter setup menu and ensure the following are correct: a. Nautical miles and knots selected 14. Explain and demonstrate the navigation mode.

2. navigation kit. Determine and lay out courses for turns on the chart. 3. Compute running time in minutes for each leg at desired speed. 8. Times must be within one minute (plus or minus) of the estimated time of turn and speeds must be within one knot. 6.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-05-14-ANY References Pilot a Boat Using All Electronic Equipment. Take two or more fixes on each leg. 10. The instructor should verify positions and speeds using the available navigational instruments. All turns must be made within 50 yards of the turn point. Activate and tune GPS/DGPS. Task must be run over a course provided by the instructor of at least 10 miles and containing at least 5 course changes (of 10 degrees or more). and Tables a. 5. under any weather conditions. compass. Steer boat directly to first turn point. The boat must remain within one-tenth of a nautical mile of the intended course. 9. fathometer. Instructor Comments Date 4-53 . and fathometer. Determine boat’s speed using the GPS/DGPS. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. COMDTINST M16114. and appropriate charts of the boat. a stopwatch or clock. b. radar. 4. using only the installed GPS/DGPS. Charts. 7.5 (series). COMDTINST M3530. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. radar. a Navigation Kit. Clear pier and start on course. Steer boat directly to each turn point using proper helm commands.2 (series) Conditions Task must be performed while underway at night. Continue until voyage is complete. Predict boat’s speed and ETA for each turn point. Chapter 14 Coast Guard Navigation Standards. All chart plotting must be accomplished using proper notation and symbols. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.

without error. and Time a. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. 2. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.2 (series) The American Practical Navigator Conditions Standards Task should be performed at any t ime onboard the boat. In response to the instructor. speed. COMDTINST M16114. State understanding of nautical slide rule. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. onboard the boat. COMDTINST M3530. Demonstrate the 3-minute rule. b. State units of measurements and formulas for distance. The instructor will provide the time difference figures.2 (series) The American Practical Navigator Conditions Task should be performed at any time. state the basic concepts related to navigation as outlined in the steps listed below.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-05-15-ANY References Distance. Section E Coast Guard Navigation Standards. All positions must be accurate to within one-tenth of a nautical mile. c. 3. Date Instructor Comments TASK COX-05-16-ANY References Demonstrate Plotting a Position Using LORAN-C Time Difference (TD) Coordinates a.5 (series). Define LORAN-C time difference. 3. State time difference position from latitude and longitude. 2. COMDTINST M16114. c. speed and time problems provided by the instructor. Speed. Demonstrate the 6-minute rule. Section D Coast Guard Navigation Standards. Chapter 14. Demonstrate plotting LORAN-C time difference using the interpolator on a LORAN-C overprinted chart.5 (series). 6. 4. speed. COMDTINST M3530. and time. the trainee must. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. State the importance of computing distance. Chapter 14. Complete 5 distance. Date Instructor Comments 4-54 . and time. given a LORAN-C overprinted chart. b. 5. Trainee must plot the time difference coordinates utilizing the LORAN-C Interpolator.

skiffs and punts. Sector (VS). Demonstrate knowledge of SAR fundamentals. and Track Line Return (TSR) Execute a Single Unit Expanding Square Search (SS) Pattern Execute a Single Unit Sector Search (VS) Pattern Execute a Single Unit Parallel Search (PS) Pattern Execute a Single Unit Creeping Line Search (CS) Pattern Execute a Single Unit Track Line Non-Return Search (TSN) Pattern Execute a Single Unit Track Line Return Search (TSR) Pattern See Page 4-56 4-56 4-57 COX-06-04-ANY 4-58 COX-06-05-ANY COX-06-06-ANY COX-06-07-ANY COX-06-08-ANY COX-06-09-ANY COX-06-10-ANY 4-58 4-59 4-60 4-61 4-62 4-63 4-55 . Parallel (PS). The following are objectives of Division Six: • • • Demonstrate knowledge of SAR organization and responsibility.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section F. NOTE $ Introduction Search and Rescue (SAR) The tasks within this Section DO NOT apply to cutter boats. Track Line Non-Return (TSN). In this Section This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number COX-06-01-ANY COX-06-02-ANY COX-06-03-ANY Task Organization and Responsibility Legal Aspects and USCG Policy Successfully Complete the CG Institute’s SAR Fundamentals Course or Maritime SAR Planning (Resident) Course Plot the Following Search Patterns: Expanding Square (SS). Creeping Line (CS). Demonstrate the ability to plot and execute commonly used search patterns.

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification

TASK COX-06-01-ANY

Organization and Responsibility Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats, skiffs and punts. a. b. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual, COMDTINST M16114.5 (series), Chapter 15, Section A U.S. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual, COMDTINST M16130.2 (series)

NOTE $
References

Conditions Standards

Task should be performed at any time onboard the boat. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, the trainee must, without error, state the basic concepts related to organization and responsibility as outlined in the steps listed below. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1. 2. 3. 4.

State the four primary geographic divisions of responsibility for U.S. SAR. State the two geographic areas of Coast Guard responsibility for SAR. State the three general objectives that provide guidance for the SAR program. State the two SAR program goals. Date

Instructor Comments

TASK COX-06-02-ANY

Legal Aspects and USCG Policy Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats, skiffs and punts. a. b. c. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual, COMDTINST M16114.5 (series), Chapter 15, Section C District SOP U.S. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual, COMDTINST M16130.2 (series)

NOTE $
References

Conditions Standards

Task should be performed at any time onboard the boat. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. In response to the instructor, the trainee must, without error, state the basic concepts related to legal aspects and USCG policy as outlined in the steps listed below. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1. 2. 3. 4.

State an understanding of the statutory authority for the SAR program. State an understanding of “SAR agreements”. State which distress beacon the CG endorses. State the response policy for distress beacons.

4-56

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification

Performance Criteria 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. State the response policy for flare incidents. State the definition of a false alarm. State the definition of a hoax. State an understanding of the policy for closing hoax and false alarm cases. State an understanding of the CG Maritime SAR Assistance policy.

Completed (Initials)

10. State an understanding of the CG General Salvage policy other than towing. 11. State an understanding of CG fire fighting activities. 12. State an understanding of the policy for persons trapped in capsized vessels. 13. State an understanding of the District SAR policy on the above topics. Instructor Comments Date

TASK COX-06-03-ANY

Successfully Complete the CG Institute’s SAR Fundamentals Course or Maritime SAR Planning (Resident) Course Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats, skiffs and punts. a. Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431

NOTE $
References Conditions Standards

None. None. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

1.

Successfully complete the SAR Fundamentals Course or Maritime SAR Planning (Resident) Course. Date

Instructor Comments

4-57

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification

TASK COX-06-04-ANY

Plot the Following Search Patterns: Expanding Square (SS), Sector (VS), Parallel (PS), Creeping Line (CS), Track Line Non-Return (TSN), and Track Line Return (TSR) Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats, skiffs and punts. a. b. c. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual, COMDTINST M16114.5 (series), Chapter 15, Sections E and F Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431 U.S. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual, COMDTINST M16130.2 (series)

NOTE $
References

Conditions

Task should be performed at any time onboard the boat. Instructor will provide the trainee with a Search Action Plan, including area description, pattern description, commence search point (CSP), track spacing, major axis, minor axis, and search speed. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Commence search point must be accurate to within 100 yards, track lines must be within 3 degrees, and times to run within 60 seconds. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

Standards

1. 2.

Lay out search pattern correctly on chart with CSP in the proper location and orient the first leg in the correct direction for each pattern. Calculate time to complete the search and time to turn for each search leg for the designated pattern. Date

Instructor Comments

TASK COX-06-05-ANY

Execute a Single Unit Expanding Square Search (SS) Pattern Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats, skiffs and punts. a. b. c. d. e. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual, COMDTINST M16114.5 (series), Chapter 15, Section E Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431 GPS Operator’s Handbook Radar Operator’s Handbook U.S. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual, COMDTINST M16130.2 (series)

NOTE $
References

Conditions

Trainee will be given a CG boat with operational GPS, radar, radio, compass, corrected chart of the operating area, and a certified crew operating within prescribed limitations. Instructor will provide the trainee with a Search Action Plan, including area description, pattern description, CSP, track spacing, major axis, minor axis, and search speed. Task will be performed while underway, day or night, in calm to moderate weather. Trainee must plot the search pattern in accordance with TASK COX-06-04-ANY. The pattern will be run for a minimum of 5 legs, all turns must be 90 degrees to the right and within 50 yards of the predetermined turning points. The search pattern shall be completed within 5 minutes of the calculated completion time.

Standards

4-58

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification

Performance Criteria 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Brief crew on mission. Arrive within 100 yards of plotted CSP. Deploy datum marker buoy at CSP. Report on-scene weather and start time of pattern to SMC. Run first leg of pattern in direction of drift. State speed over ground (SOG). Utilize fathometer to verify depth. Complete turns within 50 yards of their plotted positions. Navigate vessel in accordance with rules of the road.

Completed (Initials)

10. Identify and utilize aids to navigation. 11. Use illumination without compromising night vision, if task is conducted at night. 12. Pass final position of datum to SMC. Instructor Comments Date

TASK COX-06-06-ANY

Execute a Single Unit Sector Search (VS) Pattern Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats, skiffs and punts. a. b. c. d. e. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual, COMDTINST M16114.5 (series), Chapter 15, Section E Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431 GPS Operator’s Handbook Radar Operator’s Handbook U.S. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual, COMDTINST M16130.2 (series)

NOTE $
References

Conditions

Trainee will be given a CG boat with operational GPS, radar, radio, compass, corrected chart of the operating area, and a certified crew operating within prescribed limitations. Instructor will provide the trainee with a Search Action Plan, including area description, pattern description, CSP, track spacing, major axis, minor axis, and search speed. Task will be performed while underway, day or night, in calm to moderate weather. The trainee must plot the search pattern in accordance with TASK COX-06-04-ANY. All turns shall be 120 degrees to the right and within 15 seconds of the estimated time. The search pattern shall be completed within 5 minutes of the calculated completion time. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

Standards

1.

Brief crew on mission.

4-59

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification

Performance Criteria 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Arrive within 100 yards of plotted CSP. Deploy datum marker buoy at CSP. Advise SMC of on-scene weather and start time of pattern. Run first leg of pattern in direction of drift. Adjust the 3rd, 6th and 9th legs to pass through datum. State SOG. Utilize fathometer to verify depth. Complete turns within 50 yards of their plotted positions.

Completed (Initials)

10. Navigate vessel in accordance with rules of the road. 11. Identify and utilize aids to navigation. 12. Use illumination without compromising night vision, if task is conducted at night. 13. Pass final position of datum to SMC. Instructor Comments Date

TASK COX-06-07-ANY

Execute a Single Unit Parallel Search (PS) Pattern Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats, skiffs and punts. a. b. c. d. e. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual, COMDTINST M16114.5 (series), Chapter 15, Section E Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431 GPS Operator’s Handbook Radar Operator’s Handbook U.S. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual, COMDTINST M16130.2 (series)

NOTE $
References

Conditions

Trainee will be given a CG boat with operational GPS, radar, radio, compass, corrected chart of the operating area, and a certified crew operating within prescribed limitations. Instructor will provide the trainee with a Search Action Plan, including area description, pattern description, CSP, track spacing, major axis, minor axis, and search speed. Task will be performed while underway, day or night, in calm to moderate weather. Trainee must plot the search pattern in accordance with TASK COX-06-04-ANY. The CG boat shall commence search within 100 yards of the CSP. All turns shall be 90 degrees and within 50 yards of plotted turn points. The search pattern shall be run for a minimum of 5 legs. The search pattern shall be completed within 5 minutes of the calculated completion time. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

Standards

1.

Brief crew on mission.

4-60

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification

Performance Criteria 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Enter all turns into GPS as waypoints. Arrive within 100 yards of plotted CSP. Adjust course and speed to stay on track line. Complete turns within 50 yards of plotted positions. Utilize XTE function. Utilize SOG function. Utilize ETA function. Utilize fathometer to verify water depth.

Completed (Initials)

10. Navigate vessel in accordance with rules of the road. 11. Identify and utilize aids to navigation. 12. Use illumination without compromising night vision, if task is conducted at night. 13. Advise SMC of completion time of pattern. Instructor Comments Date

TASK COX-06-08-ANY

Execute a Single Unit Creeping Line Search (CS) Pattern Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats, skiffs and punts. a. b. c. d. e. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual, COMDTINST M16114.5 (series), Chapter 15, Section E Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431 GPS Operator’s Handbook Radar Operator’s Handbook U.S. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual, COMDTINST M16130.2 (series)

NOTE $
References

Conditions

Trainee will be given a CG boat with operational GPS, radar, radio, compass, corrected chart of the operating area, and a certified crew operating within prescribed limitations. Instructor will provide the trainee with a Search Action Plan, including area description, pattern description, CSP, track spacing, major axis, minor axis, and search speed. Task will be performed while underway, day or night, in calm to moderate weather. Trainee must plot the search pattern in accordance with TASK COX-06-04-ANY. The CG boat shall commence search within 100 yards of the CSP. All turns shall be 90 degrees and within 50 yards of plotted turn points. The search pattern shall be run for a minimum of 5 legs. The search pattern shall be completed within 5 minutes of the calculated completion time. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

Standards

1.

Brief crew on mission.

4-61

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification

Performance Criteria 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Enter all turns into GPS as waypoints. Arrive within 100 yards of plotted CSP. Adjust course and speed to stay on track line. Complete turns within 50 yards of plotted positions. Utilize XTE function. Utilize SOG function. Utilize ETA function. Utilize depth sounder to verify water depth.

Completed (Initials)

10. Navigate vessel in accordance with rules of the road. 11. Identify and utilize aids to navigation. 12. Use illumination without compromising night vision, if task is conducted at night. 13. Advise SMC of completion time of pattern. Instructor Comments Date

TASK COX-06-09-ANY

Execute a Single Unit Track Line Non-Return Search (TSN) Pattern Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats, skiffs and punts. a. b. c. d. e. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual, COMDTINST M16114.5 (series), Chapter 15, Section E Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431 GPS Operator’s Handbook Radar Operator’s Handbook U.S. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual, COMDTINST M16130.2 (series)

NOTE $
References

Conditions

Trainee will be given a CG boat with operational GPS, radar, radio, compass, corrected chart of the operating area, and a certified crew operating within prescribed limitations. Instructor will provide the trainee with a Search Action Plan, including area description, pattern description, CSP, track spacing, major axis, minor axis, and search speed. Task will be performed while underway, day or night, in calm to moderate weather. Trainee must plot the search pattern in accordance with TASK COX-06-04-ANY. The CG boat shall commence search within 100 yards of the CSP. All turns shall be made within 50 yards of plotted turn points. The search pattern shall be run in its entirety. The search pattern shall be completed within 5 minutes of the calculated completion time. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials)

Standards

1.

Brief crew on mission.

4-62

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification

Performance Criteria 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Enter all turns into GPS as waypoints. Arrive within 100 yards of CSP. Advise SMC of on-scene weather and start time of pattern. Adjust course and speed to stay on track line. Complete turns within 50 yards of plotted positions. Utilize XTE function. Utilize SOG function. Utilize ETA function.

Completed (Initials)

10. Utilize depth sounder to verify water depth. 11. Navigate vessel in accordance with rules of the road. 12. Identify and utilize aids to navigation. 13. Use illumination without compromising night vision, if task is conducted at night. 14. Advise SMC of completion time of the pattern. Instructor Comments Date

TASK COX-06-10-ANY

Execute a Single Unit Track Line Return Search (TSR) Pattern Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats, skiffs and punts. a. b. c. d. e. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual, COMDTINST M16114.5 (series), Chapter 15, Section E Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431 GPS Operator’s Handbook Radar Operator’s Handbook U.S. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual, COMDTINST M16130.2 (series)

NOTE $
References

Conditions

Trainee will be given a CG boat with operational GPS, radar, radio, compass, corrected chart of the operating area, and a certified crew operating within prescribed limitations. Instructor will provide the trainee with a Search Action Plan, including area description, pattern description, CSP, track spacing, major axis, minor axis, and search speed. Task will be performed while underway, day or night, in calm to moderate weather. Trainee must plot the search pattern in accordance with TASK COX-06-04-ANY. The CG boat shall commence search within 100 yards of the CSP. All turns shall be made within 50 yards of plotted turn points. The search pattern shall be run in its entirety. The search pattern shall be completed within 5 minutes of the calculated completion time.

Standards

4-63

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification

Performance Criteria 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Brief crew on mission. Enter all turns into GPS as waypoints. Arrive within 100 yards of plotted CSP. Advise SMC of on-scene weather and start time of pattern. Adjust course and speed to stay on track line. Complete turns within 50 yards of plotted positions. Utilize XTE function. Utilize SOG function. Utilize ETA function.

Completed (Initials)

10. Utilize depth sounder to verify water depth. 11. Navigate vessel in accordance with rules of the road. 12. Identify and utilize aids to navigation. 13. Use illumination without compromising night vision, if task is conducted at night. 14. Advise SMC of completion time of pattern. Instructor Comments Date

4-64

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification

Section G.
Introduction • • • • In this Section

Rescue and Assistance

The following are objectives of Division Seven: Demonstrate the ability to rescue personnel in various distress situations. Demonstrate the ability to deliver personnel or equipment to vessels in distress. Demonstrate the knowledge and ability to use standard U.S. Coast Guard boat salvage equipment. Demonstrate the knowledge and ability to transfer personnel safely between different types of units.

This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number
COX-07-01-TYPE COX-07-02-TYPE COX-07-03-TYPE COX-07-04-TYPE COX-07-05-TYPE COX-07-06-TYPE COX-07-07-ANY COX-07-08-TYPE COX-07-09-ANY COX-07-10-TYPE COX-07-11-TYPE COX-07-12-TYPE COX-07-13-TYPE

Task
Recover a Person from the Water Using the Direct Pickup Method Recover a Life-Like Dummy (Oscar) in 2- to 4-Foot Seas Maneuver the Boat Alongside Another Boat, with No Way-On, and Transfer Personnel Maneuver the Boat Alongside Another Boat, with Way-On, and Transfer Personnel Maneuver the Boat Alongside a Ship and Transfer Personnel Combat a Boat Fire from the Boat Use a Portable Pump to Dewater a Sinking or Swamped Boat Use an Eductor to Dewater a Sinking or Swamped Boat Attend a Static Display Given by a CG Helicopter Air Crew Participate in a Basket Hoist Using the Direct Delivery Method Participate in a Basket Hoist Using the Trail Line Delivery Method Participate in a Rescue Swimmer Transfer Using the Rescue Strap Demonstrate the Appropriate Responses to the Basic Engineering Casualty Control Exercises (BECCE)

See Page
4-66 4-67 4-68 4-68 4-69 4-70 4-71 4-72 4-73 4-74 4-75 4-76 4-76

4-65

in fair weather conditions and calm seas. 5. boat crew survival vest. a wet suit or dry suit. Chapter 16. Section A Given an operational CG boat and a certified crew operating within prescribed limitations. Depress MOB button on the GPS/DGPS. Brief crew on pickup. if able. Deploy life ring and strobe light correctly. 4. Base approach to MOB on prevailing weather conditions. The MOB shall wear a helmet. Boat comes about toward the side from which the MOB fell or in a safe manner. Notify Station.5 (series). 3. and coxswain is informed of MOB’s position. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Recover MOB within 3 minutes. 8. Coxswain receives report of MOB. Task must be completed without placing the MOB in any danger and should be completed within 3 minutes of the time the initial warning was given. 9. Instructor Comments Date 4-66 .Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-07-01-TYPE References Conditions Recover a Person from the Water Using the Direct Pickup Method a. PFD. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. COMDTINST M16114. 6. Task will be performed while underway. 7. Pointer is assigned and positioned. trainee will pick up a live person or a life-like dummy (Oscar) from the water. 2. during daylight hours. and if conditions warrant.

Task will be performed while underway. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Chapter 16. 7. Section A NOTE $ References Conditions Given an operational CG boat and a certified crew operating within prescribed limitations. Correctly deploy life ring and strobe light. Depress MOB button on the GPS/DGPS. Task must be completed without placing the simulated MOB in danger and should be completed within 3 minutes of the time the initial warning was given. Boat comes about toward the side from which the MOB fell or in a safe manner. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. 4. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 9. during daylight hours. Notify Station. trainee will recover a life-like dummy (Oscar) from the water. Recover MOB within 3 minutes. 2. COMDTINST M16114.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-07-02-TYPE Recover a Life-Like Dummy (Oscar) in 2. a. 5. 8. 6. Base approach to MOB on prevailing conditions. Instructor Comments Date 4-67 .to 4-Foot Seas Task DOES NOT apply to skiffs and punts. Coxswain receives report of MOB.5 (series). 3. Brief crew on pickup. Pointer is assigned and positioned. with a minimum sea height of 4 feet. and coxswain is informed of MOB’s position.

a certified crew operating within prescribed limitations. Transfer personnel to other boat. with Way-On. in fair weather conditions and calm seas. Brief crew and assign duties. 7. 6. Rig all fenders. COMDTINST M16114. in fair weather conditions and calm seas. Bring CG boat alongside other boat. Brief personnel on the other boat. and Transfer Personnel a. 2. Task must be completed without placing the personnel of either boat in danger. and Transfer Personnel a. 8. 3. Standards 4-68 .5 (series). Section E Given an operational CG boat. Chapter 10. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. 5. during daylight hours. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 10.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-07-03-TYPE References Conditions Maneuver the Boat Alongside Another Boat. Task will be performed while underway. 4. during daylight hours. a certified crew operating within prescribed limitations. Section E Given an operational CG boat. Maneuver CG boat away from other boat. Task will be performed while underway. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. and another boat underway with way -on. Make approach to other boat.5 (series). Task should be performed in a controlled manner and without unnecessary maneuvering. trainee will safely transfer personnel from the CG boat to the other boat with way -on. Roving fender is available if needed. Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-07-04-TYPE References Conditions Maneuver the Boat Alongside Another Boat. and another boat underway but with no way-on. Task must be completed without placing the personnel of either boat in danger. with No Way-On. Task should be performed in a controlled manner and without unnecessary maneuvering. COMDTINST M16114. trainee will safely transfer personnel from the CG boat to the other boat with no way -on. Establish communications with the other boat.

Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 1. 4-69 .5 (series). Chapter 10. trainee will safely transfer personnel from the CG boat to the ship or large vessel. If the geographical location of a unit prevents practical demonstration of this task. or cargo net. 6. Standards NOTE $ Accomplishment of this task depends on the availability of a ship or large vessel. Establish communications with the other boat. Transfer personnel to other boat. Brief crew and assign duties. during daylight hours. 5. 8. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section E Knight’s Modern Seamanship NOTE $ References Conditions Given an operational CG boat. 4. Roving fender is available if needed. a certified crew operating within prescribed limitations. Brief personnel on the other boat. 2. a. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Task should be accomplished at the earliest possible time. Task must be completed without placing the personnel of either vessel in danger. and a ship or large vessel with an accommodation ladder. Maneuver CG boat away from other boat. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-07-05-TYPE Maneuver the Boat Alongside a Ship and Transfer Personnel Task ONLY applies to cutter boats. COMDTINST M16114. Rig all fenders. it may be postponed until an opportunity presents itself. 7. Task should be performed in a controlled manner and without unnecessary maneuvering. Bring CG boat alongside other boat. Jacob’s ladder. b. Make approach to other boat. in fair weather conditions and calm seas. 3. Task will be performed while underway. Brief crew and assign duties.

Chapter 18. 6. 5.5 (series). if applicable. Roving fender is available if needed. Establish communications with the other vessel.2 (series) NOTE $ References Conditions Given an operational CG boat. 4. COMDTINST M16130. Task will be performed while underway. and another boat with a simulated fire onboard. NOTE $ It is not necessary to actually place water on the drill boat for this task. Section A U. 7. a certified crew operating within prescribed limitations. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual. Brief shipboard personnel and determine method of transfer. 8. during daylight hours.S. b. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 10. Make approach to ship using a 15. 9. Maneuver CG boat away from the ship. COMDTINST M16114. but in order to minimize salt spray on the drill boat the fire fighting steps may be simulated. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Receive sea painter and secure to an inboard cleat just aft of the bow. Rig all fenders. 11. Hold boat at desired position alongside the ship.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 2. a. 3. Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-07-06-TYPE Combat a Boat Fire from the Boat Task DOES NOT APPLY to cutter boats. Obtain permission from ship CO to come alongside. Request and receive permission to maneuver away from the ship. trainee will combat the fire on the other boat. in fair weather conditions and calm seas. 4-70 . Transfer personnel to the ship.to 30-degree angle. All of the equipment must be activated.

5 (series). Task should be performed in a controlled manner and without unnecessary maneuvering. 5. Task must be completed without placing the personnel of either boat in danger. Brief crew and assign duties. Standards 4-71 . Keep SMC advised of status. 3. 2. 9. a certified crew operating within prescribed limitations. in fair weather conditions and calm seas. Rescue any persons in extremis and address medical needs. 10. Trainee should maintain positive control over both boats during the dewatering. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 18. Prepare fire fighting equipment for use. 4. during daylight hours. Section I NOTE $ References Conditions Given an operational CG boat.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Standards Task must be completed without placing the personnel of either boat in danger. Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-07-07-ANY Use a Portable Pump to Dewater a Sinking or Swamped Boat Task DOES NOT APPLY to cutter boats. a. 6. 7. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. trainee will dewater the other boat using a portable pump. Account for all persons from the distressed boat upon arrival. Approach distressed boat from upwind. Dewater distressed vessel if able to do so safely. and another boat simulating taking on water. COMDTINST M16114. Fight fire keeping CG boat upwind. Engage fire pump and start portable pump. Make preparations to dewater distressed vessel. 8. Task will be performed while underway. Task should be performed in a controlled manner and without unnecessary maneuvering.

Brief crew and assign duties. a certified crew operating within prescribed limitations. Chapter 18. Task should be performed in a controlled manner and without unnecessary maneuvering. in fair weather conditions and calm seas. 2. 8. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). 2. 9. Keep SMC advised of status. trainee will dewater the other boat using an eductor. 6. and another boat simulating taking on water. 4. during daylight hours.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification WARNING I Do not use a drop/portable pump to dewater a boat with fuel contamination in its bilges. 4-72 . Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Account for all persons from the distressed boat upon arrival and remove them from the boat. Determine if flooding was controlled. 7. Section I NOTE $ References Conditions Given an operational CG boat. Safely reduce or stop flooding. Conduct risk assessment before placing CG personnel onboard distressed vessel. Make portable pump ready for use. Trainee should maintain positive control over both boats during the dewatering. 11. 5. Task will be performed while underway. Task must be completed without placing the personnel of either boat in danger. Brief crew and assign duties. 10. Safely identify source of flooding. if necessary. Completed (Initials) Performance Criteria 1. 12. COMDTINST M16114. Dewater distressed vessel. Account for all persons from the distressed boat upon arrival and remove them from the boat if necessary. a. Set flood watch. 3. Rescue any persons in extremis and address medical needs. Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-07-08-TYPE Use an Eductor to Dewater a Sinking or Swamped Boat Task DOES NOT APPLY to cutter boats. Start portable pump and obtain/maintain suction.

Sections C and D Task will be performed at any time with both helicopter types on deck for a static display. Determine if flooding is controlled. Identify tow points for each type of helicopter. Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-07-09-ANY References Conditions Attend a Static Display Given by a CG Helicopter Air Crew a. Task must be completed at the earliest possible time. Safely identify source of flooding. 4-73 . Keep SMC advised of status. Start fire pump and obtain/maintain suction. COMDTINST M16114. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Dewater distressed vessel. 5. Task must be completed in accordance with the steps listed below. Safely reduce or stop flooding. Rescue any persons in extremis and address medical needs. For cutter boats. prior to conducting helicopter operations. Conduct risk assessment before placing CG personnel onboard distressed vessel. Chapter 19. 9. 11. Attend static display given by a CG helicopter aircrew prior to conducting helicopter operations. 2. NOTE $ Standards Task MAY BE DEFERRED if no helicopter training is available. Set flood watch.5 (series). Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 10. 7.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 3. Make eductor ready for use. 4. 8. 6. task only applies to flight-deck equipped cutters. 12.

a. during daylight hours. Task must be completed at the earliest possible time. 4. 7. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. COMDTINST M16114. and boat crew personnel survival kits. Task must be performed so as not to endanger any crew members or the helicopter. State number of persons onboard (POBs) on helicopter and boat. Agree on breakaway procedures between helicopter and boat. Establish communications with the helicopter. Basket must be grounded to the boat before crew members handle it.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 3. Basket and/or cable must not become entangled or otherwise attached to the boat at any time. in fair weather conditions. 2. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 4. 5. Chapter 19. All crew members should be wearing helmets. Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK COX-07-10-TYPE Participate in a Basket Hoist Using the Direct Delivery Method Task ONLY applies to boats 30' and above. PFDs or wet suits. Lift basket from CG boat and hoist up to helicopter. Establish and maintain boat heading and speed. 4-74 . Sections A and B NOTE $ References Conditions Task will be performed while underway. 3. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Brief crew and assign duties. Task should be accomplished during a scheduled helicopter operations training session. Discuss emergency breakaway procedures with the helicopter aircrew.5 (series). Bring basket onto CG boat by hand. 6. NOTE $ Standards Task MAY BE DEFERRED if no helicopter training is available. Identify all emergency exits for each type of helicopter.

Basket must be grounded to the boat before crew members handle it. Agree on breakaway procedures between helicopter and boat. 5. 2. 6. 4. 7. during daylight hours. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Task should be accomplished during a scheduled helicopter operations training session. Establish communications with the helicopter. Bring basket onto CG boat using the trail line. Lift basket from CG boat and hoist up to helicopter. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. a. All crew members should be wearing helmets. COMDTINST M16114. in fair weather conditions. PFDs or wet suits. Task must be performed so as not to endanger any crew members or the helicopter.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-07-11-TYPE Participate in a Basket Hoist Using the Trail Line Delivery Method Task ONLY applies to boats 30' and above. Establish and maintain boat heading and speed. 3. Chapter 19. Task must be completed at the earliest possible time. Brief crew and assign duties. Sections A and B NOTE $ References Conditions Task will be performed while underway. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. NOTE $ Standards Task MAY BE DEFERRED if no helicopter training is available. Basket and/or cable must not become entangled or otherwise attached to the boat at any time. Instructor Comments Date 4-75 .5 (series). State number of POBs on helicopter and boat. and boat crew personnel survival kits.

Task must be completed at the earliest possible time. 3. including non-standard boats. All crew members should be wearing helmets. Agree on breakaway procedures between helicopter and boat. Sections A and B NOTE $ References Conditions Task will be performed while underway. in fair weather conditions. and boat crew personnel survival kits.5 (series). PFDs or wet suits. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Task must be performed so as not to endanger any crew members or the helicopter.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-07-12-TYPE Participate in a Rescue Swimmer Transfer Using the Rescue Strap Task ONLY applies to boats 30' and above. during daylight hours. Establish and maintain boat heading and speed. 7. Hoist rescue swimmer back to helicopter. NOTE $ Standards Task MAY BE DEFERRED if no helicopter training is available. State number of POBs on helicopter and boat. Establish communications with the helicopter. a. Rescue strap and/or cable must not become entangled or otherwise attached to the boat at any time. Task should be accomplished during a scheduled helicopter operations training session. Transfer rescue swimmer to CG boat using the rescue strap. Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-07-13-TYPE References Conditions Demonstrate the Appropriate Responses to the Basic Engineering Casualty Control Exercises (BECCE) a. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Chapter 19. 6. without the use of any references or prompting. Brief crew and assign duties. COMDTINST M16114. 4-76 . Manufacturers’ Operator’s Manual and Technical Publications Task should be performed at any time onboard each of the unit’s boats. The cable must be grounded to the boat before crew members handle it. 4. 5. 2. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.

Loss of steering (jammed rudder). Loss of electrical power. 5. demonstrate the steps taken for each of the BECCEs listed. 9.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Standards In response to the instructor. 7. Propeller damage and excessive cavitation. 10. Cooling system casualties. 2. 13. 11. 14. Reduction gear failure. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Loss of fuel oil pressure. Loss of steering (cable/hydraulic). Loss of control of engine RPMs. 12. Collision with submerged object. Loss of main engine lube oil pressure. without error. 15. as stated in reference (a) above. Immersed outboard. General starting difficulties including engine not starting and emergency starting procedures. Main engine high water temperature. 3. Accidental grounding. the trainee must. Fire in the engine room. 6. 8. Instructor Comments Date 4-77 . 4.

Demonstrate the procedures for inspecting both fixed and running towing gear. This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number COX-08-01-ANY COX-08-02-ANY COX-08-03-ANY COX-08-04-ANY COX-08-05-TYPE COX-08-06-ANY COX-08-07-ANY COX-08-08-TYPE COX-08-09-TYPE COX-08-10-TYPE Task State General Towing Safety Precautions State the Principle Forces that Affect Boat Towing Inspect the Towline and Associated Hardware Make Preparations for Taking a Vessel in Tow Use a “Heavy Weather” Approach to Take a Vessel in Stern Tow Use a Shackle or Skiff Hook Assembly Connection to Take a Vessel in Stern Tow Take a Boat in Stern Tow Using a Bridle Connection Take a Boat in Alongside Tow from a Stern Tow Moor a Disabled Vessel in Alongside Tow to a Float or Pier Take a Vessel at Anchor. Near Shoal Water in Tow See Page 4-79 4-79 4-80 4-80 4-81 4-83 4-84 4-85 4-86 4-86 4-78 . Introduction • • • • In this Se ction Towing and Salvage The following are objectives of Division Eight: Define and state the static and dynamic forces that come into play during various towing evolutions. Demonstrate the procedures used when preparing to take a vessel in tow.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section H. Demonstrate the procedures for taking a boat in tow using different approaches.

5. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. the trainee must. COMDTINST M16114. 4. 7.5 (series). 4. 3. state the basic policy precautions taken during towing evolutions as outlined in the steps listed below. State the policy regarding establishing and maintaining communications.5 (series). State the precautions regarding the breaking strength of shackles used. State the types. State the cause of towline strain. without error. State the precautions regarding the towed boat’s hull capability and speed. and effects of dynamic forces.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-08-01-ANY References Conditions Standards State General Towing Safety Precautions a. COMDTINST M16114. In response to the instructor. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. State the policy regarding wearing of PFDs by persons onboard the disabled boats. State the cause and effect of shock load. causes. State the precautions regarding personnel around the towline. Date Instructor Comments TASK COX-08-02-ANY References Conditions Standards State the Principle Forces that Affect Boat Towing a. Chapter 17. In response to the instructor. the trainee must. Section B Task should be performed at any time. State the precautions regarding removal of personnel from disabled boats. 2. Date Instructor Comments 4-79 . 6. State the causes and effects of static forces. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 3. without error. 5. 2. State the precautions regarding the throwing of heaving lines. state the principle forces effecting boat towing as outlined in the steps listed below. Appendix 17-A Task should be performed at any time. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. State the effect that lengthening the towline has on shock load. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.

All hawsers. Inspect the double-braided bridles and state the warning signs for wear or defective condition. bridles. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. and seas of not less than 2 feet. chocks. Date Instructor Comments TASK COX-08-04-ANY References Conditions Make Preparations for Taking a Vessel in Tow a. Completed (Initials) 4-80 . Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. and a bridle may be used for hookup.to 30-knot winds. All gear should be inspected in accordance with the above reference and as outlined in the steps listed below. Section C Task will be performed dockside during daylight hours. Chapter 17. 5. A messenger should be used for passing the towline.5 (series). Chapter 17. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Inspect wire rope bridles and state the warning signs for wear or defective condition. Inspect the shackles and kicker/skiff hook and state the warning signs for defective condition. 3. Standards Trainee must perform the task without casualty to personnel or boat in accordance with the steps listed below. Performance Criteria 1. cleats.5 (series). and other gear carried aboard the boat and associated with towing will be inspected. hooks. 2. 3. shackles. 2. Inspect the towline and state the warning signs for wear or defective condition. 20. and the towline storage reel and state the warning signs for defective condition. Determine material condition of the vessel to be towed. 10. COMDTINST M16114. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Establish communications using a Coast Guard working frequency. and seas of not less than 6 feet but not greater than 8 feet. COMDTINST M16114.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-08-03-ANY References Conditions Inspect the Towline and Associated Hardware a. Section D and Appendix 17-A Task will be performed while underway for training or towing operations during daylight: For MLB: For UTB: For all others: 20. and seas of not less than 4 feet but not greater than 8 feet.to 30-knot winds.to 20-knot winds. Inspect bitts. 4. Proper radio procedure and prowords shall be used during all radio communications. Determine physical condition of the people onboard the vessel to be towed.

Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference.to 20-knot winds. Safety d. Hookup procedure b.) g. COMDTINST M16114. Bend heaving line to towline for passing to the vessel to be towed. Establish backup emergency signal(s). Section D Task will be performed while underway for training or towing operations during day light in: For MLB: For UTB: For all others: 20. Chapter 17. Towing approach Establish communications schedule to be followed for the duration of the tow. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 5. Ensure that the operator of the distressed vessel understands the above procedures. Date Completed (Initials) 7. 6.5 (series). Standards Trainee must perform the task without casualty to personnel or boat in accordance with the steps listed below. 9. and seas of not less than 2 feet.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 4. including the following: a. and seas of not less than 4 feet but not greater than 8 feet.to 30-knot winds. 20. Instructor Comments TASK COX-08-05-TYPE References Conditions Use a “Heavy Weather” Approach to Take a Vessel in Stern Tow a. etc. Brief crew on assigned duties. Operating procedure (steering behind. 8. A messenger should be used for passing the towline and a bridle may be used for hookup. Breakaway procedure f. Direct people onboard the vessel to be towed to don life preservers. Line handling c. and seas of not less than 6 feet but not greater than 8 feet. Chafing gear fitting for towing line or bridle e. Brief people onboard vessel to be towed regarding the hookup and towing procedure to be used. 10.to 30-knot winds. Towline must be passed on the first pass without resorting to backing down and with no risk of fouling the towline. Performance Criteria 1. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 4-81 .

Display proper lights and sound signals given for the weather conditions present. 4. 6. 17. Install chafing gear as needed. Keep boat stationed in optimal position. Adjust scope of towline to put towed vessel in step. 10. 18. 13. Place working turn on tow bitt after towline is secured on disabled vessel. Make preparations for taking a boat in tow in accordance with TASK COX-08-04-ANY.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 2. Set and maintain tow watch. 8. Instructor Comments Date 4-82 . 16. 11. Maintain safe towing speed. Ensure crew member passes the heaving line to the disabled vessel. Determine vessel’s relative rate of drift by observing which vessel drifts to leeward faster. 7. 9. Pay out appropriate length of towline. Maneuver boat onto the same heading as the disabled vessel and stop astern of it. Make approach into predominate weather/seas. 14. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 3. 12. Pay out and tend line away from boat’s screws. Make up tow bitt. including the establishment of the best place to attach a line and the rigging of a bridle if one is to be used. 15. 5. Set initial course. Check status of towed vessel.

Maneuver boat to position in front of the disabled vessel. Set initial course. 5.5 (series). 6. Maintain safe towing speed. 2. 3. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 8. Install chafing gear as needed. Pay out appropriate length of towline. Brief crew on assigned duties. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-08-06-ANY References Conditions Use a Shackle or Skiff Hook Assembly Connection to Take a Vessel in Stern Tow a. 10. 4. in calm to moderate weather conditions. Adjust scope of towline to put towed vessel in step. Chapter 17 Task will be performed while underway for training or towing operations. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. 13. Pay out and tend line away from boat’s screws. during daylight. Trainee must perform the task without casualty to personnel or boat in accordance with the steps listed below. Make preparations for taking a boat in tow in accordance with TASK COX-08-04-ANY. COMDTINST M16114. Check status of towed vessel. 7. 15. Place working turn on tow bitt after towline is secured on disabled vessel. 12. Begin approach from off the bow and downwind of the disabled vessel. Set and maintain tow watch. 11. 9. Make up tow bitt. 16. Instructor Comments Date 4-83 . 14. Ensure crew member passes the shackle or attaches the skiff hook to the disabled vessel. Display proper lights and sound signals given for the weather conditions present.

in calm to moderate weather conditions. 14.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-08-07-ANY References Conditions Take a Boat in Stern Tow Using a Bridle Connection a. Check status of towed vessel. 5. 8. Chapter 17 Task will be performed while underway for training or towing operations. 10. Instructor Comments Date 4-84 . Keep boat stationed in optimal position. 15. COMDTINST M16114. Set and maintain tow watch. 7. Place working turn on tow bitt after towline is secured on disabled vessel. 12. Maintain safe towing speed. Maneuver boat onto the same heading as the disabled vessel and stop astern of it. 4. 2. 3. 6. Set initial course. Brief crew on assigned duties. Ensure crew member passes the heaving line to the disabled vessel. Install chafing gear as needed. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 13. Display proper lights and sound signals given for the weather conditions present. Pay out appropriate length of towline. Trainee must perform the task without casualty to personnel or boat in accordance with the steps listed below. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Towline must be passed on the first pass without resorting to backing down and with no risk of fouling the towline. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. Make up tow bitt. 18. 16. 9. Determine vessel’s relative rate of drift by observing which vessel drifts to leeward faster. Pay out and tend line away from boat’s screws.5 (series). 17. Make preparations for taking a boat in tow in accordance with TASK COX-08-04-ANY including the establishment of the best place to rig a bridle. Make approach into predominate weather/seas. during daylight. 11. Adjust scope of towline to put boat-towed vessel in step.

5 (series). 11. Attach forward spring line. 3. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Maintain positive control of the tow and keep towline in view and appropriate relative position while shortening tow. a. Brief crew on assigned duties. Pass and secure tow strap to disabled vessel ensuring the stern of the boat is aft of the tow. Instructor Comments Date 4-85 . Towline must not be placed near the screws at any time. Make alongside lines ready.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-08-08-TYPE References Conditions Take a Boat in Alongside Tow from a Stern Tow a. Energize appropriate navigation lights as needed. The disabled vessel should be at least ¾ the length of the towed boat. 4. Brief vessel to be towed on procedures to be used. Move towline to the #1 line position. and fake out of the way (clear of well deck). COMDTINST M16114. 5. 8. 2. Drop towline of disabled vessel or properly execute backdown approach. 9. Break down tow bitt. during daylight. Secure aft spring line and stern line. Slow speed in increments and shorten tow if needed. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. haul slack towline aboard. in calm weather conditions. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Prepare deck for alongside tow. b. Trainee must perform the task without casualty to personnel or boat in accordance with the steps listed below. Rig fenders on appropriate side of towing vessel. 10. 7. 6. Chapter 17 Task will be performed while underway for training or towing operations.

State the expected effects of the wind and current on the mooring of the boat. Trainee must perform the task without casualty to personnel or boat in accordance with the steps listed below. Trainee must accomplish the task wit hout prompting or use of a reference. in calm to moderate weather conditions. a. Towline must be passed on the first pass with no risk of fouling the towline. Safely moor vessel(s). Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Brief crew on the procedure to be used and assign duties. and procedures. 4. Brief towed boat on mooring method. during daylight. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Brief bow pointer and position in effective location. during daylight.5 (series). Trainee must perform the task without casualty to personnel or boat in accordance with the steps listed below. 2. COMDTINST M16114. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-08-09-TYPE Moor a Disabled Vessel in Alongside Tow to a Float or Pier Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. a. Boat must be moored on the first try with a minimum of maneuvering. Towline must not be placed near the screws at any time. at an angle. 3. Instructor Comments Date TASK COX-08-10-TYPE Take a Vessel at Anchor. in calm weather conditions.5 (series). Approach pier slowly. 5. S tandards 4-86 . Chapter 17 NOTE $ References Conditions Task will be performed while underway for training or towing operations. 6. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Chapter 17 NOTE $ References Conditions Task will be performed while underway for training or towing operations. Near Shoal Water in Tow Task DOES NOT apply to cutter boats. location.

Identify nearest hazard and adjust approach as necessary. 6. 9. Instructor Comments Date 4-87 . 12. Adjust speed accordingly for the type of boat and conditions. Brief crew on assigned duties. 2. Make preparations for taking a boat in tow in accordance with TASK COX-08-04-ANY including the establishment of the best place to rig a bridle. 13. Set tow watch. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 10. 7. Pay out appropriate length of line for size and type of boat being towed. 4. 3. Keep station while heaving line and pass towline/bridle to disabled vessel. Display proper navigational lights and sound signals for the current weather conditions. 8. Direct crew to tend line with no strain until connection is completed. 11.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 1. Maneuver towed boat to safest position where heaving line can be passed. 5. Recover anchor of disabled boat or cut anchor line Tend bitt while boat and tow move clear of restricted waters. Adjust scope of towline to put boat and towed vessel in step.

Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Introduction Law Enforcement. Complete the following Boarding Officer tasks: a.3 (series) Task should be performed at any time. In this Section This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number COX-09-01-ANY Task Law Enforcement. 1-04 Authority and Jurisdiction 1-05 Use of Force Continuum 2.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section I. Homeland Security and Defense Operations The following are objectives of Division Nine: • Complete the following Boarding Officer and Boarding Team Member PQS. 3-07 Less than Lethal Delivery Systems Date Instructor Comments 4-88 . b. COMDTINST M16247. b. Homeland Security and Defense Operations a. NOTE $ Standards This task MUST be accomplished by ALL coxswain trainees. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. Complete the following specialty and optional task: a. Homeland Security and Defense Operations See Page 4-88 TASK COX-09-01-ANY References Conditions Law Enforcement. Task must be completed in accordance with the above reference. Boarding Officer/Boarding Team Member Personal Qualification Standard (PQS). 2-01 Authority and Jurisdiction 2-10 Use of Force Against Non-Compliant Vessels 3. Complete the following Boarding Team Member tasks: a.

This Chapter contains the following Sections: Section A B C D E F G H I Title Reading Assignments . Coxswain Trainee Study Guide Introduction This Chapter should be removed and given to the trainee to keep. The instructor should then discuss the trainee’s answers to ensure understanding of the subject matter prior to beginning instruction for each new task. The trainee should read the appropriate reading assignment and answer the related questions prior to beginning training in each new task.Division Eight Reading Assignments .Division One Reading Assignments .Division Seven Reading Assignments .Division Six Reading Assignments .Division Nine See Page 4-90 4-92 4-94 4-101 4-102 4-105 4-112 4-118 4-122 4-89 . Its purpose is to provide guidance for the trainee’s reading assignments and is not a part of the training record.Division Five Reading Assignments . then the task will not have a page number to reference.Division Four Reading Assignments . NOTE $ In this Chapter If there is no reading assignment assigned for a specific task.Division Two Reading Assignments .Division Three Reading Assignments .Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Chapter 3.

Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number COX-01-01-ANY • Reading Assignment U.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section A. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments . COMDTINST M16130.S.2 (series) None assigned See Page 4-91 COX-01-02-ANY • 4-90 .Division One The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task.

A _________________ shall be sent when a station reaches crew fatigue. 4-91 . The maximum crew underway time in seas greater then four feet is _____ hours.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-01-01-ANY: 1. Crew Fatigue Standards The crew fatigue standards are based on a ____________ period. 3. 2.

COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 8.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section B. Chapter 8 Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook.5 (series). Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments . Sections B and C Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.Division Two The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. COMDTINST M16114 (series) None assigned None assigned None assigned See Page 4-93 COX-02-02-TYPE • 4-93 COX-02-03-TYPE • 4-93 • COX-02-04-TYPE COX-02-05-TYPE COX-02-06-ANY • • • 4-92 . Section B Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 8. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number COX-02-01-TYPE • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.

As a displacement hull moves through the water. Net tons refer to the _________________________ capacity of the boat expressed in tons of 100 cubic feet. 4.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-02-01-TYPE: State Basic Construction and Design Features of the Boat 1. the power must be decreased ________________ to move the boat from the planing mode to the displacement mode. smooth _____________________ ___________________________ for the gaskets to press against. 6. the water __________ at the bow and then closes behind it. Doors. 2. 5. 3. Chafing gear is used to protect the __________________________ line. the space between bulkheads becomes _____________________________________. having individually opened dogs. Small openings to water and fuel tanks. as well as void spaces. Transverse frames extend __________________________________ and are perpendicular to the keel. 2. unpainted. The hull consists of a __________________________________ framework and a skin or shell plating. 7. are called _____________________________. should be opened starting with the dog ____________________________ the hinges. Watertight doors and hatches. Once the boat is planing. A boat may sustain heavy damage and remain _______________________. 5. 4. Personnel survival kits are used by ________________________ in the event of capsizing or man overboard. and Set Watertight Integrity Aboard the Boat 1. Watertight closures must have clean. 4-93 . 3. TASK COX-02-03-TYPE: Locate and State the Purpose of Deck Equipment and Fittings Onboard the Boat 1. The complete list of each piece of equipment required onboard a boat is contained in a document called the ________________ ______________________ _________________________. Chafing chain assists in preventing chafing of the ________________ _____________________________ on the bottom. TASK COX-02-02-TYPE: State the Characteristics of. The ________________________ is the backbone of the boat. 8. 2. 4. With enough speed. hatches. provided watertight integrity is maintained. the planing hull is __________________________ up onto the surface of the water. 3. and scuttle covers must be ________________________ ____________________________ while the boat is underway and while it is moored and unattended by crew members. With the hatches shut. bright.

COMDTINST M16114 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section F Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). Section A Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Sections C and D Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Appendix A Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. Chapter 9. Chapter 10 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114 (series) None assigned None assigned None assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). Chapter 10.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 10.5 (series). Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments . COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section C. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 10 Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook.Division Three The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 1. and Chapter 10. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 10. Chapter 10. Section F See Page 4-96 COX-03-02-ANY • 4-96 COX-03-03-TYPE COX-03-04-TYPE COX-03-05-TYPE COX-03-06-TYPE COX-03-07-TYPE COX-03-08-TYPE • • • • • • 4-97 • COX-03-09-TYPE COX-03-10-TYPE COX-03-11-TYPE COX-03-12-TYPE • • • • 4-97 COX-03-13-TYPE • 4-97 COX-03-14-TYPE • 4-97 • COX-03-15-TYPE • 4-98 COX-03-16-TYPE • 4-98 4-94 . COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).5 (series). This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number COX-03-01-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Sections A and B None assigned None assigned None assigned None assigned None assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section B.

5 (series). COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).5 (series). Section H Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 10 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section G Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section H See Page 4-98 COX-03-18-TYPE • 4-99 COX-03-19-TYPE COX-03-20-TYPE • • 4-99 COX-03-21-TYPE • 4-100 COX-03-22-TYPE • 4-100 4-95 .5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 10.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Task Number COX-03-17-TYPE • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). Chapter 10. Chapter 10. COMDTINST M16114. Heavy Weather Addendum None assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.

High freeboard causes a boat to be susceptible to the ____________ of the wind. The direction toward which a current flows is called the __________. 10. the side force will throw the stern to ________________________. when commencing forward motion with no way on. 5. 11. 7. with sternway on and the rudder amidships. for control. Whenever possible. it is called the _______. 9. The difference between the distance a propeller should advance a vessel in one revolution and the distance it actually travels is called _____________________. On a single screw boat. 7. 2. 3. State the Basic Principles of Boat Handling On a single screw boat. 14. the starboard screw is _______________-handed and the port screw is ________________________handed. the boat will pivot in a ___________________ direction. 6. 10. Boats are usually under better control with ______________________. 4. A _______________________________ moment is the force tending to return the boat to an even keel. 9. On a twin screw boat. it will build up a ________________________ sea when running across a bar. the effects of a leeway can be overcome by increasing the RPMs of the _____________________________ engine. 8. On a twin screw boat. When a tidal current is going out. approach a dock into the wind and on the _________________________________ side of the dock. On a twin screw boat. 13. the closer the current is on the bow. the stern will go to ______________________________. 4-96 . 6. 5. Breaking waves are the most __________________________ kind of waves encountered in boat operations. The ______________________ characteristic of a boat depends upon the hull shape. TASK COX-03-02-ANY: 1.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-01-ANY: 1. The speed of a current expressed in knots is called the ___________. The distance the boat will travel after the engine has been disengaged is called _________________________________________. Currents are _______________________________ movements of water. The flow of water caused by the propeller is called _______________ current. An eddy is a _____________________________ motion of water in or beside the main current. When running against the current maneuverability __________________. _____________________ and _______________________________________. The center of gravity is fixed for stability and does not shift unless weight is ___________________. On a twin screw boat. 12. with the port screw astern and the starboard screw stopped. 2. 4. Waves are generated as a result of the ________________ moving over the water’s surface. State the Forces that Affect Boat Handling A boat has two principle types of stability. 3. 8. _____________________ or ___________________. the stern will back to ___________________________. with the port screw astern and the starboard screw ahead.

5. moves ahead slowly.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-08-TYPE: 1. Maneuver the Boat in Tight Quarters With a single screw boat moored port side to. the coxswain should ensure that all ________________ gear is secured and the boat is secured for sea. 2. When clearing with a twin screw boat. the coxswain should cast off the ______ spring line and shift the rudder. the coxswain should explain the ___________________ of the mission. 5. and no wind or current. after throwing the stern out. The basic process should be _________________________ until clear. TASK COX-03-12-TYPE: 1. The engineer should make checks and report the results to the _____________________________________. the coxswain should pull the throttle into ________________________ and _________________________ the rudder to right full. the coxswain puts the engine ahead with the rudder at amidships. 4. With a head current. 4. The combined effect of bank cushion and bank suction may cause a boat to veer off toward the ______________________________ bank. 4-97 . 4. 2. the ________ spring line is cast off. All necessary __________________________ for the mission should be onboard. 2. 3. while being set against the dock. and the reaction time should be noted. 3. The force that has the effect of moving the stern into the bank is called bank ___________________________________. Engine controls should be tested in both _______________________ and ____________________________. the best position from which to begin a turn is the ______________________________ of the channel. Bank cushion and bank suction are strongest when the bank of a channel is _______________________________. Conduct a Pre-Underway Checkoff for the Boat When briefing the crew. TASK COX-03-13-TYPE: 1. 2. and applies right or left rudder ____________________. starboard side to. TASK COX-03-14-TYPE: 1. Before getting underway. When clearing with a single screw boat while being set against the dock. go ahead on the starboard engine and _________________ on the port with _____________ full rudder until the stern clears the dock. Come About in a Narrow Channel The effect of current that causes the boat to veer off from the near bank when traveling in a straight line is called ___________ cushion. Get the Boat Away from a Pier When clearing with a single screw boat and no wind or current. 3. When clearing with a twin screw boat. and after the stern is clear. port side to. and after the stern is clear.

The _______________ is the side-to-side motion as each side goes up and down. 5. 3. Maneuver only to keep a ______________ aspect to the weather. 3. TASK COX-03-17-TYPE: 1. the coxswain must either gain ________________________________ before the water reaches the boat or get the ____________________ into it with headway. Try to avoid the ____________ gusts. 6. _______________________. 4-98 . TASK COX-03-16-TYPE: 1. With an MLB. The average sea runs _______________ to _______________ knots. 3. proceed at a very __________ ______________. __________________. Keep one hand constantly on the __________________ _____________________. ________________ is the horizontal flow or movement of water in a river. Look and drive for the path of ______________________ __________________. 7. If white water is gaining astern. the coxswain should take care to steer ____________ any tendency of the stern to slip sideways.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-15-TYPE: Operate the Boat and Apply Its Handling Characteristics in a Following Sea 1. The vertical motion the entire boat makes is the _______________________. 2. and ___________________ are factors that affect a boat’s turn in a sharp bend or narrow channel. Maneuver in Heavy Weather The _______________ is the up and down motion of the bow or stern. 4. 2. In extremely narrow channels where bank cushion and bank suction are expected. 4. 2. Maneuver in Rivers Bank cushion occurs only when operating in ____________ ______________ to the bank.

3. _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ 3. 4. The four methods of estimating wave height are: a. 5. Wind will cause the bow of the boat to ________________ off. inlet. ______________ occur when a wave breaks from the ends toward the middle. When mooring a twin screw boat. the coxswain should use as ______________ an angle as safely possible. Compare with floating structures/vessels _________________________________ Compare with fixed structures _________________________________. against the current. The ____________________ period in a wave system is the safest time to transit a bar. TASK COX-03-20-TYPE: 1. d. thus avoiding the _________________. the coxswain should make his approach using a ______________________ angle. ___________ is the key to running the safest operations possible. c. When mooring a single screw boat. 8. 7. with no wind or current. or shoal area in heavy seas/surf. 2. or two waves __________ forward of each other. the coxswain should make his approach using an angle of approximately ________. 5. b. The factors which determine the characteristics of wind waves are: a. Identify Heavy Weather Terms In heavy weather. It is preferable to drive a boat in the ________________ if possible. 4-99 . The ___________________ is defined as the section of a wave that carries the most potential energy. Driving on the ______________________ can be particularly useful in a narrow surf zone because it allows you to drive very close to a break relatively safely. 4. c. When mooring a single screw boat from leeward. 2.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-18-TYPE: 1. Moor the Boat If the wind or current is from astern. b. a _____________________ spring line is used instead of a bow spring line. 6.

If the anchor still won’t break free. Weigh the Boat’s Anchor When approaching the anchor. the slack in the line should be taken up ______________________________ to prevent fouling the screw(s). TASK COX-03-22-TYPE: 1. While anchored. if possible. 4. 4-100 . 5. ____________________ the line around the forward bitt and go forward a few feet. Anchor the Boat When selecting an anchorage. 2. 3. If the anchor refuses to break free. 2. move slowly in a wide circle to change the _______________________________ of pull. When letting go. When the anchor line is tending ________________________.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-03-21-TYPE: 1. the anchor will normally break free from the bottom. keep a ______________________ posted at all times. the anchor line should be tended directly from the ___________________________________________________. When approaching the anchorage. head ____________ the wind or current. The scope of the anchor line used should be _____ to______ times the depth of the water to be anchored in calm water. 3. 4. shallow water is preferred because a given amount of line will provide better ______________ and reduce the _______________________________ of the circle of swing.

Division Four The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number COX-04-01-ANY • Reading Assignment None assigned See Page 4-101 .Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section D. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments .

Section C Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section D None assigned See Page 4-103 COX-05-03-ANY • 4-103 COX-05-04-ANY COX-05-05-ANY • • 4-103 COX-05-06-ANY COX-05-07-TYPE COX-05-08-TYPE COX-05-09-TYPE COX-05-10-TYPE COX-05-11-TYPE COX-05-12-TYPE COX-05-13-TYPE COX-05-14-ANY COX-05-15-ANY • • • • • • • • • • 4-104 COX-05-16-ANY • 4-102 . This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number COX-05-01-ANY COX-05-02-ANY • • Reading Assignment None assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section D None assigned None assigned None assigned None assigned None assigned None assigned None assigned None assigned None assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section D None assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 14. COMDTINST M16114.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section E.5 (series).Division Five The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. Chapter 14. COMDTINST M16114. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments .5 (series). Chapter 14. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). Chapter 14. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).

Radar fixes. DR plots should be labeled at least every ____________________ and at every ________________________________ or _______________________ change. 3. either _________________________ or _____________________________ your course or direction. Care should be taken when using radar ____________________________ information only. 7. Only courses __________________________________ are used to determine a DR. 4. 2. TASK COX-05-03-ANY: 1. 4. To apply compass error. no matter how they are determined. Deviation varies for different _____________________________ you steer. Variation is the difference in degrees between the directions to the _________________________________ and true north poles. A new course should be plotted from every ________________as it has been determined thus starting a new DR plot. The amount the compass is deflected by magnetic influences of the boat itself is called ___________________________________. 3. If you have a single LOP. Pilot the Boat Using Dead Reckoning (DR) Techniques Dead reckoning is the process of determining a boat’s position by applying its course. 5. Apply _______________________ to the compass course to get the magnetic course and then apply _________________________ to the magnetic course to get the true course. 6. 2. 3. and time from its ______________ known position. 5. The line of ____________________________ is common to all methods of piloting. 4-103 . 4. speed. wind. 2. 5. you know you are ______________________ on that line. LOPs should always be taken on objects close to the boat as minor errors are magnified as you __________________ your distance from the object. An ideal fix is one having ______________ or more LOPs. are plotted in the same manner as ________________________________ fixes. The key elements of dead reckoning are the course steered and the distance traveled without __________________ to current. 6.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-05-02-ANY: 1. or other external forces. When correcting you must add ___________________ errors and __________________________ westerly errors. TASK COX-05-05-ANY: Determine the Location of a Boat Using Radar Ranges and Bearings 1. Determine a Compass Course from a True Course The compass reading must be corrected for _________________________ and _______________________________.

4. Distance. 2. Speed is measured in _________________. Speed. _________________________ and __________________ are critical elements in navigational calculations.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-05-15-ANY: 1. Time is measured in _________________. 3. 4-104 . Distance is measured in ________________ __________________. and Time ______________________.

S. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 15.2 (series) See Page 4-108 • COX-06-02-ANY • 4-108 • • COX-06-03-ANY COX-06-04-ANY • • 4-110 • • 4-105 . Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual. COMDTINST M16130. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number COX-06-01-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Sections E and F Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431 U. Section A U. COMDTINST M16130. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual.2 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). COMDTINST M16130. COMDTINST M16114.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section F. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual. COMDTINST M16114.2 (series) None assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.S.S. Chapter 15. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments .5 (series).Division Six The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task.5 (series). Section B District SOPs U. Chapter 15.

Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual.2 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual.S. COMDTINST M16130. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 15.S.2 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16130. COMDTINST M16130.S. Chapter 15. Section E Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431 GPS Operator’s Handbook Radar Operator’s Handbook U. Section E Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431 GPS Operator’s Handbook Radar Operator’s Handbook U.2 (series) See Page 4-110 • • • • COX-06-06-ANY • 4-110 • • • • COX-06-07-ANY • 4-111 • • • • 4-106 . COMDTINST M16114.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Task Number COX-06-05-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). Section E Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431 GPS Operator’s Handbook Radar Operator’s Handbook U. Chapter 15.

COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. Section E Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431 GPS Operator’s Handbook Radar Operator’s Handbook U. Chapter 15.2 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual.S. Chapter 15.S.5 (series).Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Task Number COX-06-08-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series).2 (series) See Page 4-111 • • • • COX-06-09-ANY • 4-111 • • • • COX-06-10-ANY • 4-111 • • • • 4-107 . COMDTINST M16130. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). Chapter 15. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual. Section E Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431 GPS Operator’s Handbook Radar Operator’s Handbook U. COMDTINST M16130.2 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section E Coast Guard Institute SAR Fundamentals Course 0431 GPS Operator’s Handbook Radar Operator’s Handbook U. COMDTINST M16130.S.

8. 4. and ____________ render aid to _____________ persons and protect and save ______________ on and under the high seas. the __________ maritime area. Reasonable time on scene by a commercial provider is generally considered to be _________________ _______________ _______________ _______________. Because of their high false alert and alarm rates. __________ __________ and __________. 6. and to maintain __________ __________ and __________ __________ during SAR missions. __________ __________. c. Only the __________ __________ can suspend or downgrade an unresolved hoax or false alarm case. maintain and operate SAR facilities. Maritime SAR is divided into __________ areas. Reserve and ______________ personnel are not to be used in any capacity that might give rise to the perception of a ______________ ______________ ______________. 6. each with its own __________ __________. 121. Flare incidents must be treated as a _____________ and ______________ ______________ unless available information indicates otherwise. Coast Guard resources will not ______________ ______________ with private enterprise. 17. 15. 7. The three geographical divisions are: a. ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ 2. __________ __________ is one of the most important tools available to SAR authorities. The CG endorses the ______________ as the preferred beacon type. 3. Unresolved red or orange flares require ______________ ______________. A case where information is conveyed with the intent to deceive is a ______________. 4. 16. The Coast Guard is responsible for __________ SAR. “SAR Agreements” are formal _____________ agreements and should resolve ______________ coordination problems. and to maintain a __________ __________ position in maritime SAR.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-06-01-ANY: 1. establish. the reporting source did not deliberately act to deceive. b. When the source of a hoax or false alarm has been confirmed. SAR. 12. COMDTINST M16130. 9. The two program goals are to save at least __________ of those people at risk of death and to prevent the loss of at least __________ of the property that is at risk of destruction. 7. Organization and Responsibility The U. In a ______________ ______________ case.S. 4-108 .S. 11. to minimize __________ __________ and __________ __________ during SAR missions. 14. The SMC may use all sources of assistance in a ______________ ______________ without concern for ______________ with private enterprise. 2. SAR resources can reasonably be dispatched upon receipt of a _______________ first alert.2 (series) establishes __________ primary geographical divisions of responsibility for U. the case can be ______________. 5. 10. 3. 13.5/243 MHz first alerts initiate the ____________ phase. The Air Force is responsible for __________ SAR. and the __________ maritime area. The Coast Guard’s primary concern in a SAR situation is that ______________ and ______________ ______________ be provided. TASK COX-06-02-ANY: 1. 5. Legal Aspects and USCG Policy The CFR states that the CG shall develop. Coast Guard Addendum to the United States National Search and Rescue Supplement (NSS) to the International Aeronautical and Maritime Search and Rescue Manual. The three general objectives that provide direction for the SAR program are to minimize loss of __________.

and CG units and personnel are not ______________ ______________ by the operation. A unit CO may consider using ______________ personnel with diving qualifications. 28. ports and harbor. A Marine Assistance Request Broadcast (MARB) will be made to solicit the ______________ ______________ of anyone who can assist the mariner. 27. certified ______________ divers or similarly highly trained ______________ _____________. 21. The ______________ ______________ shall ensure guidance is in place so that experienced supervisors. Coast Guard units should engage in salvage other than towing only when limited salvage operations can prevent a _______________ ______________ or ______________ ______________ of the vessel. The volunteers may be CG personnel or civilians. The District Commander may modify the policy to provide for refloating a grounded boat which is not in peril of further damage or loss if CG units are ______________ of rendering the assistance. 23.S. the vessel being towed will ______________ be taken to the nearest ______________ ______________. 19. During marine fire fighting situations. including ______________ diving qualifications. A unit CO may request the assistance of other ______________ divers. 30. such as local police divers. 25. Any salvage operations shall be performed at the discretion of the unit ______________. decide how to proceed with rescue attempts. if faced with a life-threatening situation and no other resources are reasonably available. Coast Guard or auxiliary vessels may be directed to respond if no intent to respond to a MARB is heard within a ______________ period of time. ______________ ______________ are primarily responsible for maintaining necessary fire fighting capabilities in U. A guideline of ______________ ______________ is recommended. through appropriate channels. In cases involving towing by the CG or Auxiliary. A Coast Guard swimmer is not to go _____________ ______________ or enter a ______________ or ______________ object. CG units shall adopt a ______________ response posture and shall focus their attentions on those traditional CG activities not requiring unit personnel to enter into a ______________ ______________. 22.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification 18. Rescue of persons trapped below the surface of the water must fully consider proper ______________ ______________ and ______________. 20. the owner ______________ the assistance and agrees to the ______________ ______________ to be made. 29. 26. 24. not the ______________ ______________. who ______________ services. 4-109 .

TASK COX-06-06-ANY: 1. the search area is small. Track Line Non-Return (TSN). The ________________ ________________ ________________ is used when the last known position of a search object has a high degree of accuracy. 6. The Coast Guard is responsible for search and rescue in the ________________________________ region. Track spacing is the _________________________________ between adjacent search tracks. 10. The first leg begins in the _________________ direction that the search object is drifting toward. The most important items of information to initially record are the nature of distress and its __________________________________.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-06-04-ANY: Plot the Following Search Patterns: Expanding Square (SS). The _____________________________________________ search pattern is used when the last known position is established within close limits with a high degree of accuracy. and a concentrated search is desirable. TASK COX-06-05-ANY: Execute a Single Unit Expanding Square Search (SS) Pattern 1. Creeping Line (CS). The ___________________________ phase is assigned anytime apprehension exists for the safety of a vessel or the people aboard the vessel. the first leg is normally in the direction of the search object’s drift and all turns are made __________ degrees to starboard. 2. 2. Parallel (PS). using the ___________________________________ _________________________ method. 12. The _________________________________ search pattern is used when datum is established with a high degree of confidence and the search target is difficult to detect. Execute a Single Unit Sector Search (VS) Pattern The VS Pattern is used by a ___________________ boat. Sweep width is a function of the environmental conditions in the search area and how those conditions affect _____________________. datum must be _______________________________ to account for wind and current. 13. 4. 2. The pattern used when the only information available is the intended track of the target is the ________________________________ pattern. The term __________________________ refers to the probable location of the distressed craft corrected for drift at any moment of time. 8. A search description. 11. 3. uses two or more landmarks as boundaries for the search. and Track Line Return (TSR) 1. 5. 9. As time progresses. Sector (VS). In the SS Pattern. The search area must be large enough to ensure that survivors are ______________________________ in it. 7. using the corner method. gives the latitude and longitude of each ___________________ _______________________. 14. A search description. 4-110 . The ____________________________________________________ is responsible for coordinating and controlling a specific SAR mission at the scene of the incident.

A TSN search is used when the only information is the search targets ______ or _________ __________. In darkness or extremely low visibility. TSR is used to search when the only information available on the missing vessel is the ________________ ___________________ of the search object.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-06-07-ANY: 1. TASK COX-06-10-ANY: Execute a Single Unit Track Line Return Search (TSR) Pattern 1. TASK COX-06-08-ANY: Execute a Single Unit Creeping Line Search (CS) Pattern 1. surface search vessels should periodically stop their engines at a selected point in the search area and conduct a _____________ _____________. 4-111 . 2. The TSN is usually the first search action since the ______ may be near its _________ and will be easily seen. TASK COX-06-09-ANY: Execute a Single Unit Track Line Non-Return Search (TSN) Pattern 1. Execute a Single Unit Parallel Search (PS) Pattern The PS search pattern is used when the search area is _________ and there is equal probability of the target being anywhere in the __________ ____________. CS patterns are the same as parallel patterns with the exception that the _______________ are run parallel to the short side. The CS pattern is used when the ______________ ________________ of the search object has been determined to be more likely at one end of the search area than at the other end. 2. 2. The search legs are ____________ to the search area’s ____________ ___________. 2.

Chapter 18.5 (series). Sections A and B Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section I Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments . Chapter 10. Section E Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 10. Section A Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number COX-07-01-TYPE • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 19. Sections A and B None assigned See Page 4-113 COX-07-02-TYPE • 4-113 COX-07-03-TYPE • 4-113 COX-07-04-TYPE • 4-114 COX-07-05-TYPE • 4-114 COX-07-06-TYPE • 4-114 COX-07-07-ANY • 4-71 COX-07-08-TYPE • 4-115 COX-07-09-ANY • 4-116 COX-07-10-TYPE • 4-116 COX-07-11-TYPE • 4-117 COX-07-12-TYPE • 4-117 COX-07-13-TYPE • 4-112 . Section H Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series).Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section G. Chapter 19. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 16.Division Seven The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. Chapter 16. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). Chapter 19. COMDTINST M16114. Section E Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). Section A Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. Sections A and B Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 16. Section A Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).5 (series).5 (series).5 (series). Chapter 16. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. Section A Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 19. Sections A and B Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). Chapter 18.5 (series).5 (series).

5. then return to the PIW. Recover a Life-Like Dummy (Oscar) in 2. The first person to realize someone has fallen overboard should spread the _________. 9. is to stop. consider prevailing ______________ and ______________. If going alongside a disabled vessel or one that is underway but dead-in-the-water. is to stop. 3. A ________________/_________________ crew member will be assigned to prepare to retrieve the person from the water.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-07-01-TYPE: Recover a Person From the Water Using the Direct Pickup Method 1. A ________________ should be positioned on or near the bow of the boat. ___________________ and ____________________. 10. 4-113 . If approaching a ________________vessel. The coxswain should slow the boat as the approach is made so that it will be nearly _____________________ when the person overboard comes abeam. and Transfer Personnel 1. the coxswain should depress the MOB button on the __________ receiver. 2. approach from ________________. TASK COX-07-03-TYPE: Maneuver the Boat Alongside Another Boat. 3. 4. the coxswain will maneuver the boat to the ______________ side of the PIW so that the boat will be set ___________ the PIW. 5. the coxswain should then push the memory button on the _______________ or __________________ receiver. When determining approach. the approach should be made heading ____________ the seas. with No Way-On.to 4-Foot Seas After “Man Overboard” is called. location. In heavy weather or surf conditions. 11. 3. 8. _________________ sizes and ________________ density. _______________ and __________________. 4. then return to the person in water (PIW). a _________________ should position himself at the cabin window. The coxswain should normally turn the boat in the _________________ the man fell overboard. There are two basic approaches: a _______________ approach and a _____________ approach. 4. 12. A _______________ _______________ with a strobe light should be thrown over the side towards the person in the water. 6. ___________________. Generally. If weather conditions permit. After “Man Overboard” is called. Another option. 2. Discuss your intentions with the other _________________ _________________. There are two basic approaches: a _________________ approach and a _______________ approach. When approaching a larger vessel with a low drift rate. particularly in a restricted waterway. compare ______________ _________________ _________________. TASK COX-07-02-TYPE: 1. 7. or ____________________. determine if your vessel makes a wind shadow that will ________________ the other vessel’s drift. particularly in a restricted waterway. The determining conditions for selecting a recovery method is whether the PIW is conscious. A __________ ___________ with a strobe light should be dropped over the side. Another option. 2.

5. well forward of where the boat will come alongside. A _______________ _______________ may be used in coming alongside a larger vessel underway. Never secure the sea painter to the boat’s ________________ or to the side of the boat away from the ship. Conditions permitting. Coxswains must always stay well clear of _________________ _______________ rising from a fire because they greatly reduce visibility and can pose a __________________ hazard. The sea painter is a line used to _________________ a boat clear of a ship’s side and occasionally to hold a boat alongside a ship in order to _________________ or __________________ personnel. Boat crews must be aware of their limited roles in emergency assistance. 2. Riding a sea painter helps maintain __________________ and control of the boat. ________________ could result. 4. match your ________________ to the other vessel. 4. parallel to another vessel that is making way. 3. 2.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-07-04-TYPE: Maneuver the Boat Alongside Another Boat. TASK COX-07-05-TYPE: Maneuver the Boat Alongside a Ship and Transfer Personnel 1. where they may avert a _________________threat without undue risk. Coast Guard personnel shall not engage in ________________ fire fighting operations except to save a ___________________ or in the early stages of a fire. particularly when responding to _________________ _________________. Minimize _________________ alongside. your primary responsibility in emergency assistance is__________________ ________________ not __________________. and Transfer Personnel 1. with WayOn. TASK COX-07-06-TYPE: 1. 3. 5. Fire is the greatest single potential for ________________ on a boat. 3. then start closing in from the side. Boat crew members must work together as a _________________ to minimize any _________________ or immediate jeopardy for both _________________ casualties and themselves. The possibility of fire can never be completely ___________________ and is always a threat to watch for and guard against. Make contact with the ________________ section of your boat. 4. If secured to the outboard side of the boat. Combat a Boat Fire from the Boat As a boat crew member. Never _____________ _____________ when clearing alongside. 2. 4-114 . Close at a __________ to __________-degree angle to the vessel’s heading. The sea painter leads from the _________________ vessels deck.

_______________ of the crew is the first priority.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-07-07-ANY: Use a Portable Pump to Dewater a Sinking or Swamped Boat 1. 4-115 . 7. 5. Use an Eductor to Dewater a Sinking or Swamped Boat Dewatering with an eductor can be performed only when _________________ __________________ permit your boat to safely come alongside a disabled vessel and remain close to it. 3. a ________________ _________________ can easily be passed from one boat to another. TASK COX-07-08-TYPE: 1. A coxswain should always brief crew members on what _______________ to follow before beginning to dewater a disabled vessel. 2. How to dewater a vessel depends on __________________that exist at the scene. 8. 6. Boat crew must always make certain that a _________________ _______________ leads over the side and a _______________ _______________ is placed in the flooded areas of a disabled boat. 4. 2. The eductor is submerged. either __________________ or___________________. Dewatering pumps will not be used to pump_________________ ___________________. crewmembers may take steps to _________________ ________________ ______________into the boat. 4. Once a source of flooding has been determined. The distressed vessel should not be boarded if it seems ________________ and could possibly _______________. 3. An eductor is used in conjunction with the _________________ _________________ on your boat. When secured in its watertight container. Dewatering with a drop pump is done with the pump placed on the _________________ boat. in the flooded area to be dewatered.

or _____________ _____________ ____________. hearing. The HH-60J Jayhawk will not land in the water except in an emergency. rigging. Helicopters are flexible_______________ _______________. 4. before touching it. including head. Even with_____________ ______________. 7. TASK COX-07-10-TYPE: Participate in a Basket Hoist Using the Direct Delivery Method 1. 7. 10. It is not ______________. Boat-helicopter operations require team effort. Ensure all ___________________ _______________ is properly worn. The _________________ _______________is used to transfer an injured or unconscious person in any weather conditions. Designate one boat crewmember to give _________________ ______________ to the hoist operator. alertness. Lower and secure all antennas. 3. Use of a _______________ _______________minimizes the time a pilot must maintain a precise stable hover without having a reference point. 5. and cooperation among crew members aboard both the ________________ and the _________________. 4-116 . 5. 2. 2. 4. The ______________ ______________ is used only to rescue persons familiar with its proper use. The HH-65A Dolphin can carry a maximum of _____ passengers or survivors in addition to its crew of three. eye. Always allow the rescue device to contact the boat. booms. 6. Maximum endurance of the HH-60J Jayhawk with a crew of two pilots and two crew members is approximately _______ ________. 8.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-07-09-ANY: Attend a Static Display Given by a CG Helicopter Air Crew 1. 6. Brief the crew and _______________ to be ________________ regarding the type of hoist to be expected. Maximum endurance of the HH-65A Dolphin with a crew of two pilots and one crew member is approximately_________ _________. The HH-65A Dolphin will not land on the water except in an _________________. The multi-jointed (MJ) ____________ ____________is the primary device for hoisting survivors from land or sea during helicopter rescue operations. 9. it will stay afloat only long enough for the crew to exit. capable of recovering victims from a wide variety of distress situations on land or water. It will float if it is not badly _______________and the flotation bags are _______________. Stow or secure all ______________ _______________ on deck. water. and _______________ _______________. 3. and hand protection.

4-117 . 2. exerting enough strain to guide the rescue device to the ________________ _______________ on the deck. When the person to be hoisted positions the collar under the armpits. Boat crew members will tend the trail line by _________________ method. the coxswain will maneuver to ____________________ and away from the helicopter. If either the coxswain or pilot feels the operation is unsafe. The rescue device will be lowered from the ____________ side of the aircraft. The strop will only be used to transfer trained. then a __________________ should be conducted.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-07-11-TYPE: Participate in a Basket Hoist Using the Trail Line Delivery Method 1. TASK COX-07-12-TYPE: Participate in a Rescue Swimmer Transfer Using the Rescue Strop 1. 2. 3. 5. 4. uninjured ________________ personnel in fair weather. Once the trail line is cast off. A second crew member should act as backup and ______________ the _______________. 6. The pilot will normally direct the coxswain to assume a certain course and speed with a relative wind speed of _____ to _____ knots and 35 to 45 degrees off the ____________ bow. a __________________ __________________ must ensure the safety strap s are fastened.

5 (series).5 (series). Chapter 17 None assigned See Page 4-119 COX-08-02-ANY • 4-119 COX-08-03-ANY • 4-120 COX-08-04-ANY • 4-120 COX-08-05-TYPE • 4-120 COX-08-06-ANY • 4-121 COX-08-07-ANY • 4-121 COX-08-08-TYPE • 4-121 COX-08-09-TYPE • 4-121 COX-08-10-TYPE • 4-118 . COMDTINST M16114. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments . COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. Section B Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 17 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 17 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Numbe r COX-08-01-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. Section D Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 17.5 (series). Chapter 17. Section C Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 17.5 (series). Chapter 17 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Chapter 17 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). Appendix 17-A Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section H. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series).5 (series). COMDTINST M16114.Division Eight The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task.

Heaving lines should be thrown __________________ the disabled boat. Boats should never be towed at speeds beyond the __________________ of the craft. A constant ________________ towing should be maintained. When towing. and the __________________ and direction of the seas. sudden ___________________ and _________________ should be avoided.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-08-01-ANY: 1. If practical. Speed should be increased slowly and in the _______________ direction as the disabled vessel is heading. 3. 2. 12. Boats beyond the capability of the towing vessel should _______________ be towed. 6. Shock loading can be reduced by decreasing ________________ or increasing the _____________________. 4. Personnel on both boats should be kept clear of the ___________________. TASK COX-08-02-ANY: 1. The coxswain should ensure that all people onboard the boat to be towed have donned their _________________________. Towlines should always be kept clear of the boat’s _________________. A _____________________ can be used to prevent yawing of the tow. 5. 10. 7. Dynamic forces are caused by the __________________ force resulting from the boat through the water. Towlines should be _____________ tended before securing and never secured using _____________ hitches. The breaking strength of all shackles used should be __________________ to or ___________________ than the breaking strength of the towline. 5. 3. With a deep draft boat. 8. 4-119 . 14. the _______________ and direction of the wind. ______________________________ should be established and maintained. 11. State General Towing Safety Precautions All ______________________________________ from the disabled boat should be removed if necessary. someone on the towed craft should man the ______________. a high rate of ________________ puts severe strain on the deck fittings and the towline. 2. 6. 13. 4. Friction is created by the movement of the __________________ layer through the water. State the Principle Forces that Affect Boat Towing Static forces can be minimized by beginning the tow _______________. 9.

and snagging. 6. use the formula Speed (in knots) = 1. Make Preparations for Taking a Vessel in Tow In determining towing speed. 4-120 . The two types of bridles which should not be routinely used are the cabin and the ________________ bridles. Bitts. Heavily used towlines will indicate reduced ________________________ strength and overloading by its becoming _________________________ or hard. TASK COX-08-05-TYPE: Use a “Heavy Weather” Approach to Take a Vessel in Stern Tow 1.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-08-03-ANY: 1. and (3) the diameter of a ________________ wire in one of the __________________________ of the wire rope. and chocks should be inspected frequently for _________________. cleats. 4. This heading should be ________________________ the seas and wind whenever possible. 2. the coxswain must know (1) the original diameter of the wire rope. provide a ______________ radio to someone on the distressed craft. TASK COX-08-04-ANY: 1. 3. fusing. 6. 2. (2) the present diameter of the wire rope. 7. the primary factor to be considered is the ___________________________ of the boat and its occupants. To determine the maximum towing speed of a displacement hull boat. The recommended towing speed for planing hulls is the ______________ as for a displacement hull. Persons aboard the distressed craft should be directed to __________ their PFDs. 5. 3. 4. 8. 3. 2. If boat-to-boat communications cannot be established through installed radio equipment. All equipment should be assembled and checked for _________________. The towing boat crosses the disabled boat’s bow on a heading ________________________________ to it. The people on the other board should be ____________________ on the procedures to be used. The towline should be inspected frequently for damage resulting from ______________________________. The “heavy weather” approach is used when there is a ________________ sea or when the disabled boat’s rate of speed is rapid. 5. To determine wear on wire rope. and working surface smoothness.34 times the square root of the __________________________ at the water line. Safe towing speed is maximum towing speed decreased by at least ____%. abrasion. Inspect the Towline and Associated Hardware A minimum of ____________ turns should always be kept on the towline reel. ________________.

To reduce the hazard of injuries to personnel aboard both boats during hookup. a skiff hook assembly. When docking. 2. 3. is used to make the connection. The skiff hook assembly is only used with small __________________ type boats. ____________________________ the wind and current and moor on the protected side of the mooring. 4. The crew member on the sailboat should take one _____________ turn around the mast and then the bridle to the _______________________. When shortening tow. the coxswain should ________________________________ speed as slowly as possible to maintain control of the towed vessel. __________________________________ should always be rigged to prevent hull damage. For control approach. TASK COX-08-08-TYPE: 1. which can occur between boats. it should be ____________________. The trailer eyebolt is generally located on the ________________. 5. 3. TASK COX-08-07-ANY: 1. 4.Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification TASK COX-08-06-ANY: Use a Shackle or Skiff Hook Assembly Connection to Take a Vessel in Stern Tow 1. The tow strap and the backing line reduce the amount of ___________. or near the ________________________ of the boat. a rapid decrease in speed can easily result in the towed boat _________________________ on your boat so as to present an overtaking or ramming situation. and height of tide should be evaluated when determining the best ______________________ of approach and the side of the boat to be moored. 2. used in conjunction with a__________________________. The _______________________ should be visually inspected to ensure it will be able to withstand the stress of towing. 3. Shackles should only be used in _____________ or __________________ weather conditions. current. Back down slowly to remove the slack from the __________ strap. After tightening the shackle pin. 4. 4-121 . 2. Take a Boat in Alongside Tow from a Stern Tow The alongside tow is used primarily when maximum __________________ is required and preferably in ____________________________ waters. TASK COX-08-09-TYPE: Moor a Disabled Vessel in Alongside Tow to a Float or Pier 1. Take a Boat in Stern Tow Using a Bridle Connection _____________________________ leg bridles are generally used for towing sailboats. 2. A ___________________________________ should be assigned to the sailboat to assist in the rigging. 5. 3. Factors such as wind velocity.

Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments .Division Nine The reading assignment(s) should be read prior to beginning instruction of each task. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number COX-09-01-ANY Reading Assignment • None Assigned See Page 4-122 .Part 4 – Coxswain Qualification Section I.

These tasks represent the minimum elements of skill and knowledge necessary for safe and effective performance of a Coast Guard heavy weather coxswain. practiced. which must be learned.U. NOTE $ In this Part This Part contains the following Chapters: Chapter 1 2 3 Title Task Accomplishment Record for Heavy Weather Coxswain Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Tasks Heavy Weather Coxswain Trainee Study Guide See Page 5-3 5-5 5-43 5-1 . This Manual is not meant to be ordered for purposes of obtaining individual qualification tasks. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. and performed by the trainee. Qualification tasks should be reproduced locally and provided for trainees. Volume II Part 5 Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Introduction This Part contains a collection of tasks.S.

Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual.U.S. Volume II 5-2 .

Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 5-3 . TRAINEE NAME: _________________________________ INSTRUCTOR NAME: _____________________________ RATE: ____________________ RATE: ____________________ POSITION/QUALIFICATION CODE TO BE TRAINED FOR: ______________________________ NOTE $ Task HW-01-01-ANY HW-01-02-ANY HW-01-03-TYPE HW-01-04-ANY HW-01-05-ANY HW-01-06-ANY HW-01-07-ANY HW-02-01-ANY HW-02-02-ANY HW-02-03-TYPE HW-02-04-ANY HW-03-01-ANY HW-03-02-TYPE HW-03-03-TYPE HW-03-04-TYPE Instructors should line through those tasks not applicable to this qualification.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Chapter 1. Task Accomplishment Record for Heavy Weather Coxswain NOTE $ Instructor should remove this chapter and place it in the trainee’s training record.

Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Task HW-03-05-TYPE HW-03-06-TYPE HW-03-07-TYPE HW-03-08-TYPE HW-03-09-TYPE HW-03-10-TYPE HW-03-11-TYPE HW-03-12-TYPE HW-03-13-ANY HW-03-14-ANY HW-04-01-ANY HW-04-02-TYPE HW-04-03-TYPE HW-04-04-TYPE HW-04-05-TYPE HW-04-06-TYPE HW-04-07-TYPE HW-04-08-TYPE HW-04-09-TYPE HW-04-10-ANY Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 5-4 .

Tasks should be signed. The instructor should present the tasks to the trainee in a logical order using the instructions provided in Part 1. In this Chapter This Chapter contains the following Sections: Section A B C D Title Heavy Weather and Surf Knowledge Emergency Procedures or Response in Heavy Weather/Surf Heavy Weather Operations Surf Operations (up to 8 feet) See Page 5-6 5-12 5-16 5-32 5-5 . Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Tasks Introduction The following are the instructions for this Chapter: • • • This Chapter is to be kept by the instructor or in the trainee's training record. Prerequisites A prospective Heavy Weather Coxswain must: • • Be assigned to an operational unit with a surf capable boat attached.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Chapter 2. and Be a certified coxswain on the boat type for which they are seeking this higher level of qualification. dated and placed in the trainee's training record when the instructor is satisfied that the trainee can consistently perform a task in accordance with all standards and conditions. Its purpose is to provide guidance on the trainee's progress through the qualification tasks.

Section A Bowditch Chapman Piloting Conditions Standards Task performed at any time or place with the aid of visual reference. State differences between deep-water waves and near shore breaking waves. COMDTINST M16114. The trainee must identify. c. 2. their Characteristics and Causes Explain the Geographical Causes of Local Surf Conditions Explain the Forces Effecting a Surf Capable Boat Operating in Heavy Weather and Surf Explain the Relationship Between Navigation and Piloting as it Pertains to Operations in Heavy Seas or Surf Explain the Procedures and Safety Concerns Related to Recovery of Personnel from the Water in Heavy Seas or Surf Explain the Heavy Weather Towing Approach and Key Elements Related to Towing in Heavy Weather Explain the Procedure for Passing the Pump or Other Gear in Heavy Seas See Page 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 HW-01-05-ANY 5-9 HW-01-06-ANY 5-10 HW-01-07-ANY 5-11 TASK HW-01-01-ANY References Identify the Types of Breaking Seas. b. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. surging). Section B. spilling. This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number HW-01-01-ANY HW-01-02-ANY HW-01-03-TYPE HW-01-04-ANY Task Identify the Types of Breaking Seas. Introduction • In this Section Heavy Weather and Surf Knowledge The following are objectives of Division One: Demonstrate knowledge of heavy weather and surf conditions and operating boats under these conditions. their Characteristics and Causes a. without error. 5-6 . Chapter 12.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Section A. and Heavy Weather Addendum. 3. the types of breaking seas while observing actual conditions or referring to photo examples. State causes of each type of breaker. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). Identify and describe types of breakers (plunging. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting.

Date Instructor Comments 5-7 . jetties. State causes of each type. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. islands and obstructions. 2. 5. 4. Window c. State affects of local contour. State effects of winds on sea conditions. State effects of bottom contour. and preferred training areas. areas to be avoided. and obstructions. 6. Heavy Weather Addendum. State effects of winds. the local surf conditions. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting. islands.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 4. Saddle d. Closeout b. State local surf areas to be avoided. without error. State effects of local tides and currents. 5. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 7. The trainee must state. local names) for typical surf zones in operating area. 7. Explain the effects of current and tidal conditions on breaking seas. State the definition for the following terms: a. State description of local surf conditions.5 (series). State effects of local weather systems and patterns. COMDTINST M16114. causes. jetties. shoaling areas. 8. 6. Shoulder e. 3. State characteristics (depths. Low/high side Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK HW-01-02-ANY References Conditions Standards Explain the Geographical Causes of Local Surf Conditions a. Section A Task performed at any time or place with use of visual reference.

square). the forces effecting a surf capable boat operating in heavy weather and surf. 11. stern. Section E Task performed at any time or place.5 (series). 9. stern to. State effects of meeting a breaker at varying angles to the boat (i. stern and beam to the element. and beam to the element. quartering. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. 7. State cause of rollover or knockdown. State effects of aerated water on rudders and propellers. 5. State how different types of sea/swell patterns effect boat operations with the bow. 8. State how each type of breaker effects boat operations with the bow. State effects of meeting surf with all power ranges and the effects of excessive speed when meeting a breaker. stern and beam to the element. without error. Heavy Weather Addendum. 2. State effects of changes in center of gravity. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 4.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-01-03-TYPE References Conditions Standards Explain the Forces Effecting a Surf Capable Boat Operating in Heavy Weather and Surf a. State effects of shallow water on maneuverability. The trainee must state. State how various wind velocities effect boat operations with the bow. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. 12. Instructor Comments Date 5-8 . State cause of pitchpoling.e. 3. 6. 10. State cause of broaching. bow to. Describe wave avoidance techniques.

points of reference. State the importance of setting up down-swell and using the appropriate steering station. 5. b. 3. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 5. the difficulties encountered when piloting/navigating in heavy seas and/or surf. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Heavy Weather Addendum. COMDTINST M3530. 2. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 5-9 . State the importance of ensuring that proper PPE is used. the proper procedure for recovery of personnel from the water in heavy weather or surf. State the use of shore-side (tower/beach) lookouts to keep track of the MLB’s position. 6. Section E Task performed at any time or place. State the effects of aerated water on the accuracy of the fathometer. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 3. 2. 4. Explain the importance of frequent operational status communications and when a 15-minute position check would be more appropriate than 30 minutes. State the safe surf working areas by use of ranges. State the standard coxswain/crew communications expected during the recovery phase. The trainee must state.5 (series). Date Instructor Comments TASK HW-01-05-ANY References Conditions Standards Explain the Procedures and Safety Concerns Related to Recovery of Personnel from the Water in Heavy Seas or Surf a. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). Performance Criteria Complete d (Initials) 1. without error. Section E Coast Guard Navigation Standards Manual. 4. State the appropriate methods for protecting the crew during the recovery phase.2 (series) Conditions Standards Task performed at any time or place. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-01-04-ANY References Explain the Relationship Between Navigation and Piloting as it Pertains to Operations in Heavy Seas or Surf a. The trainee must explain. State the definition for navigation and piloting. without error. State the advantages and disadvantages of using the enclosed bridge versus the open bridge in heavy weather. State when to have personnel man the well-deck/recess port. Heavy Weather Addendum. or radar ranges and fathometer. The trainee must explain the methods used to overcome these difficulties that would allow the coxswain to be assured of the boat’s position and safety. COMDTINST M16114.

Approach c. 3. State the importance of setting up down-swell/down-current and using the appropriate steering station. 9. Hook-up d. The trainee must state. 9. 7. 2. In tow State the different tow rigs available and the advantages of each. throw bags. 8. State the importance of crew control and assigning duties. 10. State the risks inherent in recovering personnel from the water and methods used to minimize them. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 5. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 4. the heavy weather approach. State the causes of shock loading and how to correct them. State the risks or safety concerns inherent in taking a vessel in stern tow and methods used to minimize them. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Set-up b. State the differences between recovery techniques used for a conscious vice unconscious person. deployment procedures and proper use of the drogue as it relates to towing in heavy seas. Paying out e.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 6. Date Completed (Initials) Instructor Comments TASK HW-01-06-ANY References Conditions Standards Explain the Heavy Weather Towing Approach and Key Elements Related to Towing in Heavy Weather a. without error. State the standard coxswain/crew communications expected during each of the following phases: a. Chapter 17 Task performed at any time or place. State the definition of optimum position. 5-10 . 8. Discuss the use of life rings. COMDTINST M16114. danger area. and maneuvering zone. 6. State the importance of being aware of the effect that the wind and seas have on the MLB in relation to the disabled vessel (set and drift). State first-aid procedures and where to place recovered personnel. 7. and boat hooks. State the purpose. State the procedures for maintaining safe distance while station keeping (opening and closing).5 (series).

the proper procedure for passing a pump or other gear in heavy seas. Date Instructor Comments 5-11 . Heavy Weather Addendum. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. State proper equipment setup to pass gear in heavy weather including use of tending lines. The trainee must state. 3.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-01-07-ANY References Conditions Standards Explain the Procedure for Passing the Pump or Other Gear in Heavy Seas a. State the importance of station keeping until all gear is delivered. 2. State the importance of using a proper heavy weather approach to the lowest part of the disabled vessel. extra flotation. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. without error. State the risks inherent in passing equipment in heavy seas and methods used to minimize them. Section E Task performed at any time or place. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 4. or messengers.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114.

such as cotton clothing. hypothermia undergarments. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 5-12 . Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Introduction Emergency Procedures or Response in Heavy Weather/Surf The following are objectives of Division Two: • • Demonstrate an understanding of the PPE and safety equipment to be used for heavy weather/surf operations. State use of dry suits. non-waterproof gloves. Include explanation on the dangers of improper attire. Chapter 6 Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number HW-02-01-ANY HW-02-02-ANY HW-02-03-TYPE HW-02-04-ANY Task Identify PPE and Safety Equipment for Heavy Weather and Surf Operations Explain Boat Preparations and Safety Precautions for Operating in Heavy Seas/Surf Explain the Procedures to be Taken for a Rollover or Knockdown Explain the Procedures for Personal Survival if Lost Overboard in a Heavy Weather or Surf Environment See Page 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 TASK HW-02-01-ANY References Identify PPE and Safety Equipment for Heavy Weather and Surf Operations a. 5. anti-exposure coveralls. 4. NOTE $ In this Section Instructors must ensure that trainees reassess risk at appropriate intervals during evolutions. without error. State use of helmets.5 (series).10 (series) Conditions Standards Task performed on the boat at any time. The trainee must state. 3. b. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. COMDTINST M10470. and use the results in decision-making.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Section B. State use of safety belts and seat belts. Demonstrate an understanding of the emergency procedures for operating in heavy weather/surf. caps. and other protective garments including requirements for wear of each. communicate to the crew. comfort rings. etc. 2. COMDTINST M16114. State current policies and references for use of PPE and safety equipment on boats. the safety precautions and safety equipment for heavy weather and surf operations. gloves. State the attachment points for the safety belts.

State concept of offshore crew management (extended sortie. underway rest/relief alternatives). 6. State areas of attention related to conducting safety rounds on the boat prior to heavy weather or surf operations (i. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Task performed at any time or place.16 (series) Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. typical missile hazards.e. State disabling casualties or restrictive discrepancies that would effect decisions to operate in heavy weather or surf. Boat Crew Utilization Guidelines. 7. systems checks).Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-02-02-ANY References Conditions Standards Explain Boat Preparations and Safety Precautions for Operating in Heavy Seas/Surf a. The trainee must state.e. 13. State when it is necessary to increase the frequency of ops and position checks (i. preparations and safety precautions for operating a boat in heavy seas or surf. Instructor Comments Date 5-13 . State maximum training conditions. State procedures for reducing body stress. 10. watertight integrity. State maximum operational conditions. 5. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Go-No Go points). COMDTINST 5312.e. b. 12. Explain how risk assessments are conducted and used to manage inherent risks. 11. Explain the need for a backup radio and alternatives for communication. 4. Explain the boat crew fatigue standards. 2. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. every 15 minutes). State affects of fatigue and hypothermia on crew. Explain coxswain/surfman level decision criteria related to prosecution of the mission sortie (i. 9. 3. equipment stowage. State procedures for conducting underway rounds during or after operations in heavy weather or surf. 8. without error.

State likely condition of engine room and other compartments. State essential information to be reported to operational command and alternatives for communicating status. State precedence for securing of electrical system breakers if necessary. mast. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. windows.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-02-03-TYPE References Conditions Standards Explain the Procedures to be Taken for a Rollover or Knockdown a. 14. 7. 12. State immediate dockside procedures.e. In response to the instructor. State immediate coxswain/surfman actions including assessment of crew condition and control of the boat. 8. State potential actions to be performed by the backup safety boat (when available). and superstructure. Specific Boat Type Operator's Handbook. reassessed risk) to determine whether to proceed with mission or return. electronics. State likely conditions of antennas. 13. 6. State the effect flooding in various compartments will have on boat stability and maneuvering. 3. the trainee must. 10. 11. 4. 2. state the crew procedures when a boat rolls or is caught by the force of a breaker. 5. State expected length of time for rollover or knockdown. without error. State the actions of crew in the event a breaker strikes the boat. Instructor Comments Date 5-14 . 9. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. State post rollover/knockdown casualty control procedures. State force to be expected and effects on crew and boat. State potential damage control efforts or assistance that may be required as a result of a rollover or knockdown. State deciding factors (i. COMDTINST M16114 (series) Task performed at any time onboard boat.

to ensure timely support resources are available. cold water. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 5. ice). as appropriate. signaling.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-02-04-ANY Reference Conditions Standards Explain the Procedures for Personal Survival if Lost Overboard in a Heavy Weather or Surf Environment a. Explain emergency procedures (as established locally) and emergency signals to be used by rescue swimmers. wave force. rip currents. 4. COMDTINST M10470. warm water. Explain reasons for use of a beach (shore-side) rescue party including limitations and alternatives to Coast Guard response. Explain the techniques for swimming in beach surf areas and hazards that may be encountered (i.10 (series) Task performed at any time or place.e. (potential cross-training opportunity) Date Instructor Comments 5-15 .e. 3. rescue response (from where). Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Discuss notification of other units or agencies. Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. long shore currents. The trainee must state. debris). stay with boat). 2.e. and survival choices (i. procedures for personal survival if lost overboard in local area heavy weather or surf conditions. Discuss local area hazards (i. without error. swim to beach. shoals.

etc. during various missions. and Crew Brief Related to Heavy Weather Operations Operate a Boat in Heavy Seas Pilot a Boat in Heavy Seas Conduct a Person-in-the-Water (PIW) Recovery in Heavy Seas Maintain a Stationary Position (Station Keep) Relative to Another Vessel (or Drifting Object) in Heavy Seas* Conduct a Direct Pass of Equipment (Drogue. and use the results in decision-making. Demonstrate ability to operate boat(s) in heavy weather conditions. NOTE $ In this Section Instructors must ensure that trainees reassess risk at appropriate intervals during evolutions.) to Another Vessel in Heavy Seas* Take a Boat in Tow in Heavy Seas Using Heavy Weather Approach (Bow-to Seas)* Take a Boat in Tow in Heavy Seas Using “Stern-to Seas” Approach* Counteract Shockloading During Tow of a Vessel in Heavy Seas and Demonstrate Use of a Drogue* Shorten Tow in Heavy Seas* Tow a Vessel Inbound Across an Inlet or Bar in Heavy Weather* Illuminate a Bar. Pump.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Section C. Inlet or Surf Zone at Night Using Pyrotechnics from a Boat and from Shore Conduct a Post-Mission Standdown and Crew Debrief See Page 5-17 5-17 HW-03-03-TYPE HW-03-04-TYPE HW-03-05-TYPE HW-03-06-TYPE 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 HW-03-07-TYPE 5-23 HW-03-08-TYPE HW-03-09-TYPE HW-03-10-TYPE 5-24 5-25 5-26 HW-03-11-TYPE HW-03-12-TYPE HW-03-13-ANY 5-28 5-29 5-30 HW-03-14-ANY 5-31 * Task must be accomplished with another vessel 5-16 . Introduction • • Heavy Weather Operations The following are objectives of Division Three: Demonstrate ability to properly plan for heavy weather operations. Vessel Systems Checks. This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number HW-03-01-ANY HW-03-02-TYPE Task Conduct Pre-Mission Sortie Planning for Heavy Weather Operations Conduct Safety Rounds. communicate to the crew. Radio.

winds. Include discussion of backup radio use and location. Chapter 1 Task performed on boat prior to leaving protected waters and upon return to protected waters. Brief crew on sortie objectives and the area where operations will be conducted. currents. Evaluate sea/surf conditions. Trainee must lead the shore-side pre-mission safety brief to include all involved crew (i. leaks or signs of system problems). 2. Solicit and evaluate safety concerns including knockdown/rollover brief and proper use of PPE.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-03-01-ANY References Conditions Standards Conduct Pre-Mission Sortie Planning for Heavy Weather Operations a. beach party). Trainee must coordinate safety rounds of the boat after returning to protected waters. COMDTINST 3500. Brief crew on principle use of tower watch/beach party in providing critical information to the participating boats. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. watertight integrity. Operational Risk Management. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. and anticipated changes that may occur during the sortie. Conduct visual inspection through all compartments prior to getting underway (i. Date Instructor Comments TASK HW-03-02-TYPE References Conditions Standards Conduct Safety Rounds. Brief crew on communications plan encompassing boat-to-boat. and Crew Brief Related to Heavy Weather Operations a. 5-17 .1 (series) Task performed prior to getting underway. Monitor conditions and hazards in operating area.e. 7. GAR or other) from TCT/ORM and include discussion of risk as part of crew briefs. boat-to-shore. tides. 4. Trainee must check operation of the boat key systems and brief crew prior to leaving protected waters. stowage. Trainee must complete a visual safety round prior to getting underway. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1.3 (series) Team Coordination Training.5 (series). M16114. Conduct risk assessment for sortie using appropriate risk management tools (SPE. Vessel Systems Checks. 3. boat crews. b. COMDTINST 1541. missile hazards. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 2. 6. tower watch. Identify safe operating area and hazards. Trainee must coordinate all mission planning and establish objectives for the sortie. 5. comms watchstander.e. shore-to-boat. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.

Check steering system for full. 16. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 10. Instructor Comments Date 5-18 . 8. radar ranges. 5. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew and other resources. 9. Brief crew on knockdown/rollover procedures. 4. Brief crew on procedure in the event the coxswain becomes incapacitated. Brief crew on methods to be used in moving about the deck. 13. 15. even rudder control port and starboard (both open bridge stations on 47' MLB). and who will authorize movement. 12. 6. 14. Assign crew positions and check PPE and all safety equipment. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat. Brief crew on risk assessment results. Brief crew on procedure to remain together and use appropriate signaling device in the event that they have fallen overboard. Check engines and controls for full power ahead and astern (both open bridge stations on 47' MLB). and depth of water to be used. Ensure engineer made round of engine room prior to leaving protected waters.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 3. points of reference. if necessary. 7. Check communications with backup safety boat and/or shore party. Coordinate safety rounds of boat after safely returning to protected waters. 11. Brief crew on natural ranges.

stern to. comfortable ride for conditions. the second engine will remain on line.5 (series). Maintain full control of boat while maneuvering in winds gusting to greater than 30 knots. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Adjust speed and/or angle to the seas to allow a stable. Identify safe operating area and hazards. During single engine operations for the simulated engine casualty. if possible. Trainee must also demonstrate vessel control in high wind conditions with gusts greater than 30 knots. 2. 7. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 10.to 15-foot seas. 14. Maintain full control of boat while transiting with stern to seas. Maintain proper communications between coxswain and crew. 11. 13. and beam to seas while both making way and maintaining stationary position. 5. 5-19 . Use proper power to meet seas when required. Maintain full control of boat while backing (minimum of 500 yards without yawing more than 10 degrees off heading). Brief crew and assign duties. Test engine and steering controls prior to departing protected waters. Maintain full control while operating/maneuvering with one engine. Boat must operate with bow to.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-03-03-TYPE References Conditions Operate a Boat in Heavy Seas a. 12. Maintain full control of boat while station keeping. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 9. and Heavy Weather Addendum. during a simulated engine casualty. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. Section B Task performed while underway in 8. Chapter 1. Observe sea conditions and evaluate. COMDTINST M16114. 3. 8. 6. Avoid breaking waves. 4. Maintain full control of boat while transiting with bow to seas.

track lines. Inspect boat ensuring all loose gear is stowed and watertight integrity is maintained. 8. swell.3 (series) Conditions Standards Task performed while underway in 8. Consistently determine speed over ground and actual course made good. 9. 5. Assign crew positions and check PPE and all safety equipment.to 15-foot seas. 12. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. Adjust heading and/or speed to compensate for set and drift as needed to maintain safe transit. Integrate information from all available electronics to consistently determine position. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Boat must be piloted at least eight miles with all installed navigation equipment used competently by the trainee.5 (series). Demonstrate awareness of the effects of current. b. 11. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 4. COMDTINST M16114. Promote continuous communication and use of crew as integral part of piloting effort. Observe sea conditions and evaluate safest course against planned dead reckoning plot. Identify safe operating area and hazards and pilot boat with adjustments for surrounding dangers. 3. 10. COMDTINST M3530. and wind on the boats heading.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-03-04-TYPE References Pilot a Boat in Heavy Seas a. Conduct pre-launch preparations including plotting of dead reckoning positions. ranges. Heavy Weather Addendum. 2. 6. and waypoints. Demonstrate advantages and shortcomings of all available electronics. 5-20 . Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Section C Coast Guard Navigation Standards Manual. Brief crew and assign duties. 7. Boat preparations must be accomplished prior to getting underway or leaving protected waters.

Task must be accomplished without injury or excessive risk to the person (life-like dummy) in the water.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 13. 2. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 5. Section D Task performed while underway in 8. 3. 8. A life-like dummy (Oscar) will be used if performed during a training sortie.to 15-foot seas. Maneuver boat into safe position for recovery with regard to crew and PIW. 7. Complete safe recovery of PIW. Brief crew and assign duties. Maintain situational awareness and crew control throughout evolution. Maneuver boat down sea into position for final approach. Station pointer on open steering station or nearby coxswain to effectively communicate. 10. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-03-05-TYPE References Conditions Conduct a Person-in-the-Water (PIW) Recovery in Heavy Seas a. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Conduct recovery from recess port or well-deck only. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew.5 (series). Throw life ring if appropriate to assist PIW. 4. 9. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. 6. 5-21 . COMDTINST M16114. The direct pickup method must be used. Position crew for recovery ensuring safe movement and clear communications. Make ready appropriate standard retrieval equipment. Properly use sea and wind conditions in adjusting approach during pickup. Heavy Weather Addendum.

3. 13. Heavy Weather Addendum. COMDTINST M16114. Brief crew and assign duties. The task must be accomplished without endangering the other vessel (object) and without getting close enough for the vessels to collide. Boat must maintain bow/stern to the seas attitude at all times except when lateral movement is necessary. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Boat must maintain stationary position for at least five minutes with limited movement relative to the other vessel (object). Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew. 6. Identify safe operating area and hazards. Use proper helm and throttle control to establish a safe position near the other vessel. Section B Task performed while underway in 8. 12. Use appropriate steering station. Use swells and/or wind to assist in maneuvering and holding position. 5-22 . Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. 5. Maintain position within 75 feet of the other vessel or drifting object for 5 minutes with bow/stern to seas. Use of another vessel is preferred as a relative target. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 4. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-03-06-TYPE References Conditions Maintain a Stationary Position (Station Keep) Relative to Another Vessel (or Drifting Object) in Heavy Seas a. but a suitable drifting object may be substituted. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1.5 (series). 2. 7.to 15-foot seas. Move PIW from recess port or well-deck to position of safety and protection from elements.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 11.

Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-03-07-TYPE References Conditions Standards Conduct a Direct Pass of Equipment (Drogue. 6. 9. Brief crew and assign duties.to 15-foot seas. 2. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Make proper approach to disabled boat. The boat must maintain a safe standoff distance while conducting the direct pass. 10. Control of the equipment must be maintained without loss. Set up to pass standard equipment using messenger. 7. Establish communications with disabled boat. 5-23 . Pump. Maintain relative position with drifting vessel. or recovery lines as appropriate. Chapter 18 Task performed while underway for training in daytime in 8. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. Ensure crew maintains control of gear during pass to disabled boat. 8. 5. 4.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 8. Evaluate relative rates of drift. Evaluate condition of disabled boat. tending. 3. Identify safest transfer point on MLB and receiving point on disabled boat. etc. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. The task must be accomplished without endangering the other vessel or crew.5 (series).) to Another Vessel in Heavy Seas a. COMDTINST M16114. Radio.

2. Boat must take another boat in stern tow and maintain tow for at least fifteen minutes.25 (series). Safely pass towline while station keeping in optimum position relative to vessel.to 15-foot seas. Transition into stern tow after towline is safely made fast to the vessel and the crew has control at the tow bitt. Describe evolution and safety procedures to disable vessel. 9. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. 5. Evaluate relative rates of drift while station keeping near disabled vessel. Locate towing appendages and evaluate for strength. 11. Chapter 6 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. b. 6. Brief crew and assign duties. 47' MLB Operator’s Handbook . 3. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-03-08-TYPE References Conditions Standards Take a Boat in Tow in Heavy Seas Using Heavy Weather Approach (Bow-to Seas) a. vessel size. and sea conditions. Chapter 17 Task performed while underway in 8. 10. Use appropriate towing equipment for vessel type. Evaluate condition of disabled vessel.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 11. 8. COMDTINST M16114. Performance Crite ria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. 7. 5-24 . Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution.5 (series). Observe sea conditions and evaluate. Make heavy weather approach to disabled vessel while keeping bow square to seas. Establish communications with disabled boat. 4. COMDTINST M16114.

Evaluate condition of disabled boat. 3. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1.5 (series). 47' MLB Operator’s Handbook . 4.to 12-foot seas. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Performance Crite ria 12. Tow disabled boat for minimum of fifteen minutes. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew. Brief crew and assign duties. COMDTINST M16114. Smoothly and slowly pay out towline without shockloading.25 (series). 16. and final course to give disabled vessel the safest/best ride. 18. Chapter 17 Conditions Standards Task performed while underway in 8. Boat must take another boat in stern tow and maintain tow for at least fifteen minutes. Maintain consistent communications with disabled vessel to verify status. COMDTINST M16114. b. 17. 5. 5-25 . speed. Describe evolution and safety procedures to disable vessel. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-03-09-TYPE References Take a Boat in Tow in Heavy Seas Using “Stern-to Seas” Approach a. 13. Observe sea conditions and evaluate. 14. Chapter 6 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Choose angle to the seas (during pay out) to provide safest working conditions for crew and least strain on towing equipment and appendages. 15. 2. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Adjust length of tow. Establish communications with disabled vessel.

vessel size. Smoothly and slowly pay out towline without shockloading.5 (series). Evaluate relative rates of drift while station keeping near disabled vessel.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 6. 16. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 10. 14. Task performed after safely taking a vessel in stern tow. 12. Choose angle to the seas (during pay out) to provide safest working conditions for crew and least strain on towing equipment and appendages. 5-26 . Safely pass towline while station keeping in optimum position relative to vessel. 7. Use appropriate towing equipment for vessel type. Tow disabled boat for fifteen minutes. 15. 9. Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-03-10-TYPE References Conditions Counteract Shockloading During Tow of a Vessel in Heavy Seas and Demonstrate Use of a Drogue a. 13. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. and final course to give disabled vessel the safest/best ride. Maintain consistent communications with disabled vessel to verify status. 17.to 15-foot seas in open waters. speed. Locate towing appendages and evaluate for strength. 18. 8. Adjust length of tow. COMDTINST M16114. Transition into stern tow after towline is safely made fast to the vessel and the crew has control at the tow bitt. and sea conditions. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. 11. Make heavy weather approach to disabled boat while keeping stern square to seas. Chapter 17 Task performed while underway in 8.

12. adjust scope of towline). 5. Demonstrate proper method to counteract shockloading based on conditions (i.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Standards Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. 11. adjust speed.e. towing rig. Vessel must be towed for at least 15 minutes without excessive strain on the towing appendages or shockloading of the towline. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. 4. 10. 3. 6. State when to have towed vessel recover drogue and what actions will be taken. course change. Maintain consistent communications with disabled vessel to verify status. 8. Explain where a drogue should be secured when towing in a heavy following sea. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Demonstrate use of a drogue. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew. State how to judge the proper scope of drogue line to be used in various sea states. Tow disabled vessel for fifteen minutes. 2. Brief crew and assign duties. 7. 15. 9. Task will be performed utilizing standard equipment and procedures. Explain how a vessel is affected when being towed with a drogue. Evaluate conditions with relation to sea state. Instructor Comments Date 5-27 . towed vessel. use of a drogue. intended destination. 14. 13. and expected changes or hazards. Brief towed vessel on procedures and intended actions. State the appropriate method for passing a drogue and the best time to accomplish it. State safety precautions to be observed when selecting and using a drogue.

Maneuver to transition back into stern tow. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Ensure tow bitt is broke and line is tended by crew off the quarter. 7. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 12. 10. 11. Select appropriate heading approximately quartering the seas based on wind conditions.5 (series). Square into the seas with towed vessel down swell. COMDTINST M16114. 14. Ensure bight of towline does not get forward of the coxswain. 2. 3. Maintain consistent communications with disabled vessel to verify status. Set up to recover towline off the windward quarter. 5. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-03-11-TYPE References Conditions Standards Shorten Tow in Heavy Seas a. Back square to the seas with appropriate power until desired amount of towline is recovered. Chapter 17 Task performed while underway in 8. Brief crew and assign duties. Make tow bitt and tend towline as necessary. Explain precautions when towing across a bar/inlet at short tow. 5-28 . Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. 8. 6. Task must be accomplished without allowing either the towed vessel or the MLB to be set over the towline at any time. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. Slow both vessels to a stop (no headway). 16. 15. 9. 4.to 15-foot seas in open waters. 13. Brief towed vessel on procedures and intended actions. Safely take excess towline aboard to length established by coxswain.

5 (series). Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew. 8. break on the stern. Discuss risk control alternatives (i. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. Explain precautions when towing across a bar/inlet at short tow.e. safety backup boat.e. 5. Successfully transit bar/inlet with tow. 7. no surf). beach party). 4. Maximum sea state will be at command discretion based on area of operation but not to exceed 15 feet (swells or wind generated chop. tower manned. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 9. 2. Discuss safety concerns (i.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-03-12-TYPE References Conditions Tow a Vessel Inbound Across an Inlet or Bar in Heavy Weather a. Brief crew and assign duties. loss of tow. MOB. tow overtaking towline). Instructor Comments Date 5-29 . Chapter 17 Task performed while underway in heavy weather. State and demonstrate appropriate procedures and standard equipment to counteract shockloading when towing a vessel across a bar or inlet. 10. 3. Task must be accomplished with minimum shock loading of the towline. COMDTINST M16114. taking on water. The MLB must maintain control over the towed vessel throughout the transit. Brief towed vessel of crossing and safety procedures prior to evolution. Maintain consistent communications with disabled vessel to verify status. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. 6. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.

Chapter 6 Task performed while underway during a period of darkness in 8. Determine whether backup safety boat or helo support was necessary to ensure safety. Instructor Comments Date 5-30 . inlet. 13. 16. 15. Coordinate illumination of the operating area to allow clear observations from boat and/or shore. 9. or surf zone at night in order to improve safety of operations.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-03-13-ANY References Conditions Illuminate a Bar. Conduct unit pre-mission brief including safety procedures.to 15-foot seas. The trainee must coordinate the necessary resources to illuminate an area adequately for nighttime MLB (or surf capable boat) operations. position assignments. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew and other resources. The MLB (or surf capable boat) may be inside or outside the bar/inlet at the commencement of the operation. Provide clear. 2. Identify safe operating area and hazards. Keep bow or stern square to the seas as appropriate for conditions. 6. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. accurate assessment of sea conditions in area and report to unit. Explain the reasons and techniques that may be used for illuminating an area such as a bar. 8. 5. 7. Brief crew and assign duties. inlet or surf zone. Establish communications between all resources involved including shore-side party. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat. Inlet or Surf Zone at Night Using Pyrotechnics from a Boat and from Shore a. 10. Use safety backup boat (if applicable) or shore-side safety watch to provide additional information as appropriate. individual roles and responsibilities. Conduct unit post-mission debrief including lessons learned and recommendations to command related to improvement in unit response strategy for near shore operations. 4. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. 14. 11. 12. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 3. risk management issues. Determine if conditions were safe for transit into or through the bar. COMDTINST M16114. Coordinate resources to ensure all equipment and personnel were on scene prior to commencement of operations.5 (series). Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Maintain a stable platform during launch of pyrotechnics for illumination.

tower watch. radios. comms watchstander. Instructor Comments Date 5-31 . 3. Ascertain condition of any other resources utilized (i. 6. COMDTINST 3500. Discuss crew’s ability to react to changes in risk levels encountered during debrief. Ascertain condition of unit boats and ensure they remained fully mission capable (any disabling or restrictive discrepancies report to command). Determine if the lessons learned or the actions during the mission warrant further reporting via the boat mishap reporting system. 10. Review objectives. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Operational Risk Management.3 (series) Team Coordination Training. Stand down all unit resources involved with heavy weather operations and ensure safe return to unit.e. b. 4.1 (series) Task performed after underway for heavy weather operations. and reinforcement of good seamanship practices and teamwork. Debrief crew.e. Trainee must lead the shore-side post-mission safety debrief to include all involved crew (i. vehicles. communications. 8. tower. 5. encouraging input from juniors first (least experienced). Provide lessons learned and recommendations to command related to improvement in unit response strategy for near shore operations. safety gear) and ensure their continued readiness. safety issues observed.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-03-14-ANY References Conditions Standards Conduct a Post-Mission Standdown and Crew Debrief a. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 7. lessons learned. Ascertain condition of participating crews. COMDTINST 1541. 2. seniors last (most experienced). 9. Coordinate and lead unit post-mission debrief in appropriate setting. ideas for improvement. boat crews. beach party).

communicate to the crew.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Section D. Unit commands that have surf (up to 8 feet) in their respective areas of responsibility shall use these tasks to prepare coxswains and heavy weather coxswains for missions in or near these areas. These are the objectives for this section: • • Demonstrate ability to properly plan for surf operations. Coxswains and heavy weather coxswains shall not attempt operations in surf unless they have demonstrated the proper skills through satisfactory accomplishment of these tasks. during various missions. and use the results in decision-making. and Crew Brief Related to Surf Operations Determine the Position of a Boat in Surf up to 8 Feet Maintain Stationary Position (“Station Keep”) Using Both the Bow-To and Stern-To Methods in Surf up to 8 Feet Transit Outbound on an Inlet or Bar Through Surf up to 8 Feet Transit Inbound on an Inlet or Bar Through Surf up to 8 Feet Lateral Across a Surf Zone Beam to Surf up to 8 Feet Enter and Depart a Beach (Shoal Area) Surf Zone in Surf up to 8 Feet Conduct a Person-in-the-Water (PIW) Recovery in Surf up to 8 Feet Conduct a Post-Mission Standdown and Crew Debrief See Page 5-33 5-33 HW-04-03-TYPE HW-04-04-TYPE 5-34 5-36 HW-04-05-TYPE HW-04-06-TYPE HW-04-07-TYPE HW-04-08-TYPE HW-04-09-TYPE HW-04-10-ANY 5-36 5-38 5-39 5-40 5-41 5-42 5-32 . NOTE $ In this Section Instructors must ensure that trainees reassess risk at appropriate intervals during evolutions. This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number HW-04-01-ANY HW-04-02-TYPE Task Conduct Pre-Mission Sortie Planning for Surf Operations Conduct Safety Rounds. Introduction Surf Operations (up to 8 feet) The tasks in this section are not required for certification as heavy weather coxswain. Vessel Systems Checks. Demonstrate ability to operate boat(s) in surf conditions up to 8 feet.

and anticipate changes that may occur during the sortie. Trainee must coordinate all mission planning and establish objectives for the sortie. tower watch. currents. b. and Crew Brief Related to Surf Operations a. Identify safe operating area and hazards. winds. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Date Instructor Comments TASK HW-04-02-TYPE References Conditions Standards Conduct Safety Rounds. 6. boat-to-shore. Monitor conditions and hazards in operating area. Conduct visual inspection through all compartments prior to getting underway (i. Evaluate surf conditions.5 (series). shore-to-boat. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 5-33 . COMDTINST 3500. boat crews. missile hazards. Trainee must coordinate safety rounds of the boat after exiting the surf zone. Chapter 1 and Heavy Weather Addendum. 5. Trainee must lead the shore-side pre-mission safety brief to include all involved crew (i. 3. Solicit and evaluate safety concerns including knockdown/rollover brief and proper use of PPE. Check engines and controls for full power ahead and astern (both op en bridge stations on 47' MLB). leaks or signs of system problems). 2. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. watertight integrity. stowage.e. Section E Task performed on boat prior to entering and immediately after exiting a surf zone. Brief crew on sortie objectives and the area where operations will be conducted.e. tides. comms watchstander. COMDTINST M16114. 4. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Operational Risk Management. Include discussion of backup radio use and location.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-04-01-ANY References Conduct Pre-Mission Sortie Planning for Surf Operations a. Trainee must check operation of the boat key systems and brief crew prior to entering surf zone. Vessel Systems Checks. 3.1 (series) Conditions Standards Task performed prior to getting underway. Performance Criteria Completed (Initial s) Boat Type 1. Brief crew on principle use of tower watch/beach party in providing critical information to the participating boats. Brief crew on communications plan encompassing boat-to-boat. Trainee must complete a visual safety round prior to getting underway. COMDTINST 1541. reporting necessary to safety. 2.3 (series) Team Coordination Training. beach party).

Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-04-03-TYPE References Conditions Determine the Position of a Boat in Surf up to 8 Feet a. Brief crew on procedure in the event the surfman becomes incapacitated. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 5. Brief crew on natural ranges. 8. 12. 5-34 . Brief crew on procedure to remain together and use appropriate signaling device in the event that they have fallen overboard. 15. Brief crew on knockdown/rollover procedures. Check steering system for full. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew and other resources. radar ranges. 14. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat. Coast Guard Navigation Standards Manual. points of reference. Coordinate safety rounds of boat after safely exiting the surf zone. Completed (Initial s) Boat Type 10. Assign crew positions and check PPE and all safety equipment. Check communications with backup safety boat and/or shore party. 13. Ensure engineer made round of engine room prior to entering the surf zone. 7. 16. Brief crew on risk assessment results.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 4. Brief crew on methods to be used in moving about the deck if necessary and who will authorize movement. and depth of water to be used. 6. 11. even rudder control port and starboard (both open bridge stations on 47' MLB). 9. COMDTINST M3530.2 (series) Task performed while underway in surf up to 8 feet.

16. Trainee must maintain a safe distance from known hazards at all times. 7. 6. Observe sea and surf conditions and evaluate safest course through surf zone. Pass accurate position t o operational command and verify by shore-side plotting. 8. beach party. Brief crew on natural ranges. Avoid breaking waves (when possible) using windows. Determine boat’s position in relation to known hazards using available electronics. and depth of water to be used. Instructor Comments Date 5-35 . aircraft. watchstander). Demonstrate advantages and shortcomings of all available electronics. and wind on the boat’s heading and movements.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Standards Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. Using local knowledge. 2.e. 11. Choose safe position in which to station keep with relation to depth of water. points of reference. Demonstrate awareness of the effects of current. hazards. Ensure safety rounds and checks were complete. and shoulders. 15. Use other available resources to assist in determining position (i. 10. 3. Identify safe operating area and hazards and pilot boat with adjustments for surrounding dangers. and useful ranges. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. available electronics and seaman’s eye. tower. Task must be accomplished while station keeping in the surf zone. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat. Promote continuous communication and use of crew as integral part of piloting effort. 5. Assign crew positions and check PPE and all safety equipment. radar ranges. Determine boat’s position using fixed geographical references and seaman’s eye. 12. saddles. other boats. swell. 9. Brief crew and assign duties. trainee must determine boat’s position relative to the closest hazards with an accuracy of 100 yards. 13. 14. 4.

boat must meet breakers squarely and with enough power to get the boat through/over the wave.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-04-04-TYPE References Conditions Standards Maintain Stationary Position (“Station Keep”) Using Both the Bow-To and Stern-To Methods in Surf up to 8 Feet a. Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-04-05-TYPE References Conditions Transit Outbound on an Inlet or Bar Through Surf up to 8 Feet a. Maintain square bow-to/stern-to aspect while station keeping in surf. 5. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Maintain position for 5 minutes. Boat must maintain square bow-to/stern-to attitude at all times except when lateral movement is necessary. 5-36 .5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. 8. 7. Identify safe operating area and hazards. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. When necessary. Section E Task performed while underway in surf up to 8 feet. 6. Section E Task performed while underway in surf up to 8 feet. Use small swells and surf to maneuver and hold position. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Brief crew and assign duties. 4. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. Use proper helm. 2. 3. Boat must maintain stationary position for at least five minutes with limited movement. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. Use proper amount of power to meet breakers and hold position. Heavy Weather Addendum.5 (series). Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. throttle commands to achieve a bow/stern position to the seas. 9. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew and other resources. Heavy Weather Addendum.

9. 6. 11. Use appropriate. Provide accurate bar report to operational command concerning existing conditions. 8. 4. If possible. 5. Identify the high/low sides and maneuver toward the low side. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew and other resources. safe speed without launching. and shoulders. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. transit through the surf zone should be accomplished without meeting a breaker.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Standards Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. Brief crew and assign duties. boat must meet breakers squarely and with enough power to get the boat through/over the wave. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. 2. Identify safe operating area and hazards. Instructor Comments Date 5-37 . saddles. 10. Use safety backup boat or shore-side safety watch to provide additional information as appropriate. 7. Time series to transit through surf zone on the lull. When necessary. 3. Avoid breaking waves (when possible) using windows. Meet breakers with appropriate power.

8. and shoulders. Use appropriate. 4. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 13. 3. 9. COMDTINST M16114. 14. Heavy Weather Addendum. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. Provide accurate bar report to operational command concerning existing conditions. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Brief crew and assign duties. 6. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. 5. 10. Identify safe operating area and hazards. saddles. 2. Avoid breaking waves (when possible) using windows. Time series to transit through surf zone on the lull. Boat must be maneuvered in adequate time to avoid a breaker on the stern. Use proper techniques to avoid getting caught on the face of a swell and avoid being caught on a hard chine. Identify the high/low sides and maneuver toward the low side. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew and other resources. Maximum effort should be taken to keep the boat from being overtaken by a breaker. 7. Use proper technique and timing to turn and meet breakers squarely when needed. 12. 5-38 . Evaluate overtaking surf and avoid taking a breaker on the stern. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Section E Task performed while underway in surf up to 8 feet. 11. safe speed to avoid overtaking the crest of a swell or breaker. Meet breakers with appropriate power.5 (series). Use safety backup boat (if applicable) or shore-side safety watch to provide additional information as appropriate.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-04-06-TYPE References Conditions Standards Transit Inbound on an Inlet or Bar Through Surf up to 8 Feet a.

Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. reference points or radar ranges. Use safety backup boat or shore-side safety watch to provide additional information as appropriate. boat must meet breakers squarely and with enough power to get the boat through/over the wave. safe speed. 5.5 (series). 2. 7. 4. saddles. Brief crew and assign duties. avoid or meet squarely as appropriate. When necessary. Instructor Comments Date 5-39 . Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 8. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew and other resources. Identify safe operating area and hazards. Time series and transit on the lull. 10. COMDTINST M16114. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Avoid breaking waves (when possible) using windows. Section E Task performed while underway in surf up to 8 feet. Heavy Weather Addendum. Use appropriate.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-04-07-TYPE References Conditions Standards Lateral Across a Surf Zone Beam to Surf up to 8 Feet a. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. Evaluate approaching surf. 6. Boat must not be overtaken by a breaker on the beam. Identify and used natural ranges. and shoulders. 9. 3.

When necessary. 9. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 3. Maintain bow/stern aspect in surf using appropriate technique or power.5 (series). boat must meet breakers squarely and with enough power to get the boat through/over the wave. Boat must station keep shoreward of the surf zone (if possible). Brief crew and assign duties. 12. Identify and use natural ranges reference points or radar ranges. 4. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Safely hold position inside or shoreward of surf zone (long enough to accomplish a PIW recovery if needed). Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. 10. Evaluate approaching surf. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew and other resources. Identify and evaluate effects of shore currents and rips. 5-40 . 8. Time series and make shoreward approach turn during lull. COMDTINST M16114. 13. Consistently monitor depth and do not allow boat to go aground or touch bottom. 7. 11. 5. Meet breakers with appropriate power. 2. Section E Task performed while underway for in surf up to 8 feet. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. Use appropriate. 6. Heavy Weather Addendum. Boat must not be overtaken by a breaker on the beam. Use safety backup boat or shore-side safety watch to provide additional information as appropriate. 14. safe speed without launching or moving over the crest of a swell onto the face. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. Avoid breaking waves if possible.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-04-08-TYPE References Conditions Standards Enter and Depart a Beach (Shoal Area) Surf Zone in Surf up to 8 Feet a. avoid or meet as appropriate.

windows. The direct pickup method must be used. 3. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Use safety backup boat or shore-side safety watch to provide additional information as appropriate. Maneuver boat into safe position for recovery with regard to crew and PIW. Conduct recovery from recess port or well-deck only. and saddles for maneuvering and turns. 9. Station pointer appropriately to communicate effectively. A life-like dummy (Oscar) will be used. 5-41 . Brief crew and assign duties. 4. 6. 5. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Use lulls between series of breakers for making final approach. 7.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-04-09-TYPE References Conditions Standards Conduct a Person-in-the-Water (PIW) Recovery in Surf up to 8 Feet a. Task must be accomplished without injury or excessive risk to the person (life-like dummy) in the water. Heavy Weather Addendum. Ensure boat is stopped and kept square while PIW is recovered. shoulders. Position crew for recovery ensuring safe movement and clear communications. 13. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. Make ready appropriate standard retrieval equipment.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. Section D Task performed while underway in surf up to 8 feet. Use lulls. 10. Maneuver boat down sea into position for final approach. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 8. 12. Throw life ring if appropriate to assist PIW. 11. Safely recover PIW/Oscar. 2.

Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 6. COMDTINST 3500. boat crews. lessons learned. COMDTINST 1541. Review objectives. Ascertain condition of unit boats and ensure they remain fully mission capable (any disabling or restrictive discrepancies reported to command). ideas for improvement. 4. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. Trainee must lead the shore-side post-mission safety debrief to include all involved crew (i. Provide lessons learned and recommendations to command related to improvement in unit response strategy for near shore operations. communications.1 (series) Conditions Standards Task performed after underway for surf operations.e. Debrief crew. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew. tower. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1.e. Coordinate and lead unit post-mission debrief in appropriate setting. 15. Discuss crew’s ability to react to changes in risk levels encountered during debrief. safety gear) and ensure their continued readiness. 2. 10. Determine if the lessons learned or the actions during the mission warrant further reporting via the boat mishap reporting system. Stand down all unit resources involved with surf operations and ensure safe return to unit. b. 7. Ascertain condition of participating crews. radios. 8. encouraging input from juniors first (least experienced). seniors last (most experienced). comms watchstander. Ascertain condition of any other resources utilized (i. vehicles.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Performance Criteria 14. 9. Completed (Initials) Boat Type Instructor Comments Date TASK HW-04-10-ANY References Conduct a Post-Mission Standdown and Crew Debrief a. Instructor Comments Date 5-42 . safety issues observed. 5. beach party). and reinforcement of good seamanship practices or teamwork.3 (series) Team Coordination Training. 3. tower watch. Operational Risk Management.

then the task will not have a page number to reference. Its purpose is to provide guidance for the trainee’s reading assignments and is not a part of the training record. The instructor should then discuss the trainees answers to ensure understanding of the subject matter prior to beginning instruction for each new task.Division Two Reading Assignments . This Chapter contains the following Sections: Section A B C D Title Reading Assignments . The trainee should read the appropriate reading assignment and answer the related questions prior to beginning training in each new task.Division Four See Page 5-44 5-47 5-50 5-52 5-43 .Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Chapter 3.Division Three Reading Assignments . Heavy Weather Coxswain Trainee Study Guide Introduction This Chapter should be removed and given to the trainee for keeping. NOTE $ In this Chapter If there is no reading assignment assigned for a specific task.Division One Reading Assignments .

Section C Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Heavy Weather Addendum. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. Section B and Heavy Weather Addendum. Heavy Weather Addendum. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number HW-01-01-ANY • Reading Assignment Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section B and Heavy Weather Addendum.5 (series).Division One The reading assignments in this section are designed to aid the trainee in developing the knowledge and skills to adequately fulfill the requirement. COMDTINST M16114.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Section A.5 (series). Chapter 12. COMDTINST M16114. Section A None Assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. Chapter 17 Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section E Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section D Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series).5 (series).5 (series).5 (series). Chapter 12. Section E See Page 5-45 HW-01-02-ANY HW-01-03-TYPE • • 5-45 HW-01-04-ANY • 5-45 HW-01-05-ANY • 5-46 HW-01-06-ANY • 5-46 HW-01-07-ANY • 5-46 5-44 . Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments . Heavy Weather Addendum. COMDTINST M16114.

TASK HW-01-03-TYPE: Explain the Forces Effecting a Surf Capable Boat Operating in Heavy Weather and Surf 1. 3. If the urgency of the case puts you on a boat heading to sea in heavy weather. ________ breakers are the most dangerous kind of wave for boat operations. A surging break occurs on very _______ beaches. ______________ currents run parallel to the shore and inside the breakers.. 6. The primary tool to ensure success in any piloting evolution is ________ _________________. _______ is the unobstructed distance over which the wind blows across the surface of the water. If a ____________ __________ is not below plotting and relaying information to the coxswain. 7. 2. _________ and _________ ranges are also critical in computing speed over ground using the three-minute rule and its variations. If you have predetermined ____________ laid out. An _________ or ______ current running across a bar builds up a more intense sea than the _________ or ________ current.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-01-01-ANY: Identify the Types of Breaking Seas. 3. The primary external force for surf operations is the _______ itself. 4. 8. The shifting of ______ or ________ inside a boat can have a great effect on stability and handling. 4. Operation in very shallow water can be complicated by serious effect on a boat’s _________________. 7. 5. There are three basic types of breaking waves. They are ________. 5-45 . position. 5. 4. 5. One of the most under used methods of piloting is ____________ _____________. __________ breakers result from waves of low steepness moving over a gentle sloping ocean floor. you will be able to see at a glance how far left or right of track you are. the boat may be forced off course by the current or wind. coxswains know what to expect and how to minimize the danger to both boat and crew. or he is working the radar and cannot _________ the plots.e. _____________ gives the curl of breakers its tremendous force. ______ and ______. take time to _______________ your chart so that it is useable. By understanding how ________ form and behave. 2. a boat may be put into a _________. 6. When crossing the current to compensate for the set. TASK HW-01-04-ANY: Explain the Relationship Between Navigation and Piloting as it Pertains to Operations in Heavy Seas or Surf 1. The wise coxswain “_________________” the boat during fair weather so that he or she can acquire the skills to navigate in poor weather without fear or nervous strain.R. well before you reach the D. such as in a steep rise of the ocean floor. Have the right _________ for every mission. 6. 3. 2. 8. i. then the coxswain is either below where he cannot ___________ the crew. _________ waves result when there is a sudden lack of water ahead of the wave. their Characteristics and Causes 1.

5. TASK HW-01-06-ANY: Explain the Heavy Weather Towing Approach and Key Elements Related to Towing in Heavy Weather 1. A ___________ or ____________ is never routine. 8. The most common towing technique is to tow the distressed vessel from _____________ of the rescue vessel. Do not allow any crew to go ____________ at any time during this evolution. the bow is back into the swell. 4. 2. 3. 4. 3. Ideally. On a CG standard boat. _____________ of the tow is more important than ____________. 5. The coxswain will ________ _________ a safe distance from the man overboard and __________ ___________ until the opportunity to turn presents itself. __________ __________ is necessary to hold position while waiting for a window or a lull. When deploying a drogue. and the coxswain gives the command. In addition to present surf conditions.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-01-05-ANY: Explain the Procedures and Safety Concerns Related to Recovery of Personnel from the Water in Heavy Seas or Surf 1. If needed. consider the _____________ of the water before entering the surf. Though optimal to make your approach from down wind and down sea. use ___ feet of ___-inch double-braided nylon. or holding position prior to and during recovery of a person in the water. The ___________ ____________ is the location that allows the crew of the towing vessel to maximize use of the best deck work area on the vessel for passing and working the tow rig. but always possible in heavy seas. 2. 3. There are several techniques to deal with breaking seas on the beam. the turn to run down swell and approach will be planned differently in ___________ _______________. 2. _________ __________ is still the preferred technique. For the drogue towline. the _________ and _________ of the distressed vessel may determine the approach. To moor an alongside tow safely and skillfully. 4. 6. 5-46 . _________ __________ maintains the position and heading relative to the weather and seas. TASK HW-01-07-ANY: Explain the Procedure for Passing the Pump or Other Gear in Heavy Seas 1. make the approach into _________ and _________ if possible. the crew must stay out of the ____________ area until the turn is completed. the boat should be ______________ with the man overboard at arm’s length from the recovery area. A ______________is deployed from the stern of the towed vessel to help control the towed vessel’s motions. outside of the danger zone. 7.

Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Section B. Chapter 4. COMDTINST M16114.10 (series). COMDTINST M10470.16. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Chapter 6. Section E Boat Crew Utilization.5 (series). Section A Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Heavy Weather Addendum. COMDTINST M16114. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments . Heavy Weather Addendum. COMDTINST M16114.Division Two The reading assignments in this section are designed to aid the trainee in developing the knowledge and skills to adequately fulfill the requirement. Volume I.S. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number HW-02-01-ANY • Reading Assignment 47' Motor Life Boat Operator’s Handbook.32 (series) Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST 5312.10 (series). COMDTINST M16114.25 (series). Section E Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. Section G Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. and Chapter 7 None Assigned See Page 5-48 • • HW-02-02-ANY • 5-48 • • HW-02-03-TYPE • 5-49 HW-02-04-ANY • 5-49 HW-02-05-TYPE • 5-47 . Section E Rescue and Survival Systems Manual. Chapter 3.5 (series). Heavy Weather Addendum. Enclosures 1 and 2 U. Chapter 3.5 (series). COMDTINST M10470.

c. boats will provide position reports and operations normal reports to the Station at ________________ intervals not to exceed _____ minutes. 3. When seated in a seat. The ________________ is responsible for ensuring all required equipment is worn and worn correctly. the __________ belt. Stow all gear Engine room Steering Tow line Searchlights Throttle and reduction gear 2. 4. or the main radio is damaged. 5. Pre-surf checks should include: a. Maximum underway limits are set at _____ hours for seas less than 4 feet. visibility greater than ____ NM and _____________ only. d. 5. e. _________ for the seat must be worn in addition to the ______________ safety TASK HW-02-02-ANY: Explain Boat Preparations and Safety Precautions for Operating in Heavy Seas/Surf True or False True True True True True True False False False False False False 1. 5-48 .Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-02-01-ANY: Identify PPE and Safety Equipment for Heavy Weather and Surf Operations 1. exposure to _______________ extremes. 2. _________________ communications (handheld VHF) should be aboard the boat in case the antennas are lost. winds less than ______kts. and motion sickness. While underway. Environmental limits for surf training are set at breaking seas less than _____ feet. 4. b. 6. 3. Some factors contributing to fatigue are ________ loss. ____ hours for seas greater than 4 feet and ______ hours for heavy weather. f. When can the uniform be worn under a PFD? When must a dry suit be worn? First layer hypothermia protective clothing must _______ moisture away from the body.

particularly ___________. ___________ your crew to ensure that no one was lost overboard or seriously injured. Any situation that places the center of gravity over the center of __________ can result in a roll. Once in ________ __________. 3. 2. The primary use for this suit would be for very cold water environments where immediate retrieval of a person overboard is necessary to prevent death: The ____________ ____________ ____________ is used aboard cutters for electronic transmission of a data signal that will aid vessel/crew relocation in the event of capsizing. 6. 5. Dry suits alone provide inadequate insulation for ____________ protection. condition of electronics. The following factors should be considered in determining whether to continue or return after a roll over. The shifting of fuel or __________ inside a boat can have a great effect on stability and handling. Condition of the crew members. 2.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-02-03-TYPE: Explain the Procedures to be Taken for a Rollover or Knockdown 1. One or the other is required to be issued. TASK HW-02-04-ANY: Explain Procedures for Personal Survival if Lost Overboard in a Heavy Weather or Surf Environment 1. as you are still in the surf and must take quick action to _________ the next wave correctly or you may roll again. 3. urgency of mission. Immediately upon re-righting. 7. and exert a force of up to __________PSI. 5-49 . the engineer should go below to check for damage. and availability of backup ____________. Units may issue either the __________ __________ __________ suit or the __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ to unit personnel. 4. sinking. ___________ the situation. or abandoning ship. overall material and operating condition of engines. A 20-foot breaker can drop _________ tons of water on the boat. 4.

Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments . COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number HW-03-01-ANY HW-03-02-TYPE HW-03-03-TYPE • • • Reading Assignment None Assigned None Assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series).Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Section C. Heavy Weather Addendum. Section D None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned See Page 5-51 HW-03-04-TYPE • 5-51 HW-03-05-TYPE • 5-51 HW-03-06-TYPE HW-03-07-TYPE HW-03-08-TYPE HW-03-09-TYPE HW-03-10-TYPE HW-03-11-TYPE HW-03-12-TYPE HW-03-13-ANY HW-03-14-ANY • • • • • • • • • 5-50 . Heavy Weather Addendum. COMDTINST M16114. Heavy Weather Addendum. Section A & Section B Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series).5 (series).Division Three The reading assignments in this section are designed to aid the trainee in developing the knowledge and skills to adequately fulfill the requirement. Section C Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.

5. 5-51 . the turn to run down swell and approach will be planned differently in ____________ ______________. well before you reach the dead reckoning position. Operate a Boat in Heavy Seas The factors that determine the characteristics of wind waves are: ______ ______. 3. 4. as steering corrections must be made the instant you feel the stern of the boat being lifted by the oncoming swell. If needed. Running stern-to in heavy seas requires ___________. 4. ________________. The Coxswain will push ahead a ____________ distance from the man overboard and ___________ ___________ until the opportunity to turn presents itself. the boats can be handled without a lot of difficulty. Once down swell. Coast Guard standard boats are required to have all the necessary ______________ in the chart box as per the type manual. TASK HW-03-04-TYPE: 1.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-03-03-TYPE: 1. 6. If you keep your bow __________ to the swell of the most predominate force and use proper amounts of ____________ for different situations. and ______________. 3. TASK HW-03-05-TYPE: Conduct a Person-in-the-Water (PIW) Recovery in Heavy Seas 1. It puts them in great danger and _________________ the crew’s ability to communicate. Ideally. 2. the boat should be stopped with the man overboard at ________ ________ from the recovery area. ________________ and _________. Wind affects the boat __________ the swell. but think of this as _______________ gear. 8. ____________ occurs when the boat is running bow into the waves. 3. you will be able to see at a glance how far left or right of track you are. Pilot a Boat in Heavy Seas Using _____________________ or ______________ chartlets makes them easy to correct. 2. turn _______________ and avoid getting caught broadside to the surf/swell. Take the time to develop your ______________ piloting kit. rolling under the boat and dropping that side then lifting the other side and dropping it in turn. 5. ____________ is caused when the boat is operating in following seas. 7. ____________ is caused by a wave lifting up one side of the boat. Do not allow any of the crew to go ____________ at any time during this evolution. 2. If you have _______________________ ranges laid out. The three basic motions that a boat experiences while operating are ___________.

5 (series).5 (series).Division Four The reading assignments in this section are designed to aid the trainee in developing the knowledge and skills to adequately fulfill the requirement. Heavy Weather Addendum. Heavy Weather Addendum. COMDTINST M16114. Section E Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Section E None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned See Page 5-53 HW-04-05-TYPE • 5-53 HW-04-06-TYPE • 5-53 HW-04-07-TYPE • 5-53 HW-04-08-TYPE HW-04-09-TYPE HW-04-10-ANY • • • 5-52 . Heavy Weather Addendum. Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments .Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification Section D. Section E Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.5 (series). This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number HW-04-01-ANY HW-04-02-TYPE HW-04-03-TYPE HW-04-04-TYPE • • • • Reading Assignment None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Heavy Weather Addendum. COMDTINST M16114.5 (series). COMDTINST M16114. COMDTINST M16114. Section E Boat Crew Seamanship Manual.

minimizing risk to the boat and crew.Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification TASK HW-04-04 TYPE: Maintain Stationary Position (“Station Keep”) Using Both the Bow-To and Stern-To Methods in Surf up to 8 Feet 1. thus avoiding the majority of the breakers. TASK HW-04-05-TYPE: Transit Outbound on an Inlet or Bar Through Surf up to 8 Feet 1. because you will be dealing with nearly constant _________ surf. 5. 5-53 . and good backing skill and proper application of _______________ are essential. risking injuries or boat damage. or currents can make station-keeping _______________. 3. It is a last resort maneuver for _______________ operators. _________________________ a breaker is an advanced emergency procedure which can easily result in personnel injures or boat damage. Do not meet breakers at __________ speed or you may plow into the face. __________ must be reduced before the wave arrives. 4. TASK HW-04-07-TYPE: 1. 4. Any significant waves that cannot be avoided must be taken _____________. Environmental factors such as surf. Never allow the boat to be caught __________ a breaking wave. Slow down and allow your ________________ to carry you through. wind. and ability to read several waves back are critical. Good ____________. 2. 4. 3. It is preferable to transit the surf during any _______ period that may exist. Keep the bow as ______________to the seas as possible. 2. or get to the top ______________ it falls on you. such as a narrow inlet or bar. The operator should attempt to work through the surf zone by driving through ________________ and _______________. Any breakers that cannot be avoided should be taken _____________. and the boat is very _______________ in the position. TASK HW-04-06-TYPE: Transit Inbound on an Inlet or Bar Through Surf up to 8 Feet 1. Lateral Across a Surf Zone Beam to Surf up to 8 Feet In the absence of lulls. If operating in an area of limiting maneuverability. Either allow it to break before it reaches you. great care and patience must be exercised. The operator should practice wave avoidance by picking a course through the ______________ and ______________. Reducing speed after the wave has already picked up the boat will likely result in a loss of _____________ and/or _________. 2. 3. Speed may be _______________ to allow waves to pass ahead of the boat. or _______________ to avoid a breaker. Use only enough ______________ to maintain position and counteract the force of the oncoming wave. the operator may have to rely strictly on __________ the waves and make the transit during ________ periods. 2. or launch off the back. if available.

Part 5 – Heavy Weather Coxswain Qualification 5-54 .

These tasks represent the minimum elements of skill and knowledge necessary for safe and effective performance of a Coast Guard surfman. Qualification tasks should be reproduced locally and provided for trainees. and performed by the trainee.U. This Manual is not meant to be ordered for purposes of obtaining individual qualification tasks. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual.S. NOTE $ In this Part This Part contains the following Chapters: Part 1 2 3 Title Task Accomplishment Record for Surfman Surfman Qualification Tasks Surfman Trainee Study Guide See Page 6-3 6-5 6-17 6-1 . which must be learned. practiced. Volume II Part 6 Surfman Qualification Introduction This Part contains a collection of tasks.

Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual.S. Volume II 6-2 .U.

Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials 6-3 .Part 6 – Surfman Qualification Chapter 1. TRAINEE NAME: _________________________________ INSTRUCTOR NAME: _____________________________ RATE: ____________________ RATE: ____________________ POSITION/QUALIFICATION CODE TO BE TRAINED FOR: ______________________________ NOTE $ Task SRF-01-01-ANY SRF-01-02-TYPE SRF-01-03-TYPE SRF-01-04-TYPE SRF-01-05-TYPE SRF-01-06-TYPE SRF-01-07-TYPE SRF-01-08-TYPE SRF-01-09-TYPE SRF-01-10-ANY Instructors should line through those tasks not applicable to this qualification. Task Accomplishment Record for Surfman NOTE $ Instructor should remove this chapter and place it in the trainee’s training record.

Part 6 – Surfman Qualification 6-4 .

Be a certified heavy weather coxswain on the boat type for which they are seeking this higher level of qualification. Be at an operational unit that has been designated as a surf station by Commandant (G-OCS). The instructor should present the tasks to the trainee in a logical order using the instructions provided in Part 1. Tasks should be signed. and Have completed the surf tasks in the heavy weather coxswain guide (related to operations in surf up to 8 feet) or accomplish those skill-based tasks as a step toward completing similar tasks in the higher risk environment of larger surf as required for the surfman standards. and placed in the trainee’s training record when the instructor is satisfied that the trainee can consistently perform a task in accordance with all standards and conditions.Part 6 – Surfman Qualification Chapter 2. Prerequisites A prospective Surfman must: • • • • Be assigned to an operational unit with a surf capable boat attached. In this Chapter This Chapter contains the following Sections: Section A Title Surf Operations (greater than 8 feet) See Page 6-6 6-5 . Surfman Qualification Tasks Introduction The following are the instructions for this Chapter: • • • The purpose of this Chapter is to provide guidance on the trainee’s progress through the qualification tasks. dated.

This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number SRF-01-01-ANY SRF-01-02-TYPE Task Conduct Pre-Mission Sortie Planning for Surf Operations Conduct Safety Rounds.to 15-Foot Surf Using the Bow-To Method Transit Outbound an Inlet or Bar Through 8. during various missions.to 15-Foot Surf Lateral Across a Surf Zone Beam to 8. and use the results in decision-making. Vessel Systems Checks.to 15-Foot Surf Transit Inbound an Inlet or Bar Through 8. Demonstrate ability to operate boat(s) in surf conditions. and a Crew Brief Related to Surf Operations Determine the Position of a Boat in 8. Introduction • • Surf Operations (greater than 8 feet) The following are objectives of Division One: Demonstrate ability to properly plan for surf operations. communicate to the crew.to 15Foot Surf Depart a Surf Zone Using Only a Single Engine in Surf less than 12 Feet Conduct a Person-in-the-Water (PIW) Recovery in 8.to 15Foot Surf Maintain Stationary Position (Station Keep) in 8. NOTE $ In this Section Instructors must ensure that trainees reassess risk at appropriate intervals during evolutions.to 15-Foot Surf Conduct a Post-Mission Standdown and Crew Debrief See Page 6-7 6-7 SRF-01-03-TYPE SRF-01-04-TYPE SRF-01-05-TYPE SRF-01-06-TYPE SRF-01-07-TYPE SRF-01-08-TYPE SRF-01-09-TYPE SRF-01-10-ANY 6-8 6-10 6-10 6-11 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-16 6-6 .Part 6 – Surfman Qualification Section A.

comms watchstander. Operational Risk Management. Conduct visual inspection through all compartments prior to getting underway (i.Part 6 – Surfman Qualification TASK SRF-01-01-ANY References Conduct Pre-Mission Sortie Planning for Surf Operations a. Date Instructor Comments TASK SRF-01-02-TYPE References Conditions Standards Conduct Safety Rounds. and a Crew Brief Related to Surf Operations a. 2. b. boat-to-shore. Trainee must coordinate all mission planning and establish objectives for the sortie. Trainee must lead the shore-side pre-mission safety brief to include all involved crew (i. Include discussion of backup radio use and location.5 (series). 6. and anticipated changes that may occur during the sortie. Identify safe operating area and hazards. Solicit and evaluate safety concerns including knockdown/rollover brief and proper use of PPE. stowage. COMDTINST 3500.e. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. watertight integrity. Chapter 1 Task performed on boat prior to entering and immediately after exiting a surf zone. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. 4.e. Evaluate surf conditions. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. Brief crew on sortie objectives and the area where operations will be conducted. shore-to-boat reporting necessary to safety. currents.3 (series) Team Coordination Training. beach party). boat crews. 5. COMDTINST M16114. Monitor conditions and hazards in operating area.1 (series) Conditions Standards Task performed prior to getting underway. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. GAR or other) from TCT/ORM and include discussion of risk as part of crew briefs. Conduct risk assessment for sortie using appropriate risk assessment tools (SPE. COMDTINST 1541. Trainee must complete a visual safety round prior to getting underway. Trainee must coordinate safety rounds of the boat after exiting the surf zone. tower watch. winds. Brief crew on principle use of tower watch/beach party in providing critical information to the participating boats. Brief crew on communications plan encompassing boat-to-boat. 2. tides. missile hazards. 7. 6-7 . leaks or signs of system problems). Trainee must check operation of the boat key systems and brief crew prior to entering surf zone. 3. Vessel Systems Checks.

3 (series) Task performed while underway in 8. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew and other resources. 6-8 . 12. even rudder control port and starboard (both open bridge stations on 47' MLB). 6. Brief crew on risk assessment results. Assign crew positions and check PPE and all safety equipment.to 15-foot surf. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat. Check steering system for full. 9. Check engines and controls for full power ahead and astern (both open bridge stations on 47' MLB). point of reference and radar ranges to be used and depth of water. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Coordinate safety rounds of boat after safely exiting the surf zone. Check communications with backup safety boat and/or shore party. Brief crew on natural ranges. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 10. 16. 14. Brief crew on procedure to remain together and use appropriate signaling device in the event that they have fallen overboard. Ensure engineer made round of engine room prior to entering the surf zone. 7. 8. 5. 15.to 15-Foot Surf a. 11. Brief crew on methods to be used in moving about the deck if necessary and who will authorize movement.Part 6 – Surfman Qualification Performance Criteria 3. Instructor Comments Date TASK SRF-01-03-TYPE References Conditions Determine the Position of a Boat in 8. Brief crew on procedure in the event the surfman becomes incapacitated. 13. Brief crew on knockdown/rollover procedures. COMDTINST M3530. 4. Coast Guard Navigation Standards Manual.

Determine boat’s position using fixed geographical references and seaman’s eye. trainee must determine boat’s position relative to the closest hazards with an accuracy of 100 yards. hazards. point of reference and radar ranges to be used and depth of water. Using local knowledge. swell. 14. 7. 2. and shoulders. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat. Identify safe operating area and hazards and pilot boat with adjustments for surrounding dangers. available electronics and seaman’s eye. 4.e. aircraft. Observe sea and surf conditions and evaluate safest course through surf zone. tower. 5. 15. 10. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. saddles. Avoid breaking waves (when possible) using windows. Determine boat’s position in relation to known hazards using available electronics. 8. 3. Pass accurate position to operational command and verify by shore-side plotting. watchstander). Brief crew and assign duties. and useful ranges. Instructor Comments Date 6-9 . Demonstrate awareness of the effects of current. 9. Ensure safety rounds and checks are complete. other boats. Brief crew on natural ranges. beach party.Part 6 – Surfman Qualification Standards Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. 12. 6. Choose safe position in which to station keep with relation to depth of water. Promote continuous communication and use of crew as integral part of piloting effort. Task must be accomplished while station keeping in the surf zone. Use other available resources to assist in determining position (i. 16. Trainee must maintain a safe distance from known hazards at all times. Assign crew positions and check PPE and all safety equipment. 13. 11. and wind on the boats heading and movements. Demonstrate advantages and shortcomings of all available electronics.

Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. COMDTINST M16114. Use proper helm throttle commands to achieve a bow-to position to the seas. Heavy Weather Addendum Task performed while underway in 8. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew and other resources. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution.to 15-Foot Surf a. Brief crew and assign duties. 8. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Boat must meet breakers squarely and with enough power to get the boat through/over the wave. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Maintain position for 5 minutes. 5.to 15-foot surf. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. COMDTINST M16114. Use swells and surf to maneuver and hold position. 4. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. Use proper amount of power to meet breakers and hold position. 6. 2.5 (series). Boat must maintain square bow-to attitude at all times except when lateral movement is necessary. Maintain square bow to aspect while station keeping in surf.to 15-Foot Surf Using the Bow-To Method a. Boat must maintain stationary position for at least five minutes with limited movement. 9.5 (series). Instructor Comments Date TASK SRF-01-05-TYPE References Conditions Transit Outbound an Inlet or Bar Through 8. 3. 7. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. 6-10 .to 15-foot surf.Part 6 – Surfman Qualification TASK SRF-01-04-TYPE References Conditions Standards Maintain Stationary Position (Station Keep) in 8. Identify safe operating area and hazards. Heavy Weather Addendum Task performed while underway in 8.

Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. Meet breakers with appropriate power. if possible.to 15-foot surf. Boat must meet breakers squarely and with enough power to get the boat through/over the wave. 4. Time series to transit through surf zone on the lull. COMDTINST M16114. Brief crew and assign duties. 3. Boat must be maneuvered in adequate time to avoid a breaker on the stern. 5.Part 6 – Surfman Qualification Standards Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew.to 15-Foot Surf a. transit through the surf zone should be accomplished without meeting a breaker. If possible. Identify the high/low sides and maneuver toward the low side. Maximum effort should be taken to keep the boat from being overtaken by a breaker. 10. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Use safety backup boat (if applicable) or shore side safety watch to provide additional information as appropriate. Instructor Comments Date TASK SRF-01-06-TYPE References Conditions Standards Transit Inbound an Inlet or Bar Through 8. Provide accurate bar report to operational command concerning existing conditions. 2. safe speed without launching the MLB. 6. 7. saddles. 11. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew and other resources. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 9. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1. 8. and shoulders. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. Avoid breaking waves (when possible) using windows. Identify safe operating area and hazards.5 (series). Heavy Weather Addendum Task performed while underway in 8. Use appropriate. 6-11 .

11. Evaluate overtaking surf to avoid taking a breaker on the stern unless intended. Identify safe operating area and hazards.Part 6 – Surfman Qualification Performance Criteria 1. Maintain control when taking a breaker on the stern if it is unavoidable. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew and other resources. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 10. Meet breakers with appropriate power. Use proper techniques to avoid getting caught on the face of a swell and avoid being caught on a hard chine. 13. saddles. Use safety backup boat (if applicable) or shore-side safety watch to provide additional information as appropriate. Provide accurate bar report to operational command concerning existing conditions. Time series to transit through surf zone on the lull. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. and shoulders. Use appropriate. Identify the high/low sides and maneuver toward the low side. 4. 2. 5. 9. 16. Brief crew and assign duties. 15. Use proper technique and timing to turn and meet breakers squarely bow-to when needed. 8. 12. safe speed careful to avoid overtaking the crest of a swell or breaker. 3. Instructor Comments Date 6-12 . 14. 7. Follow proper recovery procedures if knocked down or rolled by a swell or breaker. 6. Avoid breaking waves (when possible) using windows.

boat must meet breakers squarely and with enough power to get the boat through/over the wave. During single engine operations for the simulated engine casualty. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution. Avoid breaking waves (when possible) using windows. saddles.5 (series). avoid or meet squarely as appropriate. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 9. Heavy Weather Addendum Task performed while underway in 8. COMDTINST M16114. 10. 4. 3. safe speed. 5. 8. Evaluate approaching surf.to 15-Foot Surf a. 6. and shoulders. Performance Crite ria Completed (Initials) Boat Type 1.Part 6 – Surfman Qualification TASK SRF-01-07-TYPE References Conditions Standards Lateral Across a Surf Zone Beam to 8. Identify safe operating area and hazards. 2. the second engine will remain on line. Instructor Comments Date TASK SRF-01-08-TYPE References Conditions Depart a Surf Zone Using Only a Single Engine in Surf less than 12 Feet a.to 15-foot surf. Time series and transit on the lull. Use appropriate. 6-13 . Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Brief crew and assign duties. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. When necessary. Boat must not be overtaken by a breaker on the beam. 7. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. reference points or radar ranges. None Task performed while underway for training in daytime in surf less than 12 feet. Identify and use natural ranges. Use safety backup boat (if applicable) or shore-side safety watch to provide additional information as appropriate. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew and other resources.

Safely exit the surf zone. Identify safe operating area and hazards. 8. Avoid breaking waves (when possible) using windows. 9. and safety backup boat (if applicable) of situation. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat.to 15-foot surf. 7. Instructor Comments Date TASK SRF-01-09-TYPE References Conditions Conduct a Person-in-the-Water (PIW) Recovery in 8. Heavy Weather Addendum Task performed while underway in 8. Boat Crew Seamanship Manual. Time series and exit the surf zone during a lull. Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew. A life-like dummy (Oscar) will be used if performed during a training sortie. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew and other resources. The direct pickup method must be used. saddles. 3. Task must be accomplished without injury or excessive risk to the person (life-like dummy) in the water. and shoulders. Trainee must safely maneuver out of the surf zone on the designated single engine without resorting to use of both engines for control. COMDTINST M16114. Brief crew. 4. Maintain square bow/stern aspect while station keeping in surf. Coxswain will apply power to both engines in the event of a possible knockdown/rollover situation. 6.Part 6 – Surfman Qualification Standards Task must be accomplished without excessive risk to the boat or crew.to 15-Foot Surf a. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. 2.5 (series). Standards 6-14 . Use safety backup boat (if applicable) or shore-side safety watch to provide additional information as appropriate. tower/beach party. Station. 5. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type CAUTION ! 1.

Conduct recovery from recess port/well-deck only. Use lulls between series of breakers for making final approach. 2. 15. 14.Part 6 – Surfman Qualification Performance Criteria 1. 13. windows. Station pointer on open steering station or nearby coxswain to effectively communicate. Make retrieval equipment ready as necessary (i. 11. Ensure clear communications and coordination among crew. Instructor Comments Date 6-15 . 4. Maneuver boat down sea into position for final approach. 7. 5. and saddles for maneuvering and turns. 12. Brief crew and assign duties. shoulders. 6. Maneuver boat into safe position for recovery with regard to crew and PIW. boat hook.e. Ensure MLB is stopped and kept square while PIW is being recovered. Safely recover PIW/Oscar. 8. 3. 9. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 10. Throw life ring if appropriate to assist PIW. throw bag). Use safety backup boat (if applicable) or shore-side safety watch to provide additional information as appropriate. Position crew for recovery ensuring safe movement and clear communications. Use lulls. Maintain situational awareness and total control of the boat throughout evolution.

beach party). Stand down all unit resources involved with surf operations and ensure safe return to unit. COMDTINST 3500. encouraging input from juniors first (least experienced). 9. 8. COMDTINST 1541. 7.e. comms watchstander. Trainee must lead the shore side post-mission safety debrief to include all involved crew (i. seniors last (most experienced). Provide lessons learned and recommendations to command related to improvement in unit response strategy for near shore operations.1 (series) Task performed after underway for surf operations. communications. b. ideas for improvement. Ascertain condition of unit boats and ensure they remain fully mission capable (report any disabling or restrictive discrepancies to command). Operational Risk Management. 2. Discuss crew’s ability to react to changes in risk levels encountered during debriefs.3 (series) Team Coordination Training. 5. Determine if the lessons learned or the actions during the mission warrant further reporting via the boat mishap reporting system. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. lessons learned. 4.e. Debrief crew. 6. Review objectives. tower watch. vehicles. Instructor Comments Date 6-16 . boat crews. safety issues observed. and reinforcement of good seamanship practices or teamwork. 10. 3. Ascertain condition of participating crews. tower. Coordinate and lead unit post-mission debrief in appropriate setting. Trainee must accomplish task without prompting or use of a reference. Ascertain condition of any other resources utilized (i. radios. safety gear) and ensure their continued readiness.Part 6 – Surfman Qualification TASK SRF-01-10-ANY References Conditions S tandards Conduct a Post-Mission Standdown and Crew Debrief a.

Its purpose is to provide guidance for the trainee’s reading assignments and is not a part of the training record. The instructor should then discuss the trainee’s answers to ensure understanding of the subject matter prior to beginning instruction for each new task. This Chapter contains the following Sections: Section A Title Reading Assignments .Part 6 – Surfman Qualification Chapter 3.Division One See Page 6-18 6-17 . The trainee should read the appropriate reading assignment and answer the related questions prior to beginning training in each new task. NOTE $ In this Chapter If there is no reading assignment assigned for a specific task. then the task will not have a page number to reference. Surfman Trainee Study Guide Introduction This Chapter should be removed and given to the trainee for keeping.

Division One The reading assignments in this section are designed to aid the trainee in developing the knowledge and skills to adequately fulfill the requirement.Part 6 – Surfman Qualification Section A. This Section contains the following reading assignments: Task Number SRF-01-01-ANY SRF-01-02-TYPE SRF-01-03-TYPE SRF-01-04-TYPE SRF-01-05-TYPE SRF-01-06-TYPE SRF-01-07-TYPE SRF-01-08-TYPE SRF-01-09-TYPE SRF-01-10-ANY • • • • • • • • • • Reading Assignment None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned None Assigned See Page 6-18 . Introduction In this Section Reading Assignments .

practiced. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. These tasks represent the minimum elements of skill and knowledge necessary for safe and effective performance of Coast Guard Tactics. Volume II Part 7 Tactics Qualification Tasks Introduction This Part contains a collection of tasks. This Manual is not meant to be ordered for purposes of obtaining individual qualification tasks. Qualification tasks should be reproduced locally and provided for trainees. and performed by the trainee.S.U. NOTE In this Part This Part contains the following Chapters: Chapter 1 2 Title Task Accomplishment Record for Tactics Tactics Qualification Tasks See Page 7-2 7-3 7-1 CH-2 . which must be learned.

Task Accomplishment Record for Tactics NOTE Instructor should remove this chapter and place it in the trainee’s training record. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual.S. Date Started Date Completed Instructor’s Initials CH-2 7-2 .U. TRAINEE NAME: _________________________________ INSTRUCTOR NAME: _____________________________ RATE: ____________________ RATE: ____________________ POSITION/QUALIFICATION CODE TO BE TRAINED FOR: ______________________________ NOTE Task TAC-01-01-ANY TAC-01-02-ANY TAC-01-03-TYPE TAC-01-04-TYPE TAC-01-05-TYPE TAC-01-06-TYPE TAC-01-07-TYPE TAC-01-08-ANY TAC-01-09-ANY Instructors should line through those tasks not applicable to this qualification. Volume II Chapter 1.

In this Chapter This Chapter contains the following Sections: Section A Title Tactical Boat Operations See Page 7-4 7-3 CH-2 . dated. Volume II Chapter 2. Trainee must also be assigned to one of the following units: • • • • Port Security Unit (PSU) Maritime Safety and Security Team (MSST) Enhanced Maritime Safety and Security Team (EMSST) Units that have been designated by their Area or District Commander. The instructor should present the tasks to the trainee in a logical order using the instructions provided in Part 1. Tasks should be signed. Tactics Qualification Tasks Introduction The following are the instructions for this Chapter: • • • The purpose of this Chapter is to provide guidance on the trainee’s progress through the qualification tasks. and placed in the trainee’s training record when the instructor is satisfied that the trainee can consistently perform a task in accordance with all standards and conditions. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Prerequisites A Coxswain must be a certified on the boat type for which they are completing these qualifications.S.U.

Techniques. the Coxswain should be proficient in the Intercept. Demonstrate duties of a Tactical Reaction Boat (TRB). WARNING! EXTREME CAUTION SHOULD BE USED WHEN PRACTICING AND DEMONSTRATING THESE TACTICS! A boat’s speed and operating distance between platforms during these evolutions should always be within the capabilities of all individuals and under the direct supervision of the training supervisor. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. and use the results in decision-making. Adherence to the four-step checklist for stopping non-compliant vessels should always be followed when deciding to employ the Herding and Shouldering Tactics. communicate to the crew. Demonstrate duties of a Screen Boat (SB). Secure from a Waterside Security Mission (WSM). NOTE Instructors must insure that trainees reassess risk at appropriate intervals during evolutions. Demonstrate Vessel on Vessel Use of Force or Rules of Engagement as appropriate. Volume II Section A.U. Introduction Tactical Boat Operations The following are objectives of Division One: • • • • • • • Prepare for a Waterside Security Mission (WSM). As such. The unique nature of these tactics is recognized and specifically called-out within the Response Boat Tactics. the RB will maneuver as quickly as possible between the oncoming Target of Interest (TOI) and the High Valued Asset (HVA) and the course should be as close to bow on as possible. When employing the Intercept tactic. Employ weapons from a Response Boat (RB). The Herding and Shouldering Tactics are Step II Tactics under the vessel-on-vessel use of force (UOF) policy for non-compliant vessels. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Herding and Shouldering tactics as part of this qualification. Complete pre-arrival enforcement procedures. COMDTINST M16601. It is recommended that these tactics be practiced at incremental speeds and distances – not to exceed the operational limits of the boat.7 (series).S. CH-2 7-4 .

Stationary Tactical Reaction Boat (TRB) Duties Vessel on Vessel Use of Force/Rules of Engagement Weapons Employment Secure from Waterside Security Mission (WSM) Port Security Unit (PSU).Moving Screen Boat (SB) Duties . and Enhanced Maritime Safety and Security Team (EMSST) Specific Tasks See Page 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-5 CH-2 . Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Volume II In this Section This Section contains the following tasks: Task Number TAC-01-01-ANY TAC-01-02-ANY TAC-01-03-TYPE TAC-01-04-TYPE TAC-01-05-TYPE TAC-01-06-TYPE TAC-01-07-TYPE TAC-01-08-ANY TAC-01-09-ANY Task Review Patrol Orders and Participate in Operational Pre-Brief Complete Pre-Arrival Enforcement Procedures Screen Boat (SB) Duties .U. Maritime Safety and Security Team (MSST).S.

Reference (a) Chapter 2 Section B discusses a lengthy list of sample information that should be included in Patrol Orders and briefings. Authenticate PATCOM d.1 (series) Conditions Standards Task should be preformed at anytime. Confirm primary communications method b. b. Confirm approval to use weapons (where and when) (required during pre-brief) b. Identify Chain of Command. Verify status (delegation) of the Statement of No Objection (SNO) authority for warning shots and disabling fire c. a. Confirm asset backup Verify Communications Procedures. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. COMDTINST M16247. The below Performance Criteria represents the tasks critically important and necessary regardless of mission scenario. Review each step of the non-compliant vessel framework and account for each applicable tactic for each step d.U. a. COMDTINST M16601. a. Confirm communications contingency plan Confirm Use of Force or Rules of Engagement Guidelines. Volume II TASK TAC-01-01-ANY References Review Patrol Orders and Participate in Operational Pre-Brief a. Job aids and references are authorized.S. Completed (Initials) NOTE Performance Criteria 1. Response Boat Tactics. Confirm SAR responsibility c. 3. 4. a. Review field of fire assignments Date 2. Techniques. Instructor Comments CH-2 7-6 . Pre-diversion risk assessment b. Identify participating agencies Verify Mission Contingency Plan. Confirm secondary communications method c.7 (series) Maritime Law Enforcement Manual (MLEM). Authenticate TACON c. Trainee must complete the task prior to getting underway for Waterside Security Mission IAW Ref (a) and the approved Operational Commander’s mission plan. Authenticate OPCON b. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual.

Establish communications with PATCOM (as applicable) b. a. COMDTINST M16601. 3. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Techniques. 4. Trainee must complete the task prior to commencing HVA escort/patrol IAW ref (a). Volume II TASK TAC-01-02-ANY References Complete Pre-Arrival Enforcement Procedures a. Identify potential threats b. Perform a surface inspection b. Report to chain of command Inspect Pier (Final Destination Point).S. Establish Communications. Establish communications with HVA (as applicable) Inspect Route. a.7 (series) Conditions Standards Task shall be performed both day and night within operating parameters of the response boat. Instructor Comments 7-7 CH-2 . Identify any underwater hazards c. a. Report to chain of command Complete pre-escort Sweep. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Job aids and references are authorized. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. a. Identify potential threats c. Response Boat Tactics. Report to chain of command Date 2.U. Identify any suspicious activity b.

and casualty to personnel or boat. This understanding is demonstrated with successful completion of Part 2. Assume role the Tactical Reaction Boat (TRB) when required (refer to TASK TAC01-05-TYPE). job aids. CH-2 7-8 . Task must be accomplished without prompting. non-compliant. etc. Maintain (tactical advantage) position between TOI and protected HVA b. 2. 3. COMDTINST M16601. 6. a. Three-boat.) With the exception of zone and sector positioning. the core SB duties for a moving HVA remain the same. Herd TOI. Response Boat Tactics. Maneuver (as quickly as possible) between incoming TOI and HVA b. Two-boat. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Trainee must perform the duties of the Screen Boat and maintain zone integrity during the escort of an HVA IAW ref (a). COMDTINST M16247. 5. Switch sectors c. Communicate existence of SZ c. Escort a compliant Target of Interest (TOI) through a SZ. references. Loitering hand-off d.7 (series) Maritime Law Enforcement Manual (MLEM).1 (series) Conditions Task shall be performed while underway both day and night within operating parameters of the response boat. Techniques. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. a. VPIT) Remove non-compliant TOI from the Security Zone (refer to TASK TAC-01-06-TYPE). It is not expected that the Coxswain demonstrate proficiency in each scenario – rather the core SB duties represented below. Drop back hand-off Shadow TOI. Remain in the SZ Intercept TOI that encroaches the SZ. Section H of this manual.U. b. Maintain communications d. Patrol Intercept Zone. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards NOTE 1. a. Screen Boat (SB) duties are performed in a variety of scenarios (Four-boat. This approach requires complete understanding of the various scenarios and zone/sector variations. a. Perform sector switching c.S. Maneuver in assigned intercept zone b. 4. Assume tactical position b. Volume II TASK TAC-01-03-TYPE References Screen Boat (SB) Duties – Moving a. Classify TOI (compliant.

a. the core SB duties for a stationary HVA remain the same. etc. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. Remain in the SZ Completed (Initials) Boat Type 2. Assume role of the TRB (when required) Escort a compliant Target of Interest (TOI) through a SZ. Perform zone switching c.) With the exception of zone and sector positioning. job aids. Screen Boat (SB) duties are performed in a variety of scenarios (Four-boat. Loitering hand-off d. NOTE 8. This approach requires complete understanding of the various scenarios and zone/sector variations. Three-boat. 7-9 CH-2 . Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Actual boat-to-boat contact during shouldering (between the TOI and SB) will be simulated for training/qualification purposes. b. references. Maintain communications d.U. Techniques. Two-boat. Task must be accomplished without prompting.1 (series) Conditions Task shall be performed while underway both day and night within operating parameters of the response boat. 3. Maintain tactical position between TOI and protected HVA b.7 (series) Maritime Law Enforcement Manual (MLEM). Drop back hand-off Shadow TOI. COMDTINST M16601. Volume II 7. This understanding is demonstrated with successful completion of Part 2. Shoulder TOI.Stationary a.S. Standards NOTE Performance Criteria 1. It is not expected that the Coxswain demonstrate proficiency in each scenario – rather the core SB duties represented below. a. COMDTINST M16247. Maneuver in assigned intercept zone b. Response Boat Tactics. and casualty to personnel or boat. Take a vessel posing an imminent threat (VPIT) under fire (refer to TASK TAC-0107-TYPE). Switch sectors c. Trainee must perform the duties of the Screen Boat and maintain zone integrity while protecting a stationary HVA IAW ref (a). Date Instructor Comments TASK TAC-01-04-TYPE References Screen Boat (SB) Duties . Section H of this manual. a. Assume tactical position b. Patrol Intercept Zone.

Three-boat. This understanding is demonstrated with successful completion of Part 2. Tactical Reaction Boat (TRB) duties are performed in a variety of scenarios (Four-boat. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. the core TRB duties for a stationary HVA remain the same. 7. Maneuver (as quickly as possible) between incoming TOI and HVA b.) With the exception of zone and sector positioning. and casualty to personnel or boat. NOTE 8. Herd TOI. 5. Intercept TOI that encroaches the SZ. It is not expected that the Coxswain demonstrate proficiency in each scenario – rather the core TRB duties represented below. Take a Vessel Posing an Imminent Threat (VPIT) under fire (refer to TASK TAC-0107-TYPE). Date Instructor Comments TASK TAC-01-05-TYPE References Tactical Reaction Boat (TRB) Duties a. Standards NOTE CH-2 7-10 . Two-boat. Task must be accomplished without prompting. COMDTINST M16247. Response Boat Tactics. job aids.U. non-compliant. Communicate existence of SZ c. b. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. Section H of this manual.S. Techniques. Actual boat-to-boat contact during shouldering (between the TOI and SB) will be simulated for training/qualification purposes.7 (series) Maritime Law Enforcement Manual (MLEM). VPIT) Remove non-compliant TOI from the Security Zone (refer to TASK TAC-01-06-TYPE). This approach requires complete understanding of the various scenarios and zone/sector variations. a. references. Classify TOI (compliant. 6. etc. COMDTINST M16601.1 (series) Conditions Task shall be performed while underway both day and night within operating parameters of the response boat. Trainee must perform the duties of the Tactical Reaction Boat and maintain zone integrity while protecting an HVA IAW ref (a). Volume II 4. Shoulder TOI.

b. Trainee must demonstrate the duties of the Tactical Reaction Boat and maintain zone integrity while protecting an HVA IAW ref (a). job aids. a. Determine (Classify) Intent of TOI. non-compliant. Actual boat-to-boat contact during shouldering (between the TOI and SB) will be simulated for training/qualification purposes. NOTE 6. Techniques. Communicate existence of SZ c. VPIT) Remove non-compliant TOI from the Security Zone (refer to TASK TAC-01-06-TYPE). Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Volume II Performance Criteria 1. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual.7 (series) Maritime Law Enforcement Manual (MLEM).U. Maintain Communications c.1 (series) Conditions Task shall be performed while underway both day and night within operating parameters of the response boat. COMDTINST M16247. 4. 5. Keep TOI under observation d. Vessel posing imminent threat (VPIT) 7-11 CH-2 . 3. Completed (Initials) Boat Type 2. a. Non-compliant vessel c. Patrol the Reaction Zone (RZ).S. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Maintain position between TOI (in the SZ) and the HVA Intercept TOI that has moved past the Screen Boat. Compliant vessel b. Maintain zone integrity b. Herd TOI. Classify TOI (compliant. and casualty to personnel or boat. Maneuver (as quickly as possible) between incoming TOI and HVA b. COMDTINST M16601. Response Boat Tactics. Shoulder TOI. Take a vessel posing an imminent threat (VPIT) under fire (refer to TASK TAC-0107-TYPE) Date Instructor Comments TASK TAC-01-06-TYPE References Vessel on Vessel Use of Force/Rules of Engagement a. Task must be accomplished without prompting. references. a.

2. Instructor Comments Date TASK TAC-01-07-TYPE References Weapons Employment a. Determine where SNO Authority resides ii. COMDTINST M16247. NOTE 3. Place RB into firing position. Employ Warning shots and Disabling fire (See NOTE). Initiate warning shots iv. COMDTINST M16601. unit or others from a VPIT (refer to TASK TAC-01-07-TYPE).2 (series) Conditions Task shall be performed while underway both day and night within operating parameters of the response boat. and casualty to personnel or boat. Employ Higher-level Tactics d. CH-2 7-12 . a.7 (series) Maritime Law Enforcement Manual (MLEM). Compel compliance from a non-compliant vessel. Provide a stable firing platform. Volume II 2. Qualification to fire the weapon will be determined through separate Personal Qualification Standards (PQS). Response Boat Tactics. Obtain permission for warning shots and/or disabling fire iii. i. b. c. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual.S. Employ Low-level Tactics c. Trainee must demonstrate the proper procedures to engage a Vessel Posing an Imminent Threat (VPIT) with weapons IAW ref (a). job aids. Techniques. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. Demonstrate Command Presence b. Defend self. Determine field of fire. The use of blank ammunition is dependant upon local policy. references. COMDTINST M8000. Initiate disabling fire The actual firing of weapons will be simulated for training/qualification purposes. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Boat Type Standards 1. Task must be accomplished without prompting.1 (series) Ordnance Manual. 3.U.

Qualification to fire the weapon will be determined through separate Personal Qualification Standards (PQS). Instructor Comments Date TASK TAC-01-08-ANY References Conditions Standards Secure from WSM Mission a. Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) 1. Volume II 4. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Trainee must complete the task upon completion of a Waterside Security Mission IAW Ref (a) and the approved Operational Commander’s mission plan. Secure RB. a. NOTE 5.7 (series) Task should be preformed at anytime. Secure weapons Conduct De-brief. 3. Control Weapons Employment (See NOTE). Receive appropriate response from gunner The actual firing of weapons will be simulated for training/qualification purposes. Communicate with TACON. The use of blank ammunition is dependant upon local policy. After Action Reports b. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. Incident Reports. Instructor Comments 7-13 CH-2 . Response Boat Tactics. Communicate standard commands b. a. a. COMDTINST M16601. Moor IAW existing procedures b. Date 2. Complete Necessary Reports. Job aids and references are authorized.S. Techniques.U.

Response Boat Tactics. COMDTINST M8000. Trainee must perform the tasks without casualty to personnel or boat. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual. Volume II TASK TAC-01-09-ANY References Port Security Unit (PSU). Performance Criteria Completed (Initials) Standards 1. COMDTINST M16000. b. COMDTINST M16601. Port Security.S. 3. and Procedures (RB-TTP) Manual. Maritime Safety and Security Team (MSST). in any type of weather conditions not exceeding platform limits.2 (series) Conditions Task should be performed at any time. (PSU ONLY) Date Instructor Comments CH-2 7-14 . Follow vectoring instructions from Tactical Action Officer (TAO). c.U. 4. Demonstrate safe deployment of MK3A2 concussion grenades from port security platform.7 (series) Marine Safety Manual.12 (series) Ordnance Manual. Demonstrate anti-swimmer/submersible/swimmer delivery vehicle (SDV) techniques. Conn platform during an underway M240B and/or M2 live fire exercise. Volume VII. and Enhanced Maritime Safety and Security Team (EMSST) Specific Tasks a. Techniques. Live fire exercise will be completed IAW ref C. Trainee must accomplish the task without prompting or use of a reference. 2.

Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual.U.S. Volume II Appendix A. This Appendix contains the following information: Topic Glossary See Page A-3 A-1 CH-2 . Glossary Introduction In this Appendix This Appendix contains a list of terms that may be useful when reading this Manual.

Volume II A-2 CH-2 . Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual.U.S.

regulated navigation areas. unit boat allowance. harbors. and marine environmental protection regulations. without limitation. water pollution.. or District Commander (in the case of D17). An Auxiliary-Operated Station (small) is a Station (small) that relies on auxiliary members for its primary duty section staffing for three or more months a year is considered to be an “auxiliary operated” unit. Air Station AuxiliaryOperated Station (Small) Boat Crew Boat Crew Examination Board (BCEB) Boat Outfit/Stowage Plans Captain-of-thePort (COTP) Certification Command Cadre Crew Rest A-3 CH-2 . and permanently assigned dutystanders. Auxiliary operated Units may or may not have an active duty command cadre (i. and permanently assigned dutystanders. An Air Station is a Coast Guard shore facility with an OPFAC. engineers.e. Within their jurisdiction. COMDTINST M16114 (series). and equipment. warning zones. BCEB is designated in writing. The CO or OIC. regulations for the protection and security of vessels. and all other personnel required onboard a boat acting in an official capacity. including. Crews are allowed to recreate and sleep. security zones. Section or Activity command. security. and equipment. unit boat allowance. Time during which alert crews do not engage in any Station work or operations. crewmen. selected by the unit commander and organized to examine and evaluate boat crew candidates. and waterfront facilities. these Coast Guard officers enforce port safety. as applicable. heavy weather coxswains. command cadre. deep-water ports. and crew members. and ports and waterways safety. Section or Activity command. the Executive Officer or Executive Petty Officer. Includes the coxswain. A group of certified boat crew members. which reports to a Group. anchorages. the Engineering Petty Officer and senior Boatswain’s Mate (at units with COs) are a unit’s command cadre. which reports to a Group. boat coxswains.Appendix A . boat engineer. OIC). command cadre. consisting of experienced surfmen. Formal command verification that an individual has met all requirements and is authorized to perform the boat crew duties at a specific level aboard a particular boat type. or District Commander (in the case of D17).Glossary TERM Aids to Navigation Team DEFINITION An Aids to Navigation Team is a Coast Guard shore facility with an OPFAC. The configuration requirements for standard boat outfits and equipment stowage plans are set forth in the applicable Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook.

A waiver to crew rest or rest-recovery requirements granted by a Group Commander. motion sickness. Such fire is a special method of stopping a vessel. workload. at a minimum. command cadre. which reports to a Group. Currency is maintained by completing the regularly scheduled minimum proficiency requirements of their current crew position.Appendix A . Fatigue Fatigue Waiver Field of Fire A-4 CH-2 . These are the only authorized modifications to a standard boat. Disabling fire as practiced by the Coast Guard does not constitute the use of deadly force. The firing of ordnance at a vessel with the intent to disable. No one other than Commandant (G-SEN) is authorized to approve ECs to standard boats. A Cutter. Computation of such time ends when the mission is complete. A condition of impaired mental and physical performance brought about by extended periods of exertion and stress which reduces the individual's capability to respond to external stimuli. with minimum injury to personnel or damage to the vessel. The area in which a weapon or a group of weapons may cover effectively with fire from a given position. hunger. and boredom. and permanently assigned dutystanders. changes in work and sleep cycles. illness. COMDTINST M16114 (series) provides amplifying details on the EC process. to which a cutter boat is assigned. A protective screen of naval or law enforcement vessels and aircraft used to protect a high valued asset(s) from enemy attack. Some factors contributing to fatigue are sleep loss. physical exertion. unit boat allowance. they are considered to be fatigued when they exceed the underway or alert posture standards in this section. exposure to temperature extremes (hypothermia and heat stress). contains an OPFAC.Glossary TERM Crew Underway Time DEFINITION Begins when the crewmember reports to the designated place to prepare for a specific boat mission. While an individual or crew may be considered to be fatigued at any time. and equipment. The Specific Boat Type Operator’s Handbook. A current crewmember is certified and has all recurring training requirements completed and up to date. or District Commander. Current Cutter Disabling Fire Engineering Changes (ECs) NOTE Escort Engineering Changes (ECs) were formerly known as BOATALTS. Crew underway time includes time spent accomplishing pre-mission and post-mission boat checks. Section or Activity command.

Department of Defense (DoD) personnel may assist non-DoD law enforcement authorities with MHS law enforcement missions in accordance with Federal law and applicable DoD and Coast Guard regulations and policies. Heavy weather for each specific boat type may be determined by the coxswain at any time. including the Coast Guard. The establishment of any LAA requires public rulemaking and publication in the Federal Register. Normally extends from the outer edge of the RZ away from the HVA an additional 1000 yards.Appendix A . vessels. Areas defined in the port. and other applicable law enforcement policies. NOTE This definition of heavy weather is not intended to define a heavy weather situation for a specific boat type. which shall be conducted in accordance with the Physical Security and Force Protection Program. or objects within these areas. and permanently assigned dutystanders. COMDTINST M5530. HVA may include military and commercial vessels. waterfront facilities. unit boat allowance.1 (series). the Maritime Law Enforcement Manual (MLEM). which reports to a District Commander. persons. command cadre. and territory. Any landside or waterside asset that is of high value. The outermost area of a security zone (SZ). and location. and conducted in accordance with settled law enforcement procedures. military facilities. Within the context of MLE. An MSO is a Coast Guard shore facility with an OPFAC. submarines. Herding Tactical boat maneuver where an RB purposely maneuvers towards a TOI (there is no physical contact) in an attempt to force it away from the protected asset. swell and wind conditions combining to exceed 8 feet and/or winds exceeding 30 knots.1 (series). MHS does not include the physical security of Coast Guard units and property. A Federal law enforcement mission carried out by domestic law enforcement authorities. vessel status/flag. and equipment. or commercial vessels carrying CDC. vehicles. COMDTINST M16247. The government’s right to exercise legal authority over its persons. or activity boundaries and used to restrict or control movement of vessels. jurisdiction is comprised of three elements: substantive law. terminal area. High Value Asset (HVA) Intercept Zone (IZ) Jurisdiction Limited Access Area (LAA) Maritime Homeland Security (MHS) Marine Safety Offices (MSO) A-5 CH-2 . facility.Glossary TERM Heavy Weather DEFINITION Heavy weather is defined as sea.

an NVPZ is a 500-yard regulated area of water.S.Appendix A . Air Stations and Greater Antilles Section. naval vessels. unit boat allowance and OIC. surrounding large U. A Non-Pooled Station (small) is a Station (small) with permanently assigned personnel. A directive issued by a commander to subordinate commanders for the purpose of effecting the coordinated execution of an operation. Subpart G. or District Commander (in the case of D17). or within a floating dry dock. including MSC vessels. Operational Commanders are defined as commanders of Groups. moored.S. assigning tasks. command cadre. Transferable command authority that may be exercised by commanders at any echelon at or below the level of Area Commander. anchored. and giving necessary authoritative direction necessary to accomplish the mission. OPCON may be delegated and is the authority to perform those functions of command over subordinate forces involving organizing and employing commands and forces. This definition specifically does not include Station COs/OICs exercising operational control of a Station (small). See also tactical control. designating objectives. Section or Activity command.Glossary TERM Maritime Safety and Security Teams (MSST) DEFINITION An MSST is a Coast Guard shore facility with an OPFAC. except when the large naval vessel is moored within a restricted area or within a naval defensive sea area. and equipment. As described in 33 CFR 165. For the purpose of this instruction. Naval Vessel Protection Zone (NVPZ) Night Non-Compliant Vessel Non-Pooled Station (Small) Operational Commander Operational Control (OPCON) Operational Order (OPORD) A-6 CH-2 . (out to 3NM). OPCON is inherent in area command (command authority). whether the large naval vessel is underway. who exercise direct operational control of a subordinate unit with a standard boat or nonstandard boat assigned. in effect at all times in the navigable waters of the U. including a 100-yard exclusion zone. A vessel subject to examination that refuses to heave to after being legally ordered to do so. and permanently assigned dutystanders. unit boat allowance. which reports to a Group. Night is defined as ½ hour after nautical sunset and ½ hour before nautical sunrise. These units will be assigned an Operating Facility (OPFAC) number. Activities.

Port Security Unit (PSU) Ports. and Coastal Security (PWCS) Qualification Reaction Zone (RZ) Readiness A-7 CH-2 . sabotage. A PSU is a Coast Guard shore facility with an OPFAC. and then become an OPORD. COMDTINST M5440. assigned unit boat allowance. Marine Transportation System from internal and external threats. A Pooled Station (small) appears in the Operating Facilities (OPFAC) of the U. S. and post mission reporting or follow-up.2 (series). unit boat allowance. The parent unit for this Pooled Station (small) has additional personnel to operate a boat from the physical location of the Station (small). The designation “plan” is usually used instead of “order” in preparing for operations well in advance. The ability of a boat to perform the functions and missions for which it was designed. The satisfactory completion of the appropriate qualification tasks. personnel. and permanently assigned dutystanders. such as destruction or loss or injury from terrorism. and equipment.Glossary TERM Operation Plan (OPLAN) DEFINITION A plan for a single or series of connected operations to be carried out simultaneously or in succession.S. Waterways. Operations Parent Station Pooled Station (Small) The Pooled Station (small) is essentially a “remote operating location”.S. Its command cadre allowance may be different from that of a typical unit to account for the increased responsibility associated with the assignment of subordinate Stations (small/s). or an OIC. underway. Protection of the U. A parent Station is a unit with one or more subordinate Stations (small/s). command cadre. but will not have an assigned OPFAC number. Area within a SZ immediately adjacent to the HVA. Coast Guard. Time spent on pre-mission planning. or on signal. Maritime Domain and the U. An OPLAN should be put into effect at a prescribed time. It is usually based upon stated assumptions and is the form of directive employed by higher authority to permit subordinate commanders to prepare supporting plan and orders. Section or Activity command. or other subversive acts. Normally extends 1000 yards from the HVA. or District Commander (in the case of D17). which reports to a Group.Appendix A .

It may be stationary and described by fixed limits or it may be described as a zone around a vessel in motion. The steps a crew member takes to regain command authorization to be assigned boat crew duties when prior certification has lapsed due to permanent change of station (PCS) transfer. A safety zone may be established by regulation under the authority of the Port and Waterways Safety Act (PWSA) (33 U.Glossary TERM Ready for Operations Team (RFO Team) Recertification Process DEFINITION A minimum of three members. water. The term “response boat” refers mainly to the Coast Guard’s smaller. high/medium endurance cutters) work in conjunction with these smaller craft. vessels. A-8 CH-2 . harbors. or waters of the United States. in situations when the coxswain or the CO/OIC is unsure. the RFO team consists of members designated by the Operational Commander. vehicles. Response Boat – Small (RB-S). or to secure the observance of the rights and obligations of the United States. territories. or land and water established for such time as the COTP deems necessary to prevent damage or injury to any vessel or waterfront facility. quicker. A Reserve Augmented Unit is a unit that relies on reserve personnel for at least one third of its primary duty section staffing for three or more months a year.Appendix A . Also. Teams conduct annual assessment visits to ensure the goals of the Readiness and Standardization Program are achieved. A rough bar is a river entrance or inlet where heavy seas or surf conditions exist. to safeguard ports. and more maneuverable craft (47' Motor Life Boat. or objects authorized by the COTP. failure to meet semi-annual/annual currency requirements. they are considered to fill the Escort/Command and Control Vessel role rather than that of the RB. 1221) within which vessel traffic controls and operating restrictions may be imposed. Reserve Augmented Unit Response Boat (RB) Risk Assessment Rough Bar Safety Zone Screen Boat (SB) Security Zone (SZ) A boat interposed between the HVA and the threat. 41' Utility Boat. or revocation. a rough bar is assumed. An analysis of the probability that an asset will sustain damage from an attack. 25' Response Boat – Homeland Security (RB-HS).C. buoy tenders. and similar style craft).S. Security zones are designated areas of land. While larger Coast Guard assets (patrol boats (PBs). A designated water or shore area to which access is limited to persons.

Tactical boat maneuver where an RB inside an SZ maintains a position between a transiting TOI outside the SZ and the protected HVA. Guidance on the use of force (UOF) for the accomplishment of non-law enforcement missions. Section or Activity command. Section or Activity command. and equipment. Tactical boat maneuver where an RB purposely maneuvers into a TOI in an attempt to physically force it away from the protected asset. Each team conducts biennial assessment visits to ensure the goals of the Readiness and Standardization Assessment (outlined in this Manual) are achieved. A three to five member deployable evaluation team that consists of highly trained and experienced professionals specializing in the operational/deck and engineering aspects of each standard boat platform. and national self-defense. and permanently assigned dutystanders. which reports to a Group. SROE also establish fundamental policies and procedures governing action to be taken by U. and support from its parent unit. and permanently assigned dutystanders. unit self-defense.S. unit boat allowance. this individual is considered a member of the command cadre whose primary function is to lend experience to the unit training program. they support the centers by providing guidance and feedback to improve school training and program functions. A Station is a Coast Guard shore facility with an OPFAC. or District Commander (in the case of D17). command. command cadre. Shadow Shoulder Sleep Period Standardization Team (Stan Team) Standing Rules of Engagement (SROE) Station Station (Small) Station Aids to Navigation Team (STANT) A-9 CH-2 . These teams act as a deployable asset to the centers of excellence (UTBSC/NMLBS/NATON) for each standard boat platform.Glossary TERM Senior Boatswain’s Mate DEFINITION The senior Boatswain’s Mate permanently assigned. command cadre. and equipment. A STANT is a Coast Guard shore facility with an OPFAC. other than the OIC or XPO. A Station (small) is a minimally staffed and resource constrained unit that receives operational direction. and assist in the training and mentoring of subordinate personnel. or District Commander (in the case of D17). A period of time available for an individual to devote to sleeping that is not interrupted by official responsibilities. which reports to a Group. For purposes of Boat Crew Training. and in addition to providing field units with technical information.Appendix A . force commanders during military operations and contingencies. unit boat allowance.

usually. The tactical reaction boat (TRB) is charged with backing up the SB when it is intercepting/investigating a TOI entering the SZ. A separate training step learned in order to perform a particular job skill. A four-element code used to identify the applicability of tasks listed in this Manual. 49' BUSL. boat operations. and function of structural vessel parts.S.S. Command authority over assigned or attached forces or commands. vessel coatings. or post-mission reporting and followup. Ex: boat maintenance. form. A mission which involves the probable loss of life unless the Coast Guard intervenes. Surf is defined as the waves or swell of the sea breaking on the shore or a reef. TACON is inherent in OPCON. A CO or OIC of a unit with a standard or non-standard boat assigned. A-10 Structural Configuration Characteristics Surf Tactical Control (TACON) Tactical Reaction Boat (TRB) Target of Interest (TOI) Task Task Code Type Unit Commander Unit Self-Defense Urgent Operations Urgent SAR CH-2 . A particular class of boat. A mission of sufficient importance that the District Commander elects to execute it with a fatigued boat crew. forces may employ such force in self-defense only so long as the hostile force continues to present an imminent threat.Glossary TERM Station Work DEFINITION Activities that constitute normal unit work which are not directly associated with duty. U. Force used should not exceed that which is necessary to decisively counter the hostile act or intent and ensure the continued safety of U.S. such as 41' UTB. Any contact (vessel or aircraft) that poses a possible threat to a law enforcement unit or protected asset. Station cleanup. made available for tasking. and mounted equipment locations are managed by structural configuration requirements. TACON may be delegated to. and exercised at any level at or below the area commander. local direction and control of movements or maneuvers necessary to accomplish missions of tasks assigned. pre-mission planning. Watertight closures. forces in the vicinity from a hostile act or hostile intent. or 47' MLB. forces or other persons and property they are ordered to protect. This applies to the fit. that is limited to the detailed and. non-mission administrative tasks. A commander has the inherent authority and obligation to use all necessary means available and to take all appropriate action to defend that commander’s unit and other U.Appendix A .

Appendix A .Glossary TERM Vessel-on-Vessel UOF TTPs DEFINITION The tactics. Vessel Posing an Imminent Threat (VPIT) Waterside Security Measures or actions taken to prevent or guard against the use of a waterside approach to a waterfront facility or vessel by persons or vessels intent on theft. and procedures for stopping non-compliant vessels. sabotage. The procedures follow a gradual escalation in intensity. A geographic boundary or geographic area of jurisdiction such as a Captain-of-thePort zone. and/or belligerent acts. or death. While some vessel-on-vessel TTPs have the potential for causing serious damage. from non-harmful means up to and including the possible use of disabling fire. techniques. security zone. injury. safety zone. Zone A-11 CH-2 . terrorism. Any vessel whose actions pose an imminent threat of death or serious physical injury to any person. they do not include TTPs that are intended to be applied as deadly force. tactical security zone or tactical reaction zone. marine inspection zone.

U.S. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual, Volume II

Appendix B. List of Acronyms
Introduction In this Appendix This Appendix contains a list of acronyms used throughout the manual. This Appendix contains the following information: Topic List of Acronyms See Page B-3

B-1

CH-2

U.S. Coast Guard Boat Operations and Training (BOAT) Manual, Volume II

B-2

CH-2

Appendix B – List of Acronyms

ACRONYM
AOR BCEB BCM BDCM BDS BECCE BM BO BUSL CDV CGUOFP CO CO/OIC COMDTINST COTP CS CSP DGPS DHS DR EBL EC ECM EMSST EMT EPIRB ETA GAR GPS HELP HDOP HVA HVAC ICW IZ LAA

DEFINITION
Area of Responsibility Boat Crew Examination Boards Boat Crew Member Buoy Deck Crew Member Buoy Deck Supervisor Basic Engineering Casualty Control Exercises Boatswain’s Mate Boom/Crane Operator Buoy Utility Stern Loading Course Deviation Variance Coast Guard Use of Force Policy Commanding Officer Commanding Officer/Officer-in-Charge Commandant Instruction Captain-of-the-Port Creeping Line Search Commence Search Point Differential Global Positioning System Department of Homeland Security Dead Reckoning Electronic Bearing Line Engineering Change Electronic Control Module Enhanced Maritime Safety and Security Team Emergency Medical Technician Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon Estimated Time of Arrival Green-Amber-Red Global Positioning System Heat Escape Lessening Position Horizontal Dilution of Precision High Value Asset Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning Intracoastal Waterway Intercept Zone Limited Access Area
B-3

CH-2

Appendix B – List of Acronyms

ACRONYM
LOP LORAN-C MARB MARSEC MHS MLB MLC MOB MSO MSST NAVRULS NMEA NMLBS NSB NVPZ OIC OPAREA OPCON OPFAC OPLAN OPORD PATCOM PCS PFD PIW POB PPE PPS PQS PS PSU PTO PWCS RB RFO

DEFINITION
Line of Position Long Range Aid to Navigation Marine Assistance Request Broadcast Maritime Security Maritime Homeland Security Motor Lifeboat Maintenance and Logistics Command Man Overboard Marine Safety Office Maritime Safety and Security Team Navigation Rules National Marine Electronics Association National Motor Lifeboat School Non-Standard Boat Naval Vessel Protection Zone Officer-in-Charge Operational Area Operational Control Operating Facility Operation Plan Operational Order Patrol Commander Permanent Change of Station Personal Flotation Device Person-in-the-Water Person Onboard Personal Protective Equipment Precise Positioning Service Personnel Qualification Standard Parallel Search Port Security Unit Power Take-Off Ports, Waterways, and Coastal Security Response Boat Ready for Operations

B-4

CH-2

Appendix B – List of Acronyms

ACRONYM
ROE RZ SAR SB SMC SOG SOP SPC (HWX) SPE SPE/GAR SPS SROE SS SSB-HF STANT SWL SZ TACON TCT TD TOI TRB TSN TSR TTP UOF U/W UPH UTB UTBSC UTM VPIT VRM VRO VS

DEFINITION
Rules of Engagement Reaction Zone Search and Rescue Screen Boat SAR Mission Coordinator Speed Over Ground Standard Operating Procedures Heavy Weather Special Purpose Craft Severity-Probability-Exposure Severity-Probability-Exposure/Green-Amber-Red Standard Positioning Service Standing Rules of Engagement Square Search Single Side Band-High Frequency Station Aids to Navigation Team Safe Working Load Security Zone Tactical Control Team Coordination Training Time Difference Target of Interest Tactical Reaction Boat Track Line Non-Return Search Track Line Return Search Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures Use of Force Underway Unaccompanied Personnel Housing Utility Boat Utility Boat Systems Center Utility Boat Medium Vessels Posing an Imminent Threat Variable Range Marker Variable Ratio Oiler Sector Search
B-5

CH-2

Appendix B – List of Acronyms

ACRONYM
WLL XPO XTE

DEFINITION
Working Load Limit Executive Petty Officer Cross Track Error

B-6

CH-2

Index

Index

2-31, 2-32, 2-33, 2-34, 2-35, 2-36, 2-37, 2-38, 239, 2-40, 2-41, 2-42, 2-43, 2-44, 2-45, 2-46, 2-47, 2-48, 2-49, 2-50, 2-51, 2-52, 2-53, 2-54, 2-55, 2-56, 2-57, 2-58, 2-59, 2-60, 2-61, 2-62, 2-63, 2-64, 2-65, 2-66, 2-67, 2-68, 2-69, 2-70, 2-71, 2-74, 275, 2-76, 2-77, 2-78, 2-79, 2-80, 2-81, 2-82, 2-83, 2-84, 2-85, 2-86, 2-87, 2-88, 2-89, 2-90, 2-91, 292, 2-93, 2-94, 2-95, 2-96, 2-97, 2-98, 2-99, 2-100, 2-101, 2-102, 2-103, 2-104, 2-105, 2-106, 2-107, 2-108, 2-109, B-3 BDCM, B-3 BDS, 2-111, 2-133, 2-134, 2-135, 2-158, B-3 BECCE, 2-55, 2-71, 4-65, 4-76, B-3 bend a heaving line, 2-54, 2-60, 2-106 bilge flooding, 3-65 bitts, 2-25, 2-30, 2-87, 2-107, 2-114, 2-117, 3-7, 346, 4-80, 4-120 BM, B-3 BO, B-3 boarding team, 4-88 boarding team member, 4-88 boat construction, 2-25, 2-26, 2-86 boat crew dry suit, 2-12, 2-16, 2-80 boat crew examination board, 1-9, A-3, B-3 boat crew member, 1-2, 1-4, 2-1, 2-3, 2-9, 2-12, 2-73, 2-82, 4-114, 4-117, A-3, B-3 boat crew survival vest, 2-12, 2-16, 2-20, 2-21, 2-80, 2-81, 4-66 boat crew survival vest equipment, 2-12, 2-16, 2-80 boat crew training, A-6 boat handling, 2-9, 2-31, 2-39, 2-94, 4-7, 4-16, 4-17, 4-18, 4-96 boat in tow, 2-61, 2-62, 4-78, 4-82, 4-83, 4-84, 4-87, 5-16, 5-24, 5-25 boat nomenclature, 2-9, 2-25, 2-85 boat operations, 1-5, 3-6, 3-8, 3-11, 3-13, 3-15, 3-16, 3-17, 3-20, 3-21, 3-27, 3-29, 3-33, 3-40, 4-38, 496, 5-8, 5-45, 5-47, A-6 boat piloting, 4-7, 4-40 boat preparations, 5-12, 5-13, 5-20, 5-48 boom/crane, 2-111, 2-114, 2-117, 2-122, 2-123, 2128, 2-129, 2-130, 2-131, 2-132, 2-133, 2-134, 2135, 2-135, 2-136, 2-137, 2-139, 2-140, 2-144, 2147, 2-148, 2-149, 2-153, 2-154, 2-156, 2-157, B-3 boom/crane operator, 2-111, 2-114, 2-128, 2-129, 2130, 2-134, 2-144, 2-153, 2-154, 2-156, B-3 bow on mooring, 2-31, 2-32 bow-to, 5-16, 5-24, 5-32, 5-36, 5-53, 6-6, 6-10, 6-12 bow-to method, 6-6, 6-10 bow-to seas, 5-16, 5-24 breaking seas, 5-6, 5-7, 5-45, 5-46, 5-48

A
aids to navigation, 2-36, 2-43, 2-44, 2-45, 2-49, 2-99, 2-111, 2-113, 2-114, 2-116, 2-117, 2-120, 2-122, 2-123, 2-124, 2-125, 2-126, 2-127, 2-128, 2-129, 2-130, 2-131, 2-132, 2-134, 2-136, 2-138, 2-139, 2-142, 2-143, 2-144, 2-152, 2-155, 4-43, 4-44, 459, 4-60, 4-61, 4-62, 4-63, 4-64, A-3 alongside a ship, 4-65, 4-69, 4-114 alongside another boat, 4-65, 4-68, 4-113, 4-114 alongside tow, 2-54, 2-62, 2-107, 4-78, 4-85, 4-86, 4121, 5-46 anchor, 2-33, 2-34, 2-85, 2-90, 3-7, 3-23, 3-31, 3-32, 3-34, 3-46, 3-63, 4-12, 4-14, 4-16, 4-35, 4-36, 437, 4-87, 4-100 anchoring the boat, 2-31, 2-33, 2-90 anti-exposure coveralls, 2-12, 2-15, 2-80, 2-81, 2-82, 5-12 AOR, 4-32, B-3 area of responsibility, 4-32, B-3 associated hardware, 2-112, 2-124, 2-149, 4-78, 4-80, 4-120 AtoN, 1-4, 2-1, 2-7, 2-111, 2-112, 2-113, 2-114, 2115, 2-123, 2-126, 2-128, 2-134, 2-140, 2-141, 2144, 2-149, 2-158 AtoN buoy deck equipment, 2-112, 2-123, 2-149 AtoN procedures, 2-112, 2-113, 2-144 authority and jurisdiction, 2-72.2, 2-72.3 automatic weapons, 2-72.2, 2-72.15 auto pilot, 3-12, 4-14, 4-40, 4-52 auxiliary, 3-6, 3-11, 3-36, 3-64, 4-14, 4-109, A-3 auxiliary system, 3-6, 3-11 away from a pier, 2-31, 2-38, 4-16, 4-28, 4-97

B
bar, 1-5, 2-150, 3-32, 4-17, 4-19, 4-31, 4-96, 4-99, 516, 5-28, 5-29, 5-30, 5-32, 5-36, 5-37, 5-38, 5-45, 5-53, 6-6, 6-10, 6-11, 6-12, A-6 basic casualty response, 3-33, 3-63 basic engineering casualty control exercise, 2-55, 271, 4-65, 4-76, B-3 basket hoist, 4-65, 4-74, 4-75, 4-116, 4-117 BCEB, A-3, B-3 BCM, 1-4, 2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-10, 2-11, 2-12, 2-13, 2-14, 2-15, 2-16, 2-17, 2-18, 2-19, 2-20, 2-21, 222, 2-23, 2-24, 2-25, 2-26, 2-27, 2-28, 2-29, 2-30,

Index - 1

CH-2

Index

bridle, 2-54, 2-60, 2-61, 2-106, 2-108, 2-119, 2-125, 2-150, 2-158, 4-78, 4-80, 4-81, 4-82, 4-84, 4-87, 4121 bridle connection, 4-78, 4-84, 4-121 buoy boat, 2-157 buoy deck crew, 2-111, 2-112, 2-113, 2-114, 2-144, 2-145, B-3 buoy deck crew member, 2-111, 2-112, 2-114, 2-145, B-3 buoy deck limitations and parameters, 2-112, 2-123, 2-149 buoy deck seamanship, 2-112, 2-124, 2-149 buoy deck supervisor, 2-111, 2-114, 2-129, 2-134, 2135, 2-136, 2-138, 2-144, 2-148, 2-156, 2-157, 2158, B-3 buoy deck supervisor fundamentals, 2-134, 2-136, 2157 buoy deck tool fundamentals, 2-112, 2-120 buoy maintenance, 2-112, 2-126, 2-150 buoy operations, 2-153 Buoy Utility Stern Loading Boat, 2-123, 2-131, B-3 BUSL, 2-123, 2-131, 2-143, 2-147, 2-149, 2-151, 2152, 2-153, 2-154, 2-155, 2-156, 2-158, A-7, B-3

crew brief, 5-16, 5-17, 5-32, 5-33, 6-6, 6-7 crew debrief, 5-16, 5-31, 5-32, 5-42, 6-6, 6-16 crew efficiency factors, 2-9, 2-10, 4-7, 4-8 crew fatigue, 2-10, 2-75, 4-8, 4-91, 5-13 crew first-aid responsibility, 2-12, 2-13, 2-78 CS, 4-55, 4-58, 4-61, 4-110, 4-111, B-3 CSP, 4-58, 4-59, 4-60, 4-61, 4-62, 4-63, 4-64, B-3 cutting, 2-106, 2-112, 2-120, 2-121, 2-148

D
dead reckoning, 4-40, 4-42, 4-103, 5-20, 5-51, B-3 de-brief, 2-72.2, 2-72.6 deck equipment, 2-149, 4-9, 4-11, 4-93 deck watch officer, 4-38 defense operations, 4-7, 4-88 depart a surf zone, 6-6, 6-13 depth of water, 2-33, 2-43, 2-48, 2-101, 4-35, 5-18, 5-34, 5-35, 6-8, 6-9 description of tasks, 1-1, 1-4 determine the position of a boat, 5-32, 5-34, 6-6, 6-8 dewatering, 2-54, 2-63, 2-108, 3-7, 3-12, 3-18, 3-37, 3-38, 3-64, 4-65, 4-71, 4-72, 4-73, 4-115 DGPS, 3-47, 4-46, 4-47, 4-49, B-3 direct pass of equipment, 5-16, 5-23 direct pickup method, 4-65, 4-66, 4-113, 5-21, 5-41, 6-14 disabling casualties, 3-5, 3-15, 3-33, 3-52, 5-13 disabling fire, 7-6, 7-12 DO, 3-60 DR, 4-40, 4-42, 4-103, B-3 drifting object, 5-16, 5-22 drogue, 5-10, 5-16, 5-23, 5-26, 5-27, 5-46 dry chemical fire extinguisher, 2-55, 2-67, 2-109 dummy, 2-55, 2-56, 2-58, 4-65, 4-66, 4-67, 4-113, 521, 5-41, 6-14 duty section, A-3, A-6

C
capsizing, 2-12, 2-22, 2-82, 3-33, 3-37, 3-53, 3-64, 419, 4-93, 5-49 CDV, 4-49, B-3 certification, 1-1, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10, 2-13, 2-14, 4-38, 532, A-3, A-5 CG-1 strobe light, 2-12, 2-20, 2-80 channel, 2-41, 2-42, 2-45, 2-51, 2-96, 2-99, 4-16, 430, 4-32, 4-97, 4-98 check-ride, 1-8, 1-9 classes of fires, 2-54, 2-65, 2-108 cleats, 2-25, 2-30, 2-87, 2-107, 2-114, 3-7, 3-46, 480, 4-120 CO, 1-5, 4-70, 4-109, A-3, A-6, A-7, B-3 CO/OIC, 1-5, A-6, B-3 CO2 fire extinguisher, 2-55, 2-66, 2-108 collision with a submerged object, 3-33, 3-39, 3-65 combat a fire in the engine space, 2-55, 2-70, 2-109 command and control vessel, 2-72.10 command cadre, A-3, A-4, A-5, A-6 commence search point, 4-58, B-3 compass course, 2-31, 2-37, 2-92, 4-40, 4-41, 4-42, 4-103 compute time, speed, and distance, 2-43, 2-47, 2-100 course deviation variance, 4-49, B-3 CPR, 2-12, 2-14, 2-79 creeping line search, 4-55, 4-58, 4-61, 4-110, 4-111, B-3

E
EBL, 2-50, B-3 EC, A-4, B-3 eductor, 2-64, 2-65, 2-108, 3-10, 4-65, 4-72, 4-73, 4115 electrical charging system, 3-18 electrical system, 2-131, 3-6, 3-8, 3-16, 3-18, 3-48, 349, 3-54, 5-14 electronic bearing line, B-3 electronic charting system, 2-43, 2-53 electronic control, 3-29, B-3 electronic control module, B-3 electronic equipment, 3-64, 4-9, 4-13, 4-25, 4-40, 453 Index - 2

CH-2

Index

electronic systems, 3-6, 3-16, 3-21, 3-53, 4-16, 4-21,

4-25
Emergency Medical Technician, 4-12, B-3 emergency procedures or response in heavy weather/surf, 5-5, 5-12 emergency signaling mirror, 2-12, 2-17, 2-80 EMSST, 7-3 engine failing to start with the starter turning over, 319, 3-22, 3-58 engine high water temperature, 3-34, 3-58 engine oil failure, 3-59 engine running uneven or stalls, 3-19, 3-27, 3-60 engine will not turn over or start, 3-19, 3-21, 3-57 engineering petty officer, A-3 enhanced maritime safety and security team, 7-3 enter and depart a beach, 5-32, 5-40 escort, 2-72.4, 2-72.8, 2-79.9, 2-110.5, 7-8 escorting, 2-72.2, 2-72.9, 2-72.11 estimated time of arrival, 4-42, B-3 ETA, 4-42, 4-48, 4-50, 4-53, 4-61, 4-62, 4-63, 4-64, B-3 evaluation team, A-6 excessive shaft seal leakage, 3-19, 3-30, 3-61 expanding square, 4-55, 4-58, 4-110 extinguishing agents, 2-54, 2-65, 2-108

G
GAR, 4-25, 5-17, 6-7, B-3 generator set, 3-48 global positioning system, B-3 G-OCS, 6-5 GPS, 2-43, 2-52, 2-102, 3-7, 3-16, 3-47, 4-14, 4-40, 4-45, 4-46, 4-47, 4-48, 4-49, 4-50, 4-52, 4-53, 458, 4-59, 4-60, 4-61, 4-62, 4-63, 4-64, 4-66, 4-67, 4-106, 4-107, B-3 GPS/DGPS, 2-43, 2-52, 2-102, 3-7, 3-16, 4-14, 4-40, 4-45, 4-47, 4-48, 4-49, 4-50, 4-52, 4-53, 4-66, 4-67 green-amber-red, 4-25, B-3, B-4 griping buoys, 2-112, 2-126, 2-150

H
hand signal fundamentals, 2-112, 2-122, 2-148 hard chine lock-up, 4-16, 4-33, 4-34 HDOP, 4-49, B-3 heat escape lessening position, 2-24, B-3 heat stress, A-4 heating, 2-112, 2-120, 2-121, 2-148, B-3 heavy seas, 1-5, 4-35, 4-99, 5-6, 5-9, 5-10, 5-11, 512, 5-13, 5-16, 5-20, 5-21, 5-22, 5-23, 5-24, 5-25, 5-26, 5-28, 5-46, 5-48, 5-51, A-6 heavy seas or surf, 1-5, 5-6, 5-9, 5-13, 5-46, A-6 heavy weather, 1-2, 1-4, 1-5, 4-16, 4-32, 4-33, 4-78, 4-81, 4-95, 4-98, 4-99, 4-113, 4-120, 5-1, 5-3, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-8, 5-9, 5-10, 5-11, 5-12, 5-13, 5-15, 516, 5-17, 5-19, 5-20, 5-21, 5-22, 5-24, 5-26, 5-29, 5-31, 5-32, 5-33, 5-36, 5-38, 5-39, 5-40, 5-41, 543, 5-44, 5-45, 5-46, 5-47, 5-48, 5-49, 5-50, 5-52, 6-5, 6-10, 6-11, 6-13, 6-14, A-3, A-4, B-4 heavy weather approach, 5-10, 5-11, 5-16, 5-24, 5-26 heavy weather operations, 5-5, 5-16, 5-17, 5-31 heavy weather towing, 5-6, 5-10, 5-46 helicopter air crew, 4-65, 4-73, 4-116 helicopter operations, 2-54, 2-59, 4-73, 4-74, 4-75, 476, 4-116 helmsman, 2-31, 2-37, 2-92 helo-ops, 2-54, 2-59, 2-106 HELP, 2-24, 2-83, B-3 herd, 7-8, 7-10, 7-11 herding, 2-72.12, 2-110.4, 7-4 high value asset, 2-79.2, 2-72.4, 2-72.9 higher-level tactics, 7-12 hitches, 2-25, 2-28, 2-29, 2-61, 2-87, 4-119 homeland security, 4-7, 4-88 horizontal dilution of precision, 4-49, B-3 HVA, 2-79.2, 2-72.4, 2-72.9, 2-72.10, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11, HVAC, 3-7, 3-8, 3-12, 3-14, 4-21, 4-22, B-3 Index - 3

F
fathometer, 2-43, 2-48, 2-98, 2-101, 3-7, 3-17, 3-47, 4-14, 4-42, 4-43, 4-44, 4-53, 4-59, 4-60, 4-61, 5-9 fatigue, 2-10, 2-75, 5-13, 5-48, A-4 field of fire, 2-72.4, 2-72.12, 7-6, 7-12 fire, 2-19, 2-54, 2-55, 2-60, 2-65, 2-66, 2-67, 2-68, 269, 2-70, 2-71, 2-106, 2-108, 2-109, 2-121, 2-148, 3-10, 3-12, 3-18, 3-24, 3-33, 3-34, 3-35, 3-36, 337, 3-40, 3-63, 3-64, 4-12, 4-13, 4-21, 4-57, 4-65, 4-70, 4-71, 4-73, 4-77, 4-109, 4-114 fire in the auxiliary machinery space, 3-33, 3-36, 364 fire in the engine room, 2-71, 3-33, 3-35, 3-64, 4-77 fire onboard, 2-54, 3-33, 3-34, 3-35, 3-36, 3-64, 4-70 first-aid, 2-9, 2-12, 2-13, 2-58, 4-12, 5-10 fittings, 2-25, 2-26, 2-31, 2-66, 2-87, 2-130, 2-137, 2154, 2-157, 3-6, 3-7, 3-46, 4-9, 4-10, 4-11, 4-12, 413, 4-93, 4-119 flooding, 3-33, 3-37, 3-38, 3-39, 3-40, 3-65, 4-72, 473, 4-115, 5-14 following sea, 4-16, 4-19, 4-31, 4-55, 4-58, 4-98, 4110, 5-27, 5-51 fuel sources, 2-54, 2-65, 2-108

CH-2

B-3 LORAN-C TDs.2. 5-46 moor the boat to a pier. 5-46. 4-96. 2-9. 4-113. 2-25. 4-93. 6-7. B-3 moving target. 6-11. 4-52. 2-54. 2-71. 2-12. 360. 3-59. A-4. 3-9. 2-72. 4-80. 2-105. 3-58. 2-92 maritime homeland security. 5-29. 5-32. 5-28. B-3 moor. 2-43. 2-75. 5-30. 3-48. 1-5. B-3 LORAN-C. 3-8. 2-36. 2-45.2. 2-106 MK-79 illumination signal kit. 4-56. 2116. 2-22. 5-29. 2-43. 3-28. 2-31. 5-14. B-4 Index . B-3 J jammed rudder. 2-150 motion sickness. 4-99. 3-52 local surf conditions. 3-22. 5-30. 4-103 main engine. 5-25. B-3 illuminate a bar. 3-31. 4-81. 4-109. 4-86. 2-43. A-6 instructor guidance. 5-34. 422. 536. 2-87. 2-72. 6-8 knots. 3-32. 3-9. 1-1. 4-108 limited access area. 3-12. 2-52. 2-102 MSO. 3-15. B-3 marine safety office. 2-81 inland and coastal piloting.3. 2-71. 5-18. 2-45. 5-34. 5-38. 5-23. 2-55.4 CH-2 .2. 4-103. 3-57. 4-28. 5-53. 2-72. 4-35. 5-32. 5-51. 3-58. 2-54. 5-8. 2-48. 2-54. 2-38 mooring evolution. 2-50. 4-109. 2-31. B-3 list the disabling casualties and restrictive discrepancies. 4-98. 5-10. 7-3. 4-34. 2-43. 2-72. 5-7 locate components and accessories. 2-21. 2-31. 1-7 intercept.Index I ICW. 2-92 LOP. 7-11 intercept zone. 2-25. 2-71. 4-81 line of position. 3-24. 3-12. B-3 maritime distress signals. 4-33. 5-39. 5-28. 2-85. 5-29. A-7. 2-102. 2-35. 6-11. 5-16. 7-12 lube oil pressure. 2-12. B-3 MSST. 5-31. 4-40. A-4. 4-113. 5-18. 2-56. 2-71. 2-55. 3-59. 6-6. 2-87.7 lateral across a surf zone beam. 4-51. 2-10. 2-31. B-3 MLC. 3-25. 2-45. 4-55. 2-62. 2-25 mishap report. 4-54. 2-49. B-3 lookout watch. A-4. 2-125. 5-24.4. 2-12. 3-19. 2-28. 5-49. 4-19. B-3 make fast a boat to a pier. 2-46. 4-18. 3-20. 4-49. 2-100. 2-68 maintenance and logistics command.6 loss of control of engine RPM. 2-72. 3-46 long range aid to navigation. 5-12. 7-3 maritime SAR planning. 2-90 man overboard. 4-77 K knockdown. 2-115. 3-37. B-3 low-level tactics. 5-42. 2-71. 6-7. 4-99. 4-46. 3-6. 4-77 loss of fuel oil pressure. 2-127. 2-29. 2-31. 2-102 loss of communications. 7-8 intracoastal waterway. 5-6. 6-15. 6-16 mission planning. 3-29. 4-45. 6-13 legal aspects. 324. 4-20. 2-32. 4-117. 2-151 mooring maintenance. 2-55. 2-140.4. 2-72. 7-4. 2-18. 2-135. 2-11. 2-72. 322. 2-93. 5-16. 4-16. 3-58. 5-49 N national marine electronics association. 3-19. 2-52. 5-15. 3-32. 4-78. 3-20. 3-59. 2-72. 3-6. B-3 man overboard evolution. 3-11. 4-77 lost overboard.12. 2-51. 5-17. A-5. 5-48. 4-46. 2-91. 2-72. 2-71. 3-19. 7-8. 3-6. 5-33. 519. 4-121. 3-25. 5-12. A-4 L LAA. 3-33.4. A-4 Motor Lifeboat. 1-5. 3-24. 2-71. 5-33. 5-33. 4-55.4 maritime safety and security team. 2-12. A-6 MK-124 smoke and illumination signal. 2-99 inlet. 5-53. 4-77 main engine high water temperature. 1-5. 2-81 MARB. 4-31. B-3 marine assistance request broadcast. 2-72. 3-64. 4-26. 4-77 loss of steering. 2-112. 5-17. 2-72.7 line handling. 6-8. 5-30 inflatable PFD. 2-72. 2-105 manual deployment. inlet or surf zone. 3-37. 2-80 MK-127A1. 2-38. 4-98. 4-77 loss of main engine lube oil pressure. 2-60. 2-94. 4-77 main fire pump. 2-112. 4-67. 2-43. 4-66. 2-72. 2-19 MLB. 349. 4-34. B-3 MOB. 3-19. 4-57 marlinespike seamanship. 4-20 M magnetic course. 3-19. 2-61. 3-19. 6-6. 4-33. 6-10. 5-9. 7-10. 4-120. 348 locate installed equipment and fittings. 4-47. 2-33.2. 2-56.

4-9. 4-67. 2-57. 4-65. B-4 parts of a line. 7-8. A-7. 5-15. 2-55. 2-97. 5-49 person-in-the-water. 4-86. 4-16. 3-17. 7-11. 5-18. 5-51. 2-102. 4-71. 2-40. 5-51. 6-7. A-5.4. 2-38. 2-31. 7-3. 2-25 naval vessel protection zone. 2-105. B-4 NSB. 2-34. 5-41. 7-14 PTO. 4-60. 6-7 pre-start checkoff. 2-52. B-4 navigational publications. 5-45 operational area. 2-106 parallel. 5-16. 6-6. 4-28. 5-40. B-4 PPE. 5-19. 5-16. 2-100. 2-56. 2-13 pier. 2-54. 4-48. 3-5. 5-46 PATCOM. 2-54. 5-30 Index . 2-107. 535. B-4 pre-arrival enforcement procedures. 2-50. 2-82 operate a boat in heavy seas. 2-55. 2-35. 4-111. 2-91. 2-54. 4-50. 2-43. 6-15. A-7. 2-44 pass a towline to another boat. 4-29. 2-107 pass the heaving line. 2-61. B-4 nautical chart. 4-55. 2-46. 3-17. 2-57. 4-116 passing the pump. 2-80. 4-50.Index national motor lifeboat school. 2-105. 3-53. A-5. B-4 PPS. 460. 4-58. 7-5. 4-40. 2-25. 4-16. A-6. 5-41. 5-33. 5-33. 4-12 propulsion system. 6-16 posts. 4-38. 3-19. 2-60. 2-81. 5-32. 2-102 obtain suction. 4-113. 3-19. 4-65. 5-45 navigation kit. 7-10. A-4. 5-16. 6-9. 7-12 personal survival. 5-34. 1-5. 4-111. 2-108 OIC. 5-20. 5-6. 2-120. 4-111. 5-16. B-4 PQS. 2-30. 3-19. 6-15 outboard motor vibration or spun propeller. 2-88. 4-88. 2-31. 5-17. 2-47. 5-51 operating facility. 5-6. 521. A-5. 7-3. 2-30. B-4 ORM. 5-11. A-5. 5-48. 7-6 precise positioning service. 2-9. 2-102. 3-13. 2-45. B-4 operational characteristics. 5-31. 2-54. 4-47. 5-31. 5-41. 5-16. B-4 PSU. 2100. 4-115 post-mission standdown. 434. 2-108. 4-12. 4-60. 2-64. 2-105. 4-55. 2-29. 2-72. 4-66. 4-41. 5-17. 3-7. 4-20 PS. 7-14 portable pump. 4-24 propulsion equipment. 4-88. 2-43. 4-48. B-4 pyrotechnics. B-4 plot a position. 5-17. 6-8. 2-96 OPFAC. 2-36. B-4 OPCON. 2-21. 6-6. B-4 NMEA. 2-52. 4-66. 6-14. 2-54. 4-113. 2-72. 2-54. 2-87 parts of a nautical chart. 4-121 PIW. 327. A-3. B-4 parallel search. 6-14. 4-53 navigation lights. 2-72. A-6. 2-46. 5-45. B-4 NVPZ. 2-140. 4-55. 5-41. B-4 physical fitness. 5-16. 2-72. 7-12 non-standard boat. 5-8.5 CH-2 . 2-64. 2-43. 2-82. 5-33. 2-107. 5-32. 2-56. A-5. 2-32. 485 navigation rules. 5-48. A-3. 4-76. 532. 3-59 overheating shaft packing gland. 2-68. 2-60. 7-7 PCS. 7-5 pre-brief. 2-28. 2-72. 3-32 power take-off. 5-42. 4-40. 2-106 passengers. 2-93. 3-61 oxygen acetylene. 3-46. 4-86. 2-22. 2-25. 2-23. 4-114. A-3. 4-110. 4-67. 4-18 operational risk management. 6-6. 3-13. 2-32 non-compliant. B-4 NMLBS. 4-53. 2-102 POB. B-4 petty officer. 3-7. 2-71. 2-132. 2-99. 5-6.8 O obtain a fix. 5-9. 7-5. 2-64. 7-6 open water survival skills. 4-16.8 navigation and piloting. 3-30 parachute illumination signal. 2-69. 4-43. 4-58. 3-46. 2-43. 5-21. 2-140. 5-42.2. 3-30. 6-6. 6-7 Oscar. 4-72. 2-34. 4-22. 6-7. 5-45 operations report. 3-6. 521. B-4 pointer. 2-54. 2-63. 5-9. B-5 PFD. 3-33. 4-66. 5-6. 2-112. 5-22. 4-13. 5-12. 2-63. 2-55. 4-47. B-4 permanent change of station. 6-15 port security unit. 2-100. 4-40. 7-5. 2-12. 4-78. B-4 personal qualification standard. 2-148 P packing gland. 4-110. 5-32. 2-58. B-4 no current/wind. 2-58. 5-9. 2-87.6. 5-12. 2-12. 4-38. 4-12. A-5. 4-43. 5-21. 4-41 NAVRULS. 3-51. B-4 pre-mission sortie planning. B-4 operating in heavy weather and surf. 7-6. B-4 OPAREA. A-6. 7-12. 6-14. 6-16 operations in heavy seas or surf. 4-41 nautical terminology. 2-9. 5-17.

4-78. 5-49. 4-85. 4-62.4. 7-6. 2-72. 5-33. 4-25. 5-18. 4-73. 4-7. 5-34. B-4 Index . B-4 sound signals. 2-111. 2-40. 4-107. 4-58. 4-25. 3-52. 5-26. 5-30 search and rescue. 6-6. 4-62. 2-105 reduction gear failure. 5-18. 5-5. 7-11 S safe working load. 2-50. 4-59. 4-8. 4-62. 5-23. 4-25. 2-72.12 restrictive discrepancies.4. 4-61. 5-16. 4-7. 2-12. 2-41. 2-42. 4-7. 4-60. 2-72. 3-39 shoal area. 4-35. 5-8. 4-58. 5-24. 4-61. 484. 5-33. 2-54. 2-72. A-6 ready for operations team. 2149. A-5. 4-63. 3-8. 2-96. 2-108 rig fenders. 7-11 set watertight integrity. B-5 secure the boat. 3-1.12.2. 4-61. 4-83. 2-158 risk assessment. 4-44 RB. 2-135. 463. 4-64. 5-16. 534. 2-124. 4-27 security zone. 4-59. 3-29. 2-12. 2-31. 2-54. 2-72. 4105. 4-56.2. 4-108. 2-150 sinking boat. 2-51. 2-153. 4-72. 4-7. 7-4 single engine. 4-110. 5-13. 2-102 rescue and assistance. 4-65 rescue and survival raft. 2-62. 5-12. 4-56. 4-117 rescue swimmer transfer. 4-90. 4-16. 2-49. 3-9. 2-72. 5-17. 4-61. 4-58. 4-78. 6-8 rough bar. B-5 sector search. 3-6.5 reaction zone. 2-134. 4-63. 6-7. 2-117. 7-9. 4-10. 1-5. 3-67. 5-13. 2-20. 4-106. 6-6. 2-72. 2-56. 5-27. 4-117 response boat. 4-78. 4-106. 7-11 shouldering. 7-11 readiness and standardization. 2-90. 6-1. 4-57. 5-48. 4-55. 4-80. 2-10 risk management. 4-62. 463. 4-65. 4-61. 4-93 severity-probability-exposure. 3-53.10. 5-48. 4-120. 2-9. 4-60. 4-55. 4-25. 5-17. 2-136. 6-8. 2-58. 4-59. 2-71. 4-60. 4-110. 7-10. 6-8. 4-108. 2-64. 4-59. 7-5. 2-149. 3-10. 4-61. 5-6. 4-25. 2-102 rivers. 1-5. 5-19. 5-26. 2-114. 4-121 shadow. 4-58. 2-62. A-5 recovery of personnel from the water. 4-61. 4-1. 6-7. 1-2. 463. 4-31. 3-16. 2-148. 1-4. 2-107. 4-55. 2-43. 3-19. 5-32. 4-65. 4-105. 5-42. 2-59. 5-7. 3-40. 534. 5-9. 2-115. 4-64 RZ. 4-87 SPC. 4-7. 4-80. 7-8 SDU-5/E. 6-5. 4-55. 5-17. 5-20. 2-50. 4-33. B-4 SNO. 272. 3-15. 7-4. 5-19. 4-62. 5-31. 5-48 safety rounds. 4-65. 2-110. 4-119. 2-102. 4-57. 2-9. 2-133. 2-81 rescue strop hoist. 6-7. 4-111 sector. 5-14. 2-72. 2-72. 2-22. 4-63. 2-7. 1-1. 1-3 SAR. 4-86 shockloading. 5-35. 2-72. 3-61 shaft seal. 6-16 rig and operate an eductor.4. 5-17. 5-12. 7-8 screen boat.4. 4-56. 2128.6 CH-2 . 7-10.Index Q qualification task. 4-16. 5-25. 2-43. 5-18. 7-5. 3-17. 5-25. 5-12. 2-101. 4-71. 5-32. 5-29 shorten tow. 7-8. 5-28 shoulder. 4-9. B-4 SOP. 3-18. A5 R radio. 2-147 safety precautions. 4-59. 5-17. 4-83. 4-28. 2-117. B-4 shackle. 5-16. 4-72.4. 2-118. 2-54. 2-72. 2-1. 4-70. 2-72. 4-109 sample task. 2-103. A-7. 2-134. 4-83. 4-72. 4-58. 4-108. 2-56. 6-9 safety precaution fundamentals. 5-13. A-5 recertification. 4-63. 2-145.5. 4-78. 4-60. 6-14 sinkers. B-4 SAR fundamentals course. 2-125. 2-72. 4-85 rigging fundamentals. 4-63. 2-157. 2-121. 410. 4-59. 2-114. 5-13. 4-99. 2151. 5-13. 4-110. 4-77 relative bearings. A-6 rules of the road. 5-1. 2-82. 5-46 recovery/pickup person. 2-147. 6-8 risk factors. 4-61. 4-59. 3-20.12. 7-12 SOG. 4-7. 2-115. 2-138. 4-32. 2-118. 4-55. B-4 search pattern. 4-57. 4-38. 4-55. 2-35. 5-27. 2-54. 4-15. 2-72. 2-112.2. 2-127. 4-82. B-3 range and bearing. 6-9 salvage.8. 4-60. 5-49 skiff hook. 2-36. 2-31. 4-79. 4-110. 4-19. 462. 6-7. 3-15. 3-5. 2-72. 2-32. 5-18. 4-107 SB. 3-17. 4-115. 2-112. 4-105. 5-40 shoal water. 4-106. 2-145. 2-56. 4-107. 4-60. 4-59. 4-71. 7-4. 4-62. 4-58.10. 4-59. 2-126. 2-80 sea conditions. 4-59.10. 5-34. 4-110. 4-98 rollover. 2-91. 4-60. 2-140. 460. 5-33. 3-60. 4-78. 4-121 SMC. 5-16. 2-43. 4-64. 2-62. 2-107. 5-30 risk of collision. 5-35. 1-5. 7-8 shaft packing gland. 5-20. 4-73. B-4 safety equipment. 4-62. 6-13. 4-76. 4-14. 1-5. B-4 SPC (HWX).

4-119. 5-36. 4-103. 5-26. 4-83. 4-32. A-7 surf capable boat. 4-74. 5-48. 5-32. 2-29. 4-48. 3-33. 4-104. 5-24. 2-72. 7-10. 5-37. 3-63. 5-24. 6-16 surf station. 2-23. 5-26. 4-50. 2-107. 4-85. 4-25. A-6. 5-13. 5-42. 4-76. 2-77. 5-17. 2-85. 6-16. 2-15. 4-58. 5-8. 4-74. 5-19. 5-25. 4-41. 4-78. B-4 terminology fundamentals. 2-58. 3-10. 2-72. A-4. 5-32. 2-76. 4-7. 4-7. 4-81. 4-86. 5-37. 5-38. 615 steering casualty. 5-39. 2-23. 4-34. 4-57. 3-54. 2-105 survival. 5-22 stern tow. 5-6. 5-38. 1-5. 5-22. 5-28 stern-to. 3-61. 7-8. 6-10 steer on a signal. 1-4 TCT. 2-58. 2-59. 5-30. 5-45. 2-117. 4-29. 4-51. 4-121. 4120. 5-33. 2-72. 5-29. 2-57. 4-15. 5-25. 5-36. 2-158 surf. 7-9. 4-35 SPE. 4-40. 442. 4-87. 2-62. 6-7. 7-11 T tactical action officer. 4117. 4-59. 6-11. 2-102. 3-51. 5-15. A-6. 6-5. 2-61. 4-79. 2-45. 4-14. 6-9. 2-91. 4-40. 7-8 task designation. 2-100. 6-9. 5-49 standard boat. 4-44.11. 4-18. 5-37. 2-94. 5-34. 5-51. 6-13. 2-106. 4-80. 4-80. 3-6. 4-79. 5-5. 5-16. 2-82. 5-29. 527. 4-109. 4-85. 5-51. 2-39. 4-82. 6-7. 4-62. 3-33. 4-75. 2-134. 3-63 stern to seas. 4-96. 6-13 surf operations. 4-121. 4-83. 510. 4-78. 5-33. 4-19. 2-54. A-3.10. 5-46 Index . 4-116 station aids to navigation team. 5-19. B-4 speed. 2-10. 3-16. 4-121. 2-43. 3-50.2. 5-42. 5-24. 6-10. B-4 TD. B-4 stability. 5-45. 5-31. 2-11. 2-63. B-4 SPS. 2-9. 2-27. 4-53 SZ. 4-58. 4-73. 2-151 towing in heavy weather. 5-35. 6-13. 5-18. 6-12. 6-14 stationary position. 4-47. 2-139. 6-6. 2-86. 5-45. 5-28. 6-7. 4-31. 2-9. 5-32. 6-16. 6-8. 5-12. 4-16. 5-33. 4-115 SWL. 5-8. 5-46. 2-134. 5-39. 2-57. 6-5 surf less than 12 feet. 2-72. 5-26. 5-38. A-5. 4-7. 4-28. 2-52. 4-78. 5-40. 5-17. 2-62. 2-23. 2-112. 5-51. 4-119. 2-72. 7-4. 5-10. 2-34. B-4 TOI. 2-87. 4-13. 5-21. 4-12.2. 526. 4-104. 4-48. B-4 symbols. 4-12. B-4 station keep. 6-8. 6-13. 4-8. 5-47 swamped boat. 5-15. 2-140. 5-32. 4-99. 5-51. 485. 2-80. 3-37. 7-4 tactical control. 5-31. 5-27. 3-61. 2-128. 5-28. 6-5 surface swimmer. 5-16. 2-153. 2-12. 3-16. 2-28. 2-128.12 TACON. 4-31. 4-86. 5-46 towing a buoy. 2-146. 7-10 tactics.5. 5-13. 2-72. 5-17. 4-54. 5-5.2.5 throttle stations. 5-35. 5-22. 6-7. 4-40. 7-5. 4-40. 2-18. 2-112. 4-83. 5-9. 7-8. 2-16. 2-9. 2-77. 3-61. 2-51. 4-71. 6-11. 4-84. 4-72. 5-53. 5-6. 5-40. 4-19. 2-72. 425. 5-53. A-6 STANT. B-4 team coordination. 6-6. 5-24. 5-48. A-3. 6-14. 7-11 tow a vessel inbound.2. 4-49. 2-56. 7-10. 2-11. 2-43. 481. 3-18.Index SPC (surf). 5-25. 4-87. 6-7. 2-72. 2-54. B-4 standardization team. 7-3 tactical reaction boat. 4-19. 4-34. 6-16.11. 2-41. 2-99. 5-25. 2-10. 3-19. 2-54. 2-99. 5-42. 2-77. 540. 4-54. 2-151. 5-30. 5-6. 4120. 56. 4-12 striking a submerged object. 4-61. 5-39. 2-100. 2-72. 5-10. 4-79. 3-12. B-4 time difference. 4-9. 48. 2-138. 4-96. 4-12. 6-10. 5-45. 4-82. 5-22. 3-39. 2-24. 4-17. 4-53. 4-25. 4-65. 5-42. 5-27. 5-7. 4-54. 2-52. 553. 2-10. 7-14 target of interest. 6-6. 5-34. 2-17. 3-31. 6-6. 2-52. A-5. 4-64. 2-11. 3-8. 4-81. 2-43. 5-40. 6-14. 4-93. 2-97. 4-82. 2-136. 2-129. 5-53. B-4 statement of no objection. 7-3. 6-11. 2-14. 219. 2-62. 4-42. 5-5. 445. 5-17. 5-46. 3-14. 4-16. 2-102 steering. 7-8. 5-48. 2-44. 5-16. 5-29 towing. 2-54. 1-3. 4-33. B-4 square search. 7-9. 6-12. 6-7. 3-65 supervise a buoy deck evolution. 2-61. 2-72. 3-25. 2-96. B-4 SS. 2-106. 4-63. 2-138. 2-48. 2-118. 5-12. 4-28. 5-8. 2-21. 4-85. 4-113. 4-76. 4-81.4. 4-31. 3-7. B-4 SPE/GAR. 5-29. 4-119. 2-25. 4-110. 4-26. 5-32. 7-14 tactical boat operations. 4-120. 5-19. 331. 4-120. 5-33. 2-112. 48. 2-20. 5-11. 2-146 threats. 5-17. 4-55. 5-46 towline. 4-26 tight quarters. 4-84. A-6 standard positioning service. 2-12. 3-30. 4-22. 5-19. 5-25. 2-57. 5-49. 5-9. 545. 5-10. 4-93. B-4 team coordination training. 2-72. 7-6 state the equipment casualties. 5-14. 2-87. 5-10. 7-2. 3-52 static display.2. 2-40. 6-12. 3-37. 483. 4-97 time. 5-41. 2-83. 5-16. 6-5. 2-105. 4-54. 4-84. 3-19. 5-53 stokes litter. 3-32. 4-60. 2-95. 2-72. 2-107.7 CH-2 . 4-16. 5-36. 5-12. B-4 SSB-HF. 5-36. 5-19. 2-22.5 tactics qualification tasks. 2-72. 5-20. 2-116. 4-84. 2-103. 7-1. 5-26. 4-75. 1-5. 7-6 TAO. 4-14. 2-56. 4-65. 4-43.

7-13 X XPO. 4111.12 weighing the boat’s anchor. 2-90 WSM. 4-63. 2-23. 2-83 watertight integrity. 7-10 true course. 2-33. 2-72. 2-12. 4-58. 5-32. 2-15. B-4 type III flotation jacket. 7-11. 4-9. 4111. 2-50. 7-5. 3-21. 2-40. 4-62.2. 5-17. B-5 variable ratio oiler. B-5 VRO. 2-102. 4-78. 4-111. A-7.2. 4-70. 5-53. 7-5. 2-13. 4-114. 7-4. 4-110. 5-20. 2-14. 7-12 waterside security mission. 5-32. 2-83 water survival exercise. 7-11 vessel posing an imminent threat. 3-26. 7-4. 5-36. 411. 4-68. B-5 UTM. 4-80. 2-12. 4-62. 5-38. 2-79 type III PFD. B-4 TSR. 6-6. 4-55. B-4 use of force. 4-55. 3-17. 4114 transit inbound. 7-9. 2-72. 4-14 VHF-FM radiotelephone. 4-65. 4-59.8 CH-2 . 7-12 weapons engagement. 2-81 W warning shots. 1-5. 7-10. 2-69. 1-1. 4-114 weapons command and control. 4-44. 4-65. 2-68. 4-110. 4-113. 4-110. 4-35. 1-3. 7-12 VRM. 2-20. 4-15 UPH. 2-72. B-5 Utility Boat. A-6. 7-5 water survival. 6-10 TRB. 4-40. 2-12. 4-69. 5-13. 4-60. 4-63. 2-42. 2-51. 2-91. 4-18. 2-25. 4-81. 4-44. 4-58. B-5 VS. 7-11. 2-72. 5-32. 4-62. 5-17. 4-43. 2-86. 2-24. 2-12. 2-109 vessel at anchor. 5-48 unit training program. 2-10. 4-41. 5-16. 4-31. 4-63. B-5 U underway limits. 2-27. 4-111. 4-58. 7-4. 7-4. 5-33. 4-55. 4-111. 4-58. 2-55. A-6 unstable vessel. 2-54. 4-55. 4-93.2. 2-101.7. 4-42. 6-6. 2-72. 2-85. 4-68. 2-72. 3-26. 4-110. 4-121 trainee guidance. 6-6. B-5 vari-nozzle. 5-48 vision. 2-79. 4-75.Index track line non-return search. 5-33. B-5 V variable range marker. 6-7 way-on. 4-59. 2-72. 7-6. 2-43. 67 VHF-FM direction finder. 1-10 transfer personnel. 7-5. 2-35. 712 vessel systems checks. 2-72. 2-96 visibility. 2-31. 7-9. 4-55. B-5 Index . 2-24. B-4 trail line delivery method. 4-117 trailer eyebolt. 4-86 vessel on vessel use of force.10. 2-15.13 weapons employment. B-4 track line return search. 5-53. 2-12. 2-107. 4-103 TSN. 2-62. 4-61. 4-65. 4-58. 7-6 UTB. 4-25. 7-10. 4-113. 6-11 transit outbound. 4-64 VPIT. 4-110.2.

9 .Index Index .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful